Volume 70
Advances in Education Research
Volume 70
Advances in Education Research (ISSN: 2160-1070) The proceedings series Advances in Education Research (AER) aims at publishing proceedings from conferences on the theories and methods in fields of education, humanities and social sciences.
Publishing information The series aims at publishing original proceedings from international conferences. With a fast turnaround time and free access on the Internet, the proceedings in this series provide an excellent means for conferences and their participants to quickly publish their articles to the widest possible audience. Proceedings are published on-line (either with limited access or in Open Access mode). Print and can be provided on demand. In order to guarantee the quality of our publications we only accept articles for publication which have been peer-reviewed by at least 2 external reviewers, which is the current standard for scientific journals, proceedings and books. The series as a whole has as an ISSN-number where each individual volume of proceedings will have its own ISBN-number. Code of Ethics, malpractice and conduct The publication of an article in a peer-reviewed journal or conference proceedings is an essential building block in the development of a coherent and respected network of knowledge. It is a direct reflection of the quality of the work of the authors and the institutions that support them. Peer-reviewed articles support and embody the scientific method. It is therefore important to agree upon standards of expected ethical behavior for all parties involved in the act of publishing: the author, the journal editor, the peer reviewer, the publisher and the society of society-owned or sponsored journals.
Social Sciences and Society
Research areas include psychology, sociology, history, communication studies, economics, law, political science, education and e-learning, environmental Studies and philosophy, management and so on.
Social Sciences and Society May 20-21, 2015, Paris, France
ISBN:978-1-61275-070-5 Advances in Education Research Vols.70-73 ISSN:2160-1070, Electronically available at http://www.ieripress.com/
INFORMATION ENGINEERING RESEARCH INSTITUTE
Social Sciences and Society
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015) May 20-21, 2015, Paris, France
Edited by Garry Lee and Gerald Schaefer
Sponsored by Information Engineering Research Institute, USA Technical co-sponsored by Loughborough University, UK
INFORMATION ENGINEERING RESEARCH INSTITUTE, USA
iii
Copyright © 2015 Information Engineering Research Institute, USA All rights reserved. Personal use of this material is permitted. However, permission to reprint/republish this material for advertising or promotional purposes or for creating new collective works for resale or redistribution to servers or lists, or to reuse any copyrighted component of this work in other works must be obtained from the Information Engineering Research Institute, USA.
Information Engineering Research Institute, USA 16672 Bellflower Blvd, Bellflower, CA 90706 http://www.ieripress.com/
Volumes 70-73 of Advances in Education Research ISSN: 2160-1070 ISBN: 978-1-61275-070-5 Electronically available at http://www.ieripress.com/
Distributed worldwide by Information Engineering Research Institute Singapore Office 101 Petir Road, #17-03 Foresque Residences, Singapore, 678272 E-mail:
[email protected]
iv
ICSSS 2015 Preface On behalf of the organizing committee of the 2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015), it is our pleasure to present to you the conference proceedings. Social science is a major branch of science, and a major category of academic disciplines, concerned with society and the relationships among individuals within a society. It in turn has many branches, each of which is considered a social science. The main social sciences include economics, political science, human geography, demography and sociology. ICSSS 2015, which is the 4th edition of the ICSSS series of conferences, is intended as an international forum for researchers and professionals in all areas of Social Sciences and Society. The main target this conference is to bring together the researchers from academia and industry as well as practitioners to share ideas, problems and solutions relating to the multifaceted aspects of Social Sciences and Society. The conference featured invited as well as contributed talks, with morning plenary sessions and afternoon parallel sessions, converging Education, Economic, management, culture and so on. This year we received 970 submissions from about 18 countries all over the world. These submissions were sent to the members of the PC and additional reviewers for review. Every submission received at least two independent reviews. Especially, some authors in our conference also join us as reviewers in this conference, such as Natalia Bozo and Olga Kislitsyna from Novosibirsk State Technical University in Russia respectively help us review 2 papers in the related education area, Martin Grančay from University of Economics in Bratislava in Slovak Republic also did a lot of contributions to review. We would like to thank the PC members and the reviewers for their hard work and dedication. Finally, 323 papers were accepted to be presented in this proceeding. The major areas covered at the conference and presented in this proceedings include: 1) Education and Educational Research 2) Social Sciences and Applied Science 3) Education, Teaching Method, and Curriculum Design 4) Economics, Finance and Enterprise Management 5) Geography, Agriculture, Environment and Tourism 6) Other Topics The ICSSS 2015 will be published in volumes 70-73 on international journal Advances in Education Research (AER) (ISSN: 2160-1070) by Information Engineering Research Institute, USA. We hope that this volume will prove useful for researchers and practitioners in developing and applying new theories and technologies in Social Sciences and Society. ICSSS 2015 is co-sponsored by Information Engineering Research Institute, USA and technical co-sponsored by Loughborough University, UK.
v
Finally, we would like to thank all authors for submitting their works and all members of the Program Committee, listed on the following page, for their cooperation and time spent reviewing submissions.
vi
Conference Committees Honorary Chair and Keynote Speaker Gerald Schaefer, Loughborough University, U.K General Chairs Sang-Bing Tsai, University of Electronic Science and Technology of China, China Yijin Wu, Huazhong Normal Univesity,China Program Chair Yijin Wu, Huazhong Normal Univesity, China Andrew Parvel, Information Engineering Research Institute, USA Publication Chair Garry Lee, Information Engineering Research Institute, USA Gerald Schaefer, Loughborough University, U.K International Committee Dusan Marcek, Research Institute of the IT4Innovations Centre of Excellence, Czech Republic Takao Terano, Tokyo Institute of Technology, Japan María Beatríz Bernábe-Loranca, Benemérita Universidad Autónoma de Puebla, México Xin Shi, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK Rogelio González-Velázquez, Benemérita Universidad Autónoma de Puebla, México Martín Estrada-Analco, Benemérita Universidad Autónoma de Puebla, México Abbas Ghanbari Baghestan, Limkokwing University of Creative Technology, Malaysia Xinxiang Hua, Zhengzhou University of Science and Technology, China Juan Yi, Tianjin University of Finance and Economics, China Jie Sun, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, China Liyan Gao, Tianjin Polytechnic University, China Xiaoling Yan, Hengshui University, China Qunying Zhou, Southwestern Finance and Economics University, China Xuehua Ren, Chengdu College of University of Electronic Science and Technology, China Mingjun Han, Aba Teacher University, China
vii
Table of Contents Volume 70 Chapter 1: Education and Educational Research A Corpus-Based Approach to the Teaching of English Blanka Klimova ······························································································································· 3 Discussion on Impetus Mechanism Model of Sustainable Development of Private Universities Based on the Entropy Theory Dong-ling Wang ······························································································································ 8 The Role of Counselling in Addressing Stress in Zambia’s Teachers Daniel Ndhlovu, Kenneth Muzata, Thomas Mtonga and Janet Serenje-Chipindi ························ 14 Investigation of Students' Motivation for Innovation in Russian Higher Education Natalia Bozo, Evgenia Gorevaya, Olga Kislitsyna, Alexey Chuvaev and Marina Khayrullina··························································································· 18 Research on Measures for Improvement of Physical Education Quality in Colleges and Universities - Based on Dimension of “Trinity” Goal System Honglei Dai ··································································································································· 25 Discussion on Large Class of County Primary School in Hebei Province - Taking X County as an Example Junqiao Qin, Chunli Li and Yan Gong ·························································································· 30 Survey on Mental Health Status of High-level Graders of Over-quota Class in Primary Schools Chunli Li, Junqiao Qin and Jing Zhao ························································································· 35 Design and Implementation of Student Intelligent Management System Chaoke Ren ··································································································································· 41 Based on the Game Theory Analysis of Student Teaching Evaluation in Chinese Universities Haowen Feng and Weimin Ouyang ······························································································ 46 Research on Network Teaching Platform-Based Individualized Teaching Mode of Principles of Computer Composition Xiufang Li······································································································································ 51 Correlation Research on Improving College English Teaching Effectiveness Dongmei Xu ·································································································································· 57 Study on Volleyball Refereeing Ability Training Strategy of Teachers' College Students in Physical Education Major Hai Qiao and Shi Feng ················································································································· 61 Enlightenment of “Whole Language” Theory to College English Teaching Reform Lu Dai ··········································································································································· 66
ix
Research on Digital Archives Resource Management Technology in the Cloud Environment Xiaozhen Li ··································································································································· 70 The Intervention Effect of Group Psychological Counseling on Improving the Social Responsibility of University Students Yanfei Du, Zhibin Liu, Yaru Wang and Lina Liu ··········································································· 74 Open “Duet” of Scientific World and Living World - Discussion on Function Realization of Professional Teachers and Instructors in Construction of Undergraduates’ Meaning World Yongmu Tang ································································································································· 80 Research on Mental Health Problem of Senior Stay-at-home Children of Large-Class Primary School Chunli Li and Junqiao Qin ··········································································································· 86 Comparative Study on Mental Health Status of High-grade Left-behind Children and Non-left-behind Children of Over-quota Class in Primary Schools Junqiao Qin, Chunli Li and Yanling Wang ··················································································· 90 Using Corporate Culture Construction Theory to Explore the Road of Vocational College Brand Development Hongchong Zhang and Hongmei Liu ···························································································· 95 Management Reference Configuration of a Knowledge System Judyta Kabus, Katarzyna Szymczyk and Stanisław Brzeziński ··················································· 100 It Authorisation of the Process of Knowledge Management Judyta Kabus, Katarzyna Szymczyk and Robert Sałek ······························································· 106 Parametrization in the Aspect of Managing Information about Scientific Output of University Staff Dagmara Bubel, Anna Brzozowska and Katarzyna Szymczyk····················································· 113
Chapter 2: Social Sciences and Applied Science Accessibility in the Assessment Systems: A Case Study of the OPEN Certification System in Italy Michela Dalpràand and Maria Cristina Grillo ·········································································· 121 The Operational Efficiency Analysis and Construction of a Management Matrix for Medical Centers in Taiwan Ching-Kuo Wei ···························································································································· 127 Cost-effectiveness Analysis as a Tool of Intelligent Transport Systems Evaluation Pavol Král and Katarína Janošková··························································································· 132 The Research of Rural Collective Construction Land Transfer in China Yonghui Rao ································································································································ 139 Formation Experience of Sociocultural Competence in the System of Additional Foreign Education Elena Volkova, Rushaniya Zinurova and Andrey Tuzikov··························································· 144 Assessment of Climate Change and its Impact on Romania Lucian-Ionel Cioca and Larisa Ivascu ······················································································· 148
x
Stefan Lazarević and Orthodox Nobility in Transylvania Stefan Staretu ······························································································································ 154 The Correlation Analysis of the Per Capita GDP and the Community Service Facilities Allocation——A Survey of 7023 Communities in ten Cities of Sichuan Province Guangchuan Pan, Wei Song and Haopeng Zhang ······································································ 160 Public Service Resources Optimization Research of Chengdu Community Haopeng Zhang, Wei Song and Guangchuan Pan ······································································ 166 Research on the Influence of Wechat Advertising on Consumer Buying Behavior Yucheng Zeng and Zhiwei Zhang ································································································ 171 Theories of FDI and Economic Development – A Critical Review Tomáš Dudáš ······························································································································· 176 Structural Analysis and Design of Engineering Personnel Development Process Marina Nikolaevna Vrazhnova, Ekaterina Igorevna Makarenko, Aleksandr Vyacheslavovich Akhterov and Olga Vladimirovna Lezina ············································· 182 The Impact of Territoriality of Court Bailiffs and its Quantification in the Czech Republic Luboš Smrčka and Jan Plaček ···································································································· 189 Metal Curtains of Architectural Stage: Media Facades İnanç Işıl Duman························································································································· 195 The Study on Transformational Leadership and its Influence in Chinese Media: Taking Newspaper Group as Example Zhiyong Mo and Chih-Chung Chen ···························································································· 201 The Reinterpretation of Translator’s Identity under the Notion of “Horizon of Expectations” Wanfang Zhang ··························································································································· 208 Translation: Attempts at Rebuilding Tower of Babel Changhong Zhai·························································································································· 213 Real Options Method in Venture Capital Investing of Innovative Projects: Methodology of Evaluation and Application Alexander Baranov and Elena Muzyko······················································································· 218 Difficulties and Outlet of Property Right Type Security Housing System Junyu Gao ··································································································································· 229 City Sports Tourism Planning System Based on Diversified Development of Theory Changkun Shao and Zhiling Chen ······························································································ 235 Development Potential Evaluation System Design of Regional Sports Public Service Resources Guangqin Sun······························································································································ 240 Modern Enlightenments of Restitutionary Relief System in Early Britain Yuzhou E and Ziqin Liu ··············································································································· 245 Institutional Economic Regionalistics and its Research Program Galina Litvintseva ······················································································································· 251
xi
The Impact of Gesture Design on Mobile Interaction Xiaomeng Mao ···························································································································· 258 Chinese Investment in Slovakia – Past, Present and Future Martin Grančay ·························································································································· 262 Comparative Advantages and Outward Direct Investment of China Nora Grancay ····························································································································· 268 Metaphorical Uses of Body Part Terms in Chinese Ying Zhang ·································································································································· 274 Discourse and Praxes of Actors Involved in the Creation of Indigenous Public Policies in Chile Dalma AHUES ···························································································································· 281 Sula’s Resistance and Pursuit--The Self-identity Reconstruction for Black Women in Tni Morrison’s Sula Lei Zhang ···································································································································· 285 A Freudian Psychoanalytic Interpretation of “Lord Mountdrago” Li Zhang and Xiaoli Shi ·············································································································· 289 Research on Hybrid Recognition Model between Entrepreneurship and Entrepreneurial Opportunity Based on Perceived Risk Jingyi Wang ································································································································· 295 Exploring Antecedents of Competence-Based Synergy in M&A by Means of ARCTIC Model Andrejs Čirjevskis ······················································································································· 300 Study on the Influence of Patronage on Translation of Song Ming Pinghua Xuan Rongguang Yang ························································································································· 306 The Enforcement of China’s Anti-Monopoly Law and the Regulation on Restrictive Competition in Franchising Xiaowen Xiao and Lijia Hu·········································································································· 311 Exploring Dynamic Capabilities and Business Models in Acquisition Processes Andrejs Čirjevskis ······················································································································· 316 Running Security Mechanisms for Acceptable Generalized Safety Bin Yu ·········································································································································· 323 Study on Cultural Features and Social Functions of Traditional Sports of Qiang Ethnic Group Chenliang Deng ·························································································································· 327 The Inclusion of the Russian Federation in the OECD Martin Grešš ······························································································································· 333 Multidimensional Scaling with Noise and Missing Data: Modified EXSCAL Algorithm Ulas Akkucuk······························································································································· 338 The Linkage between Speculation and Derivatives’ Trading Jana Drutarovska ························································································································ 344 Symbols and the Revelation of Blanche’s Destiny Lei Zhang ···································································································································· 349 xii
The Power of Knowledge-Intensive Services Tatiana Čorejová and Mário Al Kassiri ······················································································ 354 Discussion on Construction Idea of Traditional Culture in Modern Environmental Art Design Jing Tian and Xiaoyu Huang ······································································································ 358 The Problems and Development Strategy Research on the Resources Integration of Financial and Insurance Group Lesheng Jiang ····························································································································· 362 Analysis of the Collapse of Patriarchal Consciousness Based on Male Images in An Encounter Mei Dong ···································································································································· 367 Research on Transformation Path of Intangible Cultural Heritage into Animation Tourism Products Xiaoyu Huang, Jing Tian and Xu Chen ······················································································ 373 Choosing Internet-marketing Talents with the InLinPreRa Method Tien-Chin Wang, Su-Yuan Tsai and Shu-Chen Hsu ····································································· 377 Does “Sell in May” Effect Exist in Chinese a Share Market? ——An Empirical Analysis Based on ARMA-GARCH Model Yu Guo ········································································································································· 383 The Application of the Flipped Classroom Model in College English Translation Teaching Qing Yang ···································································································································· 389 Evaluation on Policies of Major Decisions Assessment on Social Stability Risk -----Focused on the Assessment Subject Yang Wang ··································································································································· 395 Public Sports Service Demonstration Area of Urban and Rural Social Sports Instructor Team Management Jianqiang Guo, Wenjie Zhu and Qiner Xu ·················································································· 402 Public Sports Service Demonstration Area Construction of Human Security Team Construction Jianqiang Guo and Wenjie Zhu ··································································································· 406 A Case Study of the Explanation of English Vocabulary Abilities for English Comprehensive Competence Ying Shen and Yaxiong Li ············································································································ 410 A Comparative Study on View of Women of William Somerset Maugham and William Faulkner Li Zhang and Xiaoli Shi ·············································································································· 416 The Intelligent Control System Design of Lampblack Machine Based on Wireless Communication Wen-dong Xu ······························································································································· 421 The Application of the Improvement Cost Method in Assessment of the Generator Price Dongmei Wei and Xinyue Lin······································································································ 426
xiii
An Empirical Study on Joint Development of Manufacturing Pillar Industries and Logistics Industry in Three Northeastern Provinces Yingxia Zhao and Xiujie Tian ······································································································ 432 Influence of E-commerce on Enterprise Financial Management and Innovation Analysis Xin Wei ········································································································································ 438 Author Index ··································································································································· 444
xiv
Chapter 1: Education and Educational Research
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
A Corpus-Based Approach to the Teaching of English Blanka Klimova University of Hradec Kralove, Faculty of Informatics and Management, Rokitanskeho 62, Hradec Kralove 3, 500 03, Czech Republic
[email protected] Keywords: Corpus-Based Approach, English Language Teaching, Advantages, Constraints, Sketch Engine.
Abstract. Thanks to the rapid development of modern information and communication technologies (ICT), which have already penetrated all the spheres of education, including foreign language teaching (FLT), teachers of foreign languages have many more possibilities of how to increase their students’ communicative competences. In particular, they can apply different approaches to their teaching of foreign languages. Perhaps, one of the most progressive approaches at the moment, based on the exploitation of ICT, is a corpus-based approach. The purpose of this article is therefore to discuss this approach with respect to the conditions at Czech schools, emphasize its benefits for English language teaching and demonstrate some of its exploitation for FLT. 1. Introduction Nowadays, there exist many approaches to language education. Since 1990s one of the most progressive approaches has seemed to be a corpus-based approach [1]. This approach enables both teachers and learners to study real life language by means of naturally occurring language samples, which are stored in corpora (or corpuses). Corpora are computerized databases created for linguistic research. [2] provides the most recent characteristics of a corpus: • Authentic, naturally occurring data; • Assembled according to explicit design criteria; • Representative of a particular language or genre; and • Designed for a specific linguistic or socio-pragmatic purpose. There are various types of corpora. Among the best known and influential types are the following (cf. [3]): General corpora, such as the British National Corpus (BNC) or the Bank of English (BoE), contain a large variety of both written and spoken language, as well as different text types, by speakers of different ages, from different regions and from different social classes of the UK. Synchronic corpora, such as F-LOB and Frown, record language data collected at one specific point in time, e.g. written British and American English of the early 1990s. Historical corpora, such as A Representative Corpus of Historical English Registers (ARCHER) and the Helsinki Corpus of English Texts, consist of corpus texts from earlier periods of time. They usually span several decades or centuries, thus providing diachronic coverage of earlier stages of language use. Learner corpora, such as the International Corpus of Learner English (ICLE) and the Cambridge Learner Corpus (CLC), are collections of data produced by foreign language learners and include texts types such as essays or written exams. 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
3
ICSSS 2015
Corpora for the study of varieties, such as the International Corpus of English (ICE) and the Freiburg English Dialect Corpus, represent different regional varieties of a language. There is also a large variety of specialized corpora, e.g. Michigan Corpus of Academic Spoken English (MICASE). The corpus-linguistic approach can be used to describe language features and to test hypotheses formulated in various linguistic frameworks. To name but a few examples, corpora recording different stages of learner language (beginners, intermediate, and advanced learners) can provide information for foreign language acquisition research; by means of historical corpora it is possible to track the development of specific features in the history of English like the emergence of the modal verbs gonna and wanna (cf. [4]). 2. Current exploitation of the corpus-based approach at Czech schools Although teachers of English as a foreign language (EFL) in the Czech Republic are exposed to corpus-based dictionaries (e.g. Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English) and grammar books (e.g. Longman Grammar of Spoken and Written English), they do not exploit corpora in their classes. [1] provide the following reasons for that: • Low level and experience of learners; • Time constraints; • Curricular requirements; • Knowledge and skills for corpus analysis and pedagogical mediation; • The access to computers; and • Relevant software tools and corpora. However, EFL teachers can enormously benefit from the application of the corpus-based approach in three main areas in their teaching (cf. [5]): • Syllabus design (to meet students’ needs; teachers use a corpus to try to determine what language items should be incorporated into the course syllabus) ; • Materials development (with the help of a corpus teachers can create exercises based on real examples which provide students with an opportunity to discover features of actual language use); and • Classroom activities (students themselves can discover during their language classes how a concordancing programme works and draw their own conclusions about language use; this in turn will promote learner autonomy). It is also worth mentioning here that English textbooks in most cases still ignore the use of corpora to reveal real life language usage. This in fact supports Ellis’s (1999, as cited in [4]) statement that non-authentic/contrived materials better serve pedagogical purposes. On the contrary, [6] claims that English textbooks still teach school English which does not seem to exist outside the foreign language classroom and hence learners of English have difficulties to communicate with native speakers successfully. A classic example of this is the teaching and learning of the usage of non-assertive pronoun any at Czech schools at which English textbooks for EFL learners designed by the English publishing houses (e.g. Headway or English Works) are predominantly used. Students are taught the rule that the non-assertive pronoun any is mainly used in negative and interrogative sentences and in this sense students practise its usage. However, the corpus analysis conducted by [7] states that 50% of any usage takes place in affirmative statements, 40% in negative statements, and only 10% in interrogatives. At present, there are a number of software programmes, which EFL teachers can use for analyses of different corpora. For example, the author of this article uses Sketch Engine [8]. As [9] explains, the Sketch Engine is highly specialized type of search engine that can search over 60 different corpora to provide data about words, phrases and grammatical constructions. It was developed by experts at the Faculty of Informatics of Masaryk University in Brno, Czech Republic. 4
One of the most exploited tools of the Sketch Engine is the concordancer, which gives a chance to see any word or phrase in context so that one can see what sort of company it keeps. See Fig. 1 below for an example. It presents the concordance of the collocation electronic learning in the British National Corpus (BNC) with its context to the left and right and also in the sentence when one clicks on the search word or phrase. The BNC was compiled in 1994. Obviously, at that time nobody knew anything about electronic education. Therefore there is just one occurrence in the BNC. In addition, the concordance page presents the genre on the left side in which the search word was used.
Fig.1.An example of the concordance of the collocation electronic learning in the BNC
In addition, there are a few software programmes, which can be downloaded free of charge. However, their functions are simpler in comparison with the Sketch Engine. Teachers can exploit, for example, the TextSTAT [10], which was developed at Freie University in Berlin. It is a simple programme for the analysis of texts. It reads plain text files (in different encodings) and HTML files (directly from the Internet) and it produces word frequency lists and concordances from these files. It is very user-friendly, which means that even teachers who are relatively unskilled or inexperienced in computer use can operate it easily. Both teachers and students can create their own corpora and analyse them afterwards. Fig. 2 below demonstrates the analysis of a corpus of 60 English written conference abstracts on tourism. Students can look, for example, at the most frequent words and collocations and see them in their context (cf. [3]).
5
Fig.2.An example of the analysis of one’s own corpus with the TextSTAT, showing right and left collocations of the word paper
3. Conclusion EFL teachers should expose their students to authentic, real life language usage. But they should always employ the corpus-based approach meaningfully in accordance with students’ immediate language needs. In addition, they should teach their students how to use a corpus and thus diminish their language insufficiencies in the following ways: • To increase their linguistic proficiency by looking at grammatical (e.g. examine word order) and lexical (e.g. compare similar words) aspects of language use; • To teach them how to use frequency wordlists so that they can discover useful phrases and their collocations and thus enhance their communication skills; and • To teach them how to look at some sociolinguistic markers, such as comparison of language use – written/spoken, to enhance their intercultural communication competences. References [1] T. McEnery and R. Xiao, What corpora can offer in language teaching and learning, in E. Hinkel, (Ed.), Handbook of Research in Second Language Teaching and Learning, vol. 2, London, Routledge, pp. 364-380, 2010. [2] L. Flowerdew, Corpora and language education, Basingstoke, Palgrave Macmillan, 2012. [3] B. Frydrychova Klimova, English for Academic Purposes: Developments in theory and pedagogy, UHK, Gaudeamus, 2013. [4] K. Hyland, English for Academic Purposes: An advanced resource book, London, Routledge, 2006. [5] M. Barlow, Corpora, concordancing, and language teaching. Proceedings of the 2002 KAMALL International Conference, Korea, Daejon, 2002, pp. 135-141. 6
[6] D. Mindt, English corpus linguistics and the foreign language teaching syllabus, in J. Thomas and M. Short (Eds.), Using Corpora for Language Research, Harlow, Longman, pp. 232-247, 1996. [7] D. Mindt, Corpora and the teaching of English in Germany, in G. T. Knowles, T. Mc Enery, S. Fligelstone, and A. Wichman (Eds.), Teaching and Language Corpora, Harlow, Longman, pp. 40-50, 1997. [8] Sketch Engine, 2003. Retrieved January 4, 2015, from http://www.sketchengine.co.uk/. [9] J. Thomas, Discovering English with the Sketch Engine, USA, Laptop Languages, 2014. [10] TextSTAT, 2012. Retrieved January http://neon.niederlandistik.fu-berlin.de/en/textstat/.
7
4,
2015,
from
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Discussion on Impetus Mechanism Model of Sustainable Development of Private Universities Based on the Entropy Theory Dong-ling Wang Shandong Yingcai University, Jinan of Shandong Province，China
[email protected] Keywords: Sustainable Development of Private Universities, Impetus Mechanism; Entropy Theory;
Abstract. The paper analyzes the sustainable development mechanism of Private Universities from the philosophical level using the entropy theory. Through the analysis on the internal and external forces of sustainable development, the paper builds the impetus mechanism model of sustainable development of Private Universities. Private Higher Education Practice has proved that Private Universities play an irreplaceable role in increasing education services varieties, promoting education fair, expanding education resources and building a learning society in which people pursue life-long education. “Long-term Education Reform and Development Plan (2010-2020)” clearly stated, “Non-government funded education is an important growth point of the development of educational business and an important force of promoting educational reform, It’s an important job for governments at all levels to develop Private funded education.” However, at present, Private higher education in our country is developing into the sluggish, struggling “plateau” after a rapid development, there being some "symptoms", like a sharp decline of students, the increasing financial constraints and slowly lifting of social reputation. Also, according to the results of field research and surveys, the current capacity of sustainable development of Private universities is not optimistic. With the contrast between theory and practice and the contradiction between educational level and social demand being increasingly emerging, the sustainable development of Private universities becomes a concern of the academia. The paper, based on entropy theory, analyses the impact which internal and external environments have on the sustainable development of Private universities from the perspective of philosophy, and builds the impetus mechanism model for the sustainable development of Private universities to solve and provide reference for the sustainable development of Private universities. 1. A review of the sustainable development of private universities Abroad the development of Private universities has been relatively mature, and its current research is mainly in the affirmation of position and role of Private higher education, at the same time focuses on the quality monitoring, evaluation system, etc. Domestic research on the sustainable development of Private higher education is more, but the content is relatively concentrated in: Mao-yuan Pan and others put forward the government, society and the Private education should work together to promote the harmonious development of Private education on the basis of analysis of internal and external environments of Private higher education; Feng-qiao Yan and others points out that the international experience of the development of Private higher education has a certain reference value and reference after comparing the global Private education; De-guang Yang and others pointed out that at present the internal relationship of Private universities in our country has not been smooth, the management system needs to be improved, and system mechanism also produces an advantage hard. To achieve healthy and sustainable development, we must actively 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
8
ICSSS 2015
manage internal reform and innovation; Ying-qiang Zhang and others pointed out that Private universities must be reasonable positioned, and the characteristics must be strengthened, at the same time firmly oriented to the market, and run independently in accordance with law in order to achieve sustainable development. Overall, such researches are either for the purpose of explanatory research from the internal and external factors, or for the purpose of learning domestic and foreign experience, lacking systemic study of the connotation, constituent elements and impetus mechanism of sustainable development of Private universities, The theoretical basis is weak and practice interoperability is not strong. In addition, most of scholars analyze the impetus mechanism of sustainable development of Private universities from the angles of internal management and society, but the analysis of the application of entropy is rare from the philosophical level. In order to overcome the shortcomings of the research above, this paper analyzes the sustainable development of Private universities s based on entropy theory, and establishes impetus mechanism model of sustainable development. 2. Discussion on entropy-based impetus mechanism model of sustainable development of private universities 2.1 Entropy and information entropy In thermodynamics, entropy (usual symbol S) is the quotient of heat absorbed over temperature in the material system in any reversible processes. Max Planck, Gibbs expresses it as: under certain conditions, if that a total of the motion state of the micro units of a substance is N, then the material system lnN is proportional to the thermodynamics entropy S . The proportion coefficient is the Boltzmann constant k, namely S = klnN. In information theory, entropy is a measure of the uncertainty. Its founder, Shannon in his thesis “A Mathematical Theory of Communication’’ puts forward the measurement of information based on probability statistical mode. He defines information as "something to eliminate uncertainty", the formula is as follows: n
Η = − Κ ∑ Ρ i log 2 P i i =1
(1)
Wherein, H represents the information entropy, indicating the degree of uncertainty of information, represented in binary. K represents the Boltzmann constant, k = 1.380658 × 10-23 joules • K-1, and Pi is the probability set . In the entropy theory, information is on behalf of the negative entropy. There being a complementary relationship between information and entropy, entropy increasing means loss of information. The higher system order degree is, the smaller the entropy is, then the greater the amount of information contained; Conversely, the higher the disorder, the greater the entropy, then the smaller the amount of information . 2.2 Analysis of impact forces of sustainable development of private universities Private universities are run by Private universities managers under a variety of forces. Here the author analyses the dynamic factors influencing the sustainable development of Private universities from internal and external environment based on the theory of system.
9
Economic and social development promotion
Improvement of financing channels
Competitive pressures from similar universities
Internal Impetus Mechanism System of the Development of Private Universities
Faculty
Educational targets Cultivation of Talents
The government policy guarantee
Enrollment employment
Benefits
Employment market demand
Fig.1.External Impetus Mechanism System of the Development of Non-governmental Universities
2.2.1 Internal Force of Development System of Private Universities Internal dynamic factors of development system of Private universities include educational target( F1), benefits (F2) ,faculty( F3), cultivation of talents (F4)and enrollment and employment (F5), etc. The educational target is the vision for the future development of Private universities, pointing out the direction of the development. Educational target determines the route choice of the professional setting, personnel training, the teaching goal ,etc, directly affecting the competitiveness of Private universities in the education market, so the analysis of educational target is essential. The benefit of higher education, as a result of people's practice, basically is a kind of value relationship. Namely, higher education is not for benefit, but for value. So the benefit of higher education is in line with the subject purpose of higher education practice, and in direct contact with the practice effect of principal part. It clearly reflects the subject's needs and interests, deeply reflects the relationship between higher education activity and one's own value 12. The benefit of Private universities includes economic benefit and social benefit. Because of educational nature of Private universities, Private universities should first focus on economic benefit, which determines the survival, ensuring economic benefit under the premise of social benefit. People are engaged in a variety of activities of Private universities, high quality teaching level also can ensure the goal and the smooth implementation of the management mode and organization structure. The structure and adequacy of faculty directly affect the education level of Private universities, thus affecting the speed, the direction and the way of development13. The important yardstick to measure the level of a university education is the quality of the talents cultivation. On the one hand, the talent training quality embodies the level of specialty construction and curriculum construction, experiment practice condition and the standardization of the teaching management of Private universities. On the other hand, the students, as "product" of Private universities, affect the social evaluation and recognition of Private universities. If Private universities are personnel processing factories, then recruiting students is the input of raw materials, and employment is the delivery of its products to market. Because Private universities in China are based on fees as a market operation mechanism, so lots of students are the foundation on which Private universities relies for survival and development15. The scale of its enrollment scale directly decides the development and educational
10
benefit of Private universities, and employment in turn affects the enrollment of students and the reputation in the society. The impact of internal forces affecting the sustainable development of Private universities is nonlinear, which is similar to the field theory in physics, so we'll regard the internal force as a complex impetus field. The internal force is expressed as F, mathematical expression is as follows: F internal=f(F1，F2，F3，F4，F5) Where infrepresents a nonlinear function
(2)
2.2.2 External Forces of Development System of Private Universities External forces of development system of Private universities mainly includes the driving force of economic and social development( F6), government education policy (F7), employment market demand (F8), competitive pressure (F9), financing channels (F10). National economic development provides the precondition for the development of Private universities. On the one hand, the school level is affected by economic development: material construction, welfare treatment of the staff, and the expansion of scale are restricted by social and economic conditions; On the other hand, the national economic development level directly determines quantity and quality of talents who the industry needs. During the development of Private universities, government adjusts the development through policy - "invisible hand". Government influences the development through relevant system design and government policies, so the system environment and policy environment play the role of the "institutional guarantee" in the development of Private universities. The talented person demand of employment market provides a boost to the development. Competition has the effect of "reversed transmission" on the development. Competitive pressures make Private universities constantly change to obtain competition advantage in the fierce market competition. Funds of Private universities mainly come from student tuition and investment of investors. Capital bottleneck is the important problem which Private universities face, and the improvement of financing channels provides " financial security " and follow-up support for the sustainable development. The impact of external forces affecting Private universities is also nonlinear, it indirectly influences the development. If F is expressed as the external force of the development of Private universities, its mathematical expression is as follows: F external = g (F6, F7, F8, F9, F10) g represents the non-linear function
(3)
The impact which the internal and external force fields has on the development of Private universities is nonlinear, so it is difficult to measure. For the convenience of measurement, the author indirectly studies the work way in which the internal and external forces affects the development to study the effect of impetus factors . 2.3 Analysis of internal force effect of sustainable development system of private universities Internal and external force fields affect the development system of Private universities in the way of the information entropy. All forces of internal and external force fields of the development system are expressed as discrete information sources, producing corresponding information entropy. Such as information entropy produced by the driving force of the government education policy (F7), we can obtain the following by Formula 1 Η
F7
= −Κ
n
F
7
∑ log i =1
2
PF7
(4)
Wherein, HF7 represents information entropy generated by F7, k is Boltzmann constant, and PF7 is corresponding probabilities sets for F7. Similarly, we can obtain the information entropy produced by other information sources of external force field. According to the principle that entropy can be added, we can calculate the total information entropy produced by internal and external force fields of the development of Private universities, which can be shown as follows:
11
Η Η
外
内
n
=
−Κ ∑
PI
log
2
i =1
− Κ ∑
−
K
∑ j
∑ i
= 6
n
=
n
10
PI =
PE
log
2
P
−
K
2
P Fj
(5)
P
2
P
(6)
n
5
=
E
i = 1
P F j log
=1
∑ j
∑ i
= 1
F
log
j
F
j
= 1
The total information entropy of internal and external force fields is expressed as follows, Η
e
=
H
I
+
H
10
=
E
−
K
∑ j
= 1
n
∑ i
P
j
log
2
P
j
(7)
= 1
The effect of force field on the development of Private universities is mainly information input. Information entropy is negative entropy, which makes the total entropy of development system of Private universities decrease, causing the system to stay away from a balanced and orderly direction. The development system of Private universities absorbs and internalizes the information input of the total force fields, and integrates into the overall impetus of the development, thus contributing to the sustainable development of Private universities. The managers invest and match human, financial and material resources, so the ultimate expression is that the development of Private universities are in harmony with the social demand and economic development, which is a strong boost. On the other hand, during the development of Private universities, resistance loss can be encountered to produce system entropy, called process entropy, which makes the system approach disorder chaos. This directly causes the wastage of development system of Private universities, namely, the ineffective information or wrong information, the information channel being not smooth, management risk, system policy risk, etc. To overcome the disadvantageous of process entropy, feedback mechanisms can be introduced into the development system to the Private universities managers, thus the managers can adjust and supplement the impetus of the sustainable development after receiving feedback information based on the status of universities development and the elements constituting condition. The development system of Private universities and the external environment work together to constitute an open system, in which material, energy and information exchange. With dS general being the total entropy of the general system, dS1being the process entropy within the system, dSe being the entropy caused by exchanging material, energy and information between the system and the external environment, which is information negative entropy flow. The total entropy of development system of Private universities can be expressed as:
ds
总
=
ds
1 +
ds e
(8)
During the development of Private universities, the information is always gradually reduced, consumed, which results in process entropy of the development of Private universities (the positive change of the entropy function). On the contrary, the negative entropy process (the negative change of the entropy function) can make the development of Private universities from disorder into order. So the development of Private universities can be completely open, self-improvement. To continuously introduce negative entropy flow from the outside world, to exchange information with the environment, to compensate the entropy produced within the development system, and gradually to overcome the chaos under the interaction of various internal elements can make the organization as a whole achieve negative entropy value to promote the sustainable development of Private universities. So when |dS1|-|dSe|8
Two items>8
Three items>8
More than four items>8
Overall
4
31
15
11
13
132
3%
23.5%
11.4%
8.3%
9.8%
100%
76
20.7
27
38.2
49
25.3
According to Table 1, it can be seen that the mean value of total score of anxiety is 25.3 as for all tested people, which doesn’t exceed the total score of normal anxiety; besides, the students with normal psychology accounts for 97% of overall students, which shows that the tested group is a low-anxiety group. This table shows there are 4 students with serious mental health problem, accounting for 3% of overall students; 31 students have mental health problem in one dimension scale, accounting for 23.5% of overall students; 15 students have mental health problem in two dimension scales, accounting for 11.4% of overall students; 11 students have mental health problem in three dimension scales, accounting for 8.3% of overall students; 13 students have mental health problem in above four dimension scales, accounting for 9.8% of overall students, and it is required to formulate specific individual guidance plan to help them to eliminate mental barriers and improve mental health level. 36
3.2 Distribution of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school with maladjustment in different dimension of mental health Tab.2.Distribution of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school with maladjustment in different dimension of mental health Number of people
Ratio
Sequencing
Interpersonal anxiety
40
30.3
1
Impulsion trend
33
25
2
Learning anxiety
25
18.9
3
Physical symptoms
24
18.2
4
Terror trend
22
16.7
5
Allergy-prone trend
22
16.7
6
Loneliness trend
18
13.6
7
Self-accusation trend
14
10.6
8
The result in Table 2 shows: as for tested students who have maladjustment in different dimension of mental health, the top 3 dimensions are interpersonal anxiety, impulsion trend, and learning anxiety, followed by physical symptoms, terror trend, allergy-prone trend, loneliness trend, and self-accusation trend. 3.3 Grade difference in mental health of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school Tab.3.Analysis on grade difference in mental health of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school 4th grade (n=44)
5th grade (n=55)
6th grade (n=33)
F
p
Learning anxiety
5.93±1.981
6.29±2.015
5.82±1.811
0.730
0.484
Interpersonal anxiety
6.50±1.959
6.36±1.809
6.27±1.925
0.143
0.867
Loneliness trend
4.20±2.436
4.07±2.631
4.73±2.349
0.738
0.480
Self-accusation trend
4.70±2.064
5.18±1.529
5.79±1.781
3.475
0.034
Allergy-prone trend
5.73±1.703
6.02±1.920
5.79±1.474
0.381
0.684
Physical symptoms
5.57±2.286
5.75±2.230
6.24±1.621
1.003
0.370
Terror trend
5.80±1.773
5.89±2.386
5.94±1.819
0.050
0.951
Impulsion trend
6.05±1.976
6.33±2.001
6.06±1.870
0.317
0.729
Total score
23.84±16.106
25.75±15.656
26.88±12.589
0.406
0.667
According to Table 5, it can be seen that there is significant difference in the dimension of self-accusation trend as for students of different grade, and then it is found via further inspection that there is more serious self-accusation trend in case of higher grade, and there is no significant difference in other dimensions.
37
3.4 Urban and rural difference in mental health of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school Tab.4.Analysis on urban and rural difference in mental health of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary
school Rural (n=70)
Urban (n=62)
t
Learning anxiety
6.50±1.837
5.74±1.950
2.055
p 0.042
Interpersonal anxiety
6.52±1.900
6.17±1.761
0.966
0.336
Loneliness trend
4.15±2.537
4.43±2.384
-0.572
0.568
Self-accusation trend
5.08±1.844
5.40±1.570
-0.953
0.343
Allergy-prone trend
5.93±1.593
5.81±1.837
0.376
0.708
Physical symptoms
5.80±2.065
5.72±1.885
0.198
0.844
Terror trend
5.87±1.961
5.51±1.828
0.960
0.339
Impulsion trend
6.15±1.956
6.04±2.105
0.273
0.786
Total score
26.33±14.159
23.87±13.862
0.901
0.370
The result in Table 6 shows that there is significant difference in dimension of learning anxiety as for urban and rural high-level graders of over-quota class, and there is no significant difference in other dimensions. 4. Discussion, analysis, and recommendation 4.1 Basic condition of mental health of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school The mental problem of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school commonly exists, including both elementary students who have obvious mental problem, have the total score of more than 65, and account for 3% of overall students, and elementary students who have total score of less than 65 and show problem in some dimensions (as shown in Table 1). As for tested students who have maladjustment in different dimension of mental health, the top 3 dimensions are interpersonal anxiety, impulsion trend, and learning anxiety (as shown in Table 2), which is different from the previous research in which the learning anxiety is the chief factor.[3][4] Therefore, we can’t ignore mental guidance for those elementary students with mental deviation in some aspects. According to research result, it can be seen that the main factors which influence the mental health are interpersonal anxiety, impulsion trend, and learning anxiety as for high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school, and the interpersonal anxiety is ranked at the 1st place, which may be related to the reasons such as large class collective, elementary students’ immature psychology, and low cognitive evaluation; the mental problem often happens in them due to influence of teachers or parents’ improper behaviors or social unhealthy factor.[5] The interpersonal anxiety refers to the situation people don’t know how to contact with other people, and they are shy with strangers; while they speak with others, they will worry if they will be red in the face; while they are blamed by teachers of parents, they always put the blame in their heart, and they also worry if their friends will speak ill of them secretly, thus they often feel anxious. As for this type of students, we shall firstly distinguish the reason which causes interpersonal anxiety. As for most of students, the unsmooth interpersonal relationship is caused by lack of experience, or they don’t get suitable game partners in childhood, or they don’t go outside to play due to being bullied by elder children, or they just play alone at home and are spoiled by their parents. In order to solve the problem caused by lack of experience, we shall put the students in friend group for training, let them participate in the activities of many teams (such as learning team, and game team). At the beginning,
38
we can firstly let them participate in activities in small team to guide them to establish the self-confidence in interpersonal relationship. There is another type of interpersonal anxiety. Some children are severely disciplined by their parents since childhood, thus they form the weak personality of being nervous and handling matters according to parents’ complexion. As for this kind of students, it is also easy for them to be nervous with other people. As for them, the 1st step of guidance is to improve parents’ attitude and let them respect their children’s personality and propose suitable requirement for their children. Meanwhile, in school life, it is required to make them feel that the teachers show “approval” to them so as to guide them to establish self-confidence and sense of security. 4.2 Analysis on factors influencing the mental health of high-level graders of over-quota class in primary school The research result shows that there is no significant gender difference in mental health status of high-level graders of over-quota class; meanwhile, there is no significant difference for left-behind children in different dimension of mental health, which is consistent with previous research result. This may be related to the situation that the society, families, and schools start to pay more attention to girls and left-behind children in recent years. It is found through research that there is significant difference in the dimension of self-accusation trend as for elementary students of different grade of over-quota class; furthermore, there will be more serious self-accusation trend in case of higher grade (as shown in Table 3). The self-accusation trend refers to the situation that people think that it is their mistake and have feared state for the thing they do while the unhappy thing happens. The source of self-accusation trend is the uneasiness due to loss of other’s love. While the students feel that they are abandoned by their parents, teachers, or friends, they often form self-accusation trend. In school education, the guidance policy for students with strong self-accusation trend is to make their desire of being loved and accepted satisfied. Therefore, it is able to make use of social measurement result to make their seats close to “people they love”, and then improve their relationship with others and give the chance to let them accepted by others via suitable team guidance so as to improve their initiative and enthusiasm. Meanwhile, it is required to guide them to change dependency personality and develop the strong-minded personality. In family, the blame and limitation shall be reduced, and the “praise” chance shall be given as much as possible to improve their initiative and enthusiasm. Generally speaking, in the changing process, the “attack” and “resistance” will temporarily appear in most of people with strong self-accusation trend. The research result shows that there is significant difference in dimension of learning anxiety for rural and urban high-level graders of over-quota class (as shown in Table 4), and the rural students have a higher degree of learning anxiety than urban students. The learning anxiety refers to excessive worry about learning, and it is caused by learning-related pressure. In recent few years, the students have overload learning burden, and the learning competition is intensified; meanwhile, the schools, teachers, and parents pay great attention to score and regard students’ academic result as the only standard to evaluate students. In current school education, there is only few chance for students below middle level to obtain a good score. According to research result of learning psychology, in order to improve learning enthusiasm and learning effect, the best method is to obtain more chances of obtaining good score (the score that the students feel “good”). Generally speaking, there will be a good effect in case of 6~7 success and 3~4 failure in 10 times. In terms of mental health, it is required to prepare more success chances. As for people with strong learning anxiety, the effective method is to intentionally provide easy test to make them get “good result” so as to eliminate excessive sense of anxiety. The application of this method in daily test can eliminate students’ learning anxiety and improve learning enthusiasm. As for poor result, the parents and teachers shall also reduce blame. Besides, after the learning anxiety is eliminated, the important thing is to cultivate a good learning attitude. While the learning method is obtained, the attention shall be also paid to cultivating self-control. Generally speaking, as for students with strong learning anxiety, the education shall be 39
also made for them and their parents. It is required to specially guide their parents to not have excessively high requirement and also guide them to improve learning environment and guidance method at home. 5. Acknowledgments This paper is a youth research topic of Hebei Provincial social science development (Project No.: 2014040319). References [1] Liu Shuang, Lang Fang: Drawbacks and Countermeasures of Over-quota Class [J], Modern Education Science, 2013, (5):115. [2] Pan Hongjian, Qiu Lijun, Sun Jingjing: Learning Status, Problems, and Countermeasures of Over-quota Class [J], Journal of Tianjin Normal University, 2013, 14 (1):11. [3] Bian Yufang, Zheng Yangqiu: Survey Report on Mental Health Status of Elementary Students in Hangzhou City [J], Journal of Hangzhou University, 1997, 27 (4). [4] Luo Li, Yu Zhaoyun: Survey and Research on Mental Health Status of Rural Elementary Students in Guangxi Province [J], Coastal Enterprises and Science & Technology, 2012, (4). [5] Ma Dezhen, Jiang Cuijuan, Li Jun: Mental Health Level of Rural Elementary Students in Changqing District of Jinan City and Its Relationship with Personality Characteristics [J], Chinese Journal of Child Health Care, 2009, 17(6).
40
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Design and Implementation of Student Intelligent Management System Chaoke Ren Institute of Education Research, Langfang Teachers University, Langfang, 065000, China
[email protected] Keywords: Android system; .NET architecture; 2D bar code scanning; MQ server, XML form.
Abstract. This paper implements a student management system with real time information collection, 2D bar code scanning sign and other functions. The collected 2D code image information is transferred to the face recognition service system in the form of XML through Android intelligent mobile phone client and WebService server, and it uses ADO.NET to access database. The MQ server will compare the personnel information, and the image with high similarity will be transmitted to the FTP server, and the final comparison result is transmitted to the mobile phone client, which improve the automatic and intelligent degree of information input, storage and recognition. It provides a new method for the innovative design of student management system. 1. Introduction In recent years, with the rapid development of the emerging information industry technology, the internet and intelligent Android communication system has become the favor object of governments, institutions and enterprises. The information management system based on Android combines the advantages of Web server and mobile terminal, which has been widely applied. This paper uses graphics fusion technology to design intelligent pattern recognition function of intelligent communication system, through the image recognition technology [1, 2]. Using the FTP server and the MySQL database designs the input of scanned information and results upload, which realizes intelligent scanning input and recognition functions of student information. 2. The overall design of system The overall design of the system mainly includes the design of FTP server and MySQL database. The main role of FTP server is uploading the four highest similarity images when doing information query in the scanning 2D code after querying on the face image. The server installs the FileZilla_Server-0_9_41 software, while the design of MySQL database uses MySQL5.5 software. The overall design is as shown in Figure 1.
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
41
ICSSS 2015
FTP server
Mysql database
192.168.2.23 FTP transmission
192.168.2.24
Internet
Intelligent terminal
Fig.1.The overall design of system
Figure 1 shows the schematic diagram of the overall design of Android smart system. This system mainly uses Web server and Android intelligent communication to save image information in the form of XML. The system will transmit the high similarity image to the FTP server, and upload the results to the system and the mobile phone client [3]. In the data collection process, it uses the Web server to realize the network upload function and information storage function, which improves the intelligent level of the system by using the scanning 2D code and 2D code recognition method. 3. Design of image intelligent recognition algorithm for information system Image recognition is the key technology to realize students' intelligent management system. In order to adjust the running speed of intelligence and information system, this paper adopts genetic algorithm to improve the image recognition, and image pixel can be encoded using the genetic algorithm [4, 5]. The coding form is as shown in formula (1) m
P = min + ∑ ai 2i −1 ) i =1
max − min . 2m − 1
(1)
The image recognition algorithm uses function approximation. Assuming the image functions are P1 (a, b) , P2 (a, b) , then the similarity of two images can be directly expressed as:
X (a, b) = ∫∫ ( P − R)d a db .
(2)
When the value of the X function is infinitesimal, the image P1 is more close to P2 , so the function can be discrete. m
X (a, b) = ∑ b =1
n
2
∑ (P − R) .
(3)
a =1
If the image recognition has overlap, the overlapping parts are C1 (a, b) and C2 (a, b) . p is the gain coefficient from C1 to C2 , p is zero line shifting coefficient from shifting from C1 to C2 . So the overlapping is calculated as follows:
D(a, b) = ∫∫ ( pM + q − R)d a d b . 42
(4)
The function is discrete as follows:
D (a, b) =
m
n
∑ ∑ ( pC + q − R )
b 0 =1 a 0 =1
0
2
.
(5)
Use ADO.NET to access the database, and ADO.NET is a component to access the database for the.NET framework, which is the extension and development of ADO technology. The main characteristic of ADO.NET access is to support the disconnect type connection, and it can connect with the XML seamless and combine multiple disparate data sources, with interactive and optimizing function [6]. In the management process of intelligent system, face recognition module of server and client uses the form of XML, which realizes the client sending a request to Web server. The main code is as follows:
1 xxx1222 ** 342323 …… 4. Design of intelligent information management system based on android and.net architecture
In order to verify the reliability of reliability algorithm designed in section second, this paper designs an intelligent management system using Android intelligent communication system and the.NET architecture, the system has 2D bar code scanning, information storage, signing and other functions. The intelligent system interface is as shown in Figure 2.
Fig.2.The interface of Android intelligent information management system
Figure 2 shows the interface of Android smart management system. The system has the function of scan 2D code, so it can save user information in the local mobile phone and server in the form of business card [7]. The design of 2D code is based on the 2D decoding principle and zxing.jar packets to achieve information automatic collection, and the collected information is displayed on the client.
43
Fig.3.Schematic diagram of 2D code acquisition interface
Figure 3 shows the module interface layout structure of 2D code information collection. The structure mainly comprises a scan 2D code and generating the 2D code. The generation of 2D code is mainly controlled by two Button controls and TextView controls [8]. When the scanning is finished, the interface will display the text information.
Fig.4. Information storage interface
Figure 4 shows the information storage interface. Android provides four kinds of data storage mode, and this paper only uses two kinds of data storage mode, including Shared Preferences and File data [9]. The main preservation information includes face photos and 2D code pictures.
Fig.5.Schematic diagram of system structure of intelligent recognition
Figure 5 shows the system structure diagram of intelligent recognition. The design adopts Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 software. In development process it calls the dynamic library file, FaceForJAVA.dll face dynamic link library and FTP library file of libmysql.dll database. In addition class FaceService, other types of operations is encapsulated in the .H file [10]. Through the verification of the system, the system not only can realize intelligent acquisition of information, but also can realize intelligent punch process through scanning 2D code, which improves the information intelligence degree.
44
5. Summary
This paper designed a mathematical model of image recognition using function approximation method, and designs code information by using genetic algorithm, which realizes the discrete of image recognition mathematical model. This paper uses the Android intelligent system and.NET architecture to design a student management system with real-time information collection, 2D bar code scanning sign and other functions. The system uses the XML form to save the image similarity information and uses the FTP server uploading information. Through debugging the system, the system not only can realize intelligent acquisition of information, but also can realize intelligent punch process using scanning 2D code, which improves the intelligence level of student management system. References
[1] W.Q. Xu, M.R. Zheng. Research and development of intelligent mobile phone application based on Android. Modern computer, 2012, 3(24): 112-116. [2] C. Liu. Intelligent mobile phone analysis and development prospect. Technology and enterprise, 2012, 3(10): 78-80. [3] X.F. Zhu, M. Mei, T. Xiong, J.J. Wang, K. Zhang. Research on data transmission between Android mobile terminal and server. Journal of Wuhan Institute of Metallurgy Administrators, 2013, 3(1): 56-59. [4] X.W. Tan. The data exchange between Android client and Web server using JSON. Fujian computer, 2013, 4(2): 102-104. [5] J.P. Ceng, Y.J. Sha. Research on development of Android architecture and application. Micro computer information, 2012, 3(9): 56-59. [6] L. Duan. Deep analysis of Android activity. Chinese new products and technology, 2012, 3(16): 145-148. [7] Z. Liu. Analysis of the current situation of China mobile business technology. Digital technology and application, 2012, 4(7): 78-82. [8] Y. Su. Application of the JSP technology in Web database. Computer knowledge and technology, 2013, 4(7): 45-48. [9] Y.M. Yao, W.G. Liu. Study on Android architecture and application development. Computer system, 2012, 2(5): 131-134. [10] W.J. Zhu, Q. Zhang. Research on SQL database security and statement information analysis [J]. Information and computer, 2011, 2(11): 23-26.
45
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Based on the Game Theory Analysis of Student Teaching Evaluation in Chinese Universities Haowen Feng, Weimin Ouyang Shanghai University of Political Science and Law 201701 Shanghai, China {Fenghaowen; oywm}@shupl.edu.cn Keywords: Game theoryl; Student teaching evaluation.
Abstract. Student teaching evaluation is one of the important means of college teaching quality management, has been carried out in Chinese universities for many years. However, in practice, student teaching evaluation does not play its due positive role in teaching quality management. In order to study the inner reasons why student evaluation of teaching has no effect in Chinese universities, we study the interest relationship between teachers and students in the process of teaching evaluation in Chinese universities from the perspective of game theory, and put forward the strategies of cracking dilemma of student teaching evaluation. 1. Introduction Student teaching evaluation is an international prevailing means of college teaching quality management[1,2], has been carried out in our Chinese universities for many years[2], whose purpose is to improve the quality of teaching by evaluation of students who are directly experience the effect of classroom teaching. On the one hand, closely monitor teachers' teaching directly, on the other hand, the feedback students’ teaching comments to teacher, in order to improve the level and quality of teaching. However, look from practice effect, Student evaluation of teaching become a mere formality, evaluation scores are generally higher, the reliability and feasible degree of data are both low, evaluation results failed to truly reflect the teaching level of teacher. The goal of college organizing student evaluation of teaching did not reached. There exist some deficiencies in the current literatures using game theory to study student evaluation of teaching [2, 3, 4], for example, parameter settings do not fully meet with the actual, and discussion is not completely. In order to study the inner reasons why student evaluation of teaching has no effect, we study the interest relationship between teachers and students in the process of evaluation of teaching in Chinese universities from the perspective of game theory, and put forward the strategies of cracking dilemma of student evaluation of teaching. To this end, we consider student teaching evaluation as a game between teacher and students in a class, and assume that teacher and students who participate in this game of are both rational, and pursue their self-interest maximization, both parties have complete information, which means that they know all strategies and payoffs of the both parties. According to the actual situation of student teaching evaluation in Chinese universities, teacher is passive side in student teaching evaluation; student is an active side, who has the decision power of the evaluation results. Because the number of students is numerous, they have different values and interests, for sake of convenient of analysis, we carry out our game theory analysis by two kinds of situations, One is not to distinguish between students, treating all the students as a whole, the other is to divide students into two categories based on students' learning attitude, students of class A hope teacher can take strict requirements, so that they can get good score through their own work hard, 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
46
ICSSS 2015
improve the level of education; students of class B hope teachers can take loose requirements, so that they learn easily, as long as the score can look good, don't care whether knowledge is acquired. 2. The first type of the game between teacher and student In the first type of the game, students, as a whole, have two policies of "serious" and "not serious". "Serious" means that students make objective and reasonable score according to the actual situation of the teacher teaching during the teaching evaluation based on the evaluation method, "not serious" means that the students make score at will according to their own subjective preference, neither according to school proposed evaluation method, and not according to the actual teaching situation. Teacher has two policies of "serious" and "not serious". "Serious" means that teacher prepare and say lessons seriously and treat student strictly, especially make strict evaluation of student achievement, "not serious" means that teacher don’t prepare and say lessons seriously and treat the student loosely, especially make loose evaluation of student achievement. For student, he must pay a fixed amount of course fee SF to school, and the course fee has nothing to do with teaching quality. The purpose of students is to obtain knowledge and course grade. If teacher take "serious" strategy, students can not only obtain course knowledge better, but also can get satisfactory course grade, although students need pay a certain effort cost of study due to the teacher’s strict requirements, but the benefits of listening to lecture is still best, which is denoted as PH, teacher take "not serious" strategy, student can obtain less course knowledge, but can get satisfactory course grade, the benefits of listening to lecture is not good, which is denoted as PL, obviously, PH>PL. In the process of teaching evaluation, student has the power of decision of teaching evaluation results, but limited to the student's own levels and short evaluation time, in fact, it is difficult for student to give a realistic objective evaluation. If student choose the "serious" strategy, which means that more comprehensive objective evaluation for teachers' teaching level and teaching quality must be made, student must read the rules and criteria of teaching evaluation, review of teachers' teaching situation, it will inevitably spent much energy and time cost, denoted as SC. If student choose "not serious" strategy in the teaching evaluation, He can make teaching evaluation according to his own subjective intention, not only need to pay "serious" appraisal cost of SC, can also get some extra cheerful gains, denoted as SE. For teacher, as long as complete teaching task, teach can get fixed income TP. If teacher choose "serious" strategy, he will pay more energy and time cost in preparing lessons, giving lessons and class management, denoted as TC. If teacher choose "not serious" strategy, under the present school management practice, if there is no major teaching accident, result of student teaching evaluation will have little impact on the teacher’s benefits, which can be ignored. Because of taking "not serious" strategy, teacher can get extra time surplus, which can be used for scientific research and leisure life, so as to get some extra income, denoted as TE. Based on the above settings, game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation is shown as Table 1. Tab.1.Game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation Student Serious Teacher
Not serious
Serious
TP-TC，PH-SF-SC
TP-TC，PH-SF+SE
Not serious
TP+TE，PL-SF-SC
TP+TE，PL-SF+SE
According to the above game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation, we discuss the strategy choice of students and teachers respectively. First, consider the strategy choice of student in teaching evaluation. If teacher choose "serious" strategy, then the profit of student in choosing "serious" strategy is PH - SF - SC, and the profit of student in choosing "not serious" strategy is PH - SF + SE, because PH - SF + SE > PH - SF - SC, the choice of "not serious" strategy is student’s optimal reaction under teacher taking "serious" strategy; 47
If teacher choose "not serious" strategy, then the profit of student in choosing "serious" strategy is PL-SF+SE, and the profit of student in choosing "not serious" strategy is PL - SF + SE, because PL SF + SE > PL - SF - SC, the choice of "not serious" strategy is student’s optimal reaction under teacher taking "not serious" strategy. Therefore, whether the teachers' evaluation strategy is "serious" or "not serious", the dominant strategy of student in teaching evaluation is "not serious". Second, consider the strategy choice of teacher in teaching evaluation. If student choose "serious" strategy, then the profit of teacher in choosing "serious" strategy is TP-TC, and the profit of teacher in choosing "not serious" strategy is TP+TE, because TP+TE > TP-TC, the choice of "not serious" strategy is teacher’s optimal reaction under student taking "serious" strategy; If student choose "not serious" strategy, then the profit of teacher in choosing "serious" strategy is TP-TC, and the profit of teacher in choosing "not serious" strategy is TP+TE, because TP+TE > TP-TC, the choice of "not serious" strategy is teacher’s optimal reaction under student taking "not serious" strategy. Therefore, whether the student's evaluation strategy is "serious" or "not serious", the dominant strategy of teacher in teaching evaluation is "not serious". So, the Nash equilibrium of the game is (not serious, not serious), that is to say,” not serious" strategy is a necessary choice for teacher and student in the teaching evaluation. From teacher's perspective, since student is necessarily take "not serious" strategy in teaching evaluation whether teacher take serious strategy, namely student will make the appraisal according to his own subjective intention, teacher also don't have to be serious. In this way, teacher not only treat himself easily, but also treat student easily, don’t call the roll in class, relax discipline in class, give high grade marks, give lenient examination, even to cater the needs of student. From student’s perspective, since teacher will ignore appraisal result, it is a good option for student to make evaluation scores at will. If considering the immediate interests of their own, student tends to choose to make good appraisal for teacher, make teacher happy, so that he can get a satisfactory grade. Because of the tacit understanding "cooperation" of treating each other with tacit "loose" manner between teacher and student, the result of teaching evaluation seemingly brings the "win-win" for teacher and student, teacher won a high evaluation, student easily obtained satisfactory score. But this on the surface of a "win-win" is, in fact, "lose-lose" for teacher and student , because, if things continue this way, teaching level of teacher can not be improved, and it is bad for teachers' professional quality and professional reputation, student also has no real knowledge gains, it is bad for student's quality and long-term interests, contrary to the purpose of school organizing the teaching evaluation. Therefore, it is a bad for all parties, however, unfortunately, is truly reflect the current status of student teaching evaluation in college and university. 3. The second type of the game between teacher and student In the second type of the game, students have been divided into two categories based on students' learning attitude, students of class A hope teacher can take strict requirements, so that they can get good score through their own work hard, improve the level of education, and students of class B hope teachers can take loose requirements, so that they learn easily, as long as the score can look good, muddle along the day, don’t care whether knowledge is acquired. Suppose teacher is very familiar with the teaching content, no matter whether he takes strict requirements, his teaching cost is the same, the main difference is that students give different evaluation scores according to how teacher treat with the them, give lower score L to strict teacher, higher score H to looser teacher. For class A, because of hard study, student always gets good grade, his profit is denoted as SH. Compared with the teachers to take "loose" strategy, if teacher takes "strict" strategy, student will cost more to get good grade , denotes the cost as X. In addition, in the appraisal, compared to taking "serious" strategy, students of class A will pay a certain amount of time cost if taking "serious" strategy, the cost is denoted as Y. 48
Based on the above settings, game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation for class A is shown as Table 2. Tab.2.Game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation for Class A Student Class A Serious Not serious Teacher
Strict
L，SH-X
L，SH-X
Loose
H，SH
H，SH
According to the above game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation, we discuss the strategy choice of students and teachers respectively. Consider the strategy choice of student in teaching evaluation. If teacher choose "strict" strategy, then the profit of student in choosing "serious" strategy is SH-X-Y, and the profit of student in choosing "not serious" strategy is SH-X, because SH-X > SH-X-Y, the choice of "not serious" strategy is student’s optimal reaction under teacher taking "strict" strategy; If teacher choose "loose" strategy, then the profit of student in choosing "serious" strategy is SH-Y, and the profit of student in choosing "not serious" strategy is SH, because SH > SH-Y, the choice of "not serious" strategy is student’s optimal reaction under teacher taking "loose" strategy. Therefore, whether the teacher’s evaluation strategies is "strict" or "loose", the dominant strategy of student in teaching evaluation is "not serious". Likewise, whether the student’s evaluation strategy is “serious" or "not serious", the dominant strategy of teacher in teaching evaluation is "loose". So, the Nash equilibrium of the game is (loose, not serious), that is to say, teacher and student will necessarily choose "loose " and "not serious" strategy ,in the teaching evaluation for class A, respectively. For class B, because of lazy study, not aggressive, the students always get low grades, profit is denoted as SL. Compared with the teacher to take "loose" strategy, if teacher takes "strict" strategy, students of class A have to endure the teacher strict requirement, denotes the more additional cost as E1. In addition, in the appraisal, compared to taking "not serious" strategy, students of class B will pay a certain amount of time cost if taking "serious" strategy, the cost is denoted as E2. Based on the above settings, game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation of class B is shown as Table 3. Tab.3.Game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation for Class B
Teacher
Strict Loose
Student Class B Serious Not serious L， L，SL-E1 SL-E1-E2 H，SL-E2
H，SL
According to the above game payoff matrix of teaching evaluation, we discuss the strategy choice of students and teachers respectively. Consider the strategy choice of student in teaching evaluation. If teacher choose "strict" strategy, then the profit of student in choosing "serious" strategy is SL-E1-E2, and the profit of student in choosing "not serious" strategy is SL-E1, because SL-E1 > SL-E1-E2, the choice of "not serious" strategy is student’s optimal reaction under teacher taking "strict" strategy; If teacher choose "loose" strategy, then the profit of student in choosing "serious" strategy is SL-E2, and the profit of student in choosing "not serious" strategy is SL, because SL > SL-E2, the choice of "not serious" strategy is student’s optimal reaction under teacher taking "loose" strategy. Therefore, whether the teacher’s evaluation strategies is "strict" or "loose", the dominant strategy of student in teaching evaluation is "not serious". 49
Likewise, whether the student’s evaluation strategy is "serious" or "not serious", the dominant strategy of teacher in teaching evaluation is "loose". So, the Nash equilibrium of the game is (loose, not serious), that is to say, teacher and student will necessarily choose "loose " and "not serious" strategy ,in the teaching evaluation for class B, respectively. From the above, both class A and class B, Nash equilibrium of student teaching evaluation game is (loose, not serious), teacher and students will choose "loose" and "not serious" in the teaching evaluation, respectively. Like the first type of student teaching evaluation game, it is a bad for all parties, the Nash equilibrium of the second type of student teaching evaluation game is bad for all parties, including teacher, student and college. 4. The strategies of cracking dilemma of teaching evaluation According to the above two types of the analysis of teaching evaluation game between teachers and students, the root causes of teacher and students felled in dilemma are: (1) the students didn't get positive profits when they make serious teaching evaluation, that is to say, making serious teaching evaluation is not good for their own learning; (2) teacher's income had nothing to do with evaluation result. Therefore, in order to crack dilemma of teaching evaluation, the school should adjust the relevant incentive policy. For teacher, the school can relate teacher’s income with results of student teaching evaluation. According to the results of student teaching evaluation, properly adjust teacher’s income through increasing or decreasing, make teacher take student teaching evaluation seriously. For students, school can change the time of student teaching evaluation to the mid-term instead of usual time point such as the end of term or the time after examination. So that the teacher not only have the opportunity to listen to the students' evaluation, but also have time to improve teaching, enables the student to get positive response. 5. Conclusion Based on the above analysis based on game theory, as an international prevailing teaching quality management measure, student teaching evaluation did not play its due positive role in teaching quality management duo to inherent defects in the operational level, instead to become a burden of teachers and students. If we want to make it play a positive role, we must change the specific implementation strategy of student teaching evaluation, get out of dilemma,make teachers and students can benefit from it, thus actively participate in the evaluation work. References [1] Spooren, Pieter; Brockx, Bert; Mortelmans, Dimitri,On the Validity of Student Evaluation of Teaching: The State of the Art,Review of Educational Research, v83 n4 p598-642 Dec 2013 [2] Yin xin，Zhang xiaomei, Xie yimei,,High school evaluation :present situation o, problems and counter measures, Textile and Apparel Education, Vol.29, pp.287-290, Aug 2014. [3] Yu Ping, Economic Game Theory Analysis of Effectiveness of College Appraisal of Teaching, Journal of Chongqing Jiaotong University (Social Sciences Edition), pp.42-44, June 2012. [4] Xia shiwu, Study on the system weakness of teaching evaluation and evaluation from the perspective of game theory, Education Science, vol.26, pp.58-61, Feb 2012.
50
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Research on Network Teaching Platform-Based Individualized Teaching Mode of Principles of Computer Composition Xiufang Li College of Information, Qilu University of Technology,Jinan,China,250353
[email protected] Keywords: Network teaching platform; Individualized teaching mode; Principles of computer composition.
Abstract. Network teaching mode is the focus in the research and discussion of all the universities on teaching mode reform, and the discussion on the network teaching mode of professional course is imperative. This text raises an individualized teaching mode, aiming at the characteristics of teaching of the professional course, Principles of Computer Composition, and combining network environment; it develops a course network teaching platform based on this mode and carries out in-depth study on the application of this mode in the teaching platform. 1. Introduction With the rapid development of computer technology and Internet technology, the teaching content needs to be updated continuously, and it’s more and more difficult to meet higher requirements within the teaching hours arranged originally; meanwhile, the traditional classroom teaching method is restricted by time and space. As the various contradictions existing under the traditional teaching mode impose severe restrictions on the teaching effect of computer professional course, objectively, the traditional teaching mode is required to be reformed and a way to introduce graphics, animation, sound, text and other medium information into teaching process needs to be sought, so as to effectively organize classroom teaching content and increase teaching information amount[1]. Computer network has been attracting countless learners with a great quantity of resources and also influencing educational content and method, and network teaching will become the mainstream teaching mode of new century. As a kind of teaching activities which is carried out under network environment and which combines multimedia technology and network technology, network teaching has incomparable advantages over the traditional teaching mode, that is, it breaks the restrictions of time and space on the traditional teaching mode and adopts advanced teaching means and teaching method to improve teaching efficiency and effect and make teaching work embark on a new level[2]. The Principles of Computer Composition is a professional basic course for computer specialty and also one of main courses for taking postgraduate entrance exams; it relates to computer hardware knowledge, features much content, large coverage, strong practice and big difficulty, and is not easy for students to learn. In order to make students better familiarize and master basic knowledge and improve their capabilities of independent innovation, this text develops a network teaching platform for this course, researches the platform-based individualized teaching mode and therefore explores a brand new mode for the learning of computer hardware course.
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
51
ICSSS 2015
2. Characteristics and research status of network teaching The teaching activity based on network environment is a new perspective about education and teaching reform in the 21st century, and the research and implementation on it is of significance to developing students’ subjectivity and creativity and cultivating their practical ability, innovative spirit and collaborative quality. Under the guidance of advanced educational thought, teaching theory and learning theory, researching and constructing web-based network course architecture and teaching practice program can help students acquire knowledge of professional course in a better way and integrate such modern education concepts as interaction, sharing, collaboration and independence into students’ professional knowledge study process to fully embody students’ dominant role[2,3]. Featuring convenience, learnability, interaction, structuredness, correctness and effectiveness, network teaching can keep good educational resources and educational methods immune to the restrictions of time and space and realize “individualized education”. [4]Without the restrictions of time and geographical position, network teaching integrates teaching resources as much as possible, combines first-rate teachers and equipment with learners who need to get new knowledge, has such advantages as small investment, large benefit, large coverage, many beneficiaries and strong interaction, and thus can save manpower and material resources for school and offer a more convenient platform for vast learners. Currently, there are two modes of research and application on it: one is Web-based software realization mode, by which students can carry out learning, discussion and examination etc and transmit text, sound, image and other information to teachers (teachers also transmit those to students) as long as they have a networked computer; the other is video conference system-based realization mode, which needs special hardware in addition to all the software used in the first mode, in order to realize real-time conversation[5,6]. 3. Individualized teaching mode under network environment At present, network teaching mode has been adopted for public computer course by all the universities but not been adopted for professional course so widely, therefore, the discussion on the network teaching mode of professional course is imperative. Currently, the following problems exist in the network teaching platform-based teaching mode of universities in our country: first, the students in all the universities have not made enough use of the resource of network teaching platform and their autonomous learning efficiency needs to be raised; second, students’ learning mode and learning idea need to be improved; third, universities have difference in the use of network teaching mode; fourth, the resource construction of university platform remains to be strengthened and the quantity and variety of teaching resources need to be increased according to students’ needs; fifth, under the network teaching platform-based teaching mode, the learning evaluation mechanism remains to be improved and it’s necessary to carry out comprehensive evaluation on students from multiple perspectives Synthesizing the characteristics of network environment and course, this text raises a network environment-based individualized teaching mode. Individualized teaching mode is a hybrid mode; it is based on the guidance of multiple theories, adopts multiple teaching devices & tools, teaching materials and media, sticks to the teaching idea of “taking students as subject, taking teachers as leading”, combines classroom teaching mode with internet teaching mode organically, constructs a good teaching environment, and aims to reach the best teaching objective. This mode includes not only the combination of the instruction of teachers on classroom and the guidance on students’ self-teaching through network platform but also the combination of the learning of students on classroom and the learning of students through network platform after class. The combination of teaching resources and teaching environment is the basis for this mode going on wheels. Synthesizing the strengths of “teaching-oriented” and “learning-oriented”, this mode can show not only teachers’ leading role but also students’ subject role so as to make students acquire knowledge actively with the 52
help of teachers and ultimately reach the teaching objective. This mode is implemented mainly based on behaviourism, cognitivism, constructivism, humanism and other theories. Its features are shown below: (1) Individualized teaching mode makes the traditional teaching mode, which takes teachers as center, change into the teaching mode which takes students as center, and makes both teaching and learning immune to the restrictions of geographical environment and time, therefore, students can carry out learning at any time. The focus of teachers is not on teaching knowledge and methods anymore but on guiding students to learn new knowledge through websites, so that teachers’ guidance is stressed. Students actively acquire the knowledge required by teaching content through websites and become the subject of learning activities. (2) The characteristics such as quick update of teaching content, strong interaction in teaching process and teaching resource & media utilization fully increase students’ learning interest. (3) The openness of network environment helps students fully develop their individuality. Students’ requirements of individualized independent study, individual communication and group discussion participation can be satisfied. (4) By means of the real-time feedback of learning under network environment, the content and subject of network teaching can be adjusted timely and the answers and solutions to the questions raised by students can be given timely. 4. Individualized teaching mode-based network teaching platform of principles of computer composition Specific to the features of Principles of Computer Composition, including much content, strong practice and big difficulty, this text develops a network teaching platform and carries out application and research on individualized teaching mode under network environment. This platform is developed under the integrated environment of (Windows+Apache+MySQL+PHP) using PHP language. 4.1 Platform architecture Network teaching platform is a good support software that assists teachers and students in carrying out online interactive teaching activities, expands teaching space, enlarges the vision of teachers and students and realizes distance teaching. It mainly offers systemic course development tool, all-round student management tool, powerful communication tool, perfect test tool and regular statistical analysis tool; it can be operated easily and can effectively reduce the difficulty for students to enter into network teaching. Based on the above considerations, this platform is divided into different modules such as teaching course introduction, teaching content, experimental teaching, online test and question answering and discussion. For the overall architecture diagram of this platform, see Fig.1.
53
Network teaching platform
Course bulletin
Course dynamic
Question answering and discussion
Online test
Experimental teaching
Teaching content
Teaching condition
Teacher team
Course introduction
Fig.1.Overall Architecture Diagram
4.2 Main functions of platform The platform realizes the following functions: (1) Course introduction: introducing the nature, meaning, hours, teaching content of course and other information. (2) Teacher team: this module includes sub-modules such as teacher team structure, teacher training, teaching research and course principal situation. Through it, students can know the composition of teacher staff of course group, the education, degree and learning experience of teachers of course group and the academic and teaching & research achievements of members of course group. (3) Teaching condition: introducing teaching materials used for theory course, supplementary teaching materials, supporting experimental teaching materials, experimental teaching environment and laboratory equipment. (4) Teaching content: mainly including teaching program, teaching calendar, teaching plan, courseware downloading, exercises and solutions, assignments etc; the module of courseware downloading provides the teaching courseware used by teachers for the whole course, including PPT, teaching plan, Flash animation and video data, so that students can learn independently after class; the module of exercises and solutions provides detailed solutions to textbook exercises and external exercises; assignments are the related learning task assigned by teachers in order to expand students’ vision and make them better understand the knowledge learned by them, and this module is the core of the whole teaching platform. (5) Experimental teaching: mainly including experimental material downloading, experimental report submission, experimental video watching and experimental teaching summary. (6) Online test: including question addition, question alteration, question deletion, test setting, question inquiry, test record management etc; test setting includes test object, test time, test score setting and test question extraction; test question management can carry out question addition, alteration, deletion and inquiry; test record management can carry out inquiry and deletion on students’ test records. (7) Question answering and discussion: this is a forum, through which teachers and students can carry out communication on the knowledge related to the course. (8) Course dynamic: introducing teaching activities related to the course. (9) Course bulletin: publishing notice related to the course.
54
4.3 Use effect evaluation and promotion value of platform Since the platform was completed, we put it into use. The use subject is 160 students of computer science and technology specialty of Grade 2010. The use of platform leads to better teaching effect, for example, the use of modules, online test and question answering and discussion, increases the interaction between teachers and students and the opportunity for students to learn at any time. Flash animation demonstration makes the abstract concepts being difficult to understand become vivid and easy to understand; it makes students carry out online learning of theory and experiments through network and improve learning ability and practice ability, and increases the interaction between teachers and students. Moreover, it saves a great quantity of human and material resources. The online self-testing function set up on the teaching platform can help students master their learning situation from time to time and know their weak link of knowledge so as to strengthen learning. Practice has proved that the application of network in teaching can motivate students’ subjective initiative on learning, increase students’ thirst for knowledge and help teachers timely master students’ learning progress and existing problems, so as to obtain good teaching effect and offer a new teaching mode for undergraduate course teaching. 5. Summary The course, Principles of Computer Composition, is difficult to learn, memorize and understand, includes abstract concepts, requires higher practice ability and makes students have poor perceptual knowledge on it, therefore, it’s difficult for teachers to realize teaching objective if they still use traditional teaching method and means in teaching. The use of network teaching platform makes up the drawbacks of traditional teaching method and makes learning more humanized. The individualized teaching mode put forward in this text not only increases the communication between teachers and students but also improves students’ learning interest so as to reach the purpose to improve teaching effect. 6. Acknowledgement This research was financially supported by the School Teaching and Research Projects of Qilu University (Grant NO.2013097). References [1] W. Zhuzhu and Z. Weiyuan, Status Analysis on Network Teaching Platform and Website Construction of Common Universities in China, China Distance Education, vol. 2, pp. 40-44, 2005. [2] L. Jinzhi, Study on Network Teaching Platform-based Teaching Mode, China Power Education, vol. 1, pp. 107-108, 2010. [3] T. Gang, J. Daoxia and L. Huaqing, Development and Countermeasure Study of Network Teaching Platform of Common Universities in China, Chinese Adult Education, vol. 18, pp. 60-61, 2010. [4] C. Barnum and W. Paarmann, Bringing Induction to the Teacher: A Blended Learning Model, T.H.E Journal, vol. 9, pp. 56-64, 2002. [5] X. Xiaolin, New Development of Network Teaching Platform, Study on Open Education, vol. 10, pp. 12-25, 2007. [6] Z. Dongmei, Exploration on Integration of Network Teaching and Traditional Teaching, China Educational Technique and Equipment, vol. 8, pp. 21-23, 2012. 55
[7] G. Hongzhou, J. Chunran and Z. Lingling, Status Survey on Construction of Domestic and Overseas Network Teaching Platform, Guide of Sci-tech Magazine, vol. 8, pp. 14-17, 2012. [8] Y. Shengquan and H. Kekang, Structure and Function of Network Teaching Platform, China E-education, vol. 8. pp. 60-63, 2001.
56
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Correlation Research on Improving College English Teaching Effectiveness Dongmei Xu Department of Foreign Languages, Liaoning Institute of Science and Engineering, Jinzhou, 121000, China Keywords: Improvement, College, English teaching, Effectiveness
Abstract. English teaching reform problem draws more and more attention now. There are many problems to be solved in improving the classroom quality of college English teaching. The occurrence of these problems is not accident, but the result of the comprehensive action of various factors. In the practice, we should take various practical and effective measures to enhance the effectiveness of English teaching reform. Specifically, we should not only change the English teaching concept and enhance the English teaching reform strength, but also improve the comprehensive quality of English teachers and comprehensively use various effective means so as to improve the English teaching quality. 1. Introduction With the continuous development of social economy and continuous deepening of economic globalization recently, the scale and speed of China’s opening up increase. The teaching reform problem draws more and more attention, in which the English teaching reform is an important part of teaching reform and its reform status is directly related to the success and failure of English teaching. It can be easily seen from this logical relation that it is of great theoretical significance to strengthen the research on English teaching classroom. However, looking at the current situation of China’s English teaching classroom reform, there are many problems to be solved, which have seriously affected the English teaching reform effectiveness. It is clear that how to improve the college English teaching classroom quality is a key and difficult project faced by China. For example, a graduate cannot write a decent English business letter; most of overseas students cannot communicate with others in English fluently when they just go abroad, so they cannot adapt to the local environment quickly. “Time consuming with low efficiency” and “dumb English” have become a prominent problem for English learning of college students. Actually, Higher Education Department of Ministry of Education clearly specified that “the education of college students aims at cultivating students’ comprehensive English competence, especially the listening, speaking, reading and writing competence, so as to make them conduct effective oral and written information communication in English in the future work and social work” in 2004, which clearly points out the future dominant teaching ideas that the students’ comprehensive English application competence should be mainly cultivated during teaching. 2. Analysis of the current situation of college English teaching and its cause 2.1 Current situation of college English teaching China’s English teaching, which is always “exam-oriented”, pays more attention to the language knowledge test and pays less attention to the practical ability of language. Looking at China’s English 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
57
ICSSS 2015
teaching classroom content, it stresses the improvement of English language at the theoretical level and neglects the application of English teaching at the practical level. According to the statistics, 70% of Chinese enterprises are unsatisfied with the English level of college students, especially the oral English level and 90% of foreign enterprises are skeptical of Chinese college students’ CET4 score because the students with CET4 certificate can rarely read the English newspapers, magazines and other books and periodicals smoothly. Thus, we can know from these information that the English status of Chinese colleges is of downhill trend, whose cause is continuously studied. 2.2 Analysis for its cause 2.2.1 Educational department: Education department poorly implements “high-efficiency English course requirements”. The college English teaching textbook is outdated, so college students cannot contact the new vocabulary. Even if some contents are changed, it just rearranges the previous content and reuses the old knowledge, without any new knowledge, so the textbook is dull, without readability and college students cannot deeply contact the English. Moreover, educational department conducts shallow research on English teaching and inherits the traditional cultural knowledge, without combining the foreign knowledge, expanding some foreign culture and introducing some innovative knowledge module. 2.2.2 School 1). Due to the insufficient investment, the equipment for English teaching is not advanced, which cannot meet students’ demand for English learning; 2). Some colleges fail to set up corresponding teaching courses. For example, as most of the graduates in China have such problem as “dumb English”, so the college should set up more listening courses to enhance students’ listening competence. In addition, due to the different specialty of colleges, the requirements on English are different. For example, the requirements on English teaching of students of foreign language specialty are higher and other students of non-foreign language specialty are just required to learn the basic English, so the training with regard to listening, speaking, reading and writing is less; 3). Colleges have low requirements on the teacher during recruitment. Colleges just pay attention to the knowledge mastering of the teacher and fail to comprehensively consider the teachers’ ability, thus leading to unilateral guidance during English teaching and low English level of college students. 2.2.3 Teacher: 1). Affected by the traditional teaching, the teacher is still “teacher-centered”, with “ancestral secret formula” teaching, and cannot form an independent, interactive, open and exploratory mode and correctly understand its status and role in English teaching, thus leading backward English teaching; 2). The teacher cannot clearly know the real intention of college English teaching. Unlike the English teaching in high school that just teaches the English knowledge, improves the English reading vocabulary, and enhance the consolidation of exam content to make students better learn English knowledge, the high-efficiency English teaching aims at cultivating students English competence, enhancing college students’ English application ability to realize all-around development and cultivation. It is not just knowledge teaching, but makes students learn independently and form a open learning model. 2.2.4 Students With the continuous increase of educational background, the English competence is enhanced continuously. However, due to the bad school spirit of partial colleges, the college becomes a habitat that causes the laziness of students. For example, some students fail to actively coordinate with the teacher and independently learn the extracurricular reading materials and just learns a little to cope with the exam, so the English application ability of graduates cannot be improved. As the old saying goes, you can lead a horse to water ,but you can't make him drink. To be superior to others in the future practice, it must exert more efforts than others to improve the value. In addition, in the society 58
that English is widely used, you can stand on a higher platform just with high English application level. 3. Pay attention to the effectiveness and enhance English teaching reform strength 3.1 Break the traditional English teaching mode English teacher of colleges should actively break the traditional teaching mode, get rid of teacher-oriented oral teaching mode and do not take itself as the knowledge teaching subject and director. In addition, the teacher should cultivate students’ application ability, enhance their self-study awareness, play a guiding role and take students as the center to make students form good habits of speaking and thinking. Thus, it is allowed to get out of traditional English teaching mode and form a new teaching concept. 3.2 Improve the college English teaching level and English teachers’ comprehensive quality According to the relevant data, college have some common problems, such as insufficient teacher, heavy teaching content and backward teaching facilities, which may hinder the development of college English teaching. So we should take corresponding measures to solve problem. Below are my suggestions: 1). Change the teaching concept, improve the teaching method, optimize the teaching process, break the traditional teaching mode to make students accept English teaching, cultivate students teaching effectiveness by the new learning method. In the innovative society, we should not indiscriminately imitate others, but should refer to the new concepts and be dare to innovate and practice in order to cultivate the talents required by the modern society. 2). Vigorously conduct scientific research activity of English teaching. Scientific research activity is a unique method in English teaching and also the necessary investment. The scientific research of English teaching should cultivate teachers’ professional dedication because the dedication is the premise of any scientific research and innovation and the scientific research awareness of English teaching is the point of strength of research, so the research awareness of English teachers in colleges should be cultivated and aroused. It is required to arouse the teachers’ interest in education and teaching problems and cultivate their sensitivity and problem consciousness of English teaching. 3). Enhance the faculty and reduce teachers’ pressure and burden by various means. For example, we can relieve teachers’ burden by multimedia and network teaching, thus regulating students’ new knowledge acceptance ability in classroom. In addition, we can recruit some teachers with high academic qualifications by diversified means. 3.3 Change the traditional teaching mode and improve students’ English application ability The traditional teaching mode just attaches great importance to the superficial knowledge teaching of students, in which the teacher is regarded as the knowledge communicator and the course content is taught in a tedious manner. For example, the teacher mainly teaches the English vocabulary in the classroom and asks students to memorize the grammar content involved by English reading and translation, which can enhance students’ English level to a certain degree, but cannot have a practical effect. It is well-known that people’s memory is limited, which can maintain memory in a short time. However, as the time passes, we will forget the words that we memorize before, so our efforts will in vain and our time and energy are wasted. Therefore, we should change the traditional teaching mode and cultivate a method that students can be more effective in English learning. For this method, my summarization according to many years’ experience is as follows: 3.3.1 Hierarchic teaching In the modern diversified society, the state needs multi-functional creative talents, so the college English teaching material should enhance the cultivation of applied talents and teach students by different methods according to their competence to cultivate practical English talents of different 59
level, specialty and type. Different students have different emphasis on the language competence in English language teaching. For example, some colleges divide students into different levels according to their English entry performance for different teaching materials and different-level education. Thus, the social talents with different English level can be cultivated and English is more effective in the social application. 3.3.2 Change the traditional test method and attach great importance to the ability of linguistic form Affected by the traditional English teaching model, the test paper exam is still adopted, which is an embodiment of English accumulation and a kind of “dumb English” and cannot reflect the oral English competence. The expression ability is the most important in the society. If you cannot better communicate with others, you can not have a good effect in accepting English teaching and give full play to the English effectiveness in the future work. 4. Development trend of college English teaching effectiveness With the rapid development of economy, the state pays attention to cultivate practical and innovative talents capable of international communication. English is an important mean to improve the international competitiveness and the cultivation of practical English talents becomes a need following the development of the times. Therefore, in the future English teaching, the college will pay more attention to the cultivation of this aspect, striving to cultivate excellent talents in the effective time. 5. Summarization China’s higher English education is now in a development stage. The social and economic development provides good conditions for and have higher requirements on college English education reform. China’s English education reform is facing great opportunities and challenges now, so we should follow the principle of integrating the east and the west and ancient and modern, reflect and summarize the advantages of China’s traditional English teaching mode and absorb the foreign advanced theory and thought to integrate the west and the east, so as to make China’s English teaching more effective and provide better applied talents for the society. References [1] Su Siqing. Foreign Language Education Must Adapt to Social Economy. Journal of Hunan Administration Institute, 2004. [2] Liu Runqing. Study on Foreign Language Education Teaching. Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press, 2004. [3] Ma Duqin. Survey on Current Situation of Social Demand for College English. College English Teaching and Research, 2010.
60
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Study on Volleyball Refereeing Ability Training Strategy of Teachers' College Students in Physical Education Major Hai Qiao, Shi Feng Department of Physical Education, Nanchang Institute of Technology, Nanchang, 330099, China Keywords: Volleyball referee, Referee ability training, Pathway
Abstract. With the country's strong support for sports and the rapid development of China's volleyball, the number of volleyball games and the sizes are increasing gradually, the number of volleyball referees, the level of acting as referees, as well as the extent of work passion are all important factors impacting volleyball development. Refereeing work is an integral part of volleyball, so the quality of refereeing will directly affect the future path of development of this sport. At present, the main place of referee training is physical culture institute, and most of the existing referees graduated from physical culture institutes. Therefore, one of the key contents of major teaching should be to train the refereeing ability for the teachers' college students specializing in volleyball, which not only can make their theoretical knowledge richer, but also improve the professionalism of the students themselves. Through the method of volleyball referee ability training of teachers' college students, the author briefly discussed the volleyball referee ability training strategy of teachers' college students in physical education major. 1. Introduction In our country, volleyball is a relatively popular sport. With this broad mass base, volleyball had been rapidly developed during the period that national women's volleyball team won five successive championships. Meanwhile, with our education system reform and the widely expanded body-building in recent years, it is particularly important to develop and improve volleyball-related work, and in which, bore the brunt of the training of volleyball referee. As the main referee training reserve base of China, physical culture institutes' use of resources and training on the students' refereeing ability both have a great impact on the development of volleyball in the future. This paper discusses the volleyball referee ability training strategy of teachers' college students in physical education major from the key factor, method and pathway of volleyball referee training, also hope to get correction and supplement for the inadequacies. 2. The status of volleyball referee ability training of teachers' college students in physical education major Volleyball has a very strong mass base in China. Since 1981 Volleyball World Cup, the spirit of Chinese women's volleyball team has inspired generations of Chinese people, conveying strong share of national pride. Especially the huge success women’s volleyball team won in the 2008 Beijing Olympic Games both encouraged the masses to actively participate in volleyball, but also let China volleyball shown on the world stage. However, form the view of the situation of college graduates in recent years, there are still many problems existed in the training of students’ volleyball referee ability. Many students do not have practical opportunities to exercise their refereeing ability at school, resulting in when they acting as a referee for a game, they are lack of confidence on the court and afraid to blow whistle; but sometimes they steal the show, disrupt the competition process at wrong 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
61
ICSSS 2015
time, and there are still many false judgments. Some students with good theory exam results do not even know when to blow the whistle on the court which resulting in lack of fairness of the game, and sometimes it also affects the students' enthusiasm for volleyball. These problems have greatly hindered the development of volleyball in China. 3. Problems existing in the training of students’ refereeing ability 3.1 Lack of modern teaching facilities Modern teaching tools and methods can effectively improve students' ability to observe. However, the teaching facilities of most of China’s volleyball referee training bases, which are higher normal sports colleges are limited by factors such as economic conditions, unable to keep up with modern development, lack of modern teaching facilities affected the quality of teaching. The country shall attach importance to university teaching facilities from the source and increase investment in teaching facilities. 3.2 Students are lack of practice opportunities to improve refereeing ability Since many universities give too much emphasis on book knowledge and classroom teaching, it results in students cannot get many opportunities to get practical exercises of refereeing ability. However, the ability training is not just empty words, if pay no attention to the practice, no opportunities to exercise ability in practice, students’ refereeing ability is difficult to be improved. Therefore, the lack of many practice opportunities is also an important cause that students' refereeing ability is improved slowly. Schools should increase the students’ practice and improve their practical skills, so as to realize the development of volleyball. 3.3 The teaching method of refereeing rules is too old stuff to keep up with development of time Modern sports rules are constantly changing, which are in an era of continuous progress, and a lot of knowledge is out of touch with modern society. But for various reasons, many eliminated rules and outdated refereeing methods are still taught to students that has greatly affected the training of students' refereeing ability, but also affected the students’ original interest for this. To get our country’s volleyball development leap, the teaching methods of refereeing rules must advance with the times. 3.4 Emphasis on technical and tactical training, but ignoring the training of students’ refereeing ability Over the years, the schools have increasingly requirements on students’ volleyball techniques, but they often ignore the training of students' refereeing ability and education of refereeing methods. In such cases, students tend to put a lot of time and effort to improve the physical fitness and volleyball technical and tactical level, and reduced the requirements of their own refereeing ability. Therefore, it is urgent to strengthen the training of refereeing ability and school sports competition organizing ability. 3.5 Less period of competition organization and refereeing methods in teaching Many colleges ignore the specialized courses of competition organization and refereeing methods in teaching and pay more attention to basic volleyball skills and technique and tactics; the requirements for refereeing methods course period are less and less course arrangement, which causes serious obstacles for the referee development of universities. To realize the development of volleyball in China, it is very important to study the specialized courses of organization and refereeing methods.
62
4. Pathways and methods of refereeing ability training 4.1 Cultivate students’ interests for volleyball refereeing work As the saying “Interests are the best teachers”, “Know its rather know, like to know rather happy know”. As we know, if people are interested in a sport, they will spend more energy and time in it. Therefore, to train students’ refereeing ability we must cultivate students’ interests for being referees. With interests, students will pay more energy and time in volleyball and volleyball refereeing activities. At the same time, for they have motivation to learn, they can better grasp the learning contents. 4.2 Integrate volleyball rules ad basic principles of refereeing methods If refereeing ability training only through theoretical knowledge education, it is difficult let students effectively understand the complex refereeing methods and volleyball rules. Therefore, in volleyball teaching, we must teach students in accordance of their aptitude, rather than to teach everyone with a very broad theory. Combining refereeing methods and the specific rules of volleyball as well techniques and tactics, form a unified and effective teaching philosophy, and the use of multimedia teaching and field simulation and other modern teaching methods to enable students to better understand the specific rules of volleyball and refereeing methods. The Integration of volleyball tactics curriculum and rules enables students have a better grasp of both apsects, but also can effectively enhance their motivation to learn. 4.3 Enhance the training of students’ referees professional ethics and psychological qualities As a referee, you must first ensure the principle of fairness and justice, to guarantee the fairness of the game. Therefore, schools need to educate students when acting as referees they must remain basic norm which is impartial and unbiased. Educate students to have serious and impartial professionalism and unwavering dedication as referees. Secondly, referees need to have good mental qualities to deal with any situation that might arise when refereeing on the court. Therefore, schools need to offer psychology courses for students to strengthen students' psychological quality education. Only in this way, the students’ professional ethics and mental qualities get a better grasp, in order to better act as referee in volleyball games. 4.4 Teachers strengthen their demonstration effect Increase demonstration function in practical teaching, including gestures, whistles, and some foul-scale of referees which are required to students understand in observation. Teachers should demonstrate and explain at the same time in the demonstration process, urging students to systematic study. Students conduct summary and thinking while teachers are demonstrating, which is also able to improve their own refereeing ability. At the same time, adjust the teaching structure, combining the volleyball rules and techniques and tactics and refereeing, to form a unified and effective teaching method, and throughout the entire teaching process, so that students can better understand the specific work of volleyball referees, to enhance students’ understanding of the rules of volleyball, and stimulate students' interest as a volleyball referee. 4.5 Guide students to establish referee association Students setting up referee association can increase the opportunities of refereeing. Organizing an annual volleyball competition at school, student referee association takes charge of specific refereeing work, and each group of referees is formed by high-grade and low-grade together, where the high grade responsible for directing the low-grade students for refereeing work. Through these opportunities to exercise their refereeing ability and improve their refereeing level, but also lay a solid foundation for the refereeing work after graduation; but also strengthen all aspects of quality of students, which is a good training opportunity for students of low grade and high grade. 63
4.6 Set up volleyball referee seminar The theoretical knowledge of volleyball rules and refereeing method is very complicated, and if only the explanation in the classroom, the students are difficult to learn, therefore, it is very necessary to set up seminars for referees to supplement classroom. Schools should regularly organize relevant professionals to set up seminars of volleyball referees issue. The seminar contents should include volleyball rules, the basic knowledge a referee should master, refereeing methods as well as the basic requirements for psychological and physical quality a referee should have to enable students can better grasp the basic literacy as a referee. 4.7 Guide students to conduct referee practice with combination of classroom After students grasp basic volleyball rules and refereeing methods in the classroom, they shall apply in the practice to deepen their memories, so that every student has an opportunity to practice in order to perceive referee ability in volleyball, to experience the work environment of referees, and accumulate the experience of refereeing. Schools shall keep in touch with the local sports bureau, the nearby factories and communities, organizing community volleyball events that also give students the opportunity to practice refereeing, laying a good foundation for they acting as referees after graduation. After end of the each internship, teachers shall summarize the specific conditions of practice and point out some typical mistakes for criticizing and good refereeing for praise. 5. Conclusions There are many problems existing in the college volleyball referees training at present, so it needs society to actively cooperate with colleges for the training of students' volleyball refereeing ability. All in all, the training of students' refereeing ability cannot be developed in a short term, but a long-term issue. Therefore, the training of refereeing ability should be one of key elements of volleyball student specializing teaching. The training of referees ability not only can enrich the students' theoretical knowledge of professional learning, but also enable students' ability to observe, analyze and solve practical problems get increased. Referee ability training not only needs schools form specific and effective teaching methods, bust also there must be joint efforts of students and teachers; on one hand, it needs to arrange specific and effective teaching methods, on the other, it also needs the support of schools and the community, creating students a lot of opportunities to practice to be proficient for the knowledge and action taught by teachers. Schools should also pay attention to the work of students' refereeing ability training, to allocate more funds as much as possible, to provide students with modern teaching methods, creating a lot of opportunities to go out to watch the practice and improve the overall quality of students, thereby enhancing the ability of students' refereeing ability. When students graduate, according to the achievements in school and the specific performance in practice of students, the school may award the title of national secondary or tertiary referee. References [1] Fang Jingqiu. How to train the refereeing ability of students majored in sports [J]. Journal of Liupanshui Normal College, 2005（6） ：44-45. [2] Dong Guoyong, Deng Guoxin. The application of microteaching in improving volleyball students' refereeing ability [J]. Graduate Journal of Central China Normal University, 2009（2）： 106-109. [3] Zhang Li. The application of "Guidance on learning -- Learning and guidance" teaching method combining with mental training method for overarm pass teaching in college volleyball [J]. Inner Mongolia Sports Science, 2007, (02). 64
[4] Su Yufeng. The analysis of factors that affect the development of Chinese women's volleyball team competitive level in different stages [J]. Sports Science Literatures, 2010, (05): 50-51. [5] Guo Liping, Song Lin. Grey relational degree analysis on the influence factors of smashing height of elite women volleyball players [J]. Journal of Jilin Normal University (Natural Science Edition), 2010, (01) :120-122 [6] Sui Yuanjie. The status analysis on nonintellectual factor of teenage volleyball athlete in Liaoning [J]. Liaoning Sports Science, 2010, (02):38, 41
65
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Enlightenment of “Whole Language” Theory to College English Teaching Reform Lu Dai Department of Foreign Languages, Liaoning Institute of Science and Engineering, Jinzhou, China Keywords: “Whole language”, College English teaching, English teaching reform
Abstract. Nowadays, English is more and more internationalized. We learn English since childhood and all kinds of English cram schools emerge constantly, such as Yu Minhong New Oriental Training School, Li Yang Crazy English and IELTS &TOEFL international class which are popular recently. More and more people make exorbitant profits by English training. For students, especially the college students, the great mass fervor of learning English is adding and they also face the pressure of TEM-4 and TEM-8. The traditional English teaching theory divides the English teaching into listening, speaking, reading and writing, which may cultivate students into examinee that can just speak dumb English. The “whole language” theory presented by American famous scholar Freeman and his wife after observation and study brings gospel to the English teaching of colleges. According to my limited knowledge, let’s discuss the enlightenment of “whole language” theory to the college English teaching reform. 1. Introduction College English teaching is facing many problems and more and more experts and scholars, college leaders and teachers have realized the necessity of English teaching reform. English, as a language tool for communication, has its own life and soul. Listening, speaking, reading and writing are the basic steps of English learning and cannot be separated. Attention should be paid to their internal relation and integration so as to better improve the English level and competence of college students, rather than just the scores and GPA. College English teaching is time-consuming and low-efficient. The effective use of “whole language” theory can make more students say goodbye to mechanically do problems and make English become an effective tool for communication and expressing the thoughts more. 2. Explanation to “whole language” theory As to the enlightenment to English teaching, we should first know what the “whole language” theory is. 2.1 Learning is from whole to part The traditional teaching concept highlights that the learning is from part to whole, namely, consisted of the above-mentioned four parts: listening, speaking, reading and writing. This kind of teaching method has certain disadvantage because the four parts are inseparable as a whole and should be integrated, which is the concept held by “whole language” theory that learning is from whole to part. English is learned as a language, rather than a pure course. The importance of the whole, coordination of all aspects and coordination between the teacher and students and between students are emphasized. The scattered four parts consist an organic whole, rather than the competence at a certain aspect. Language is a whole and the development and cultivation of language competence are a whole, 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
66
ICSSS 2015
needing coordination of all aspects so as to improve the comprehensive ability of the overall use of English. 2.2 Learning must be students-centered because learning is the process that the students actively build their knowledge The previous teaching concept is often teacher-centered. The teaching mode that we are familiar with is that the teacher teaches and students take notes continuously without the time of thinking. This kind of teaching method has certain problems because students lose the ability and opportunity of self-thinking as the teacher is the subject. Thus, students are just “bookworms”. In the course, the students should be the subject, grasp the autonomous right of learning and positively build their own knowledge system in communication and discussion. In addition, the teacher should change the course form and positively creative vivid and real context. Under this circumstance, students should have more whole practice, so as to really grasp the learning pattern and thinking way of English. 2.3 Teaching should be significant upon learning of students Compared with the traditional teaching method which thinks that the teaching should cultivate students’ ability acting on the society, the whole language thinks the teaching should be significant and make students feel the significance brought by English learning. The teacher can conduct simultaneous and whole teaching for listening, speaking, reading and writing by a significant context. Students should use brain, hand and mouth in class, rather than study mechanically to make students benefit in each class. Students can positively coordinate with the teacher and communicate with others in class. 2.4 Learning is to participate in the significant group social communication As a language, English should be a tool for communication, which cannot leave the group. However, students’ English learning just stays on the independent skill training and habit cultivation and English is rarely used as a tool and mainly involves hidebound textbook knowledge. Thus, English learning is dull and boring, without good effects. The teacher can create some contexts to force students to speak English, such as free dialogue and presentation, so as to improve students’ English learning ability in a leavening manner with little and discrete time. English learning should be created into a group communication to make students better integrate into it and make common progress in a relaxed atmosphere. 2.5 Foreign language listening, speaking, reading and writing competences are learned simultaneously This is obvious. A language is like a body, for which the arms, legs and head cannot be separated and must be an organic whole. The former test mode has higher requirements on listening, reading and writing ability and in some areas, the college entrance examination has no listening questions and only pays attention to the reading and writing ability. Honestly speaking, it is pardonable that we neglect the speaking and listening because the college entrance examination outline does have higher requirements on the reading and writing ability, and neglects the speaking ability to a certain degree. However, there is no college entrance examination pressure now, so we can comprehensively improve the English level, including listening, speaking, reading and writing ability, according to our needs. 2.6 Students that learn the foreign language should use the learning concept of native language English may not be so difficult as we think. We should accept it from the heart first. As a language, it must have certain similarity with our native language. From another perspective, we can regard it as our native language and friends can make dialogues in English daily. We can watch more English movies, listen to more English songs, keep English diary, express our ideas in English, communicate
67
with others more and make friends from foreign countries so as to improve our English in the daily life. Thus, the overall English level must be improved to a certain degree. 2.7 Confidence in students can mine students’ foreign language learning potential The traditional teaching method thinks the students’ foreign language learning ability is limited and the “whole language” theory thinks students’ foreign language learning ability is uncertain and should be mined. The college teacher’s confidence in students is embodied in: the teacher can give more time for students’ independent learning and the teacher can take multiple measures, such as topic-free presentation, and ask students to teach and then make supplement at the last. Thus, students can positively integrate into the class and an unexpected result may be obtained. 3. Enlightenment of “whole language” theory to college English teaching reform Sun Yat-sen once said: “We take Chinese reform as our mission consistently no matter what happens...” The English reform is not so great and momentous, but the use of this sentence here aims at verifying the importance of reform. We want to make things better through reform. Below is my opinions on the college English teaching reform. 3.1 College leaders should take measures The college leader should develop the English teaching scheme that is applicable to the school according to the current situation of English learning of the school. For example, the college English teachers can have on-the-job training, so as to better improve their teaching ability; a series of seminar with regard to “whole language” theory can be conducted and the novel forms and topics can be used to attract the teacher and students. In addition, the new teaching outline can be compiled to improve the overall assessment of listening, speaking, reading and writing abilities. As the college examination syllabus is changed, the learning and thinking way of the teacher and students should be changed to achieve the effective implementation of whole teaching method. In addition, the investment in English club can be improved and more competitions with regard to the improvement of English level can be conducted, including English poetry recitation contest, English debate and English corner. All in all, it is required to improve the wholeness of English learning, and develop a series of measures by reference to the “whole language” theory to promote the English teaching. 3.2 College teachers should positively improve their ability and grasp the opportunity As a college teacher and a responsible teacher, the teacher should have the concept of lifelong learning. Nowadays, some teachers in colleges still use PPT and courseware several years ago and even some teachers don’t produce new test papers. Maybe teachers have difficulties or maybe teachers are confident, which are feasible. A teacher should be responsible for students, improve his teaching practice ability by various channels and exercise himself based on the existing high ability. “Whole Language” theory is a good opportunity. The college teachers should know the essence of the theory through careful study and carefully think how to better conduct education and teaching. The teachers can discuss by groups to develop a set of new teaching scheme. In addition, the teacher can create more real language contexts, teach by taking English as a language and guide students to conduct independent communication. 3.3 Students should be positive and aggressive As the old saying goes, you need to do much practice after the master gives you the basic instructions. No matter how hard the school and teacher work, students should rely on themselves finally. If they are not aggressive and not responsible for themselves, it is useless no matter how good the teacher and school are. As a college students, there is no pressure of college entrance examination, so English learning is diversified. Students can improve their abilities from all aspects and positively participate in the school activities, such as speech and debate so as to challenge themselves and improve their 68
abilities in competition. In addition, students should also speak English boldly, communicate with others more and speak in class. Actually, “whole language” theory emphasizes the communication between students. It is required to form a whole in class, in which the students learn and progress together. Simply, students become a kind of relationship like partner so as to obtain knowledge during communication. 4. Conclusions This paper mainly involves the enlightenment of “whole language” theory to college English teaching reform. The meaning of “whole language” theory is introduced, it is compared with the traditional English teaching and its advantages and its role in English teaching are highlighted. The “whole language” theory emphasizes that the English learning is from whole to part and the teaching must be students-centered, mine the students’ foreign language learning potential and take the foreign language as the native language. Next, the enlightenment of “whole language” theory to college English teaching is mainly analyzed and the effective scheme of improving the English teaching level is explored from the college, teacher and students. It is thought that the school should positively create the English learning atmosphere to provide convenience for the English learning of the teacher and students. The teacher should give play to his advantages and positively create real and vivid environment and atmosphere to make students speak English boldly and better. The students should be positive and aggressive, have their own opinions, positively coordinate with the teacher, speak English boldly in the environment created by the teacher and communicate with others. As my knowledge and experience have certain limitation, not all the aspects are considered. I hope you can understand. References [1] Redmond, M.L. The Whole Language Approach in the FLES Classroom: Adapting Strategies to Teach Reading and Writing [J].ForeignLanguageAnnuals, 1994, 27Π3:428-444. [2] Dai Weidong. Building “One Package” English Teaching System with Chinese Characteristics [J]. Foreign Language Teaching and Research, 2001, (5). [3] Jing Shenghua. Reason for Time Consuming and Low Efficiency of College English Teaching in China [J]. Foreign Language Teaching and Research, 1999,(1)[J] ,Outside,1996,(2). [4] Li Jiongying. China’s CET4 and CET6: Problems and Thinking [J]. Foreign Language Teaching, 2002, (5).
69
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Research on Digital Archives Resource Management Technology in the Cloud Environment Xiaozhen Li Archives, Jiangxi University of Traditional Chinese Medicine, Nanchang, 330006, China Keywords: Cloud computing, Digital archive, Information security, Management strategy
Abstract. With the development of technologies on computers and network communication, cloud computing, as a new product, has significantly improved the service and management mode of digital archives, and also sent shockwaves to the management of the traditional archives information security. It has brought huge impact to the Internet and its strong computing capability has been primarily applied into some business fields with significant benefit achieved. Since there are security and confidentiality issues involved in archive work, the technologies of digital archive resources management in the cloud environment are researched. 1. Introduction With the coming of network world, human beings have stepped into the network information era and the traditional archive has been transferring itself to the digital archive as a result of the network age. Some new technologies should be introduced to improve the service level of archive management and to develop the digital archive. In some economic developed areas, profits have been gained via digital archives. However, in some less economy developed area, the establishment of digital archives goes slowly. A huge amount of money was input to the creation of archives by many digital archives, but the achievement was little. In order to understand cloud computing’s impact on digital archive as well as its contribution to the security and confidentiality, the technologies of digital archive resources management are discussed based on the acknowledgment that cloud computing exits as new type of serving computer mode. 2. Challenges faced by current digital archive resource management in the cloud computing era As a technology generating various computer technologies and service ideas, cloud computing is going to effect the resource development, operation method, management cost, innovation ways, service system of digital archive in a positive way. However, serious challenges are also faced by the current digital archive resource management in the cloud computing era. 2.1 Lack of regulation and awareness in general Digital archives are different from traditional ones. Its creation is a complicated and systematic process which requires the work that involves varied departments and regions. This is different from other enterprises’ simple management mode or other projects’ simple process, but an overall planning on the digital archive creation. The establishment process of comprehensive archives in China has its shortages at a certain level. During the creation of archive information resources, the archive information resource in each digital archive were not connected, in another word, the overall awareness is lacked. Moreover, the planning on the function and development of digital archive was insufficient. Thus, the customers’ increasing needs on information as well we requests on knowledge 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
70
ICSSS 2015
service could not be satisfied, which lead to the increasing conflict between digital archive information service and customers’ needs. Specifically, (a) developers didn’t have enough analysis on the overall function of digital archive and customers’ needs and were also lack of a comprehensive planning. Modifications on the digital archives were made step by step, some of which couldn’t be realized. The impact was so bad that the developers had to give up on the development. (b) developers had insufficient understanding on the overall system of digital archive and didn’t pay enough attention to its standards as well as the regulations of creation. Therefore, many information in the digital archives could not be shared, causing a seriously bad impact on the process of information collection and publishing. (c) developers have little knowledge on the complexity of digital archives, failed to manage the important things and less important things. Thus, many completed digital archives couldn’t function properly. 2.2 Lack cooperation spirit As a newly emerging technology, the creation of digital archive in the cloud computing era is a fresh thing. This complicated creation process does not only require the communication and learning among different organizations, but also an overall planning and unified standards. In addition, maximizing the enterprises’ benefits with the lowest cost, together with the integrated system and effective share of information resources in digital archives are also in need. However, in reality, the development of digital archive had no trustful cooperation and was in lack of a unified standard and planning. Different categories of information were saved in different file formats. Besides, there were some newly finished digital archives where some leading technology and experience cannot by effectively shared due to protections on some existed technologies. 2.3 Low enterprise profits The creation of digital archive has become the key work for the development of comprehensive archives in each level of each area since the new 21 Century times. The start of the process focused on electric file and various projects relevant to the digitalized archives: digitalized manufacture center, electric file center, archive information collection center, electric file registration and back-up center and etc. Developers invested large amount of money into the creation, but profits gained were low. Some digital archives were unable to operate properly although a lot of money was input into. Plenty of labor and materials were invested, but the operation was failed due to some reasons. Some digital archives scanned lots of pictures, but couldn’t find a specific one when it’s needed. Some received massive documents, but were unable to have them verified. Some brought a number of equipment when it was under the development, however due to the fast replacement pace of equipment, they had to be replaced even before the digital archive finished. Thus, a large amount of money was wasted and that was considered as the reason of the low enterprises profit. 2.4 Staffs were qualified with unreasonable knowledge structure Most staffs who work at digital archives are not capable of working for its development due to their unreasonable knowledge structure. There are even no staffs positioned to daily maintain the database and system of the archives. A problem is sent to software company once it occurs. In such cases, it’s impossible that systems from developers can match with the needs rom customers. Besides, the low usage rate came out as another result that just made the digital archive development more difficult. 2.5 Lack of innovation From the aspect of talent allocation, knowledge structure of staff fails to be updated and their mindset could hardly adjust themselves to the development of the new digital archive. Their mindset is conservative, lack of innovation. What also in short of is the strict security measurement in the aspect of information building up. These factors from different perspectives merged as a thereat to the safety of some software, together with shortages of digital archive service and management itself and the
71
challenges it faces, the overall level of the information resource sharing is strongly affected in a negative way. 3. Digital archives information security strategy in the cloud computing environment From the perspective of information resources, cloud computing is able to realize the information resources sharing of digital archive. In order to protect digital archive’s security in the cloud environment as much as possible, developers start to solve the problems in the developing process and conquer the challenges of information security in the aspect of innate defense within digital archive, operational management and regulation standardization. Thus, a successful and reliable digital archive can be completed. 3.1 Technical protections on digital archives In order to protect the technologies for digital archive, a reliable cloud computing environment which is targeted to protect customers’ data secure and privacy needs to be built up. In addition, the combination of current cloud computing and reliable computing is going to be the most important research area in the field of cloud safety. The establishment of reliable cloud computing environment is going to significantly improve the safe use of cloud computing under the circumstances of digital archive. It provides strong protection to the information recourse recording. For customers, they no long need to worry about the personal and important information leak and feel free to use any items in the digital archive. 3.2 Digital archive management From the perspective of digital archive management, developers should create a digital archive’s cloud computing security system which can be controlled by themselves. The establishment of reliable cloud computing environment sets up a good condition for the information security. However, the effective management mode is key to implement the safety. There are several steps to manage the archive in a secure way including establishing cloud computing customer management, verification, authorization, security auditing and etc. to regularize the safe operation on the cloud computing platform. However, there are some important issues to pay attention to: (a) Visit Control Management. Users’ ID in the cloud computing environment plays the key role for information security. Only verified users with authority can visit the information in the cloud resources. However, due to its characteristics of multi-organization and dynamic state, it’s impossible to require customers to verify IDs before they use cloud resources. Therefore, the authorized digital archives only users to verify themselves once in order to visit other information authorized in the cloud in future via a convenient way. (2) User Permission Management. Users in the digital archive environment are divided into different levels and different level have different permissions to manage and use the resources. But user manager can separate system administrators from other administrators in order to avoid unauthorized visit. (3) Risk Control Management。 Under cloud environment, backup is still the best weapon to record digital archive information in a safe and long way. On one hand, digital archive should back up its database under the cloud just in case information will gone forever if the cloud collapses itself when remote back up happens. On the other hand, digital archive should establish a set of comprehensive information risk response procedures to solve problems by rules when security issues happen unexpected. 3.3 Significance of digital archive resource management application in the cloud environment Cloud computing’s exist announced the coming of a new generation computer time with lower cost, which brought human beings into a safe era where the resources can be shared. However, the exploration on cloud computing application is still in the process. Since cloud computing has the nature of convenience and security, its application is going be widely implemented in the digital information resource management without a doubt. In the meantime, there will be better solutions to 72
the safety issue of digital archives, which means cloud computing will be able to contribute to the establishment and development of digital archive in a better way. In this way, the development and management of digital archive have been greatly enhanced. The security condition of information in digital archive needs to be analyzed and practical safety regulations need to be made in order to better serve for the development of digital archives. To guarantee the security of cloud computing, challenges of management on it should be faced with a positive attitude and strategies on the information security need to be made as well to protect the internal resources. Thus, the digital archive can be better developed in the cloud era. 4. Conclusion With the development of computer technology as well as network communication, the world of networking has come. Under such circumstances, cloud computing, as a new product, significantly contributes to digital archives’ service and management mode, and influences the Internet in a great way. In addition, the new produce has been applied into some of the business fields in China with considerable profits gained. However, since there are some security and confidentiality issues concerned, the digital archive management work under cloud computing have faced serious challenges. In order to secure the safety of cloud computing as well as better serve costumers, the digital archive’s resources management technics are discussed. It’s believed that with the development of cloud computing, the security issue of digital archive can be solved in an easier way, and it can contribute to the overall creation and development of digital archives in a better way. 5. Acknowledgments This article is the planned art curriculum of Jiangxi province in 2014 which was entitled as Library in Traditional Chinese Medicine Colleges Participate the Fundamental Public Culture Service System Establishment in a Way of “Multi-perspectives from One Single Subject” with the project authorization number: YG201423. And it’s also the curriculum of higher education in Jiangxi province which was entitled as Research on Regional Colleges Digital Archive Management Mode in Cloud Environment. with the project authorization number: jxgxdakt-2012034. References [1] Manyi Li, Cloud Computing Security Faces Challenges-Interview with Academician Chanxiang Shen from the National Information Consultant Advisory Commit[J], Secrecy Science and Technology, 2011(3)：9. [2] Xiaoqin Peng, Jiejin Cheng, Brief Exploration on Digital Archive Service and Management in the Cloud Computing Environment [J]. Archive Science Study, 2010(6)：73. [3] Xiaoting Ma, Cheng Chen, Digital Library Information Resources Security Thereat and Strategy Study in the 2.0 Cloud Security System[J], Journal of Modern Information, 2011(3)：63. [4] Jingwei Du, Cloud Computing’s Impact on Information Security and Analysis on Strategy[J], Information Security and Technology, 2011(5)：14. [5] Qing Liu, China’s Cloud Computing Security Issue and Strategy[J], Telecommunications Network Technology, 2012(3)：6.
73
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Intervention Effect of Group Psychological Counseling on Improving the Social Responsibility of University Students Yanfei Du1,2, Zhibin Liu2, Yaru Wang1, Lina Liu1 1
Department of Psychology, Changchun Guanghua University, Changchun, 130000, China 2
School of Philosophy and Society, Changchun, 130000, China
Keywords: University Students, Group Psychological Counseling, Social Responsibility
Abstract. Goal: Exploring the effect of group psychological counseling on improving the social responsibility of university students. Methods: Select 126 university students and divide them randomly into experimental group (n=63) and control group(n=63). Conduct 10 group psychological counseling toward the experimental group and impose no intervention on the control group. Then carry out the effect evaluation by adopting the 《The Psychological Scale of Social Responsibility for the University Students》Result: For the control group, there is no obvious difference in social responsibility and attitude, responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy, responsibility contents and the overall social responsibility before and after the experiment. For the experimental group, the responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy, responsibility contents and overall responsibility after the counseling is higher than that before the counseling; The score of responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy and overall responsibility in experimental group is higher than that in control group obviously. Conclusion: Group psychological counseling has optimistic intervention effect on improving the social responsibility of university students. 1. Introduction Nowadays, the social responsibility has been weakened severely. A series of social problems which have caught the attention of the public including ‘Xiao Yueyue acident’, ‘Sanlu milk powder’, ‘environmental pollution, ‘serious traffic accidents’ and ‘corruption’ have manifested the weakening trend of social responsibility. This trend spreads in the university campus, mainly reflecting in that some students regard ‘spending money’ as their responsibility at present and think that their parents are responsible for making money, consider themselves as the ‘consumer’ in the society and call themselves ‘vampire’. In addition, some students can’t conduct reasonable attribution and attribute failure to ‘luck or environment’ to avoid and pass the responsibility; for some students who study hard, their goal is their personal development instead of social development. Such behaviors make people worry about the future of China because the social responsibility level of university students at present is closely related to the construction of a powerful socialist country with Chinese characteristics and the historical course which revitalizes the Chinese nation. At present, the strength of responsibility of university students has become the focus of the whole society. Therefore, modern higher education should realize the importance of this problem and consider training the university students’ social responsibility as the important contents of morality and personality education. Social responsibility is a kind of positive personality quality which has significant influence on personal and social development. Broadly speaking, social responsibility includes contents in two aspects: the first is self-responsibility which integrates the responsibility of self-survival and self-development. Specifically, it means love for their life, the value of pursuing life, the enrichment of spiritual life, the establishment of right reflections, clear objective of struggle and ambitious 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
74
ICSSS 2015
worldly idea, the improvement of self-cultivation, the responsible acts and deeds and the fulfillment of its own duty; the second is the social responsibility toward family, others, group, country and human including honoring and supporting the old, maintaining the unity and harmony of family, respecting the personality and right of others and making their own contribution for the prosperity of Chinese nation and the survival and development of the whole universe. The study of social responsibility of Chinese university students in our country mainly include the following aspects：(1) The study of the characteristics which reflect the social responsibility of university students: the study of Liufei, Chenting, Li Fengyan, Du Weiyan, Wangyan shows that the performance of university students’ social responsibility at present is mainly good, reflecting in caring others, concerning countries and shouldering family responsibility, but also the social responsibility of some university students is negative, wrong and weakened, mainly reflecting in being strict with others, not being strict with themselves; valuing personal prospects, belittling social ideal and lacking the consciousness for serving the country; emphasizing personal value and neglecting social value and the biased value orientation; [1-6]Liu Haitao think that contemporary university students have relatively clear understanding about their responsibility contents but do not manifest the appropriate way of their responsibility consciousness. [7] (2) When analyzing the reason for the weakening of university students’ social responsibility, most studies conduct the analysis from angles of the fault of family education, lack of school education, social reform and the students’ own factors, and then provide the cultivation scheme on theoretical level. After the summary above, we know that the study related to the social responsibility of university students mainly focuses on the description of current situation and cause analysis of social responsibility of university students but lacks the specific and operable method to improve the social responsibility of university students. It is a weakening point for the study of social responsibility of university students, so the exploration of specific and effective method for cultivating the social responsibility of university students is an important direction of the study. At present, group psychological counseling becomes the important education form for the university students to improve their psychological quality. A large number of studies and practices of the researchers indicate that group psychological counseling has significant effect on improving the positive psychological quality of the university students in our country. [8]Therefore, by adopting the method of group psychological counseling, this text conducts intervention study about the social responsibility of university students, intending to explore the feasible and effective method for the cultivation of university students’ social responsibility. 2. Objects and methods 2.1 Objects Select. 126 junior students randomly from one university in Xhangchun as research objects. Select 63 students randomly from it as the experimental group with 26 boys and 37 girls; there are 63 students in control group with 34 boys and 29 girls. All the participants in experimental and control group are the students with mental health and participation willingness. The experimental group is given group psychological intervention while the control group is imposed no intervention. 2.2 Research tools. Adopt the Psychological Scale of Social Responsibility for the University Students compiled by Liu Haitao, Zhengxue and Nieyan as the tool of effect evaluation. There are 66 examination questions on the scale and the scoring formula of 5 points is adopted. 1 means ‘completely out of line’ and 5 means ‘exact match’. The higher the score, the stronger the social responsibility. The test-retest liability is 0.85 and ɑ coefficient is 0.90. The scale is made up of four item-subscales which are social responsibility attitude, social responsibility motivation, social responsibility strategy and social responsibility contents. Social responsibility attitude is the overall understanding, attitude experience and behavior expression toward the social responsibility, manifesting stable psychological characteristics. It includes cognitive components, emotional components and behavior disposition. Social responsibility motivation, which includes requirement of self-restriction, realization of self-value and the avoidance of pressure from public opinion, is 75
individual’s fundamental motivation in the involvement of social responsibility. Social responsibility strategy, which includes active assumption and the avoidance of assumption, is the strategy individual adopts in shouldering social responsibility. Social responsibility contents include four aspects which are individual responsibility, family responsibility, social responsibility and group responsibility. 2.3 Research Design and Scheme. This text investigates the effect of group psychological counseling on improving the social responsibility of university students by adopting the research design of pre-post test in experimental and control group and the method of statistic analysis. The main goal of group psychological counseling is: making the university students clarify their social role, value and relevant social responsibility on the basis of sufficient self-knowledge, establish positive responsibility attitude and reinforce the consciousness of shouldering social responsibility voluntarily. There are 63 students in experimental and control group respectively. Conduct closed structural group counseling toward the the experimental group. The experimental group is divided into 10 teams with 6 to 7 students a team. 5 teams from a counseling class and same group psychological counseling is conducted toward 2 classes. Before and after the counseling, the evaluation of the Psychological Scale of Social Responsibility for the University Students is processed. The group psychological counseling is once a week, 90 minutes a time and in total there are 10 times. Tab.1.Design Scheme of Group Psychological Counseling Activity Unit
Activity Name
Unit One Establishment of Group
1. Though born a tho usand li apart, souls which are one shall meet. 2. Loved one family
3. This is me
Activity Goal 1. group members know the goal characteristics and contents of group psychological counseling 2. encourage students to take an active part in activities.
1. grouping 2 warm-up exercise: big cold wind blows, unlocking thousands of knots 3. self-introduction 4.filling in the questionnaire
1.establish the harmonious and trustful group atmosphere, enhance sense of security and belonging of the members 2、 formulate group criterion through negotiation Deepen the members’ self-knowledge about themselves
1. Warm-up exercise: squirrel and trees 2.setting up groups 3 presenting group culture
Unit two Self-knowledge 4. me in the eyes of other people 5. self-determined life Unit Three Clarification of Value
Unit Four Roles and Responsibility
6. best love in life
7. time-travel
Activity Contents
help members know themselves through the evaluation of others 1. help members know the important things in university life 2. Help members know important personal quality 1. help members know the importance of life and take advantage of limited time to do what they think are valuable things. 1. Experience the miserable emotional experience brought by shirking responsibility 2. 76
1.
warm-up exercise：coping machine of personal name;2.self-portrait3sharing the reason for drawing the picture 4、 sharing the achievement and feeling about this group 1. warm-up exercise：trust fall；2. me in the eyes of other people 3.sharing 4.conclusion 1. Warm-up exercise: rock， paper, scissors 2. Value auction 3.discussion and sharing 4. conclusion 1. warm-up exercise: people in the same condition help each otehr2 lack of exercise3. Sharing what they think are important 4. conclusion 1. Warm-up exercise: I perform, you guess;2.psychological scene play 3.discussion and sharing 4 conclusion
8. life and responsibility
9. Will and Responsibility
Unit Five The End of the Group
10. Setting Out
Help members realize that irresponsible actions bring harm to them, others and the society 1.help members realize their role at present and in the future and the relevant responsibility 2combine social responsibility and life goal 1. help members understand the important role of will efforts in process of shouldering and undertaking responsibility 2. help members gain optimistic emotional experience after achieving success 1.review group process；2. deal with the parting feelings of members3.help members arrange their achievements and apply them in their future study and life
1.warm-up exercise: play the clock 2 life line 3 discussion 4. conclusion
1. test of willpower(4 hours),2. sharing 3. conclusion
1. blessing the broken road 2. Sharing achievements and providing suggestions 3. presenting blessing cards 4 filling the questionnaire 5.looking forward to the future
3. Result 3.1 Pre-post test comparative result in experimental group and control group Tab.2.T test （M±SD）of the pre-post test in experimental group and control group
Pre-test Responsibility Attitude Responsibility Motivation Responsibility Strategy Responsibility Contents Overall Social Responsibility
75.14±11 .08 66.06±8. 51 32.41±5. 62 79.52±10 .54 241.57±3 1.20
Control Group Post-test 73.87±10.5 0 64.44±8.69 31.76±5.16 76.33±10.9 8 234.90±30. 77
n=63 t
0.65 1.05 0.65 1.74 1.20
p 0.520 0.299 0.521 0.087 0.236
Pre-test
Experimental Group Post-test
n=63 t
72.5±8.72
74.83±11.64
-1.31
0.197
62.49±9.27
68.02±7.25
-3.64
0.001
31.60±6.08
36.06±7.911
-3.48
0.001
73.49±9.62
79.02±8.29
-3.35
0.001
240.10±29.68
258.08±25.10
-3.65
0.001
P
From table 2, we know that there is no difference of statistical significance in social responsibility attitude, responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy, responsibility contents and overall social responsibility in control group before and after the intervention. In the experimental group, there is difference of statistical significance of responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy, responsibility contents and overall social responsibility before and after the intervention and the score of post-test is higher than that of pre-test. 3.2 The influence of group psychological counseling on experimental group In order to inspect the influence of group psychological counseling intervention on the tested level of social responsibility, covariance analysis is conducted by taking group as independent variable,
77
post-test score of social responsibility as dependent variable and the pre-test score as concomitant variable. The results are shown in table 3 Tab.3.The covariance analysis of post-test in control group and experimental group Control Group marginal average Number Responsibility Attitude Responsibility Motivation Responsibility Strategy Responsibility Contents The overall score of Social Responsibility
n=63 standard error
Experimental Group marginal average Number
n=63 standard error
F
P
73.861
1.408
74.837
1.408
.24
.627
64.499
1.022
67.961
1.022
5.63
.019
31.790
.844
36.036
.844
12.61
.001
76.267
1.258
79.082
1.258
2.40
.124
246.488
3.704
258.004
3.704
4.73
.032
From table 3, we know that under the condition when the pre-test is controlled, the score of post-test of responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy and overall social responsibility in experimental group is obviously higher than that of the control group. It shows that after the intervention of group psychological counseling, the responsibility motivation, responsibility strategy and overall social responsibility tested in experimental group is obviously stronger compared with that in control group. 4. Discussion The reasons why 10 group psychological counseling have favorable intervention effect on improving the social responsibility of university students are: firstly, activities of group psychological counseling are designed according to the causes and characteristics of weakening social responsibility of university students. Through the interview with university students, we find that there exist some personal characteristics which can weaken the social responsibility on them: insufficient self-knowledge, blind understanding about their role in society, failing to form stable view of life and value, failing to understand their responsibility and obligation in the society, the avoidance and shirking of responsibility, the formation of self-interested and narrow responsibility. Unit 2 to unit 4 in this group psychological counseling is designed according to the above characteristics of university students. Secondly, the goal of group psychological counseling is very clear and targeted. The selection of activities is scientific and reasonable and the activity designs are all conducted according to the development phase of group psychological counseling. The activities apply several methods of group psychological counseling comprehensively such as game counseling method, discussion and sharing method, role-play method, music-tuning method and also they utilize some basic technology in group psychological counseling such as facilitation skills, confrontation and empty chair, etc. Thirdly, group psychological counseling builds a safe, relaxed and acceptable atmosphere for the students to make them gain the sense of security and belonging. Through the guidance of group leaders, members can communicate with each other, support each other and share sincerely. In this way, it promotes them to have a deep and comprehensive consideration about their own ‘social responsibility’ and deepens their understanding about society. Then optimistic emotional experiences are generated on them and their social responsibility is enhanced.
78
5. Conclusion Group psychological counseling can increase the social responsibility of university students efficiently. In particular, it helps them understand that the value of self-existence is not the possession of material but the responsibility and devotion to the society. It makes them realize that as social citizens, they should shoulder their responsibility optimistically and actively instead of shirking or avoiding it. In classes of ideological and political education and personal education in higher universities, the method of group psychological counseling is more beneficial for the interpersonal interaction of students than the usual class teaching. Exploring the responsibility to themselves, others and the society through observation, sharing and experience is a high-efficient and fruitful method. References [1] Liufei. The Study of Social Responsibility of Contemporary University Students[D].Hefei University of Technology, 2006：23-24. [2] Chenting, Wangbin, Li Shuning. The Survey Report of Social Responsibility of Contemporary University Students-Based on Investigation toward 705 University Students[J]. Youth Studies, 2008,(06):26-27. [3] Li Fengyan. The Exploration of Social Responsibility of Contemporary University Students[D].Master’s Thesis, Northeast Normal University, 2007(4). [4] Yang Caiqin. The Study of Social Responsibility Cultivation of Contemporary University Students. .Master’s Thesis, Northeast Normal University, 2012：13-18. [5] Du Weiyan, Xie Xiaoying. The Investigation and Analysis of Social Responsibility of Contemporary University Students[J] Sichuan University of Arts and Science Journal,2012， 22(1):128-131. [6] Wangyan. The Survey Report of Responsibility of Contemporary University Students[J] Youth Studies, 2003，1：17-22 [7] Liu Haitao.The Development Characteristics and Influencing Factors of Social Responsibility of University Students[J].Journal of Ningbo University(Educational Science Edition) ， 2011.33(3):35-38. [8] Zhang Jiajia. The Research Status of Group Psychological Counseling in Higher Universities in Our Country[J].Journal of Southwest Agricultural University(Social Science Edition) ， 2010.12：233-236
79
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Open “Duet” of Scientific World and Living World - Discussion on Function Realization of Professional Teachers and Instructors in Construction of Undergraduates’ Meaning World Yongmu Tang Huazhong Agricultural University, Wuhan, 430070, China Keywords: Meaning world, Scientific world, Living world, Professional teacher, Instructor
Abstract. Construction of undergraduates’ meaning world is a key issue for education in colleges and universities. Undergraduates’ meaning world is sourced from scientific world and living world. Professional teachers and instructors, as direct leading force, should play an important role in education practices of college students. Besides, schools should create conditions for deep integration of college students’ scientific world and living world, including enhancing living atmosphere of scientific world exploration, and establishing harmonious relationship between the teacher and students. Moreover, schools should also follow common rules of meaning world, enrich teaching process and space, improve scientific research level of living world, and realize scientific construction of meaning world. 1. Introduction In On Education, Einstein said that “Education is what remains after one has forgotten everything he learned in school”. Then, what are “remains” said by Einstein? Learning：The Treasure Within (a report submitted by Jacques Delors to UNESCO on behalf of International Committee on Education for the 21st Century in 1996) can be deemed as a good answer. Jacques Delors summarized education as four pillars: learning to know, learning to do, learning to together and learning to be. We can understand as follows: education is just to allow students to obtain the capability of changing the objective world after transforming the subjective world. This objective world also includes educatees. The transformed subjective world is neither republication of the world presented in teaching materials compiled by educators nor the original subjective world of educatees. Instead, it is a new “meaning world” created in interaction between educators and educatees. Therefore, higher education is aimed at helping college students construct a new and sound meaning world. 2. Construction of undergraduates’ meaning world: a key issue of education in colleges and universities 2.1 Meaning and characteristics of meaning world Meaning world is a value system supporting a person to live in the real world as well as a transcendence superorganic word, i.e. conceptual world. It is generally acknowledged that meaning world can be divided into four dimensions from the perspective of content: i) dimension of interpretation, ideas about reasons for various value phenomena in mundane life and relevant evolutionary trend and result; ii) dimension of “should”, ideas about how humans deal with various value relations and value contradictions in mundane society; iii) dimension of life meaning, ideas about human’s life meaning or existence meaning; and iv) dimension of belief, ideas about ultimate concern of humans in mundane life. A sound meaning world is a complete one with diversified 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
80
ICSSS 2015
functions. It can meet human’s desires for meaning in various aspects and under various kinds of environment. Moreover, it can also provide humans with various meaning resources and supports, making human’s life activities to obtain all-round meaning care. From the perspective of its composition, meaning world can be divided into knowledge, emotion and will. Emotion refers to human’s feelings and evaluations for objective things. Will refers to mental states reflected from human’s pursuits and dreams. These three parts directly influence human’s social actions. Action is social. It indicates behaviors resulting from behavioral individuals giving subjective meanings to actions with consideration of others. At the same time, such behaviors point to others in the action process. Actually, “knowledge, emotion and will” are fundamental components of college students’ morality. Sociologist Weber divided action into four categories: ① action with rational purpose, namely actions “decided by expectation of objects in the environment for other’s behaviors; while such expectation is used as means of the actor for rational pursuit and speculation”; ② action with rational value, namely actions “decided by actions with conscientious value believes due to ethical, aesthetic and religious or other reasons, and independent of realistic effect of such value”; ③ emotional action, namely actions “decided by the actor’s special emotions and states of feeling”; and ④ traditional action, namely actions “decided by deep-rooted habits”. “Knowledge, emotion and will” decide action orientations and action values of college students. College students are just in enrichment, adjustment and solidification stages of meaning world. Their meaning world has the following characteristics: ① plasticity, main duty of college students is to learn (all-dimensional and multi-layered learning). Their meaning world is open, with strong plasticity; ② subjectivity, college students are active in thought and full of energy. Their education process is an active exploration process as well as a passive receiving process; ③ group feature, college students have similar campus surroundings and life experiences, with strong homogeneity and strong interaction frequency, depth and strength. Therefore, they have strong grouping features; ④ practicalness, college students will participate into theoretical and practical leaning in the first classroom as well as wide activity space in the second classroom. Formation of their meaning world is closely associated with their practice activities; and ⑤ reflexivity, the structure of social interaction takes its shape in the process of people’s interpretation and description of social interaction structure. This phenomenon is called phenomenon of reflexivity. This nature is called reflexivity. Undergraduates’ meaning world directly forms part of their real world, and influences their action environment and action practice. 2.2 Meaning and process of meaning construction Construction is a word borrowed from architecture. Originally, it refers to a kind of structure. Currently, it is mainly applied in cultural study, social sciences and analysis on literary criticism. Now, it means to set up an analysis and reading system on existing texts, enabling people to use an analytical network to disassemble those reasons and ideologies in and behind texts, namely to form a conceptual or meaning system. The theory of meaning construction was formed in the 1960s. Core contents of this theory are information discontinuity, man’s subjectivity and impact of situation on channel of information and selection of information content. According to this theory, knowledge is subjective and constructed by individuals. However, information seeking is a kind of subjective construction activity. The process of online retrieval includes a series of processes of question interaction and solving. Due to nature of interaction and diversified situations generated by question retrieval, different meaning construction processes are formed. For college students, it is a process to actively form ideas about the world, ego and relationship between the world and ego based on self learning & living situations and experiences. Meaning construction is a dynamic process consisting of four stages: cognition, construction, deconstruction and reconstruction. Cognition refers to the recognition process of individuals for situation, action, meaning and others. At the same time, it is also the initialization stage of meaning construction. In the construction stage, individuals form association and structure of the objective 81
world and the subjective meaning world. Deconstruction refers to partial or complete modification, denial or criticism of individuals for meaning system in previous construction. Reconstruction refers to new association of the subjective world and subjective meaning after receiving new information or thought processing. Undergraduates’ meaning construction is a continuously dynamic process under great influence from the outside environment. 3. Two worlds and two teams: basis for construction of undergraduates’ meaning world Dewey said that “education is growth”. College students have two growth homelands: living world and scientific world. In colleges and universities, talent cultivation, scientific research and social service are based on scientific development. The most fundamental element of college education is to lead college students to systematic and standardized scientific world. In this world, students understand how the world (always partially due to profession) is operated through scientific ways – macro world or micro world, substance world or human world, and subjective world or objective world. Scientific world is highly abstract and highly rational. College students generate the following worlds from scientific world: scientific spirit, scientific thought, emotion of science loving, specific scientific knowledge and skill, and morality and specification for engagement in scientific research. These are also served as important indicators used for distinguish college students from primary school students and middle school students. Undergraduates’ scientific world is mainly led by professional teachers. Education of scientific world is education of system, technology and subject. Professional teachers have professional and authoritative occupational images. Undergraduates’ living world is the world which they can directly perceive from their living attitudes on campus as well as the realistic and specific environment in which they live. Such living world includes all kinds of environment related to their daily studies and living – physical environment & humanistic environment, static environment & dynamic environment, campus environment & outside environment, and the world they experienced and felt while walking in it. Living world has wide, influential and unconscious effects on undergraduates’ meaning world. Therefore, it is said that “to run a college is to create an atmosphere”. Thus, schools should implement educational philosophy of “all staff, whole course and all-round”, and advocate “all people are educational environment, and all things are educational atmosphere”. All these are based on understanding of significant influence of undergraduates’ living world on their meaning world. Therefore, undergraduates’ living world has diversified influences. In the prevent school system, instructors are served as leaders of this world. Education of living world is natural education as well as visualized and fundamental education. For students, instructors have the characteristics of closeness and living. Strictly speaking, scientific world is derived from living world. At the same time, scientific world is also served as summary of common rules in living world. Both worlds have countless associations. However, scientific world has already surpassed subjectivity of living world, and reached certain subjectivity. Actually, scientific world has already become an independent world. This is particularly obvious in “world pattern” of college students. Therefore, professional teachers and instructors led “the first classroom” and “the second classroom” of college students respectively in previous education, and independently played their roles in meaning world of college students. 4. “Duet” deep integration: new reflection on construction of undergraduates’ meaning world From the philosophical perspective, worlds facing college students can be divided as scientific world and living world. From realistic level, however, the two worlds can be integrally called college life of college students. Scientific world and living world must complement each other’s advantages and organically integrate with each other, so as to be united in meaning world of college students. Excessive separation of “the first classroom” and “the second classroom” will easily lead to “fracture” of students’ meaning world. In actual education and teaching process, it shows as follows: 82
estranged relationship between professional teachers and students, insufficient understanding and communication between professional teachers and students, failure of students to associate studies in scientific world and life development in living world with college planning, inadequate learning impetus, insufficient perseverance and vigor deficiency. According to teachers, students are unwilling to learn. However, students think that teachers are not good at proper teaching. Instructors are close to students, but they lack guidance for professional learning of students. Besides, it is difficult for instructors to combine teaching works of professional teachers with quality promotion and employment guidance of students. Some students only apply interpretation of scientific world on political and ideological education classroom into completion of examination programs. However, they cannot analyze or guide life practice, or correctly treat social reality. Therefore, it is inevitable requirement of effective construction of undergraduates’ meaning world for further exploration for integration strategy of both worlds and complementary measures of two teams. 4.1 Enhance living atmosphere of exploration in scientific world, and construct harmonious relationship between the teacher and students In senior high school, students’ exploration for scientific world and their living world are highly united with each other. Classroom learning almost accounts for all parts of their living world. Interaction between teachers and students can be found everywhere and at any time. Therefore, it results in unique teaching style and style of study in advanced middle school. However, it goes the opposite side in colleges and universities. Students’ group heterogeneity is enhanced, and they have diversified development objectives. Most professional teachers are beyond students’ growth objectives, and far away from students’ daily life. Therefore, the relationship between teachers and students is estranged. Both teachers and students lack full understanding and identification. Inevitably, teaching effect is decreased. Based on meaning construction of scientific world, students lack influence of emotional force from professional teachers as well as support of self-driving force. Therefore, it is difficult to reach the ideal state of educators. Schools vigorously advocate the policy of “teaching going to classroom and dormitory”, set up teacher-student communication platform, encourage professional teachers to participate into “study guidance, teaching guidance, life guidance and planning guidance” of students, and hope to regain harmonious relationship between the teacher and students. These measures are beneficial for enhancing humanistic care, living atmosphere and individual emissions in students’ scientific world, and enriching and improving their study motivation and study perseverance. Viewed from actual effect, it is of obvious performance. However, it lacks an effective long-term system and matched guarantee mechanism and incentive mechanism. Construction of harmonious relationship between the teacher and students and promotion of organic integration of teacher’s ethics, style of teaching and style of study will be always important topics of school education. 4.2 Follow common rules for construction of meaning world, and enrich teaching process and space Meaning construction is a dynamic process including cognition, construction, deconstruction and reconstruction. Therefore, construction of undergraduates’ meaning world should follow this common rule, and enrich condition supports in various stages. In the current classroom teaching, emphasis is laid on two stages: cognition and construction. Classroom knowledge instruction and test paper examination are also served as main teaching means. With changes in group character features of contemporary college students, however, they pay more attention to guidance function of knowledge and practice, namely effectiveness of knowledge. Facing complex living world, they attach importance to reflection on which theory and which method can be used to interpret and solve practical questions. Therefore, increase in proportion of practical teaching should become one of directions for teaching reform. The latest achievement in scientific research field and its practical efficiency should occupy an important place of classroom teaching. Interactive teaching, exploratory 83
teaching and science-education integration should become a outstanding feature in the teaching process. Additionally, great changes take place in teacher-student proportion and classroom capacity in contemporary campus, which have deep influence on classroom teaching effect. Solution to the issue of “big classroom” is associated with frequency and depth of interaction between single student and teacher as well as time issues in deconstruction and reconstruction stages of students’ meaning construction. Therefore, we should further expand time and space of teaching, set up a wider teaching platform by virtue of modern information technology and network space technology, break through learning space and time limit of previous students, and reduce obstacles of interactive teaching and exploratory learning. This train of thought is also applicable to guidance of instructors in students’ living world. If we are unable to master initiative of utterance or flexibly utilize information transmission modes under the environment of new media, it is difficult for us to integrate into living world and meaning world of college students. At the same time, it is also difficult for us to have deep and continuous influence on their meaning construction. 4.3 Improve scientific research level in living world, and realize scientific meaning construction Actually, the construction process of undergraduates’ meaning world is a process of college students to actually and passively receive socialization. According to sociology, human’s socialization subjects include family, school, peer group, unit of work and mass media. In other words, they are main factors influencing construction of undergraduates’ meaning world. Viewed from learning and living tracks of college students, instructor is served as bond between family education and school education, connector between intellectual education and moral education of college students, manager and organizer of campus life of college students, and an important other person of peer groups of college students. At the same time, instructor can participate into the action process of mass media. According to relevant file spirits and current work practices of governmental departments, instructor can participated into all aspects of students’ living world, including political and ideological education, safety stabilization, construction of study style, financial assistance, psychological health, league and student organization and occupational guidance. Therefore, instructor plays an important role in guiding college students to construct their meaning world. Facing new situation and new environment in the new age, all works of an instructor is required to be highly scientific and of fine level. From the angle of college students, it is also quite necessary to comply with trend of times and scientific guidance of individual development characteristics. The circle of school has already devoted itself to professional and occupational work of the team of instructors, and has obtained remarkable achievements. Meanwhile, instructors persist in eating, living, studying, working and practicing together with students, making instructors deeply integrated into living world of students. However, it is worthy noticing that how we can further make scatted guidance and assistance in living world to be systematic and scientific. At present, it still lacks effective carriers. Individual topics (such as the issue of career planning) have already been integrated into the course system and the field of students’ scientific world. However, many issues related to living world have not been standardized yet in “the first classroom”, including “learning to know, learning to do, learning to together and learning to be”. Relevant school departments can consider scientific efforts in diversified patterns and multiple means. References [1] Yang Shuzi and others, Knowledge Learning, Knowledge Surpassing, and Quality Improvement by Education, China Higher Education Research, 2005 (2) 5-10; [2] Lu Jie, Walking in Meaning World, Curriculum, Teaching Material and Method, 2006 (10): 20-24;
84
[3] Liu Tiefang, From Socrates to Dewey: Living Steering of Education and Completion of Modern Education, Peking University Education Review, 2010, (2): 57-61; [4] Yang Guorong, Discussion on Meaning World, Social Sciences in Chin, 2009, (4): 15-26.
85
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Research on Mental Health Problem of Senior Stay-at-home Children of Large-Class Primary School Chunli Li, Junqiao Qin Institute of Education, Langfang Teacher's College, Langfang, 065000, China Keywords: Large class; Stay-at-home children; Mental health
Abstract. Mental Health Test (MHT) is used for the survey of 37 senior stay-at-home children of a primary school of X County, Hebei Province. The research results show that the mental health of senior stay-at-home children of large-class primary school is mainly at a low anxiety level, but the stay-at-home children with impulsive tendency, anxiety to people and learning anxiety rank top three in terms of maladjustment in every dimension of mental health. The family education and school education should pay more attention to the mental health of stay-at-home children to promote the mental health of stay-at-home children. 1. Introduction Stay-at-home children refer to the minor children in the stage of compulsory education that are left at the place of domicile and cannot live with their parents as one or both of their parents go out to work and then are raised and guarded by a single parent or grandparents or other relatives. At present, there are about 58,000,000 stay-at-home children in the rural areas of China, among which about 40,000,000 children are less than 14 years old. The stay-at-home children may have different mental health problems due to lacking of direct family education and care and unsatisfied emotional and psychological needs. Large class means that the number of students of unit class fails to meet the policy and regulations of national educational department and to conform to the scientific development law of education (40-45 students for primary school and 45-50 students for middle school). According to the current situation of China, many experts think the class of primary school has 50 students at most. At the primary school of China, the large class is common, seriously affecting the physical and psychological development of students. Due to the large number of students in the class, the teacher cannot pay enough attention to every students. If the psychological problems of stay-at-home children in the large class cannot be solved immediately, it easily forms serious psychological disorders, which is unfavorable to the lifelong development of students. The in-depth discussion of the mental health features and mechanism of stay-at-home children has become an important aspect of students’ mental health research. 2. Research method 2.1 Research object The cluster sampling method was adopted and 50 students from the large-class primary school of X County, Hebei Province were chosen as the survey objects. The tested group was consisted of primary school students from grade four to grade six. There were 50 questionnaires in total, in which 37 questionnaires were effective, so the effective rate was 74%.
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
86
ICSSS 2015
2.2 Research tool Mental Health Test (MHT), revised by Zhou Bucheng et al, formulates the Chinese norms. This questionnaire is applicable to students from grade 4 to senior grade 3 for the diagnosis of emotional disturbance and maladjustment. In addition, it is of high value in the correct understanding and guidance of children by the teacher and parents as well as the scientific research of mental health of primary and middle school. This test included 8 dimension scales: learning anxiety, anxiety to people, lonely tendency, self-accusation tendency, allergy tendency, physical symptoms, terror tendency and impulsive tendency. In addition, the validity scale (lie scale) was set. The split-half reliability of full scale was 0.91. The correlation efficiency between each dimension scale and the total scores of full scale was more than 0.70, with good internal consistency. The total scores of scale were the addition of the scores of eight dimension scales. If the total scores of scale were more than 65 scores or the scores of each dimension scale were more than 8 scores, the special personal guidance plan should be developed. 2.3 Data processing SPSS17.0 data statistics software was used for survey data processing. 3. Results Tab.1.Basic information of the mental health problem of senior stay-at-home children of large-class primary schools (n=37)
Scores
One item>8 scores
Two items>8 scores
Three items>8 scores
More than four items>8 scores
1
11
11
3
4
29
2.7% 74
29.7% 22.2
29.7% 27.3
8.1% 38.3
10.8% 50.3
78.4% 26.2
Total scores≧65
Number of people Ratio Average score
Total
It could be seen from table 1 that the mean of anxiety scores of the tested group was 26.2 scores, within the normal anxiety scores and the normal students accounted for 96.3% of the total students, indicating that the tested group was at a low anxiety level. This table shows that one student had serious mental health problem, accounting for 2.7% of the total students; 11 students had problems on a subscale, accounting for 29.7% of the total students; 11 students had problems on two subscales, accounting for 29.7% of the total students; 3 students had problems on three subscales, accounting for 8.1% of the total students; 4 students had problems on more than four subscales, accounting for 10.8% of total students. It was required to develop the special personal guidance plan to help them eliminate the psychological disorders and improve the mental health level. Tab.2.Number of senior students of large-class primary school with maladjustment in every dimension of mental health Number of people
Ratio
Rank
Impulsive tendency
17
45.9
1
Anxiety to people
11
29.7
2
Learning anxiety
10
27
3
Lonely tendency
7
18.9
4
Physical symptoms
7
18.9
4
Allergy tendency Terror tendency Self-accusation tendency
5 3 3
13.5 8.1 8.1
6 7 8
87
The results in table 2 showed that the tested students with impulsive tendency, anxiety to people and learning anxiety ranked top three in terms of maladjustment in every dimension of mental health and the sequence of other people with maladjustment in other dimensions from high to low was: lonely tendency, physical symptoms, allergy tendency, terror tendency and self-accusation tendency. 4. Discussion, analysis and suggestions The psychological problem of senior stay-at-home children of large-class primary school was common, including the primary school students accounting for 2.7% of the total students, with obvious psychological problems and total scores of more than 65 scores and also the primary school students with total scores of less than 65 scores and certain problem in an individual dimension (see table 1). It could be found by survey and research that the scores of the stay-at-home child, with total scores of more than 65 scores, were more than 8 scores in each dimension of mental health and the specific scores were as follows: 9 scores for learning anxiety, anxiety to people, lonely tendency, self-accusation tendency, allergy tendency, terror tendency respectively, 10 scores for physical symptoms and 11 scores for impulsive tendency, 74 scores in total. The stay-at-home child had serious psychological problems and the special personal guidance plan should be developed. This research further found that the tested stay-at-home children with impulsive tendency, anxiety to people and learning anxiety ranked top three in terms of maladjustment in every dimension of mental health (see table 2), which was different from the result in the previous research that the learning anxiety was the primary factor. Therefore, the psychological guidance for the stay-at-home children with psychological deviant at some aspects should not be neglected. The unbalanced social and economic development structure and incomplete education system of stay-at-home children were the external cause for the mental health problem of stay-at-home children, for which the former caused the stay-at-home children problem and the latter led to insufficient quality education so that the living and educational environment of stay-at-home children could not meet the psychological needs of normal children. The inharmonious social relations and the deviation of personality characteristics of stay-at-home children were the internal causes for the mental health problem of stay-at-home children, for which the former led to the emotion absence, disordered values and other problems and the latter caused introverted, uncommunicative, asocial character and other personality defect so that the living and education environment of stay-at-home children was congenitally deficient. The mental health problem of stay-at-home children occurred under the interaction of the above four factors. With narrow area of interest, the stay-at-home children were unsatisfied with their behavior, paid more attention to their image, not good at communicating with others, showing lonely and introverted character, so their self-evaluation on their behavior, emotion and interpersonal relations was low. They could correctly evaluate their behavior, ability or values and have a correct understanding of their status in the society and environment only by improving the overall mental health level of stay-at-home children. The researches showed that the school education imposed important influences on the mental health of stay-at-home children and the missing psychological guidance of school, limited teacher’s knowledge structure and management ability and teacher’s support and education mode were the important factors that influenced the mental health of stay-at-home children. Many schools failed to set up special student psychological guidance room or similar psychological consultation institutions and the similar institutions in partial schools failed to play any role due to insufficient investment. The author found during research for the psychological problems of stay-at-home children of large-class primary school, there was no teacher of psychological education specialty for the mental and schools generally contacted the parents from the perspective of avoiding management risk, but the parents going out to work had no time and consciousness to concern the psychology of their children, so it was not strange to have psychological problems for stay-at-home children. Due to the insufficient custody of guardian, the family education had “vacuum area”. With low culture and education and quality, the guardians, such as grandparents, pampered the children and kept silent on 88
the various bad behaviors of children. The guardians, such as relatives, had their own children and could take care of their family, so they had no time to take good care of the stay-at-home children and could only meet their basic necessities of life, but neglected their mental health. The alone stay-at-home children lacked of ability to distinguish between right and wrong, had poor self-control and self-discipline ability and were easily attracted by the bad factors of outer world. The parents of stay-at-home children often made up for their children with materials as they did not at home and neglected the sprouting psychological problems of their children. The concern on the mental health of stay-at-home children is a topic that should draw the attention of the whole society. This research suggests that the parents of stay-at-home that go out to work should give due care and concern to their children, strengthen the parent-child communication, pay attention to the emotion and feeling of their children and attach great importance to the mental health of their children. In addition, the parents must give proper guidance to the children, help their children build confidence and reduce the barriers in the course of study. Moreover, the parents should help their children make progress step by step. Second, the teacher should pay attention to the mental growth and emotional fluctuation of students while teaching the knowledge and find and solve the problems immediately, especially for the stay-at-home children, for which the teacher should actively create a good teacher-student relation and peer relation for them to make up the love they do not have in the family life. To immediately know and eliminate the psychological disorders of stay-at-home children, the teacher can set up “whisper mailbox” and “station of soul” in the class to solve the problem of stay-at-home children that there is no one to tell, so as to become their good teacher and helpful friend. In addition, the teacher can hold mental health education forum and the theme class meeting of love for stay-at-home children regularly to build a good platform for improving the psychological quality. 5. Acknowledgments This paper is Hebei Provincial Social Science Development Youth Research Subject, project number: 2014040319. References [1] Hu Kun, Ding Haiyan, Meng Hong. Research on Mental Health Status of Stay-at-home Children in Rural Areas [J]. China Journal of Health Psychology, 2010, 18(8): 994 [2] Liu Shuang, Lang Fang. Disadvantages of Large Class and Its Countermeasures [J]. Modern education science, 2013, (5):115 [3] Pan Hongjian, Qiu Lijun, Sun Jingjing. Current Situation, Problems and Countermeasure of Large Class [J]. Journal of Tianjin Normal University, 2013,14(1): 11 [4] Bian Yufang, Zheng Yanqiu. Survey Report of Mental Health Status of Primary School Students in Hangzhou [J]. Journal of Hangzhou University,1997,27(4) [5] Luo Li, Yu Zhaoyun. Research on Mental Health Status of Primary School Students in Rural Areas of Guangxi [J]. Coastal Enterprises and Science & Technology, 2012,(4) [6] Xing Yuhan. Research on Mental Health Status of Stay-at-home Children in Rural Areas in Huangjia Town, Pengshui County, Chongqing [J]. Journal of Teachers College Qingdao University, 2014, 50(4): 355-356, 359.
89
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Comparative Study on Mental Health Status of High-grade Left-behind Children and Non-left-behind Children of Over-quota Class in Primary Schools Junqiao Qin, Chunli Li, Yanling Wang Institute of Education, Langfang Teacher's College, Langfang, 065000, China Keywords: Over-quota class; Left-behind children; Non-left-behind children; Mental health
Abstract. This paper adopts Mental Health Test (MHT) to carry out a survey on 80 students of 4th – 6th grade in primary school in one county of Hebei Province, and recovers 77 effective questionnaire; the research result shows that there exists no significant difference in dimensions of mental health and score for high-grade left-behind children and non-left-behind children of over-quota class in primary schools. 1. Introduction The over-quota refers to exceeding the quantity of students in unit class stipulated by policies of national education department and not conforming to scientific development rules of education (In educational circle, it is generally stipulated that a class with 40-45 students in primary school, and 45-50 students in middle school is a standard-quota class).[1] According to the actual condition in China, most experts think that the capacity of primary-school class is limited to 50 students; in case of more than 50 students, such class is called over-quota class. There is no strict stipulation for left-behind children in foreign countries, but the “kinship care” issue attracts wide attention in all sectors of society in western developed countries. Lu Y[2] shows through research that the kinship care experience will enhance the risk for children’s mental block and depressive disorder. Haight et al[3]. find that those children have high emotional trauma and other behavior problems compared to other children, which can cause anxiety, depression, behavior disorder and other mental trauma, behavior problems, and social interpersonal relationship problems. Chinese concern about left-behind children starts in recent years. As for the definition of left-behind children, there is no final conclusion in domestic academic circle at present. Through summary on most of researchers’ concept on left-behind children, the same point is that parents or parent go out, but their children can’t go out together with them, thus a long-time separation will happen, and then the children are left in village to be looked after by agent guardian or themselves. The divergence points are shown as below: (1) as for the opinion that “a child can be deemed as a left-behind child if his or her parents or parent go out, some researchers think that the children can be deemed as left-behind children as long as their parent go out, but some researchers think that the children can be deemed as left-behind children only after their parents go out; (2) there are several definition for age of left-behind children, including 0-14 years, 0-15 years, 0-16 years, 0-18 years, 6-16 years, or 6-18 years, etc., as well as the definition that the left-behind children are children or under age at the stage of compulsory education; (3) as for the continuation time of parents’ go-out, some researchers propose to take 3 months, 4 months, or half year as standard, and some researchers propose to take 1 year, 2 years or above as standard; however, most researches define this continuation time as half year and think that the half year is more identifiable than 3 months and can be used as the standard to judge left-behind children. The left-behind children involved in this research refer to under-age children at the stage of compulsory education who are left in place of domicile due to the fact that their parents or parent go out; they 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
90
ICSSS 2015
can’t live together with their parents and they are looked after by single parent, grandparents, other relatives, or themselves.[4] Due to geographical and historical reason, since the reform and opening up in 1978, a series of major reforms have been done from villages to cities successively in China; driven by rapid development of market economy, the economic development is greatly imbalanced in different area; with quickening of Chinese urbanization process, more and more rural young labor surges into cities. Due to various kinds of reasons, most of children are left in villages and form left-behind children group. The excessive quota results in small space and crowded classroom, thus the problems often happen in classroom sanitation, air, and angle of view; besides, the excessive crowding will further cause damage on people’s physiology and psychology.[5] The left-behind children are under the key period of developing the habit of life behaviors, mental growth, and character shaping; the long-term separation from their parents results in their lack of parental care, makes them unable to obtain parents’ guidance and help in values and ideological understanding, and also makes them lack of objects to whom they can talk out and seek for help; therefore, their mental and physiological demand can’t be met and it is very easy for them to have deviation from understanding and values as well as abnormality in mental behavior. The left-behind children are under the environment of over-quota class and lack of parents’ care, thus their mental problem is very prominent. 2. Research method 2.1 Research object This paper adopts cluster sampling method to extract 80 elementary students from primary schools in one county of Hebei Province as survey object. The tested students are elementary students of 4th grade -6th grade. There are totally 80 questionnaires issued, and 77 effective questionnaires recovered, with an effective rate of 96%, including 37 left-behind children, and 40 non-left-behind children. 2.2 Research tool MHT is revised by Zhou Bucheng et al., and the Chinese norm is formulated. This questionnaire is applicable to students from 4th grade of primary school to 3rd grade of high school, and it is mainly used to diagnose emotional disturbance and maladjustment, which is of great high value for teachers and parents to correctly know and guide students as well as for scientific research on primary and secondary students’ mental health. This test totally includes 8 dimension scales, including learning anxiety, interpersonal anxiety, loneliness trend, self-accusation trend, allergy-prone trend, physical symptoms, terror trend, and impulsion trend; besides, the validity scale (lie-telling scale) is also set. The split-half reliability of whole scale is 0.91. The correlation coefficient between each dimension scale and whole scale is up to above 0.70, with good internal consistency. The sum of the tested students’ scores in 8 dimension scales is the total score of scales. As for students whose total score of scales is more than 65 or for whom the score of each dimension scale is above 8, it is required to formulate special individual guidance plan. 2.3 Data processing This research makes use of SPSS17.0 data statistical software to process the surveyed data. 3. Result Tab.1.Difference in different dimension of mental health between left-behind children and non-left-behind children Factor Learning anxiety Interpersonal anxiety Loneliness trend Self-accusation trend
Yes (n=37) 5.96±2.043 6.43±1.642 4.43±2.562 5.07±1.781
No (n=40) 6.10±1.910 6.36±1.999 4.20±2.468 5.23±1.845 91
t -0.414 0.216 0.519 -0.502
p 0.679 0.829 0.605 0.616
Allergy-prone trend Physical symptoms Terror trend Impulsion trend Total score
5.72±1.734 5.59±1.973 5.61±1.732 6.59±1.962 24.91±13.059
5.94±1.745 5.93±2.190 6.01±2.194 5.94±1.918 25.65±16.072
-0.706 -0.888 -1.078 1.827 -0.268
0.482 0.376 0.283 0.070 0.789
It can be seen according to Table 1 that there is no significant difference in dimensions of mental health between left-behind children and non-left-behind children. 4. Analysis and recommendation Through looking up previous literature, it can be found that the left-behind children’s mental health status is significantly lower than non-left-behind children according to most researchers’ research on left-behind children and non-left-behind children[6-8], and some researchers also find that there is no statistical difference in their overall level of mental health.[9-11] This research find that there is no significant difference in different dimensions of mental health and score between left-behind children and non-left-behind children, which may be related to few sample amount of this research. What’s more, it is greatly related to Chinese attention paid to left-behind children’s mental problem in recent years. The left-behind children’s mental problems start to attract their parents’ attention and let them realize that providing economic support is not enough, and it is required to provide their children with more mental support and let more and more left-behind children concerned. However, in previous research, we also find that the left-behind children’s mental problem is still not optimistic and needs to attract the attention of whole society. From perspective of family environment, the main reason why various kinds of mental problems happen in left-behind children is vacant family education. The family is of important significance for children’s growth; it provides basic material conditions for children’s growth, bears the responsibility of children’s education, makes the children obtain happy childhood and obtain rich emotional experience, and also lays a firm foundation for children’s personality development. Except that the government department at each level expands the financial investment on rural left-behind children’s education, it is also required to make an overall arrangement of education resource; the left-behind children’s education is a coordinated education that the government, society, school, family, and left-behind children make efforts. In left-behind children development, the county-level government shall bear main responsibility, establish an operation mechanism in which the public security, education, labor, sanitation, agriculture, and civil administration share out the work and cooperation with each other, and it is suggested that the rural grass-roots school district, schools, and communist youth league can take the lead to unit the women’s federation, trade union, village committee, and local police station to jointly establish a third-dimensional social security network for left-behind children’s healthy growth so as to organize left-behind children together and let them support each other. It is able to organize special personnel to hold some activities, let some approachable adults replace their parents’ role, and let those left-behind children have more comprehensive emotional comfort such as detailed inquiries and guidance to let those children find mental support, all of which will cause deep influence on left-behind children’s growth. Furthermore, the most important thing is to establish a responsibility mechanism for left-behind children’s security and mental problems, and provide comprehensive care to children’s diet, accommodation, after-school life, and making friends; the community and families shall coordinate with schools to make left-behind children’s safety protection work. In the measures of preventing left-behind children’s mental problems, on one hand, the school, society, and family shall create a good living environment for them to make them develop in a positive and healthy way and become a healthy social man; on the other hand, the school and community can establish “psychological counseling room” and equip professional psychological counseling personnel to timely eliminate left-behind children’s depression in life and study. The school shall regard left-behind children’s education as a special work, carry out uniform management and establish left-behind children’s personal files on which the left-behind children’s name, interest, 92
personality, and their parents’ basic information shall be clearly listed. As for features and demands of different children, it is required to establish special education management measures and let them contact with their parents as much as possible; if any abnormality in left-behind children’s academic performance and behavior is found, it is required to timely handle it and patiently educate them, and contact with their parents timely. The school shall also establish relevant mental health course and safety knowledge education to improve left-behind children’s self-protection awareness. As for left-behind children’s mental health education, the school shall fully exert its functions of main channel, main place, and main classroom, establish school mental health education and monitoring system, optimize school education environment, and enhance the implementation of left-behind children’s mental health education work. Meanwhile, the school shall greatly promote the formation of good teacher-student relationship and student relationship so that the left-behind children can get full care and support in campus environment. Due to the specificity of left-behind children group, the professional psychological assistance shall penetrate into all aspects of society, school, and family. It is required to enhance effective mental health education work, timely find left-behind children’s mental behavior problem, handle the problems at the budding stage, and avoid their negative development. The whole society should pay attention and show care to left-behind children’s mental health so that they can grow healthily. 5. Acknowledgments This paper is one of the achievements of Hebei institution of higher education humanistic and social science research project – educational science planning project “Research on Education Issue of Hebei Rural Left-behind Children (No.GH141087)”. References [1] Liu Shuang, Lang Fang: Drawbacks of Over-quota Class and Countermeasures [J], Modern Education Science, 2013, (5):115. [2] Lu Y． Rural-urban migration and health: Evidence from longitudinal data in Indonesia[J]．Soc Sci Med，2010，70(3) : 412 -419 [3] Haight W，Black J，Sheridan K． A Mental Health Intervention forRural，Foster Children from Methamphetamine-involved Fami-lies: Experimental Assessment with Qualitative Elaboration[J]．Child Youth Serv Rev，2010，32(10) : 1146-1457 [4] Hu Kun, Ding Haiyan, Meng Hong: Survey and Research on Rural Left-behind Children’s Mental Health Status [J], China Journal of Health Psychology, 2010, 18(8): 994. [5] Li Ke: Research on Over-quota Problem of Primary School in Central China [D], Shaanxi Normal University, 2010, 5. [6] Liu Xin, Chen Qingping: Comparative Study on Mental Health Status of Left-behind Children and Non-left-behind Children [J], Journal of Changsha Normal College, 2009, 5. [7] Yang Huiqin, Zhang Bo, Guo Xueping, et al.: Analysis on Rural Left-behind Children’s Mental Health Status and Influence Factors [J], Journal of Shijiazhuang University, 2009, 11 (6): 97-101. [8] Xu Zhiwei, Su Hong, Wu Guiling, et al.: Rural Left-behind Middle School Students’ Self-injurious Behavior and Its Relationship with Locus of Control [J], Chinese Journal of Public Health, 2010, 26 (7): 868. [9] Zhang Jianyu, He Xiaohua: Relationship between Left-behind Children’s Mental Health State and Personality Characteristics [J], Chinese Journal of Public Health, 2008, 24 (8): 932-933.
93
[10] Liu Lu, Qu Cheng, Qiu Yufei: Survey and Research on Relationship between Left-behind Children’s Mental Health and Locus of Control [J], China Journal of Health Psychology, 2007, 15 (11): 1017-1019. [11] Jin Yingliang, Wu Xiujuan, Zhang Xunbao, et al.: Comparative Analysis on Rural Left-behind Children’s Mental Health Status in Northern Jiangsu [J], Chinese Journal of School Health, 2009, 9(5): 472-473.
94
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Using Corporate Culture Construction Theory to Explore the Road of Vocational College Brand Development Hongchong Zhang, Hongmei Liu Chongqing Institute of Engineering, Chongqing, 400037, China Keywords: Higher education, Vocational college brand construction, Culture development
Abstract. Cultural heritage innovation is one of important means and ways to comprehensively improve the quality of higher education, while vocational education as an important part of higher education, must carry the mission of cultural heritage and innovation. At the same time with establishing vocational college culture brand and developing cultural heritage innovation of vocational college, we are aware that vocational college campus culture is incorporated more enterprise culture based on the general college campus culture, which has the feature of "school-enterprise culture intermediation". Therefore, vocational college campus culture is partially same with the general college campus culture, but it has its own features. Thus, using sophisticated corporate brand culture construction model, to develop and build vocational college culture brand in an innovation way has become the exploration goal of Chongqing Institute of Engineering. 1. Significance to strengthen vocational college campus culture construction The schooling orientation of vocational colleges is "based on the completion of secondary education, to train a group of talents with university knowledge and certain skills and expertise." Today, more and more people are beginning to realize to the importance of vocational education. Since China began the construction of socialism society, the market economy has got strong development, and China's industrialization and modernization have been greatly enhanced and the demand of society for high-skilled personnel continues to expand. Under the influence of this situation, the number of vocational colleges nationwide has increased dramatically, which accounted almost half of higher education. Undoubtedly, vocational colleges belong to colleges and the culture construction of vocational colleges also belongs to college culture construction. Mr. Hu Jintao’s idea concerning that "Higher education is an important carrier of excellent culture heritage and important source of ideological and cultural innovation; to comprehensively improve the quality of higher education, we must vigorously promote the culture heritage innovation" was proposed together with the claim that "to comprehensively improve the quality of higher education, we must vigorously improve personnel training level and strengthen scientific research ability; we must vigorously serve economic and social development", thus, the fourth mission of college education "Cultural heritage and innovation" has become the focus of the education cycle and academia. The scholar Zhang Dexiang believes that we can understand the mission of college culture heritage innovation from two aspects of "Building a good university culture" and "colleges making contribution to the prosperity and development of society culture", which he called the dual cultural mission of the college. And as a vocational college, Chongqing Institute of Engineering pays much emphasis on "college culture heritage and innovation", expecting through their own campus culture brand construction, to have a new exploration for the culture heritage and innovation of the college.
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
95
ICSSS 2015
2. The feasibility to incorporate the corporate culture into the construction of vocational college campus culture Chongqing Institute of Engineering profoundly understood that, vocational campus culture integrates more corporate on the basis of general campus culture. Therefore, vocational college campus culture is partially same with the general college campus culture, but it has its own features. The commonalities include that main line with academic culture and moral culture, through system, rules, etiquette, management, arts and sports and teaching, research, campus environment building and other aspects, to form certain values, academic traditions and campus culture, and to demonstrate with the educational philosophy, academic ideas and ways of thinking of leadership. The difference is that vocational campus culture is more prominent about the practice track of staff and students. Such as cultivate students’ personality and character based on "integrity and professionalism", "refinement and innovation" is throughout the entire expertise learning process, focusing on shaping students’ "adaptability and practicality "spirit in terms of practice skills and ability development. These contents absorb the basic concept of corporate and social viewpoint of talent. If the "academic freedom, institutional autonomy, rule by professors” is the ideal pursuit of the scholars and professors, so the talent viewpoint of initially having "enough theoretical knowledge, good practical ability and comprehensive basic quality" is a distinctive feature of vocational education. The spiritual nature of vocational colleges involves through imparting knowledge, training skills, technology innovation; cultivate highly skilled personnel with strong practical ability and innovation spirit as well as sustainable development, to meet the development needs of the local economy and the whole society. Therefore, the educational philosophy of vocational colleges is seeking the combination point in the process of constantly adapting to the needs of enterprise and society. The practice characteristics of higher vocational education require vocational campus culture more prominent with its practice and applicability. Such as "setting up a major, establishing an entity, rejuvenating an industry, creating a brand," "not to find the students suitable for education, but to explore the education suitable for students", "implement different education to student with differences, to realize the development with differences", which are all reflection of the vocational culture. If conducting the research on vocational college as a specific cultural brand, its school-enterprise integration feature allows us to take advantage of sophisticated corporate brand construction theory to find out the special mode suitable for the culture development of higher vocational colleges. Such a special development model has applicability and replicability. Here, we are taking Chongqing Institute of Engineering as an example, using the theoretical foundation of corporate culture construction to explore the road of vocational college brand development. Chongqing Institute of Engineering which is taken as the study case has a rich cultural heritage and a good foundation of cultural studies. The school was founded in October 1951, which was Southwest Industrial Department Coal Mining Professional School founded in Liujia Citang, Beibei to meet the needs of professional mining personnel for national economic construction. In 1954, the school was moved to Shangqiao, Shapingba District of Chongqing City. The school had changed its name to Chongqing Coal Mine School, Chongqing Coal Industry School, Chongqing Engineering and Technology School. In 2001, it was upgraded to Chongqing Institute of Engineering. In 2010, it was built as national model vocational college, entered into first class of vocational colleges among the country. Over six decades, the school cultivated all kinds of high, intermediate technical personnel and management personnel for the country and region, in which 75% of graduates have become technical and managerial cadres above deputy department director level in large-scale coal enterprises in southwestern region and 77% of graduates have become chairmen of the board and general manager, therefore it is praised as the "Whampoa Military Academy" in the coal industry of southwestern region. Moreover, because of the excellent education performance, the school was awarded as “advanced unit of vocational education” by the national energy system and coal system, while also 96
being named Chongqing municipal "advanced unit of vocational education", "unit of civilization" and "garden-style unit." Over sixty years of hard work, the school has gone through sixty years of glorious history, and has already own a profound historical heritage, forming a distinctive feature of school culture. In addition, the school has always attached importance to the historical culture heritage and innovation. During the period of fortieth, fiftieth and sixtieth anniversary, the school organized special personnel and established research group, to conduct summarization, refinement and sublimation for the culture of the school, forming a number of achievements, and through various forms, made it the conscious act of school staff and students. These existing results laid a good foundation of practice for the research of this issue, which have become the foundation for my school to use corporate brand building framework to enrich campus culture innovation and development. 3. The integration of corporate brand construction theory and higher vocational college brand construction Combined with the road of brand construction exploration of my school for decades, we believe that there are several theoretical models for reference for vocational college brand construction. 3.1 Corporate brand construction theory 3.1.1 Brand construction diagrammatic figure Brand construction is strategic planning, brand system building, brand image shaping, marketing integrating and promoting as well as a variety of creative communication which need to be completed by the enterprise for occupation of the market in the process of operation and development, in order to establish internal and external brand recognition and to form the accumulation and appreciation of brand equity. In vocational college culture brand construction, we can learn from this model. Since each vocational college has its own teaching characteristics. Chongqing Institute of Engineering depends on the energy industry, signing entrusted training agreements with Chongqing Energy Group, Sichuan Coal Group and other large and medium-sized coal enterprises and implement order-form training. The mining students admitted to the school can apply to sign entrusted training agreements with mining employers and receive funding from mining employers. Based on the characteristics of order-form training of the training mechanism mode and teaching team-building mechanism, the school can establish a clear schooling orientation, which not only avoids the weakness of general colleges that too many majors and training target unclear and it is just coincided with the "brand positioning" in corporate brand building. Thus, the use of corporate brand construction theory and model to construct vocational college brand strategy is feasible and worthwhile. 3.1.2 Brand planning logic In the application of brand building application logic, vocational colleges can be based on their own schooling characteristics, see institution as a mature business, treating the featured major and advanced major as the brand of the institution. Compare these majors or featured education mode with other institutions, to make "brand diagnosis." Conduct the overall planning according to a mature brand building logic. It is noteworthy is "communication tool", now media development should not be underestimated. New media, such as mobile media, microblogging and other routes of communication are affecting young people in a wide range. Not only the communication effectiveness makes the youth interested, but also gains great attention of the government. Therefore, when we build vocational college brand, we should actively adopt new media channels. 3.2 Campus culture identity system of Chongqing institute of engineering We try to use the Mind Identity System to sort the culture brand construction of our school. Mind Identity System is type of group spirit and behavioral norms which is supported and advocated by 97
corporate management, employees consciously practice and integrated into business idea, which is able to stimulate employees’ enthusiasm and help the enterprise production and management. Here we combine it with the concept of campus brand construction, to develop a new way for campus brand construction. Mind Identity System (MI) is the central part of cultural identity system of school (CIS) which can internally motivate staff and students to be positive and externally show the society the teaching philosophy and value pursuit of the school. This mind identity system needs the school to conduct overall planning and innovation based on the current education development and specific education programs, combined with the school history, major characteristics, geographic distribution, and future goals and other expectational factors. Behavior identity system (BI) is the safeguarding project of school culture identity system (SIS). School’s concept and culture is its underlying philosophy and starting point which internally improves the regulations in teaching and management, to standardize the daily behavior of teachers and students and externally publicizes the school to the community to improve the social reputation of the school, and to exchange and cooperate with related enterprise and public institutions, other universities, as well as vocational colleges. The overall planning and design of school culture identity system should be consistent with mind identity system, to enhance the school's building from a variety of visible behaviors and activities so as to enhance the actual competitiveness and influence of the school. Visual identification system (VI), as the name suggests, is the visual part of the school culture. Its planning and design is to design the different functional needs within the school, mainly including fixed school logo, school badge, standard word, standard color, involving office, teaching, public relations, indications and more than 100 kinds of application elements, through personalized, systematic and visual design to demonstrate the related educational philosophy of the school and school spirit, to create a good visual image of the school. Environmental Culture Planning System (EI) refers to the based engineering section of school culture identity system (SIS). Environmental culture is kind of important recessive education in school education resources, in the form of "moistens everything silently" to play a subtle effect on teachers and students. At the same time, school culture construction should take "six principles", namely, purification, greening, landscaping, regularization, humanization, education" as the guiding principle, conduct construction according to the environmental culture planning system. According to the brand construction theory and the theoretical basis of the Mind Identity System, we are looking forward to make the entitial, spreadable and pomotive concrete results. 4. The strategy research of campus culture construction in higher vocational colleges 4.1 The theory model for culture construction in higher vocational colleges Build several detailed subsystems according to the four parts of Mind Identity System (MI), Behavior Identity System (BI) and Visual Identity System (VI), Environmental Culture Planning System (EI).Concept culture is the core, material culture is the foundation, system culture is the guarantee, and the industry culture is the end-result. 4.2 Basic connotation for building in higher vocational colleges culture Through our intensive research, define the connotation of culture construction in higher vocational colleges, explicit the significance for the culture construction of higher vocational colleges, research its own characteristics and law for culture construction of higher vocational colleges, explore study atmosphere, teaching atmosphere, school spirit as well as the path to the construction of harmonious campus in higher vocational colleges, problems and countermeasures in cultural construction of in higher vocational colleges, etc.
98
4.3 Influence and drive the culture construction in higher vocational colleges Combined with the practice of building new campus of Chongqing Engineering Vocational Technical Institute, through the promotion and application of results, play an exemplary, leading and radiation effect to conduct further exploration for the universe law of cultural inheritance and innovation in higher vocational colleges to. 5. Acknowledgments This article is Major Program for the teaching reform research for institutions of higher school in Chongqing (2012), subject name: Case Study for the Inheritance and Innovation of Higher Vocational Colleges, the project number is 1201024. References [1] Ren Huanru, Liu Xuejing, Guo Hao. Exploration and practice of higher vocational institution campus cultural construction [J]. Journal of Hebei Agricultural University (Agriculture and Forestry Educational Edition), 2010 (04) [2] 2011(01) Fu Xinjie. The positive significance of introducing excellent enterprise culture to build the higher vocational colleges department culture [J]. cultural and educational materials. 2011 (01) [3] 2010(19) Zhang Wei. The way for effective Higher Vocational Campus Culture and Enterprise Culture fusion under the dual mode of position creation [J]. China's high-tech enterprises. 2010 (19) [4] Cai Hui. The characteristics of campus cultural construction in higher vocational [J]. Higher Vocational Education (Journal of Tianjin Vocational University). 2009 (05) [5] Yang Quanliang. The co-operative principle and countermeasures for higher vocational colleges culture construction [J]. Vocational & Technical Education Forum. 2009 (27) [6] Wu Zaisheng, Zhang Hongchong. On the role of integration of vocational colleges corporate culture and campus culture for personnel training [J]. Education and teaching forum. 2013(35)
99
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Management Reference Configuration of a Knowledge System Judyta Kabusa, Katarzyna Szymczykb,*, Stanisław Brzeziński Politechnika Częstochowska, 42-200 Częstochowa, ul. Dąbrowskiego 69, Polska a
[email protected],
[email protected], *Judyta Kabus
Keywords: Reference configuration, Knowledge management, IT technologies
Abstract. The aim of this paper is to present the role of reference configuration in a knowledge management system. Knowledge management is focused on the problem of creating and allocating the resources of intellectual competences with the support of innovative IT technologies. Management of reference configuration should be one of the key elements of an enterprise's operation. Reference configuration is regarded as an instrument for effective implementation of IT systems. From the physical perspective, reference configuration is adaptation of IT software and tools to the process of knowledge management in a particular enterprise, but also, and above all, it is a functional system for knowledge management comprising purposefulness, subjective, structural and functional aspects. 1. Introduction In modern economy, knowledge is the most valuable resource and a source of building competitive advantage. It enables intelligent operation of enterprises. Knowledge is a systematised set of information, which is a universal or specialised factual material used in the processes of functioning and development of an enterprise. Knowledge is a result of learning; it can be obtained during the act of sale and purchase, and also can be the subject of management [7]. Knowledge management focuses on the issue of creating and allocating the resources of intellectual competences and practical skills, i.e. intangible assets of an enterprise. They refer to various fields of science and applications in practice, and are used to achieve significant competitive advantage. In the age of fast development of IT technologies, companies competing on global markets are forced to use IT systems in their planning and control strategies to support these processes. Companies operating on international markets have wide communication networks and sophisticated computer software, which allow them to take optimal business decisions. With comparable technology and similar quality of products, goods and services offered by modern enterprises, integrated IT systems allow a company to adapt itself to new economic conditions, improve its competitive advantage, increase its productivity and quality of manufactured goods, maintaining at the same time the standards of customer service. 2. Knowledge management as a system Knowledge management is a complex system, whose task is to influence the progress in all spheres of the business activity of an entity: technological, production, informational, organisational, human 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
100
ICSSS 2015
resources and economic. Such progress is characterised by positive qualitative changes in the organisational and material culture of an enterprise, and measurable financial effects [6]. A knowledge management system is a managerial activity focused on creating and allocating the resources of professional competences and using practical skills [7]. Activities covered by knowledge management include: - Gathering knowledge; - Providing information and results; - Creating new knowledge; - Using and transferring knowledge; - Integrating individual creative work - Organising team work. A system of knowledge management is a multifaceted complex which is determined by purposefulness, subjective, structural, functional and instrumental aspects (refer with: Tab.1). Tab.1.Characterisation of the aspects of a knowledge management system
Aspect of purposefulness
Subjective aspect
Knowledge management system • programming and planning systems of technical and managerial knowledge; • developing information strategies; • organising informational resources of databases and others; • increasing the capital of knowledge • types of knowledge management institutions; • organisational and legal formalisation of knowledge management institutions; • competences of managerial staff and executives; • classification of knowledge-based work; • motivation system; • communication and development of knowledge management systems
Structural aspect
• • • • • • •
distribution of tasks; distribution of decision-making powers; share of responsibilities; process organisation; relations with suppliers; management of relations with customers; organisation of networks
Functional aspect
• •
principles of knowledge management; scope of knowledge management functions depending on adopted vision, mission, objectives and strategy of an enterprise; management styles; organisational forms of the process of knowledge management (decision systems of management, functional technical systems of the management process, integrated systems)
• • •
101
• • •
Instrumental aspect
• • • • • • •
strategic analysis; benchmarking; cooperation with other companies and institutions; training periods, placements, literature study, taking over knowledge, allotting resources; internal fusions, creation of networks; documents, databases, best practices, knowledge maps, individual and collective memory; communication; internal training courses, team works, discussion lists, knowledge brokers, knowledge fairs; mentor programmes; learning through acting, implementing process and product innovations
Source: own work.
The aspect of purposefulness refers to the scope of business activity of an enterprise and its formalisation based on adopted vision and mission. In terms of knowledge management strategies, the aspect of purposefulness involves statutory activities of a company connected with creation of intellectual capital. Intellectual capital is representation of the development of technical and managerial knowledge systems in an enterprise. These strategies are programmes that orient and integrate various specialisations in the knowledge sector of an enterprise [9]. The subjective aspect refers to managers, advisory teams and organisational units, which are responsible for management of knowledge and development and implementation of systems for technical and managerial knowledge. The structural aspect refers to the location of a knowledge management system in the organisational structure of an enterprise, its configuration and scope of operation. The functional aspect refers to the functioning of a system of knowledge management and is part of the convention of the process approach, especially in terms of organisational forms of the management process. This aspect highlights the relation of knowledge management systems to all other processes covered by an enterprise's statutory activities. In other words, knowledge management processes support basic and auxiliary processes in informational terms and in the context of learning [1]. The instrumental aspect refers to a set of research and application tools used in diagnostic works, in a decision analysis, and in designing and implementing knowledge management systems. Knowledge management is closely connected with planning the development of an enterprise. This development is achieved both through organisational, technical, production- and staff-related changes. Due to the complexity of the activities in the area of knowledge management, it is necessary to use instruments that support this process [4]. 3. The importance of reference configuration in a knowledge management system Modern enterprises which want to achieve success and advantage over competition should base their strategies for an enterprise management on knowledge, i.e. intellectual capital. Improving employees' knowledge and qualifications makes activities more flexible, has a positive effect on building the quality and value of a company and allows it to optimally adapt to the requirements of the market. Knowledge and information are the most important resources of every business activity. Ability to appropriately use possessed knowledge enables an enterprise innovative and fast adaptations, reduction of the level of uncertainty during risky projects and achievement of market success [5]. 102
Reference configuration uses technical and administrative instructions and supervision to identify and document physical characteristics of the items of configuration, control changes of these characteristics, register and report the course of changes and the status of implementation and to verify the compliance with specific requirements. The use of the Service Manager programme may be an important step in processes of managing reference configuration in enterprises whose activity is based on knowledge. Thanks to this programme, it is easier to understand and handle the process of configuration management, which is an important process for managing the processes of workflow. The only problem encountered by an entrepreneur can be training employees in this area, which, besides purchasing a license for a programme, will certainly be huge investment. The HP Service Manager Knowledge Management module provides employees and users with the possibility of using information gathered in a company. Knowledge may come from any data source of the Service Manager software, e.g. interactions connected with requests, incidents or errors. Any projects connected with descriptions of business processes force large organisations to use IT tools that support the development of processes and organisations. One of such tools is the software ARIS (Architecture of Integrated Information Systems). ARIS is regarded as the basis for reference configuration in a knowledge management system, but not only. It is a system on which most projects carried out in a given enterprise are based. It was developed by IDS Scheer to enable configuration of all processes that take place in a company, in particular their restructuring and analysis. As an Architecture for Integrated IT Systems, it presents a frame concept of process management, starting from the organisation and construction of models, through controlling and planning the existing models, to their technical implementation. It is an IT tool designed to plan, restructure and improve various types of organisations. The family of ARIS tools comprises: ARIS Easy Design, ARIS Toolset and additional modules. ARIS Easy Design is a simple tool designed for employees of company divisions. It has got a simple graphical language. This programme does not require a specialised knowledge and can be used after a few hours of training. It enables full modelling of the current and future functioning of a company using an organisational structure, hierarchy of functions, models of processes, diagrams of control flows and many other techniques. Definitions of models in form of drawings and descriptions of their elements - units, functions, data and event flows - are stored in a database [8]. ARIS Toolset is a more difficult programme, but it offers more capabilities. This system is designed for process analysts and deployment consultants, who either process models created by means of ARIS Easy Design, or create their own descriptions of a company. Apart from modelling, viewing models and reporting, the standard version of this programme enables: verification, analysis and animation of models, configuration of modelling standards, consolidation of databases, definition of the content and format of reports, and documentation of ISO 9000 procedures. ARIS tools also include additional modules that support analyses and business costing (ABC). The implementation of the ARIS system enables simulation of a new organisation of work and publication of plans of action on the Internet. Some companies create a central system for documentation inspection using advantages of the ARIS tool. The central system allows all employees of a company to view documents and information. Employees can also submit their proposals for changes to the system and the functioning of the whole organisation. The central system for ARIS management is also an ideal tool for them to understand the strategy and mission of their enterprise. In ARIS models, it is possible to create OLE Object Linking and Embedding type of links to various objects placed in an IT system, e.g. Word documents, Excel spreadsheets, PowerPoint presentations etc.( refer with:Photo 1.).
103
Photo 1. An example of a central improvement system using ARIS IT tools
Source: http://www.cire.pl/publikacje/ARISdostepinf.pdf (access date: 10.03.2015)
Thanks to ARIS software, access to information is simple, but at the same time fully controlled. A database is secure, because a person with administrator privileges is responsible for managing the database [2]. The tasks of the administrator include registration, de-registration, archiving, reorganisation and restoring of databases. The Central Improvement System ensures storage of all information at one place, in a coherent object-oriented database, meeting the requirements of reduction of data redundancy [3]. This allows employees at different levels to communicate effectively, and as a result the effectiveness of the system grows, leading to its continuous improvement. It also allows the knowledge about the company to remain at one place, making it possible to use it repeatedly irrespective of staff fluctuations. Thanks to that, new employees may easily learn about processes in the organisation. The system allows for understanding fulfilled functions in the context of the whole process of value creation. Supply Chain Operations Reference Model, SCOR, is another system of IT tools developed to optimise the flow of goods, services and information. This configuration depends on: - Deliveries and arrangement of goods; - Structure of production enterprises and used technology; - Location of goods; - Information and degree of its aggregation [10]. "The SCOR reference model combines three concepts of management: business process reengineering BPR, benchmarking and the method of best practices. The SCOR model contains: - Standard descriptions of management processes; - Structures of dependencies (relationships) between these processes; - Standard measures of process results; - Management practices with best results within an industry; - Standard functionality configurations" [10]. A knowledge management system is supported by innovative IT tools, which make it easier to dynamically view the courses of processes. By using appropriate algorithms, they also control information and knowledge in an enterprise. Moreover, they make it easier to quickly change the structure and adapt actions to specific needs, extensively analyse processes that are of fundamental importance for cases in a company, use computer applications for defining optimal plans of action, plan supply and production, and integrate processes through optimal use of knowledge management strategies.
104
4. Summary The use of reference configuration in a system of knowledge management enables integration of all processes taking place in a company thanks to the possibility of instant access to appropriate information. Information processed in an appropriate knowledge resource supports the decision-making process. Reference configuration, by linking knowledge management with IT technology, makes it possible to create diagrams of processes, to redesign and analyse processes and simulate their courses. Reference configuration enables implementation and adaptation of prototype activity and its configuration based on the existing situation of an enterprise. It implements prototype actions into practical activity, and enables integration with other data sources and tools. Such applications enable improvement of the quality of forecasts and integration of processes, which leads to flexible adaptation to customer behaviour and market dynamics. References [1] Baruk J., Zarządzanie wiedzą i innowacjami, Adam Marszałek, Warszawa 2006, pp. 120-135. [2] Gabryelczyk R., ARIS w modelowaniu procesów biznesu. , Difin, Warszawa 2006. [3] http://www.cire.pl/publikacje/ARISdostepinf.pdf [ 10.03.2015] [4] Kasprzak T., Modele referencyjne w zarządzaniu procesami biznesu, [w:] Kasprzak T. (red.) Studia informatyki gospodarczej, Difin, Warszawa 2005. [5] Kordel P., Kornecki J., Kowalczyk, Krawczyk K., Pylak K., Wiktorowicz J., Inteligentne organizacje – zarządzanie wiedzą i kompetencjami pracowników, PARP, Warszawa 2010. [6] Kowalczyk A., Nogalski B., Zarządzanie wiedzą. Koncepcja i narzędzia, Difin, Warszawa 2007, pp. 105-110. [7] Stabryła A., Koncepcja zarządzania wiedzą www.zn.mwse.edu.pl/ebooki/26/169-178, [13.03.2015]
i
rozwojem
przedsiębiorstwa,
[8] Śląski P., Burchart-Korol D., Wykorzystanie modelowania referencyjnego w zarządzaniu procesami logistycznymi, [w:] Biuletyn Wat VOL. LIX, NR 1, 2010, http://yadda.icm.edu.pl/yadda/element/bwmeta.pl [13.03.2015] [9] Trajer J., Paszek A., Iwan S., Zarzadzanie wiedzą, Difin, Warszawa 2013, pp. 222-228. [10] Trocki M., Zarządzanie Projektami. , Polskie Wydawnictwo Ekonomiczne, Warszawa 2003.
105
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
It Authorisation of the Process of Knowledge Management Judyta Kabusa, Katarzyna Szymczykb,*, Robert Sałekc Politechnika Częstochowska, 42-200 Częstochowa, ul. Dąbrowskiego 69, Polska a
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected] *Judyta Kabus
Keywords: IT systems, Knowledge management, Security, Authorisation, IT Abstract. An important element of a knowledge management strategy is an IT system, which fulfils the function of supporting knowledge management in an organisation. This paper focuses on discussing the authorisation of IT technologies in the context of knowledge management. IT technologies are always ahead of the reality surrounding us. Nowadays, they are equipped with intelligent modules and drivers, that make them flexible and resistant to both external changes and internal conditions of functioning, e.g. an of enterprise. Effective use of modern IT systems involves using them as tools supporting the concepts and methods of knowledge management, which influence improvement of employees’ competences. A challenge faced by every company is to enable its employees to build and constantly improve the quality of the capital of gathered knowledge. Special attention has been given to ITIL service. It is focused on an employee, customer and use of information in the whole process of an enterprise management.
1. Introduction Modern enterprises have to face requirements of the global economy and the age of the information civilisation[4], which is characterised by a range of dynamic and unpredictable changes. Due to the turbulent market situation, companies constantly encounter new challenges. They have to be prepared for transformations both in terms of management methods and IT systems they use. The internationalisation of the global economy and the information revolution brought another stage of development, in which the structures of local and cross-border companies have to find their place. Today, knowledge is a very important "production factor." It determines appropriate formulation and implementation of adopted strategies in business. Every employee needs knowledge and appropriate competences to perform the tasks assigned to him, whether in trade, production, marketing, research or sale. Knowledge is perceived as a strategic resource of an enterprise/organisation, so it has to be properly acquired, gathered, processed and made available at the right time and in the right form ( refer with: Fig.1) [5].
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
106
ICSSS 2015
people wisdom knowledge IT processed facts-information Fig.1.Knowledge pyramid data – rough facts
Source: Brdulak, J., Zarządzanie wiedzą – co to jest i po co to jest? Materiały dydaktyczne do przedmiotu Zarządzanie Wiedzą, Szkoła Główna Handlowa w Warszawie.
Data is unordered information, whereas information is analysed data, which has been acquired for a specific enterprise, saved and is generally available. Knowledge, in turn, is valuable information that integrates data, facts or hypotheses. Properly processed data, put in a context, becomes information of an organisation. Gathered information is not knowledge. Information has to become processed through adaptation to the current situation of the market and the condition of a company only then it becomes knowledge. Knowledge is a priority, inexhaustible resource of an organisation[11]. It can be used in many places at the same time and by many users. Its possession does not ensure domination to a given organisation, but large resources of knowledge undoubtedly constitute a strategic source of competitive advantage. Entering the age of the so-called "new economy" means development of enterprise management strategies that are based on knowledge, intellectual capital, creativity, new organisational activities and on progress in telecommunications and computerisation. Currently, the most important resources for every activity in the sphere of economy and society are knowledge and information. It is necessary for an enterprise to constantly improve and increase knowledge of its employees in order to make its operations more flexible, optimise the process of management in order to build the quality and value of the company and make it better adapted to market requirements. For an enterprise, ability to appropriately use possessed knowledge enables innovative and fast adaptations, decreased uncertainty during risky projects and achievement of market success [3]. Successful knowledge management is based on adjustment of an appropriate IT technology, which facilitates management of an employee- and customer-focused IT infrastructure and use of information in the whole process of an enterprise management. Knowledge management is a holistic process whose strategy is based on three dimensions: people, technology and organisation 1. 2. It systems and knowledge management One of the most important aspects of enterprises is optimal use of knowledge. It can be achieved by methods for knowledge and innovation management, which have quickly developed as a result of constant modernisation of technologies and emergence of IT systems. Moreover, thanks to global communication networks, enterprises can conduct business activity on the global market[7]. Enterprises that have a knowledge-based model of a company management are able to adapt themselves to changes occurring in politics, economics and society. However, this would not be possible without integrating IT systems. By using well-designed IT technologies, companies may optimally use knowledge resources and implement them as practical operational goals. 1
Depending on the specificity of an enterprise, the human, technological and organisational dimensions vary. 107
Nowadays, enterprises are flooded by a huge amount of data that comes to them both from the internal and external environments. Lack of informational transparency leads to ineffectiveness of undertaken activities. A good management of information leads to better and more productive ideas for using knowledge for the benefit of an enterprise in the context of business processes. Companies that have an IT system adapted to their needs effectively cope with the huge amount of various information that reaches them. IT systems analyse information, select it and integrate with the goals and tasks established by the company management. They also make it easier to implement optimisation elements and gather important data and information [6]. In academic literature, an information system is defined as a systematised and ordered network of information links between such elements as: human being, data, methods and devices for data gathering, forwarding and processing, aimed at meeting information needs in an enterprise. The basic function of an information system is to quickly provide information, which, in turn, enables right decisions to be made. Computerisation is the extent to which information systems are saturated with computer equipment and software [7]. An IT system is thus a set of interdependent components whose task is to process gathered data by means of computer techniques. Such a system, apart from devices and software designed to store, process and transfer data, may also comprise procedures for supporting this system and employees responsible for such support (refer with: Table 1). Tab.1.Components of an IT system Elements of an IT system
Software Data bases Communication technologies
People
Organisation Information
Characterisation Enables collection, processing and sending data and information. A set of programmes and instructions written in a special computer language A set of data from a specific field, organised in an accessible form. They include equipment and software enabling two or more computers to cooperate or one computer to work with endpoint computers. The most important element of the whole IT system. They manage, design, write programmes, use and maintain the system. Whether the system will work depends on their knowledge. Effective combining of the different elements into a whole. Data that is subject to analysis.
Source: S. Łobejko (2005). Systemy informacyjne …, op. cit., p. 25.
It should be stressed that IT systems cannot manage knowledge by themselves. Their function is to support the process of management in an organisation, and they facilitate the fulfilment of some functions from this area. It systems help share information and knowledge between businesses [8]. Technology is an important element of a knowledge management strategy, but not the only factor in the development of this system. IT systems mainly enable the knowledge resources gathered in a given enterprise to be organised, which helps in planning and monitoring business strategies [1]. IT systems in enterprises can be used as [10]: − Catalogues of experts which enable contact with people, and contain information about employees of a given company; − Knowledge repositories, i.e. bases for gathering information, documents, etc.; − Tools designed to support cooperation, making it easier for knowledge to be exchanged between employees, including also e-mail, chat, instant messengers, etc. The use of modern IT solutions is intended to eliminate the lack of knowledge exchange between the divisions of a company, lack of mechanisms for knowledge acquisition, data discrepancy, lack of
108
transparency of "external and internal" information and artificiality in processing acquired information. Currently, IT technologies that are most often used in corporations include: − The Internet, on which IT infrastructure relies; − Business Management Software Process, which is a technical means for modelling the results of business management and dynamics of operating efficiency. Leading producers on the BPMS market have for many years been: Pegasystems, IBM, Oracle, Software AG; − Document Management System (DMS) – formal and informal documents that arrive at a company, such as: e-mails, customer inquiries, reports, etc. are also an important source of knowledge. DMS issues, processes and sorts this source of knowledge. Modern DMSs are very effective; − Data Warehouses (DW), in practice they are databases that integrate data from all the other database systems in an enterprise. This integration consists in cyclically feeding systems' data to warehouses − E- Mail, one of the most important and most often used technologies in an enterprise; − Web-Service, which is a multiple use element of software based on Internet services, it enables creation of knowledge portals; − ITIL (Information Technology Infrastructure Library), widely recognised worldwide and a widely accepted set of best practices for IT Service Management. It is used by IT market leaders, internal IT departments in leading enterprises and public administration, as a result of which it is perceived as a global standard firm managing IT services, defining a complete and coherent model of an IT organisation which is organised based on processes and focused on customer and his needs [13]. ITIL® contains guidelines and recommendations, numerous examples and document templates, but these are not normative requirements. An IT system shows that IT services are managed using best practices based on gathered knowledge resources. By using ITIL® in an organisation, one can prove maturity and competences. ITIL services fulfil new business requirements, introduce alterations to currently provided services, actively searching for the possibility of improving the quality of services and reducing costs of their provision [13]. 3. It security Transfer of experience in an organisation is absolutely necessary. The process of information distribution is an important element combining knowledge and organisation of a company. Productive use of knowledge for the benefit of an enterprise is the goal of knowledge management in the context of business operations. IT systems should make it easier to select the existing information and experiences of an organisation, so that an employee could receive data that is important for his work sector . Knowledge is a company's treasure and key to market success. Therefore knowledge resources should be appropriately protected. IT systems have to be equipped with mechanisms that protect them from being hacked, i.e. so-called authorisation mechanisms. In the case of IT systems for personal data processing that are used by more than one user, it is required that the user goes through authentication before starting working with the system, i.e. enters data based on which the IT system will verify his identity. Personal data processing IT systems have to have mechanisms for data access control, and operations performed by the user should be subject to authorisation, i.e. the system should check whether the user is entitled to perform certain actions. In 2004, Regulation of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Administration was introduced in Poland regarding the documentation of personal data processing as well as technical and organisational conditions that should be met by IT devices and systems designed for personal data processing. The Regulation specifies [9]: 109
− "The scope of the documentation describing the manner of personal data processing and how it should be kept as well as technical and organisational measures to ensure protection to processed personal data adequate to the threats and categories of protected data; − Basic technical and organisational conditions that should be met by devices and IT systems designed for personal data processing; − Requirements regarding recording the fact of making personal data available and security of personal data processing". In practice, the scope of data access control will depend on the system functionality and the number of possible roles of users. In some systems, every user will have the same rights, and data access control will consist in checking whether the user is logged into. In other systems, differentiation of privileges may be huge, and then the authorisation of operations plays a significant role. It is important that the user's privileges in an IT system correspond with the scope of the authorisation to process the personal data. By no means such privileges can go beyond the scope of the authorisation. Control of access to servers or other applications constitutes an important element of the security system in an enterprise. The classical method based on user login and password is an imperfect security measure. A password imposed by the administrator is often difficult to remember. On the other hand, in most situations when an employee is allowed to create a password, it is too simple and easy to crack. More and more important corporate data is stored only in IT systems. These systems are connected by network, which increases the threat of a hacker attack, therefore ensuring security to IT systems has become one of the most important IT tasks, both for large corporations and small companies. The implementation of appropriate security systems and training users is not enough to guarantee full security of knowledge resources. Constant modernisation of systems for authorising knowledge management processes and everyday work of specialists analysing the behaviour of users, network traffic and attempts of hacker attacks minimise threats connected with the loss or disclosure of confidential corporate data. The most important element of securing access to a database is to secure access to the network, servers and applications used in a given enterprise. Increased protection of access is achieved by implementing an appropriate network architecture, installing and configuring intrusion detection systems, implementing systems for network analysis and testing, and a security policy in the area of performing backup and archiving. It is also necessary to update software. There are innovative security measures for IT systems that increase security and effectiveness of managing a logical access of employees to applications functioning in an enterprise. One of them is Biometria Finger Vein. These are Single Sing-On systems which enable one-time logging into a web service and gaining access to all authorised resources that correspond with this service. "SSO systems are based on the existing computer architecture and do not require changes or significant investments in IT systems, except for smart card readers, biometric readers or tokens, which are used as login tools. Moreover, SSO software can be quickly implemented, without any impact on users' work. The structure of SSO systems is modular and user-friendly, and it may be adapted to all types of customer needs"[12]. The use of Finger Vein biometric technology is one of the solutions that prevent both accidental and intentional disclosure of confidential information. It should be noted that absolute security doesn't exist. We can never predict all potential threats in advance, especially that security measures often have to be developed earlier. Fast development of IT technologies entails the emergence of new threats. Response time to such threats is never zero, therefore even in the case of the best developed security system, there is a risk that the existing security mechanisms will be ineffective for a certain period of time. Another important reason for the impossibility to achieve 100% security is human weakness, in particular fallibility of designers, developers, IT systems' users, which results in system and application software errors and in its misuse or careless use. Each company that uses various IT solutions to support knowledge management processes is obliged to use mechanisms ensuring protection of its data so that critical components of an 110
enterprise's strategy, confidential data or company's reputation are not affected by a hacker attack on a system or theft. The implementation of security systems often takes place at the expense of convenience, but users of the system want effectiveness and guarantee of security in the first place.
4. Summary Adaptation of an enterprise to the dynamically changing situation on the market and knowledge-based economy is becoming easier thanks to a strong focus on IT technologies. Innovative IT systems guarantee fast access to data and possibility of using it as knowledge, which constitutes the fundamental factor of competitiveness and achievement of much better economic results. Knowledge resources represent the wealth of each enterprise, combination of experience, value, information and an expert's insight into an issue. Knowledge means full use of information and data combined with the potential of human capabilities, possibilities, ideas, commitment and motivation. Enterprises whose activity is based on knowledge management processes most often use: electronic transmission of documents, data bases and warehouses, as well as the Internet. They value the role of IT technologies in supporting knowledge management processes. However, they have to update the software they use to prevent theft of information collections. It is necessary for them to control access to servers or other applications through authorisation or authentication of personal data, which is an important element of a security system in an enterprise. References [1] Abecker, A., Hinkelmann K.; Maus, H., Müller, H. J., Geschäftsprozess-orientiertes Wissensmangement, Springer Verlag, Berlin, p. 39, 2002. [2] Brdulak, J. Zarządzanie wiedzą – co to jest i po co to jest?, materiały dydaktyczne do przedmiotu Zarządzanie Wiedzą, Szkoła Główna Handlowa w Warszawie, http://www.uml.com.pl/ modules/articles/article.php?id=17 [access date: 13.03.2015] [3] Kordel, P., Kornecki, J., Kowalczyk, Krawczyk, K., Pylak, K., Wiktorowicz J.,Inteligentne organizacje – zarządzanie wiedzą i kompetencjami pracowników, PARP, p. 7, Warszawa, 2010. [4] Kromer, B., Wiedza jako podstawowy czynnik funkcjonowania organizacji inteligentnej, [in:] Zeszyty Naukowe Instytutu Ekonomii i Zarządzania, nr 2, Wydawnictwo Politechniki Koszalińskiej, p. 98, Koszalin, 2008. [5] Kubiak, B., System zarządzania wiedzą we współczesnej organizacji, [in:] Kubiak, B., Human computer-interaction, pp.93, Akwila, Gdańsk 2010. [6] Lis, T., Tomski, P., Bajdor, P., The Optimization of Information Logistics as the Determinant of Competitive Advantage of an Enterprise in Turbulent Environment, [in:] Logistyka nr 5 2013, pp.55-57, Poznań 2013. [7] Łobejko, S., Systemy informacyjne w zarządzaniu wiedzą i innowacją w przedsiębiorstwie, SGH,pp. 8- 10, 24, Warszawa 2005. [8] Mesjasz-Lech, A, The use of IT systems supporting the realization of business processes in enterprises and supply chains in Poland, [in:] Polish Journal of Management Studies, Vol. 10.2. [9] Rozporządzenie Ministra Spraw Wewnętrznych i Administracji w sprawie dokumentacji przetwarzania danych osobowych oraz warunków technicznych i organizacyjnych, www.isap.sejm.gov.pl [access date: 23.03.2015] [10] Rydz, A., Systemy informatyczne wspomagające zarządzanie wiedzą, [in:] Jemielniak, D., Koźmiński, A.K. (ed.). Zarządzanie wiedzą. Wydawnictwa Akademickie i Profesjonalne, p. 111
334-335, Warszawa 2007. [11] Starostka-Patyk, M., IT i ECR w logistyce jako element przewagi konkurencyjnej: zintegrowany system monitorowania transportu, [in:] J. Grabara, Informatyczne wspomaganie procesów logistycznych, WNT, p. 107, Warszawa 2008. [12] www.hitachi.pl/veinid/IT_systems_security.html, [access date: 23.03.2015] [13] Zarządzanie usługami ITIL®, www.eprints.usq.edu.au, [access date: 23.03.2015]
112
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Parametrization in the Aspect of Managing Information about Scientific Output of University Staff Dagmara Bubela, Anna Brzozowskab,*, Katarzyna Szymczykc Politechnika Częstochowska, 42-200 Częstochowa, ul. Dąbrowskiego 69, Polska a
[email protected],
[email protected], *Anna Brzozowska
Keywords: Parameterization, Information management, Scientific output
Abstract. Education process, understood not only as acquisition of knowledge, but also as a process of learning how to live in a society, a process of gaining interpersonal skills, acquiring capabilities to use gathered knowledge and a way of self-realisation, is undoubtedly a qualitative process. Nowadays, broadly understood parametrization is implemented in various areas of social life, including in the process of education. Various types of indicators, intended to measure the level or effect of education, are designed to describe qualitative effects in a quantitative way [8]. Parameterization of education is understood as the development of indicators and measures which quantitatively describe the process and effects of education and constitute the basis for establishing standards by creating a plane for comparing institutions that provide education [13]. It is a system that not only shows the actual state of education, knowledge, capabilities and competences, but also becomes a factor influencing the process of education. It is intended to contribute to the achievement of the objectives of education and impact the improvement of its quality. In this context, this paper examines the management of information about scientific output of university staff. 1. Introduction Effective management of information about scientific output of university staff requires the use of interoperable standards that contribute to universality in data exchange. The key solution that enables the widest possible dissemination of scientific works is the use of OAI-PMH (Open Access Initiative Protocol for Metadata Harvesting) and Handle System identifiers. OAI-PMH is a mechanism that allows various search engines to aggregate metadata [14]. A standard practice that prevents objects from being invisible in the Internet is the use of digital identification of a resource by means of Handle System identifiers, which are permanently assigned to individual objects. In the process of approving a paper, each object is provided with a permanent identifier. An example of such identifiers is URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) and DOI (Digital Object Identifier), with DOI being typical of commercial publishers [5]. In order to increase the visibility of scientific output of university staff, it is necessary to register a digital archive in many catalogues and registries. The most important ones include [10]: • Registry of Open Access Repositories - ROAR - apart from the register of repositories, this platform keeps record of institutions that introduced obligatory depositing of works. • The Directory of Open Access Repositories – OpenDOAR - in this catalogue, repositories of all kinds are registered. This is a valuable source of statistical data. • The DRIVER platform (Digital Repository Infrastructure Vision for European Research) currently aggregates around 4.0 million objects from European repositories. 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
113
ICSSS 2015
• DART – Europe E-theses Portal, which gathers full texts of European doctoral theses archived in repositories. Nowadays, we observe a change in the way scientific works are published. This is connected with the changing paradigm of communication in science. New indicators for measuring the impact factor of scientific works, the so-called altmetrics, appear. This term refers to both the creation and examination of new indicators designed to analyse academic activity based on Web 2.0. The indicators can be regarded as alternative or complementary to the existing bibliometric indicators (number of citations, Hirsch index, JCR) [7]. Nowadays, repositories provide statistics showing the number of downloads or website visits, and sometimes they show the number of citations of works. Repositories that use altmetric tools, in turn, display reports on indicators connected with social networks and social bookmarking. These indicators provide information about a single object in the context of its functioning in social networks (Facebook, Twitter, Google+) or bookmarking (Mendeley, CiteUlike). Repositories across the world establish contact with companies that provide altmetric tools to large publishers (commercial solutions), but also support implementation of such tools in repositories. Each work, which has its unique, digital identifier, is integrated with a tool that presents users' activity in social networks in regard to a specific work, the number of links to a paper on blogs or the number of tweets [9]. However, the optimisation of research papers requires the implementation of a better indexation and ranking of works in search engines. There are several elements that can significantly improve the position of a research paper in the results of search engines [1]: • The use of appropriate key words • The use of appropriate metadata • The title of a paper should include the most important key word, but it also should contain other key words • The abstract should also contain selected key words, but repetitions should be avoided, because if their number is too high a search engine may consider it spam and not index it properly. • Type of graphics • Correctly written first names and surnames in a bibliography. An important issue is also the problem of the number of citations of specific works relative to the time that passed since their publication. Studies [6] show that although papers are cited much more often than books within a short time since their publication, the number of references to their content is quickly falling, whereas the frequency of citing books seems to stabilise with time. This makes us think about the quality of such quickly forgotten papers, whether the fact that they are often cited shortly after their publication is not the effect of following trends that do not stand the test of time. The discussion above should be complemented by issues that question the objectivity of publishing processes, but also indicate numerous problems referring to modern practices connected with scientific publications. It is important to highlight the conflict between the quantity and quality, which is particularly visible in a rationalised system of parametric evaluation. All manuscripts must be in English. Please keep a second copy of your manuscript in your office (just in case anything gets lost in the mail). When receiving the manuscript, we assume that the corresponding authors grant us the copyright to use the manuscript for the book or journal in question. Should authors use tables or figures from other Publications, they must ask the corresponding publishers to grant them the right to publish this material in their paper. Use italic for emphasizing a word or phrase. Do not use boldface typing or capital letters except for section headings (cf. remarks on section headings, below). Use a laser printer, not a matrix dot printer.
114
2. Effects of the dissemination of scientific output A dynamically increasing number of papers published in databases significantly contributes to a more intense dissemination of scientific output of academic centres around the world. Its importance varies across scholars representing different fields of knowledge. While representatives of mathematical and natural sciences publishing their works in the English language in highly rated magazines may see their papers present in databases, visible and cited, representatives of social sciences and humanities are not in such a good situation. Therefore their priority should be to include their works in university repositories. Scholars that deposit at least part of their output in a university repository can count on their works reaching a wide group of readers and on an increase in the readership of such works, measured, among other things, by means of statistics of use, as well as at least a potential increase in the citation rate of their output. Repositories are becoming a global database. This database is indexed by search engines. Most searches start from Google search engine, but there are also a range of search engines that are dedicated to open resources. These platforms include, among other things: BASE17, OAIster®18 and DRIVER. An interesting solution for scholars are undoubtedly services that allow citations of objects deposited in repositories to be monitored. There are tools across the world which analyse citations based on open resources. However, these services do not include digital objects of all repositories and may be used only as auxiliary tools. The Citec database, which is based only on the data aggregated from RePEc repository, presents citations from the area of economics, whereas the CiteSeer database, allows citations from the area of information science, mathematics and statistics to be monitored [2]. An important tool for academic staff who actively participate in building open, digital resources of a university is Google Scholar search engine, which aggregates scientific papers. Nowadays, it is a basic tool that provides free of charge scientific literature. Apart from the indexation function, it has an additional mode - Google Scholar Citation (GSC), which allows users to set up their own profiles, implement bibliographic data and monitor citations of their works. Materials deposited in repositories are automatically "sucked" by GSC creating a profile of a scholar. The more the works placed in repositories, the higher the number of citations indexed in GSC [12]. For scholars, quantified bibliometric indicators are the basis for evaluation, as they provide various types of data, such as: number of document downloads, frequency of downloads, and demographic data, which enables monitoring of the propagation of a digital document across the world. 3. Parametric evaluation of a university in terms of the scientific output of its staff Management of information about scientific output of employees of higher education institutions bring benefits to the whole university. A university that wants to quantify the visibility of digital objects deposited in its repository should rely on statistics of use. Repositories have various statistical modules. These may be statistics embedded into software, e.g. DSpace. Repositories based on DSpace software may also be supported by a statistics module developed at University in Minho in Portugal. These statistics enable generation of reports and rankings regarding works and authors who deposited their documents in an archive. A wide range of various types of statistics is provided by Google Analytics (GA). Analysis of statistical data generated on the basis of GA provides a lot of valuable information about users of this platform. Following statistics from GA makes it possible to gain information about the profiles of the users of a repository. The platform provides data about localisation of recipients, languages of searched works and sources of visits [4]. Undoubtedly, dissemination of documents through a repository also leads to a higher parametric assessment of a university. The more visible the output of academic staff and the higher number of citations of their works, the better the assessment. However, it’s not only about dissemination of individual works of scholars. It becomes more and more important to turn a university repository into a publishing platform or quasi-platform presenting the content of scientific magazines published at a 115
university. This is crucial because magazines that do not have Impact Factor are evaluated at the first stage according to the following criteria: (...) "a scientific magazine has an active and updated website that contains at least the following information about it: title, ISSN number, list of the scientific council members, information for the authors, information on the procedures applied for the magazine and information on the editors of the magazine [3]". The above shows that it is in the interest of a university to publish scientific magazines online, and repositories may be very helpful in that. Cybermetrics Lab, which operates as part of Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas in Spain, creates two important rankings: Web of Universities and Web of Repositories rankings [11]. Academic libraries have long been trying to participate in the process of a university parameterization, arguing that they are well-prepared for this role. Since they create and develop bibliographic databases, they must have bibliography specialists. For many years, universities have tasked libraries with analysing citations of scientific publications, so libraries have specialists prepared to use citation databases, which are the basis for periodical assessment. Available data also shows different degrees of libraries' involvement in the processes of documenting scientific output and parameterization. This results not only from legal regulations, but also from the degree of motivation to act on both parties: library and university. Studies have shown that various solutions are used to document scientific output and use it in the process of parameterization of a university, ranging from libraries that operate in an exemplary manner, through libraries that try to participate in this process, to ones that have been completely excluded from it. The solutions presented indicate the most important elements that can ensure the achievement of full satisfaction in cooperation between a library and university in terms of parameterization. They include: 1. Rector's order concerning the obligation to submit scientific publications to the library. 2. Necessity to introduce tools to enforce the above mentioned obligation. 4. Support from IT specialists - adapting the database to the requirements of a university and updating the system. 5. Linking university systems for people records with bibliographic databases. 6. Positive attitude of university authorities towards the actions undertaken by a university. 4. Summary It becomes very important to manage information and actively participate in disseminating scientific output of university staff. Until recently, a scholar had influence on where his/her works are published, but it was publishing market giants that decided about their distribution. Nowadays, the situation is changing very dynamically. Scholar have a range of possibilities, that allow them not only to publish their works, but also share them with other users around the world. They only have to take advantage of new possibilities. These opportunities undoubtedly include repositories as stable tools based on developed standards. Parameterization perceived in the aspect of managing information about scientific output of university staff may in the near future contribute to the establishment of a policy that will require obligatory submission of works in repositories. However, until such a policy is specified, the priority is to support scholars on their way to open science through creating bibliographic databases documenting their output. Such databases are used not only as a source of information about publications and unpublished works, but also for the purposes of broadly understood reporting, statistics and analyses. References [1] Ale Ebrahim, Nader. "Optimize Your Article for Search Engine." University of Malaya Research
Bulletin 2.1 (2014): 38-39. [2] Ball, David. "Librarians as midwives of change in scholarly communication." (2011): 259-272. 116
[3] Blummer, B. A., The Availability of Faculty Publication Databases from Library Web Pages,
Journal of Web Librarianship 1.2, pp. 27-55, 2007. [4] Chang S-H., Institutional repositories: the library's new role, OCLC Systems & Services:
International digital library perspectives 19.3, pp. 77-79, 2009. [5] Dudczak A., et al. dLibra–platforma do budowy repozytoriów cyfrowych Poznan: Wydawnictwo
Politechniki Poznanskiej, pp. 458-467, 2007. [6] Ezema I. J., Building open access institutional repositories for global visibility of Nigerian
scholarly publication, Library Review 60.6, pp. 473-485, 2011. [7] Gmiterek G., Biblioteka 2.0 w 2014 r.–analiza zjawiska, e-mentor 2 (54, pp. 24-33, 2014. [8] Komperda, A., Rola bibliotek akademickich w zakresie tworzenia i rozpowszechniania
informacji o dorobku naukowym uczelni, pp. 355-367, 2006. [9] Kulczycki E., Repozytorium jest ważne dla naukowców i uczelni, AMUR jako wzór. Warsztat
badacz,http://ekulczycki.pl/warsztat_badacza/repozytorium-jest-wazne-dla-naukowcow-i-uczel ¬ni-amur-jako-wzor, 2012. [10] Maczuga J., Przyłuska J., Jak zwiększyć widoczność swojej publikacji naukowej w internecie?,
Medycyna Pracy 63.4, pp.391-393, 2012. [11] Mosweunyane G., Carr L. A., Direct desktop-repository deposits with SWORD, IST-Africa
Conference Proceedings, 2014. IEEE, 2014. [12] Nowak P., Piśmiennictwo z zakresu nauk społecznych i humanistycznych przedmiotem oceny i
analiz metodami bibliometrycznymi. Możliwości i ograniczenia, Roczniki Naukowe. Seria A. Miscellanea. Państwowa Wyższa Szkoła Zawodowa w Lesznie 02, pp. 5-18, 2014. [13] Stefaniak B., Naukometria i możliwości wykorzystania wyników badan piśmiennictwa
naukowego w kreowaniu polityki naukowej, Nauka i Szkolnictwo Wyższe 3 pp. 48-82, 1994. [14] Werla M., Biblioteka cyfrowa jako repozytorium OAI-PMH [on-line] Libra, Poznańskie
Centrum Superkomputerowo-Sieciowe, http://dlibra. pl/community/display/KB/Biblioteka+ cyfrowa+ jako+ repozytorium+ OAI-PMH.
117
psnc.
Chapter 2: Social Sciences and Applied Science
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Accessibility in the Assessment Systems: A Case Study of the OPEN Certification System in Italy Michela Dalpràa, *, Maria Cristina Grillob Department of Civil, Environmental and Mechanical Engineering (DICAM), University of Trento, via Mesiano, 77 - 38123 Trento, Italy a
[email protected],
[email protected],
Keywords: Social sustainability, Accessibility, People with disabilities, Assessment systems.
Abstract. Currently, most of sustainability rating systems for the built environment are based on multi-criteria assessments, mainly including criteria and requirements aimed to minimize environmental impacts associated to the design and construction phases. Rarely, they include social and economic aspects that are very important to improve the quality of life for all citizens. Main purpose of this paper is to investigate if and how the social topic of the accessibility for people with disabilities is considered in different assessment systems applicable to the built environment. At first, the analysis focuses on the most widely rating systems in the world. Then, the main European tools for the assessment of the quality of accessibility of facilities in the tourism sector have been investigated. Finally, it was analyzed an Italian accessibility certification system for tourist facilities. 1. Introduction There are several rating systems to assess Sustainability of the built environment at different scales: building scale, neighborhood scale and city scale. The most widely used rating systems for reducing the environmental impacts associated to the design and construction phases are: LEED, BREEAM, CASBEE, etc. They are Sustainability Rating Systems (SRSs) based on a multi-criteria assessment mainly including environmental issues such as site sustainability, water efficiency, energy efficiency, materials efficiency, waste and pollution reduction, and indoor environmental quality. Sustainability is characterized by three interlocked dimensions [1]. It attempts to connect fundamental and inseparable dimensions of development: environment, economy and society (Fig.1). he achievement of environmental sustainability should go hand in hand with the social and economic aspects. However, in several SRSs social and economic issues are ‘scarcely considered’ [2]. Social sustainability, as pointed out by Parejia-Eastaway [3], refers to ‘the ability inherent in individuals and communities to meet their own needs and achieve a balanced quality of life’. In particular, the social sustainability can be understood as an ability to ensure conditions of well-being of individuals (e.g. safety, health, education, etc.) equally distributed among social classes and between men and women. According to the paradigm of Khan [4], the social sustainability includes: equity, empowerment, accessibility, participation, sharing, cultural identity and institutional stability. Social sustainability emphasizes the importance of both social cohesion and inclusion in the community, strengthening the aspect of the social justice and minimizing inequalities [5]. The built environment should be designed in order to accommodate People with Disabilities (PwDs) and to promote the universal accessibility enabling and contributing their full participation in society [6]. We must not forget that accessibility for all people increases and improves the life quality for whole 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
121
ICSSS 2015
citizens [7]. For this reason, we should recognize, measure and communicate the sustainability of the built environment in terms of accessibility for PwDs; an accessibility that goes beyond the regulations and implements the best practices; an accessibility that is functional, safe, comfortable and of quality. Accessibility for PwDs is a fundamental and essential issue, often not guaranteed by the mere application of dedicated regulations or codes. It poses problems related to both the physical possibility to access to spaces, and the ability to benefit from resources and services they offer. Therefore, it is important to ensure not only physical accessibility, but also information accessibility, economic accessibility and psycho-social accessibility. This paper aims to investigate the existing tools assessing and certifying the quality of the accessibility in the built environment with particular reference to the Italian context.
Fig.1.Pillars and key issues of Sustainable Development.
2. Accessibility in assessment systems How much and where is considered the accessibility by the SRSs? Currently, very few SRSs include specific criteria relating to accessibility, because accessibility regulations setting minimum country-specific requirements for accessible design. For example, the Japanese CASBEE awards the barrier free planning exceeding the minimum requirements of the Japanese accessibility legislation. In the US LEED rating systems, attention to PwDs is paid only in LEED for Neighborhood Development. It is possible to find requirements that provide cultural and social value in other assessment protocols, specifically developed for tourist accommodations (e.g. hotels, B&B, resorts, etc.). They are based on a multi-criteria analysis in which items are grouped into categories related to environmental, socio-cultural and economic issues [8]. When a tourist facility meets the requirements, the assessment system assigns a specific logo, brand or label accompanied by a certificate. Generally, these assessment systems do not include specific criteria regarding accessibility for weaker users (e.g. disabled and elderly people). However, in order to verify the accessibility of tourist facilities, some accessibility certification systems have been developed in Europe: Godadgang in Denmark, Equality in Sweden, Tourisme&Handicap in France, EureWelcome/AccessiblePlus in Luxemburg, and the OPEN system in Italy. They award the efforts of owners and/or managers to improve the accessibility of their accommodations exceeding the measures imposed by the current regulations. Purpose of these certifications is to provide reliable, consistent and objective information on the accessibility of tourist facilities and places for different kinds of disabilities. In particular, they are finalized to communicate physical accessibility, sensory accessibility, cognitive accessibility and information regarding 122
specific measures implemented for people with asthma and allergy. An important contribution of these certification systems is the creation of lists including accessible accommodations or places in order to spread them in dedicated information channels. The major part of the analyzed accessibility certification systems provides a database of the certified facilities on their website. The certification process includes verifications by audit with external auditors. The certificates are valid for different periods, from one to five years depending on the certification system. The renewal of the certification requires a maintenance audit. 3. Case study of the OPEN certification system The Italian OPEN Certification System was born in 2012 in Trentino region (Italy), when the Autonomous Province of Trento (PAT) decided to introduce a brand to communicate the accessibility level of facilities, services, and events within the sector of accessible tourism. The purpose of the OPEN brand is not only to eliminate architectural barriers in buildings but also to promote the culture of accessibility in tourism industry. OPEN is a voluntary certification for different kinds of facilities (both public and private) which want to have attention, sensitivity and commitment for PwDs. The certification process begins with the acceptance of the application and ends with the issuance of the certificate accompanied by the authorization of the OPEN brand use. Main actors of the OPEN certification process are: the applicant facility or organization, the PAT, the Academy of the Mountains of Trentino, the OPEN Council, the consultant, the auditor and the expert. Facility or organization sends the application to the OPEN Council filling out the Agreement Document. Subsequently, it appoints an internal OPEN Representative having expertise to keep contact with the certification body, for the purpose of following the certification process activities and of managing documentation and communication. PAT is the certification body of the OPEN brands while the Academy of the Mountains of Trentino is the delegated body to manage the certification system including the permission to use the brands. For assuring the quality of the certification system, the Academy of the Mountains of Trentino establishes the OPEN Council. It is a committee composed of representatives from the institutional, academic, economic world and from associations that safeguard rights and interests of PwDs. The OPEN consultant advises the subject who is interested in obtaining this certification. He/she provides assistance and support to the applicant facility or organization throughout the certification process. The OPEN consultant is a qualified professional and recognized by the OPEN Council. In fact, there is a list of OPEN consultants. Tasks of the OPEN consultant appointed by an applicant are: to complete the set of forms and to propose measures and actions for improvement the performances in terms of accessibility when necessary. He/she operates independently from the OPEN Council and the auditors. The OPEN auditor is an individual qualified to perform audits recognized by the certification body. In this case, the knowledge and skills of an audit team need to be supplemented by that of an expert in order to meet the audit goals. Expert is the individual with proven experience in the world of disabilities. 4. Technical specification OPEN is a certification process based on a systematic analysis in order to identify measures for improving the accessibility of a facility. OPEN distinguishes three different levels of accessibility: bronze, silver, gold. Survey forms are used by the audit team for the assessments, one for each level of accessibility. There are also specific survey forms for public managements (e.g. restaurants, bars, cafés, etc.) and accommodations (e.g. hotels, B&B, etc.). Each survey form is a checklist characterized by a variable number of requirements grouped into assessment categories in order to ensure a specific accessibility level. This is reached when all requirements of the checklist are satisfied. For what concerns public managements, the assessment categories are 12. In this case, the total number of requirements is 32 for the bronze level, 45 for the silver level and 55 for the gold level. 123
Instead, for accommodations, the certification body must verify 19 assessment categories, in which the points required for achieving the three levels are: 59 (bronze), 75 (silver) and 92 (gold). Fig.2 shows the distribution of the OPEN requirements in the different assessment categories for the three levels of accessibility applicable for public managements, while the Fig. 3 shows the requirements distribution for accommodations.
Fig.2.Distribution of OPEN requirements in the assessment categories for public managements
Fig.3.Distribution of OPEN requirements in the assessment categories for accommodations
The different number of criteria is due to the need to verify specific spaces of an accommodation: this has led to the introduction of 7 new assessment categories such as: reception, internet point, reserved bedrooms, bed, bathroom, shower/bath tub, safety and security. The other categories are almost the same in terms of name and contents. In both cases, most of categories inspects indoor spaces including requirements regarding the architectural barriers, but OPEN checks also the accessibility of exterior spaces, such as garden, terraces and other core areas (e.g. swimming pool). It is interesting to underline the presence of one category in all survey forms concerning the staff training and the communication. For each accessibility level, OPEN system considers as very 124
important the acquisition of specific skills, as well as the development of effective communication channels with guest. An adequate training helps to reduce the fear felt by the staff when interacting with a person with disabilities. A website with all information regarding the accessibility of a facility/an event/an area is the first active communication channel. In addition, the radar graphs show that moving from one level to another there is an increase of the difficulties in achieving requirements in almost all assessment categories (more than 75%). In particular, the analysis of checklists has showed how the requirements become more stringent and the necessity to introduce new requirements for the higher levels. The graphs of Fig. 4 show the percentage distribution of requirements for different types of disabilities in the three levels (bronze, silver and gold) for public managements and accommodations. OPEN mainly addresses people with motor impairments. In fact, more than 70% of the requirements in all three levels concern people with motor disabilities, especially wheelchairs users. These requirements include and partially exceed the minimum spaces and dimensions for wheelchair users in the indoor and outdoor spaces. No specific requirements have been found in OPEN checklists for adults with stroller or with other mobility aids (e.g. walkers, etc.).
Fig.4.Percentages of OPEN requirements for different types of disabilities in the checklists of public managements and accommodations
People with sensory impairments are scarcely considered by the OPEN system. The percentages of requirements inspecting the needs of people with visual and hearing difficulties are only about 10% for gold levels, about 3% for silver levels. These criteria require to the applicant facility the following measures: signaling ramps, stairs and glass doors; ensuring the reading and understanding of written on bells, intercoms and menus; introducing visual/sound alarm systems in the bedrooms. OPEN includes only one requirement for people with food intolerances, which is present in all the three levels of the accommodations checklist and in the gold level of the public managements checklist. In particular, this item requires to have appropriate foods and drinks for those people with celiac disease, lactose intolerance and hyperglycemia. No requirements for people with asthma or other forms of allergy are. Furthermore, it is interesting to note the presence of requirements addressed to all PwDs that are included in all the accessibility levels. They constitute 5% and 17% and are in the “Communication and guest service” category, with the following requests: o Development of a website complying with W3C standard, also equipped with audio guide; o Participation in training sessions organized and promoted by the OPEN Council in order to learn specific skills in terms of accessibility; o Transfer of specific skills to all staff members who come in contact with disabled guests; o Research of information about sports, cultural and other events accessible for PwDs. There are no requirements for people with cognitive impairments and for people with learning disabilities.
125
5. Conclusions Improving the quality of accessibility is useful not only for PwDs but also for all people. Nowadays there are few tools for assessing and measuring the quality of accessibility. These are mainly based on qualitative analysis. An example is the case study that analyzed how in Italy it is possible to certify the efforts made for improving the accessibility in the hospitality sector. According to these tools, audit and verifications must be performed in order to evaluate the places accessibility, identifying all barriers and issues to resolve. For this purpose a series of checklists are available in some certification systems. Checklists are often presented as lists of requirements with small checkboxes. Auditors mark these checkboxes only when the requirements are satisfied. But these checklists do not measure how well the requirements are fulfilled. However, there are research aimed to develop methods for measuring in an objective way accessibility performances in the built-environment, in the transport connectivity, etc. The adaptation of these methodologies gives the possibility to effectively analyze the quality of accessibility. For this purpose it is important: starting investigations in order to identify assessment items exceeding the national accessibility regulations and including all PwDs; taking into account in these investigations the importance of intangible components of the accessibility for each category of disabled people [9]; developing relevant indicators for the quality of accessibility that could be introduced in the SRSs for buildings or in specific accessibility certification systems. References [1] Chiu R.L.H., Sustainability, International Encyclopedia of Housing and Home, Elsevier, pp. 91-96, 2012. [2] U. Berardi, Beyond Sustainability Assessment Systems: Upgrading Topics by Enlarging the Scale of Assessment, International Journal of Sustainable Building Technology and Urban Development, vol.2, No 4, pp.276-282, 2012. [3] M. Pareja-Eastaway, Social Sustainability, International Encyclopedia of Housing and Home, Elsevier, pp. 502-505, 2012. [4] M. Adil Khan, Sustainable Development: the Key Concepts, Issues and Implications, Sustainable Development, vol.3, No.2, pp 63-69, 1995. [5] R.L.H. Chiu, Social sustainability, sustainable development and housing development: the experience of Hong Kong, in Housing and Social Change: East-West Perspectives, R. Forrest and J. Lee (eds.), London, pp. 221-239, 2003. [6] F. Y. Chua, M. Y. Naziaty, and H. Hazreena, Achieving sustainable development: Accessibility of green buildings in Malaysia, Procedia - Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol.101, pp. 120-129, 2013. [7] A.N Evcil, Raising awareness about accessibility, Procedia - Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol.47, pp. 490-494, 2012. [8] A. Frattari and M. Dalprà, Overview of the international rating systems for sustainable tourist accommodations, Changing Needs, Adaptive Buildings, Smart Cities: Proceedings of the thirty-ninth World Congress on Housing Science, Milano: PoliScript, pp. 125-131, 2013. [9] W. G. Kim, H. W. Stonesifer, and J. S. Han, Accommodating the needs of disabled hotel guests: Implications for guests and management, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol.31, No 4, pp. 1311-1317, 2012.
126
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Operational Efficiency Analysis and Construction of a Management Matrix for Medical Centers in Taiwan Ching-Kuo Wei 58, Sec.2 Szechwan Rd., Banciao Area, New Taipei City, TAIWAN
[email protected] Keywords: Operational Efficiency, Data Envelopment Analysis, Management Matrix
Abstract. This paper discusses the operational efficiency of Taiwan’s medical centers from 2005 to 2009. By using the data envelopment analysis (DEA) model, it was found that about 43.9% hospitals have a relatively efficient performance. Among 9 hospitals with efficient performance, a private hospital in northern Taiwan is the benchmark. In the multi-year time series analysis, all short, medium and long-term analysis results suggest that most of medical centers are progressive in technical changes and productivity index growth, indicating the ever improving production technology of medical centers. Finally, by using the efficiency analysis results of various models, this study constructed a management matrix to serve as a reference. 1. Introduction In the overall provision of medical services, hospital is the main provider and is the ultimate unit responsible for the public health needs. Hence, hospital is the center of medical services, and hospital development and health policy planning are closely related. Under the healthcare network-related programs in Taiwan, types of hospitals have matured, including medical centers, regional hospitals and district hospitals, which play respective roles to meet the public’s medical needs. Since the implementation of the National Health Insurance, the universal payment system has led to the closure of more than 300 small hospitals. With the rise of large corporate hospitals, which focus on management and cost, the competition of the hospital system has become intense, and is increasingly dominated by large hospitals. Hospitals, especially medical centers, continue to expand in size and purchase advanced medical equipment to maintain competitive advantages. Large medical centers control the medical resources and have competitive advantages, hence, most of the medical payment is in the hands of large medical centers. As a result, medical centers are at the top of the hospital ecological chain and are most important institutions in the hospital system. Therefore, the operational efficiency analysis of medical centers is a topic worth exploring. Related studies find that Taiwan’s medical centers have varying operating performance [1]-[3]. Hospitals may expand the scale and purchase expensive high-tech instruments due to competition with other hospitals [4], thus leading to poor production technology and excessively large hospitals [5]. Studies on the performance of the hospital system have found that the operating efficiency of hospitals of different ownership types is different [6]-[9]. Hence, whether the production technology of Taiwan’s major medical centers can lead to efficiency performance gap due to the factor of ownership type is worth discussing. 2. Model analysis In studies on the hospital production technology and efficiency, Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) model is the most popular and most widely used analysis tool. The CCR model, which assumes 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
127
ICSSS 2015
constant returns to scale (CRS).The input oriented linear programming of CCR model is shown below: s ⎡ m ⎤ M i n θ c − ε ⎢ ∑ s i− + ∑ s r+ ⎥ r = 1 ⎣ i= 1 ⎦ s .t .
θ
c
y s
x
r o − i
n
∑
=
i o
x
j = 1
n
∑
=
y
r j
j = 1
, s
+ r
, λ
j
≥
i j
λ
λ
j
j
−
+ s
s + r
− i
=
, i
, r
=
1 ,… 1 ,…
, m , s
0
3. Results 3.1 CRS and super-efficiency model analysis This study collected data from “Survey on the Status of Hospitals and their Service Volume in Taiwan” in 2005 to 2009, from the Department of Health. According to the statistics, in each year, there are 21 medical centers in this study. Based on previous studies[10]-[12], this study selected three inputs among the overall hospital assessment items, including number of hospital beds, physicians and nurses. Moreover, this study selected three outputs, including number of patient days, operations and outpatient department, and the correlation analysis coefficient of other input and output variables are all above 0.79 at significant level. According to Table 1, medical centers with relatively higher operational efficiency (CRS=1) include Hospitals A, C, F, L, N, P, Q, T, and V (43.9%). Since 9 hospitals are relatively more efficient in overall performance. As mentioned above, 9 hospitals have higher overall efficiency (CRS) and they are at the frontier of relatively high efficiency, and the rest 12 hospitals are relatively inefficiency. However, among the 9 hospitals with relatively high efficiency, which is the best in terms of efficiency? Which is the poorest in efficiency performance? CRS model cannot answer those problem. Therefore, the super-efficiency model proposed by Andersen & Petersen (1993) is used to calculate the ranking of the relative efficiency of the CRS model. The CRS model and super-efficiency model efficiency values are as shown in Table 2. When the value of super-efficiency >1 is greater, the relative efficiency is higher. Hence, super-efficiency value is used for efficiency performance ranking, finding that the hospital ranking the first (Hospital A) is the model hospital of best operating efficiency, and can serve as a reference hospital for operating benchmarks. Tab.1.CRS, Super-efficiency and Time series analysis DMUs A B C D E F G H I J K L M N P Q
CRS 1 0.9772 1 0.9769 0.9810 1 0.8218 0.9624 0.9684 0.9111 0.7507 1 0.8957 1 1 1
Super-efficiency 2.0909 0.9772 1.0943 0.9769 0.9810 1.1496 0.8218 0.9624 0.9684 0.9111 0.7507 1.0125 0.8957 1.3388 1.0535 1.0565
Rank 1 12 4 13 10 3 20 15 14 17 21 9 18 2 6 5 128
EC 1.1606 1.5273 0.9514 0.9923 0.839 0.9203 1.0716 1.0466 0.9356 0.9855 1.0389 1.0006 0.9946 0.9236 1.0694 1.0162
TC 1.0207 1.109 1.1534 1.127 1.2566 1.0781 1.1269 1.056 1.0642 1.138 1.0962 1.1108 1.0867 1.0045 1.1556 1.0703
MPI 1.1847 1.6938 1.0974 1.1183 1.0543 0.9922 1.2075 1.1052 0.9957 1.1215 1.1388 1.1115 1.0808 0.9277 1.2358 1.0876
R S T U V
0.9790 0.8699 1 0.9432 1
0.9790 0.8699 1.0519 0.9432 1.0286
11 19 7 16 8
0.9946 1.0189 0.9897 0.886 0.908
1.0622 1.1377 1.1044 1.0628 1.1423
1.0565 1.1592 1.093 0.9416 1.0371
3.2 Time series analysis In comparison of time sequences, the data of 2009 and 2005 are used. The efficiency changes, technical change and MPI analysis are as summarized in Table 1. (1) EC (Efficiency Changes) Analysis As shown in Table 1, 9 hospitals improved efficiency and 12 hospitals (57.1%) declined in efficiency, and the average efficiency of hospitals increased. (2) TC (Technical Changes) Analysis The technical changes of all hospitals were positive, suggesting that the production technology of all medical centers made continuous progress in 2009 as compared to 2005. This is encouraging to hospital managers. The overall technical changes of the hospitals were positive. (3). MPI (Malmquist Productivity Index) analysis In MPI comparative analysis, except for Hospitals F, I, N, and U, which showed increasingly decline, the MPI of the rest 17 hospitals (80.9%) gradually increased. The overall hospital efficiency changes in 2009 increased as compared to 2005. According to the efficiency change, few medical centers made progress. However, in the long term productivity change, all the medical centers made progress in production technology. Therefore, hospitals with improved MPI were more than hospitals with declining MPI, indicating that medical centers made substantial achievements in production technology change. In fact, through hospital assessment and exchanges among hospitals, the production technology of medical center is expected to gradually improve as a result of management. 3.3 Management matrix deliberations The super-efficiency model of medical centers in the current period (2009) and long-term multi-year analysis (2009 to 2005 MPI analysis) are used to construct the management matrix, as shown in Figure 1. The model can be divided into 4 quadrants, which are described as follows:
Fig.1.Management matrix
Quadrant I: the current operational efficiency is good, and the long term multi-year productivity also grows. There are 7 hospitals in this quadrant including Hospitals A, C, L, P, Q, T, and V (33.3%). These hospitals are competitive and technically advantageous. As the recent operational performance is 129
good and production technology progress has been made in these hospitals, they can be the benchmark of other hospitals. However, they need continuous progress and improvement to maintain the current operating efficiency advantages. Quadrant II: the current operational efficiency is poor, however, the long term multi-year productivity grows. There are 10 hospitals in this quadrant, including Hospitals B, D, E, G, H, J, K, M, R, and S (47.6%). As the long term multi-year productivity of these hospitals grows, they have made technical progress. However, as the short term business performance is not good, it results in current operational efficiency. Hence, hospitals in this quadrant should improve the short term management as a priority by improving investment control and output expansion, and referring to the benchmark hospitals for technical efficiency and scale efficiency improvement. In this way, they can enhance operating results and performance to become hospitals of operational efficiency. Quadrant II: the current operational efficiency is poor, and the long term multi-year productivity declines. There are 2 hospitals in this quadrant, including Hospital I and U (9.5%). As the operating performance of the 2 hospitals is poor and the long term production technology declines, they are hospitals of low competitiveness and declining production technology. These 2 hospitals include a public hospital in southern Taiwan and a religious hospital in eastern Taiwan. The input and output inefficiency may be caused by the values and missions of the hospitals. It is suggested that the 2 hospitals should actively improve operating performance, improve current production technology, and enhance competitiveness. Quadrant IV: the current operational efficiency is good, however, the long term multi-year productivity declines. There are 2 hospitals in this quadrant, including Hospitals F and N (9.5%). These 2 hospitals are a public hospital in southern Taiwan and a public hospital in Northern Taiwan. Although they have competitive advantages at preset, their long term production technology tends to decline. This is a situation of concern. If there is no production technology progress, the current competitive advantages will be lost and the hospitals will be eliminated in competition by other hospitals. Therefore, the business strategy is to make production technology breakthroughs to keep the competitive advantages. Hence, introduction of technology or exchange with other benchmark hospitals in the respect of production technology should be strengthened to enhance the current technological level and ensure competitive advantages. References [1] Ching-Kuo Wei, L.-C. Chen, R.-K. Li and C.-H. Tsai, “Using DEA-R Model in the Hospital Industry to Study the Pseudo-inefficiency Problem”, Expert Systems with Applications, vol. 38, no. 3, pp. 2172-2176, 2011. [2] Ching-Kuo Wei, L.-C. Chen, R.-K. Li, C.-H. Tsai, H.-L. Huang,＂A study of optimal weights of Data Envelopment Analysis – Development of acontext-dependent DEA-R model＂, Expert Systems with Applications, vol. 39, no. 4, pp. 4599-4608, 2012. [3] Ching-Kuo Wei, L.-C. Chen, R.-K. Li and C.-H. Tsai, ＂ Exploration of Efficiency Underestimation of CCR Model: Based on Medical Sectors with DEA-R Model＂, Expert Systems with Applications, vol. 38, no. 4, pp. 3155-3160, 2011. [4] Dranove, D. , A. Durkac, and M. Shanley, “Are Multihospital Systems More Efficient? ”, Health Affairs, vol.15, no.1, pp.100-104, 1996. [5] Ching-kuo Wei, “Measuring Efficiency and Productivity Change in Taiwan Hospitals: A Nonparametric Frontier Approach”, The Journal of American Academy of Business, vol. 10, no. 1, pp.317- 323, 2006. 130
[6] Ching-Kuo Wei, “The Effects of Production Performance Model and Competitive Environment of Hospital Systems”, Applied Mechanics and Materials, Vol. 301, pp.1623-1627, 2013. [7] Ching-Kuo Wei, “A Discussion on the Impact of the Integration and Splitting Models on the Operational Efficiency of Medical Centers in Taiwan”, Applied Mechanics and Materials, Vol. 287, pp.3622-3626, 2013. [8] Ching-Kuo Wei, Mao-Lung Liao, “Analysis of Regional Competition Efficiency of the Hospitals in Taiwan： A Case Study”, The Business Review, vol. 9, no.2 , pp.92-96, 2008. [9] Yuan Wang, Yihua Zhang, "Research on Efficiency and Efficiency Dynamic Change of China Accounting Firms Based on DEA- Malmquist Index Model", AISS, Vol. 4, No. 12, pp. 182 ~ 192, 2012. [10] Valdmanis, V.G , ＂Ownership and Technical Efficiency of Hospitals＂, Medical Care, vol. 28, pp. 552-561,1991. [11] Färe, R., S. Grosskopf, B. Lindgren, and P. Roos, “Productivity Changes in Swedish Pharmacies 1980-1989: A Non-Parametric Malmquist Approach”, The Journal of Productivity Analysis, vol.3, pp.85-101, 1992. [12] Wei Ching-kuo, ”An Evaluation of Time-series Operational Performance on the Non-profit Hospitals in Taiwan”, The Journal of American Academy of Business,vol.10, no.2, pp.173~178, 2007.
131
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Cost-effectiveness Analysis as a Tool of Intelligent Transport Systems Evaluation Pavol Krála, Katarína Janoškováb,* University of Žilina, The Faculty of Operations and Economics of Transport and Communications, Department of Economics, Univerzitná 1, 010 26 Žilina, Slovakia a
[email protected],
[email protected] *Corresponding author
Keywords: Life cycle costs, Cost-effectiveness analysis (CEA), Cost-benefit analysis (CBA), ITS project, Incremental cost – effectiveness ratio.
Abstract. The paper characterizes the cost-effectiveness analysis (CEA) as a systematic tool applicable in the evaluation of projects of intelligent transport systems (ITS) and also in selection of cost-effective solutions. It categorizes the costs of ITS projects, specifies criteria of costs summarization, presents a model designed to calculate the total life-cycle costs (LCC). At the same time it describes the basic assumptions which are necessary to follow to apply CEA correctly, identifies key advantages and disadvantages associated with the implementation of the CEA evaluation process. In conclusion it explains the essence of incremental cost- effectiveness ratio (ICER) which is used to evaluate the effectiveness of different variants of ITS projects. Our task was not to address the deficiencies of this analytical tool, but rather to point out the primary benefits of its application in the evaluation process of ITS projects. 1. Introduction Intelligent Transport Systems projects (ITS) are defined as economically indivisible series of activities showing the exact technical function which represents the systematic process of planning, implementation and management of transport telematics systems with the participation of public and private sector, achieving the objectives of increasing security in transport, increasing mobility and quality of transport service, increasing the efficiency of freight transport expressed by time saving, increasing productivity of a company commercial activities and decreasing effects of negative impact of transport and thereby meeting the needs and requirements of ITS users. 2. Cost of ITS projects To the essential aspect of the ITS projects evaluation belongs proper consideration of all cost elements associated with the project evaluation. Summarization of the ITS projects costs must follow the following criteria: 1. Exclusion - to avoid double-counting of costs; some costs can belong to more categories simultaneously, all of the cost categories must be mutually exclusive, 2. Data availability – cost calculation should be based on available and objectively verifiable data, 3. Integrity - identified costs should represent the final and complete system of consumption of all resources needed to achieve the expected outcomes, 4. Measurability - all costs must be quantifiable (expressible in monetary units). 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
132
ICSSS 2015
2.1 Classification of ITS projects costs Cost view on the implementation and operation of ITS, compared to the beneficial view, is less complicated considering its quantitative expression in the form of financial and partly also of non-financial indicators. Costs of ITS projects can be classified into: ¾ Capital expenditures – CAPEX ¾ Operational expenditures - OPEX This method of costs classification is sufficient for CEA analysis. Every physical equipment has a certain lifetime, at the end of which it will be replaced by other equipment. It is necessary to respect the time value of money, therefore all estimated costs must be discounted to their present value by the correct discount rate. Then the final algorithm for the estimation of the total costs of ITS project will be: n OC t FV PC = I 0 + ∑ − (1) t ( 1 + i )n t = 1 (1 + i ) Where: PC Present value (present costs) of total costs [€] I0 - Investment costs [€] OCt Operational costs [€] FV Final value of physical mean [€] n - Life time [€] i - Discount rate t - Year of operation termination. 2.2 Life cycle costs (LCC) The selection of an appropriate ITS equipment is always a matter of individual assessment of user´s priorities and of anticipated way of its use. What seems to be an ideal solution for one situation may not be for the other one. The selection of the appropriate equipment must take not only technical parameters, brand and first costs into account but also consider the additional costs of lifetime operation of the equipment. These costs may differ for individual devices and in absolute amount they may exceed the investment cost several times during the lifetime. Thus, if we consider the economic aspect of TIS technologies, except for the first costs, we have to consider the operational costs – the total cost of the life cycle (LCC). Economic assessment of ITS at the level of total life cycle costs requires the processing of a suitable mathematical model, which allows to choose an appropriate technology. The following model was created by modification of the mathematical model LCC according to respect the specifics of ITS and the allow a comprehensive assessment of the individual components on the life-cycle costs, the level of which is directly dependent on the quality and sophistication of technology. Total life cycle costs of particular equipment can be expressed by the formula: CT = C P + C MI + C SH + CO( P ) + C MAT + C L + C E + CO( O ) + C PM + CO( PM ) + C MM + g n + CO( MM ) +
+ Cl + C a + C S ( PM ) + C S ,S ( PM ) + C S ( MM ) + C S ,S ( MM ) + C out ( PM ) + C out ( MM ) + Cl ( out ) + C d + Cliq + C DS
(2)
Respecting the time factor: n ⎡C n ⎡C n ⎡ C matt + C Lt + C et + C O( O ) t ⎤ PM t + C O( PM )t ⎤ MM t ⎤ CT = C P + C MI + C SH + CO( P ) + ∑ ⎢ + ⎥ + ∑⎢ ⎥ + ∑⎢ t t t ⎥ ( 1 i ) + (1 + i ) ⎥⎦ t =1 ⎣⎢ (1 + i ) ⎦⎥ ⎢ t =1 ⎣ ⎦⎥ t =1 ⎣⎢ n ⎡g +C n ⎡ (B0 − Bt ) . p ⎤ n ⎡ (S t − S 0 ) . p m,et ⎤ n ⎡ C S ( PM )t + C S ,S ( PM )t ⎤ (3) n O( MM )t ⎤ + ∑⎢ t ⎥ + ∑⎢ ⎥ + ∑⎢ ⎥+ ⎥ + ∑⎢ t t t t (1+ i ) (1+ i ) (1+ i ) t =1 ⎣ ⎦ t =1 ⎣ ( 1 + i ) ⎦ t =1 ⎣ ⎦ t =1 ⎣ ⎦ n ⎡C n ⎡ C C C C + + + + C C + ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ C S ( MM )t S ,S ( MM )t out ( PM )t out ( MM )t l ( out )t d liq + ∑ ⎢ DSt t ⎥ + ∑⎢ ⎥+⎢ n ⎥ ( 1 + i )t t =1 ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ( 1 + i ) ⎦ t =1 ⎣ ( 1 + i ) ⎦
Where: CT -
total costs of equipment during the lifetime [€] 133
CP CMI CSH CO(P) Cmat CL Ce CO(O) CPM CO(PM) CMM gn CO(MM) Cl Ca CS(PM) CS,S(PM) CS(MM) CS,S(MM) Cout(PM) Cout(MM))Cl(out) Cd Cliq CDS n B0 Bt p St S0 p m,et
Costs of equipment purchase [€] Costs of mounting and installation of equipment [€] Costs of equipment shipment [€] Other costs of purchase [€] Material costs by equipment operation [€] Costs of labour operating the equipment [€] Energy costs [€] Other operational costs of equipment [€] Costs of preventive maintenance (material, wages) [€] Other costs of preventive maintenance [€] Costs of mending maintenance of equipment [€] Damage caused by the sudden failure of equipment [€] Other costs of mending maintenance of equipment [€] Costs and losses due to lower performance of equipment [€] Costs due to increased costs on material and energy [€] Losses by preventive equipment maintenance [€] Costs of shutdown and start of equipment by preventive maintenance [€] Losses by mending maintenance of equipment [€] Costs of shutdown and start of equipment by mending maintenance [€] Costs of outage due to preventive equipment maintenance [€] Costs of outage due to mending maintenance of equipment [€] Costs and losses of equipment outage [€] Costs of equipment demounting [€] Costs on equipment liquidation or recycling [€] Damages and its consequences caused by equipment [€] Lifetime of equipment operation till its shutdown [years] Benefits of equipment by its start-up [€] Current benefits of equipment in time t [€] Unit price of equipment performance [€] Amount of material, energy consumed by equipment in time t* Consumption of material, energy at the beginning of the equipment use* Price of material, energy in time t [€]
If necessary, the mentioned cost model can be extended of new cost items. Analysis of the life cycle costs of a particular type of equipment is usually carried out by allocating only those cost items which are different (considering compared types of equipment), other cost items are neglected. This leads to the definition of Ccomp, which is not an objective parameter of comparison of different types of equipment, because it does not consider the time of operation, which can vary by different types of equipment. Therefore, the comparative costs are transformed into specific comparative costs, allowing us to compare the economic efficiency of equipment with different lifetime:
Ccomp ( sp ) = Where: Ccomp(sp) Ccomp(n) ts -
*
Ccomp ( n ) ts
Specific comparative costs of n- equipment [€/year] Comparative costs of n- equipment [€] Lifetime of equipment until its shutdown [years]
Specific unit depends on the spotted parameter. 134
(4)
The most advantageous solution is the purchase of equipment with the lowest Ccomp(sp). The objective comparison can be ensured only if the same category of equipment operates under the same conditions. 3. Cost-effectiveness analysis (CEA) Cost-effectiveness analysis is an alternative analytical tool to Cost-Benefit Analysis (CBA) which is methodologically complicated. The history of CEA goes back to the 50's of the last century. It was firstly applied by the Ministry of Defence of the United States in the decision-making process dealing with the effectiveness of developed military technologies. It is one of the basic systematic methods of economic input - output evaluation of the projects, where the costs are quantified in value units and outputs in natural units. It is an aid for decision-making as it provides the fundaments for assessment of alternative solutions. It compares projects, variants of the project, on the basis of the ratio between their costs and outputs expressed in natural units. In practice, the expression of outputs by weighted point system is used. The result is an indicator of cost efficiency, which reflects the cost to the economy of scale at each point. This indicator allows to order the evaluated alternatives. [3] CEA is advantageous to apply in cases where the monetization of project outputs is complicated, which is usually the hallmark of ITS projects. This characteristic represents its fundamental limitation. The selection of natural units, as a criterion to measure the outputs, can be quite problematic if the flow of benefits is heterogeneous (inhomogeneous output of compared variants). In this case it is not possible to set one evaluation criterion. CEA provides the reliable information when the comparable quality of outputs expressed in the same units but achieved with different levels of cost is expected considering the compared project variants. Therefore we assume that there is only one objective, really defined, and based on its quantification, the effectiveness of comparable variants of the project can be monitored. Thus, the projects with social importance are evaluated to the maximum extent using the mentioned methodology. 3.1 Process of CEA implementation The disadvantage of this analytical tool application is that CEA does not evaluate the reasonableness of the project, but it focuses only on the financial evaluation. At the same time it does not include qualitative factors affecting preferences. If project brings huge volume of social costs and benefits, CEA does not enable relevant project assessment and its results are significantly different compared to CBA. In such cases it is necessary to take measures to eliminate the deficiencies of distorted evaluation [2, 4, 5]: I. To include social costs and benefits considering the projects specificities into the evaluation process. It presents some alternative between CEA and CBA. Standard CEA indicator (5) will be expressed in the form of modified CEA indicator (6): C (5) CE = E SC − OSB (6) CE * = E Where: CE Standard CEA indicator (CE ratio) C Project costs E Major expression of non monetary social benefit (effectiveness) CE* Adjusted CEA indicator SC Social costs OSB Other social benefits E Non monetary social benefit (effectiveness) 135
II. To realize monetization of all effects, including social costs and benefits and apply CBA. CBA assesses the contribution of the project to the economic welfare and it is a useful tool to make appropriate decision about the compared variants of the proposed project on the basis of the company evaluation, taking all the benefits and costs into account. This is a quantification of all impacts, both positive and negative. The assessment of public projects regarding their contribution to social welfare is based on the so-called Hicks-Kaldor (compensatory) criterion, which was published in 1939 by John Richard Hicks and Nicholas Kaldor. III. If the monetization is not possible, a qualitative dimension (for instance, in the form of scoring evaluation) and a multicriteria evaluation can be used. The result of CEA can be constructed in two forms: 1. As the ratio of output numbers to a monetary input unit, 2. As the ratio of input volume (in monetary units) to an output unit. The results may be shown also graphically:
Fig.1.Illustration of CEA results. Source: adjusted according to [1]
In this case (Fig. 1) the best variant to implement is V1 as it ensures the most favourable value of cost-effectiveness. Determination of the boundaries between the defined areas is a decision of the evaluator depending on the individual preferences. Application of CEA analysis can eliminate the problems that do not allow to use CBA [2]: 1. There is a reason (e.g. price of preparations) why not to change some important impacts of the project into money (e.g. mortality, permanent damage, etc.), 2. Some social benefits are complicated or almost impossible to convert to cash equivalent, 3. If the output of the project is an intermediate product, its relation to the preferences of final goods users is not clear. The preferred variant is that variant of the project that best meets the criterion of cost minimization considering the defined objective (output). Variants are thus classified according to this criterion. The process of CEA implementation can be described by these steps:
Fig.2.Process of CEA implementation. Source: own processing
4. Calculation of ICER If only two project alternatives are the subjects of evaluation, the differences in costs (cost increase) are compared to their differences in results (increase of benefits) based on the incremental costeffectiveness ratio. If several project variants are compared, they are evaluated using the systematic 136
pairing. ICER is defined as additional costs for additional unit of effect that can be achieved using the proposed option. C − C 2 ΔC (7) ICER = 1 = E1 − E 2 ΔE Where: C1, C2 Costs of compared project variants E1, E2 Outputs (effects) of compared project variants DC II.
I.
DE < 0; DC > 0 ICER < 0
DE > 0; DC > 0 ICER > 0 DE
DE < 0; DC < 0 ICER > 0
DE > 0; DC < 0 ICER < 0
III.
IV.
Fig.3.ICER
The placement of the evaluated project variant in the quadrants shown in Fig. 3 means: Quadrant I. - the most common scenario, interventions are more effective in the first of the compared variants, but it requires higher costs compared to the second variant, Quadrant II. - the worst possible scenario, inefficient, dominated segment - higher costs of the first variant will not result in the generation of higher output compared to the second variant, Quadrant III. - interventions are more effective in the second variant, but they require higher costs compared to the first variant, Quadrant IV. - the most favourable scenario, dominant segment - interventions are effective, cost savings in relation to the compared variant.
5. Conclusion Despite the fact that CEA provides reliable results that can be used as a basis for decision making, we should also consider the results of other evaluation tools that create optimal structure for complex evaluation of alternative solution of evaluated ITS projects. ITS projects can be effective in achieving its objectives, but it does not mean that they ensure effective money spend. For instance, the results of the financial analysis have their meaning for projects with their outputs being placed on the market or market evaluated. ITS projects with favourable results of the financial analysis are commercially interesting. CEA is the tool for the project effectiveness evaluation, i.e. its ability to achieve the objectives expressed by factual indicators. The ratio between costs and project outputs enables the mutual comparison of the projects (variants of the project) and classification according to the level of costs needed to achieve the objectives. As the objectives are not expressed in comparable units, CEA can not be used separately to make decisions about the projects or to determine which project has better recoverability. 6. Acknowledgement This contribution is an output of the project “Kvalita vzdelávania a rozvoj ľudských zdrojov ako piliere vedomostnej spoločnosti na Fakulte PEDAS Žilinskej university v Žiline, ITMS 26110230083.” Moderné vzdelávania pre vedomostnú spoločnosť/Projekt je spolufinancovaný zo 137
zdrojov EÚ. References [1] E, Drdúlová, Metodika na hodnotenie efektívnosti nákladov. Rozpracovanie dokumentov vyplývajúcich z implementácie rámcovej smernice o vodnej politike v podmienkach SR. Výskumný ústav vodného hospodárstva. Bratislava 2007. [2] E. Kislingerová et al., Inovace nástrojů ekonomiky a managementu organizací, Praha, C. H. Beck, 2008. [3] T. Klieštik, Quantification Effectivness Activities Traffic Company By the Rules of Data Envelopment Analysis, E & M Ekonomie a Management, vol. 12, pp. 133-145, 2009. [4] K. Lehutová, A. Križanová and T. Klieštik, Quantification of equity and debt capital costs in the specific conditions of transport enterprises, Proceedings of 17th International Conference Transport Means, Kaunas University of Technology, pp. 258-261, 2013. [5] P. Kráľ, Cost-effectiveness analysis ako nástroj hodnotenia projektov, QUAERE 2013, Hradec Králové, 2013. [6] F. Ochrana, et al., Veřejný sektor a veřejné finance. Financování nepodnikatelských a podnikatelských aktivit, Praha, Grada Publishing, 2010. [7] F. Ochrana, Manažerské metody ve veřejném sektoru. Teorie, praxe a metodika uplatnění, Praha, Ekopress, 2007. [8] V. Šajner, Matematický model výběru vozidla podle LCC. Proceedings of 4th International Conference, Univerzita Pardubice, DFJP, 2003.
138
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Research of Rural Collective Construction Land Transfer in China Yonghui Rao Zhejiang Police College, Hangzhou310053, Zhejiang, China
[email protected] Keywords: Rural Collective Construction Land, Land Transfer, Land Use.
Abstract. Firstly, the paper interpreted the meaning of the rural collective construction land transfer in a comprehensive and parochial way. Secondly, taking Jiangshan Town of China as an example, the paper interpreted the present situation and problems of land transfer in present China. Thirdly, the paper interpreted the principles, conditions, patterns of the rural collective construction land transfer. Lastly, the paper introduced the distribution model of land income taking Wuhu City of China for example and pointed out the essential purpose of land transfer is to safeguard rights and interests of farmers better. 1. Introduction The rural collective construction land transfer has distinct Chinese characteristics. Outside of China, foreign scholars rarely mention the word such as rural collective construction land. The occurrence of above phenomenon not only owing to the different language and culture, but also owing to the different nation politic system and economic system. Because the land property right system in western developed countries is in good condition and perfect, the land can be freely traded through the market, so there are no Chinese problems of rural collective construction land transfer. In a broad sense, the rural collective construction land transfer in China includes the transfer of rural collective construction land ownership right, land-use right and land function. In a narrow sense, the collective construction land transfer simply refers to the collective construction land use right transfer. The purpose of the paper is to research the land-use right transfer of rural collective construction land. It is difficult to give a precise definition about the land-use right transfer of rural collective construction land. In generally, it means that the individual farmers or rural collective organization make the profit out of their collective non-agricultural construction land through the following aspects: the land-sell, the land-rent, the land- stock, the land- sublease, the land- mortgage etc. 2. The present situation analysis about land-use right transfer of rural collective construction land Taking Jiangshan Town of Ningbo City (Zhejiang Province, China) as an example, the increased construction land area of Jiangshan Town is 648.43 hectares according to the land-use situation of 1996～2007. Deducting 2.33 hectares of water conservancy land, the construction land of Jiangshan Town increased 650.70 hectares actually. Among them, the increased urban land is 148.47 hectares, including 87.28 hectares national land which is transferred from collective land. The new increased urban land still maintained the land-use right of collective land area is 61.19 hectares. The increased rural residential land area is 39.70 hectares, in which there is 31.77 hectares land belongs to national land and there is only 7.93 hectares land belongs to collective land. 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
139
ICSSS 2015
The new increased industrial land area is 313.22 hectares, in which there is 259.54 hectares national land that is transferred from collective land and there is 53.68 hectares land belongs to collective land. The following table 1 and table 2 show the detailed data: Tab.1.1999～2008 Requisition Land Area of Jiangshan Town Statistics.[Unit: Hectare] Land Type House Public Education Irrigation Industry Traffic Total Tab.2.1999～2008 New Increased Land Type Town Village Industry Traffic Total
Requisition Land 53.04 11.17 10.11 44.74 259.54 112.56 491.15
Agricultural Land 50.28 9.58 10.03 42.04 242.86 104.55 459.34
Construction Land 2.36 1.43 0.07 2.70 11.12 7.69 25.38
Construction Land of Jiangshan Town Statistics.[Unit: Hectare] Increased Construction Land 148.47 39.70 313.22 133.66 650.72
National Land 125.07 31.77 259.54 78.57 491.15
Collective Land 23.40 7.93 53.68 55.09 159.57
According to the enterprise land-use survey of Jiangshan Town，industrial enterprises are distributed in 55 administrative villages of Jiangshan Town mostly. In the survey of 205 enterprises, 64% of them use the collective construction land, 5.5% of them use the famer’s land, 6.5% of them use the requisition land, and 24% of them use the national land. Because of the collective construction land’s limitative conditions and complex bureaucratic procedures for review, there is 59.06% of enterprises use the collective land without land-use right certificate. According to the analysis of the situation about rural collective construction land transfer of Jiangshan Town, it accords with the national policy currently, illegal land-use cases are rarely to be seen. At the same time, there are many problems existed in the process of rural collective construction land transfer, such as the collective land property right is to be restricted, the barriers of land-use review, land management laws are not complete, the collective land owner’s benefit is difficult to fully achieved, famer's land property rights and interests problems have not been solved completely, the rural collective construction land transactions exist certain policy risk, above of them influence the investors in a certain extent and affect the improvement of land-use intensive. 3. The principle of rural collective construction land transfer The principle of the land-use right transfer about rural collective construction land should be voluntary, paid, equal, open and in accordance with the law. The land-use right transfer about rural collective construction land should respect the wishes of farmers and believe them. The main part of rural collective construction land transfer is farmer, it should be decided by themselves and should maintain farmer legal land property rights. It should establish the government as the land manager’s service consciousness, standardize administrative rights, not force a command about the land-use right transfer about rural collective construction land. In the process, the government is not the representative, should not participate in the land trade and should try to regulate the obligations. The land-use right transfer about rural collective construction land should make the collective land having the commodity attribute. From the view of the theory, the standard to measure a product whether have the attributes of commodity is not the nature of economic system ownership, but is the two properties of commodity, i.e. the use value and exchange value. The land-use right 140
transfer about rural collective construction land should accord to the rule of value, admit the commodity status of collective land, make it enter the market as same as the national land, make it using for value and flow and bring about the increased value of land. The land-use right transfer about rural collective construction land should be permeated with the concept of equality. It should improve and perfect the land ownership, protect the possession right, use right, income right, disposition right for farmer. The requisition of rural collective land should be in accordance with the law, compensate the reasonable compensation to the rural collective organization and farmer with the principle of the land for same price, and solve the problems of employment, housing and social security for expropriated farmers. 4. The conditions of rural collective construction land transfer The land-use right transfer about rural collective construction land must obtain the permit of the land management department of town government. It should be in accordance with the following conditions: First, it should be in accordance with the land-plan requirements and the annual land-use plan. The collective land is only identified as construction land and can be used as construction land for transfer according the land-use plan. The detailed land-use conditions should be in accordance with the city-plan and town-plan. The increased rural collective construction land also should be incorporated into the annual land-plan and control the scale of construction land strictly. Real estate development and urban residential construction should be forbidden for using collective construction land. Second, it should be clearly defined land ownership and no legal disputes. The permit of rural collective construction land transfer must be in accordance with the law and definite the collective land owners and the present land users clearly. The land owners and users who failing to obtain the certificate of rural construction land ownership or land-use right are forbidden to transfer above land. Third, land right is not limited by judicial apparatus and administrative organization according to the law. Land-use right is the property right of great economic value. It is often because of the economic disputes to take compulsory measures in order to guarantee creditor’s rights. Fourth, public collective construction land-use right must be agreed by all land-owners through written document. Rural collective economic organizations sell, rent and mortgage the land-use right of rural collective construction land that owned by all farmers must be approved by over 2/3 members of the collective economic organization. Fifth, it should be in accordance with the regulations of cultivated land protection and intensive land-use. The both sides of land supply and demand must fulfill the obligations of protecting cultivated land in the process of rural collective construction land transfer. Construction land which transfer from agricultural land should fulfill relevant formalities. It should be timely to complete the requisition-compensation balance task of cultivated land in accordance with the quality and quantity requirement. It also should be to compensate another land in first before using previous land. Sixth, it should be to defend the public benefit. The activities of development, use and management about collective construction land by land user should abide by the state laws and regulations and not harm the public benefit of the society in the process of rural collective construction land transfer 5. The patterns of rural collective construction land transfer The patterns of rural collective construction land transfer are not great different with the patterns of national land transfer. The only difference is the different land ownership. It could be carried out according to the national land transfer regulations. Specifically, the patterns of rural collective construction land transfer are as follows: 141
The first pattern is to sell the land-use right of rural collective construction land. It means that the land owners sell the land-use right of a certain period to land users. The land users pay the price to the land owners. Cooperating with others to establish enterprise through sharing the land-use right also belongs to the pattern. The land owners and users should sign the sell contract in the trade of collective construction land use right. The second pattern is to rent the land-use right of rural collective construction land. It means that the lessees rent the land-use right of rural collective construction land from the land owners. The lessees pay the rent to the lessors. The land-use right rent should take buildings (including standard industrial factory, shops and housing) as the main objectives. The residences that built on the collective construction land by the lessors and lessees together should be mainly used by local village residents, not be rent by town residents. The lessors and lessees should sign a rent contract of land-use right about rural collective construction land. The rent contract should not break the national laws, regulations and land-use plan, urban and rural construction plan. The rent contract must be approved by over 2/3 members of the collective economic organization. The rent contract must be given clear indication of the land-use conditions. The third pattern is to transfer the land-use right of rural collective construction land. It means that the land user transfers the land-use right to another land-user again. The ownership of building and other structures on the ground transfer at the same time. The land-use right of rural collective construction land transfer should not change the previous land type. If land-use right of the rural collective construction land transferred, the rights and obligations stated in the land-use right transfer contract and the registration documents transfer at the same time. The land-use term after transfer is the rest of time that the total time subtracts the time which has been used by previous land user. It could not be transferred without according to the term and conditions of contract for investment and development. The fourth pattern is to mortgage the land-use right of rural collective construction land. It means that the land-use right is not transferred, but is taken as obligatory right by the land user for guarantee. It should be signed the land-use right mortgage contract if the rural collective construction land was mortgaged. The land-use right mortgage of the collective construction land must be approved and signed a written certificate by land owners. 6. Summary The main purpose of rural collective construction land transfer is to protect the farmers' legitimate land property rights and interests. It is also in order to avoid low compensation and violation of legitimate land property rights. Theoretically, the land income is the economical reflection of land ownership. Because the collective construction land belongs to farmers' collective economical organization, so the land income should be obtained by them. According to the survey, the farmer only got the land compensation and resettlement subsidies in the past process of land requisition, which transfer collective land into national land. The collective land trade income got by farmers is only equivalent to 5~10% of the national land trade income. The farmers could get the added value through the rural collective construction land transfer, which is much higher than the income of land requisition. The land incomes of rural collective construction land transfer are mainly possessed by farmers' collective economical organization. Taking Wuhu City (Anhui Province, China) as an example, it is stipulated that city government could not get the land income. The land incomes are distributed to the collective economical organization of county (area), countryside (town) and village according to the ratio 1:4:5. The farmers could obtain half of the land income from land transfer directly. The land income obtained by town will be mainly used for urban infrastructure construction in accordance with the provisions. In summary, the rural collective construction land transfer is the more effective way to safeguard rights and interests of farmers comparing to the land requisition in current China. 142
References [1] Guanzhong James Wen. Total factor productivity change in China's farming sector: 1952-1989.Economic Development and Cultural Change, 42(1993) 1-41. [2] Besley.T. Property rights and investment incentives: theory and evidence from China .Journal of Political Economics, 103 (1995) 903-937. [3] Dwayne, Benjamin, Loren Brandt. Land, factor markets, and inequality in rural China: historical evidence. Explorations in Economic History, 34 (1997) 460- 94. [4] Dennis.T.Y. China's land arrangements and rural labor mobility. China Economics Review, 8 (1997) 101-16. [5] Yang Yao. Rural industry and labor market integration in eastern China. Journal of Development Economics, 59(1999) 463-496. [6] James Kai-sing Kung. Common property rights and land reallocations in rural China: evidence from a village survey. World Development, 28(4) (2000) 701-719. [7] Chengri Ding. Land policy reform in China: assessment and prospects. Land Use Policy, 20 (2003) 109-120.
143
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Formation Experience of Sociocultural Competence in the System of Additional Foreign Education Elena Volkova1,a, Rushaniya Zinurova2,b, Andrey Tuzikov2,c 1
Latishskih strelkov st. 29-207, Kazan, Russia 2
Karl Marks st. 68, Kazan, Russia
a
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected]
Keywords: Sociocultural competence, Additional foreign education, Pedagogical conditions, actualization, Know-how skills
Abstract. This article focuses on scientific researches in the area of sociocultural competence in the system of additional foreign education. As part of the study, we determined the component’s structure of sociocultural competence, levels of its development and pedagogical conditions of its forming. We introduce information about our researches carried out on the base of the Kazan National Research Technological University. The authors underline actualization of the “sociocultural competence” phenomenon and determines the perspective directions of its forming. The authors suppose that “the system of additional professional education can and must provide conditions for forming and developing sociocultural competence of students because only in this system, professional motivation for study of foreign languages among students are the strongest”. 1. Introduction Today our society needs the specialists, qualified for including in further independent life activity, who are competent for decision of practical important and professional problems. These specialists must possess not only acquired knowledge, know-how skills but also additional qualities which are determined by terms such as “competence” and “competency”. This corresponds to the interpretation and content of modern problems and the aims of higher education. Generally, competency-based approach means refocusing predominant learning paradigm in education to create conditions for the acquisition of complex competences. There is no doubt about the fact that the effectiveness of the human both in professional and personal sphere in the modern multicultural society depends on most of all his sociocultural tolerance and ability to interact with human beings regardless of their national and cultural ethnicity. Results of human activity depend on skills to use civilized strategies of behavior in conflict situations. It is rather difficult to realize this if a person doesn’t have the formed sociocultural competence. Certainly, new socio economic changes in our society reflected in the content and organization of the supplementary education system which has been transforming, because responsibility for the formation of student’s ability to adequate social interpersonal communication in a multicultural modern world rests with the additional education system. This necessitates the search of optimal innovative forms of support and perfecting of additional foreign education, the strategy of development in accordance with contemporary realities and social educational policy, focused on support of personal development of a student and perfection of his creativity. Big enough complexity exists in the term of “sociocultural competency” for native and foreign educational science, because there is the close link with such categories and terms as “ethno-cultural competence”, “cultural competence”, “intercultural competence” and so on. It’s clear, that these terms are grouped together in the second part, which is the derivative from the term “culture”. 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
144
ICSSS 2015
In our context we consider components of sociocultural competence such as: –Awareness of the range of possible human behavior strategies in the interindividual conflict [5, 7]; –Ability of personality to realize these strategies in the specific living polycultural situation; –The degree of spiritual maturity and formation of spiritual and moral features, the skill to perform in the part of communicative mediator and et.al. Sociocultural competence performs the function of providing for developing of social and personal significant meanings, motivational and value spheres, regulation of the processes of understanding of the global world and the person individuality, aid to personality in adaptation to new conditions, increasing personal competitive strategy. The matter of students’ sociocultural competence formation is the question about their training to effective functioning in the condition of multicultural world, about socialization and education in the complex contradictory ratio of socium and culture, their sociocultural defense. In the course of our research we have determined component analysis of sociocultural competence and worked out the concrete criteria and criteria indexes of sociocultural competence forming. High level of sociocultural competence forming is characterized by demonstration of its all components while only certain components of sociocultural competence have noticeably revealed on the middle level and the rest are not sufficiently developed. Establishing the low level of sociocultural competence and its separate components, we underline not only lack of its separate components, but also the requirement in their forming and in personal professed self-improvement. Formedness of components series or full range promoted the statement of concrete objectives in organizing of additional foreign education conforming to the requirement of the sociocultural competence forming. Consequently, that made the whole process of its forming more effective and purposeful. As a part of the study, we have worked out the pedagogical model of the sociocultural competence formation. We understand it as an integrative personality trait, which includes specially structured system of intellectually gnostic, emotionally reflexive and behavioral components of sociocultural competence. These components focus on the interaction of theoretical component of knowledge with practical skills and strategies of behavior defined in relation to the activities of the individual. These components determine capability and readiness of personality to establish contacts with agents of sociocultural activity, to take part in coordinated decisions and regulation of conflicts by non-violent actions according to sociocultural personality characteristics, a group and environment. In that context, culture is determined as a complex of clearly stated sociocultural values, norms and traditions, which every concrete personality has got and which are the result of mutual influence of macro and mezzo level traditions with forming traditions in the frame of cultural and social daily life and depend on norms and values of its living. Besides, we have determined pedagogical conditions of effective functioning of our model. They are: - Regular monitoring as a control procedure of dynamics of the sociocultural competence forming; - Working out and introduction of additional courses (program projects) which provide level increasing of sociocultural competence in the spirit of intercultural mutual understanding and tolerance; - Maximal using sociocultural potential of students environment on principles of the social partnership and social dialogue of all interested individuals. First of all, setting the ambitious goal of sociocultural competence formation and development for themselves in the system of additional foreign education it is necessary to create sufficient conditions for providing informal aspect of international communication of sociocultural character and experience extension of mutual relations of students with the world around us of culturological directionality. The content of the main topics of sociocultural character must touch on personal
145
information about cultural characteristics of representatives of different nationalities, their leisure, hobbies, national traditions, ethnic cuisine, holidays, folk costumes, goodwill projects and etc. In our research we have given examples about running events of this nature from the constructive experience of the “foreign languages” department of the Kazan National Research technological university. Interpreter’s practice for students, who take the program “Interpreter in the sphere of professional communication”, includes educational regional geographical “Club of the smart and the merry” with participation of American pupils, who study Russian according to the program “National security language for youth”. The aim of this activity is to analyze factors influencing the dynamics of sociocultural competence development of students and to improve practical communication skills and adaptation in other lingua culture by immersion. The main component of this activity is the culturological component. The culture study of another country allows you to engage students in “the dialogue of cultures”[6], acquaint them with universal values, enrich base knowledge with the help of language means. Study of the culture gives the great opportunities for providing with cognitive motivation and adaptation of students in other lingua culture. One of the most important task for a teacher is a need to develop a specific technology training a socio cultural component of education in the sphere of foreign language. At the same time, it is necessary to involve the elements of the native culture of students to compare the features of perception of the world by the representatives of different language cultures. The professor of the Kazan National Research Technological university, Zinurova R.I worked out the educational technology “Dialogue of culture” [6,9,10], “which became the first regional educational program approbated in the system of maintaining peopleware in governmental youth policy aimed at suggesting Russian youth tolerance ideas. The technology is realized with the help of: – Formation of positive stereotypes of thinking and behaving in multicultural communication; – Expansion of notions of multicultural differences, tolerance in thinking and behaving, psychology of multicultural collaboration; – Diagnosing of personal level of tolerance and intolerance and correction of these levels; – Learning and laboring of constructional strategies of behaving in conflict situations; – Formation of communicative experience of negotiation process in different multicultural situations; – Formation of readiness and realization of gained experience and knowledge realization in professional activity and real-life situations”. Unfortunately, we haven’t enough time for full value realization of the sociocultural component during lectures. In this case, programs of additional education in foreign language are one of the effective means of intercultural communication. These programs realize not only practical, developing and educational tasks, but also promote better understanding and communication in foreign language. References [1] E.V.Volkova, Different approaches to the problems of intercultural communicative competence, Proceedings of the 16 th International conference on Interactive collaborative learning and 42–nd International IGIP Symposium on Engineering pedagogy, Book of Abstracts, //Edited by Claudio da Rocha Brito, Melany M. Ciampi//, Kazan, Russia, pp. 456–457, 2013 [2] I.A. Zimnyaya, The key competences as an effective purpose-oriented base of competency building approach in education, М.: Research Center of problems of the spesialists’ training quality, 2004. [3] Т.М. Tregubova, Comparative studies on vocational education: major trends and problems of adaptation, Kazan pedagogical journal, vol.3, pp.33-39, 2013 146
[4] А.Ya. Flier,. Cultural competence of the person: between the problems of education and national policies, Social Sciences and Modernity, vol.2, 2000. [5] M. Berns, Context of Competence: Social and cultural consideration in Communicative language Teaching, New York:Plenium Press, 1990. [6] А.М. Zinnurov., R.I Zinurova., V.М.Tokar, Dialog of cultures, Kazan: Republican Training Research Center, pp.120, 2004. [7] http://rudocs.exdat.com/docs/index-150633.html [8] Е.V. Volkova, Experimental evaluation of the development dynamics in engineering students, Bulletin of Kazan University of Technology, vol.16(22), pp.377-381, 2013. [9] R.I., Zinurova, W. Krieger, Educational technologies of immigrants’ adaptation in Russia and Germany: “Melting pot” or “Dialogue of cultures”, Bulletin of Kazan University of Technology, vol.18, pp.330-333, 2013.
147
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Assessment of Climate Change and its Impact on Romania Lucian-Ionel Cioca1,a, Larisa Ivascu2,b,* 1
“Lucian Blaga” University of Sibiu, Faculty of Engineering, Department of Industrial Engineering and Management, 10 Victoriei Bd., 550024 Sibiu, Romania
2
Politehnica University of Timisoara, Faculty of Management in Production and Transportation, 14 Remus str., 300191 Timisoara, Romania a
[email protected],
[email protected] *Corresponding author
Keywords: Wind energy potential, Emission reduction, Energy and climate strategies, Sustainability.
Abstract. Climate change is a complex process that affects society and the environment. They are a threat to renewable energy from the perspective of sustainable development. The observations and measurements indicate certain signals produced in Romania, which support this hypothesis of climate change. This requires a range of strategies for building a sustainable energy model for reducing carbon dioxide emissions. In this way the climate change is mitigated and the nuclear energy option is completely removed. In Romania there are considerable steps in this direction. This national direction is correlated with international standards. This paper presents the situation in Romania in terms of climate change and its impact on renewable energy sources. Finally, the conclusions of this study are presented and Romania's strategic directions for this. 1. Introduction Climate change is a global process with direct impact on resources. With priority, these climate changes have a direct effect on society and the environment. According to the International Agency for the Environment [1], the damage will increase significantly and each component of the economy must adapt to this approach and reduce emissions. There are a number of actions at the international level, but also nationally. Climate change is a double challenge for every state in part: (1) the serious effects of climate change can be avoided only by reducing greenhouse gas (the core of EU policy is associated with keeping global average temperature increase to 2° C compared with the pre-industrial period); (2) The whole society faces in parallel, the challenge of adapting to the conditions created by these changes. Climate change is inevitable even if the international actions in this field prove to be effective and properly implemented. Therefore, the first challenge is the partially controllable direction that can be improved in each country. Carbon dioxide is the most polluting gas (of the greenhouse gases that affect climate change). The paper is built on three major sections: (1) the presentation of the international context for environmental protection in order to reduce emissions and stop climate change; (2) the presentation of the current situation in Romania in accordance with international standards; (3) assessing the impact of climate change on the use of renewable sources in Romania. The paper ends by proposing a framework strategy for the development of intelligent systems whose carbon dioxide emissions can be minimized.
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
148
ICSSS 2015
2. The context of climate change 2.1 International initiatives for environmental protection At international level there have been issued a series of actions to protect the environment [2]. The first action to reduce this phenomenon occurred in 1992, in Rio de Janeiro by signing the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), adopted in Romania by Law no.24 / 1994, whereby the 194 signatory countries agreed to work long-term for reducing the intensity of greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) in the atmosphere. These GHG lead to negative effects on society. In 1997, 5 years after the Rio de Janeiro Convention in Kyoto, Japan, a number of developed countries systemized the action to combat climate change by taking some steps to limit and reduce emissions of greenhouse gases in the period 2008-2012 and they identified means of international cooperation in obtaining the benefits and achieve the proposed objectives. Currently, there are 192 Parties (191 States and one regional economic integration organization) to the Kyoto Protocol to the UNFCCC. Romania signed this protocol on January 5, 1999. Among the important actions of this protocol there are included [3,4]: • Reduction of greenhouse gas emissions for the signatory countries in accordance with the future requirements; • A greenhouse gas emission-trading program; • Organizing future actions for monitoring and sanctioning the member states that do not respect their obligations under the signature of this protocol. Among the problems expressed above, two of the most difficult problems unresolved in 1997 in Kyoto are still in discussion at international level: • Emissions Trading - is one of three "flexibility" mechanisms contained in the Kyoto Protocol (article 17); • Reducing carbon emissions through forests, soils and agricultural practices. The Kyoto protocol addresses the emissions issue of six greenhouse gases: carbon dioxide (CO2); methane (CH4); nitrous oxide (N2O); hydrofluorocarbons (HFC); perfluorocarbons (PFCs), sulfur hexafluoride (SF6). This is an important step in the fight against global warming, containing clearly defined and quantified objectives for limiting and reducing greenhouse gas emissions at national and international level [3]. The scientific reports show that to achieve the goal of UNFCCC there should be developed intense action from all countries so globally to register a decrease in GHG by at least 50% in 2050 compared with emissions in 1990. This level can be achieved only if the developed countries will reduce GHG together with the percentage values contained between 60-80% in 2050 compared to 1990 emission levels [4]. Wanting to maintain the leadership role, the EU unilaterally adopted in 2007 a series of actions and proposals to reduce the factors that lead to global climate change. According to the European Commission [5], for 2020, the EU has committed to cutting its emissions to 20% below 1990 levels. Besides this objective, in fighting climate change, there are established and accepted by all EU countries and the following objectives: • 20% reduction by 2020, of greenhouse gases emissions compared to 1990 levels - it is shown that EU makes considerable steps for emissions reduction for as much as 30%, provided that other developed countries take similar commitments and the developing countries join this initiative in accordance with nationally available possibilities; • Increasing the share of renewable energy up to 20%; • Increasing by up to 20% of the energy efficiency. In this context [5], for 2030, the European Commission proposes that the EU set itself a target of reducing emissions to 40% below 1990 levels by 2030. Going further evolutionary, for 2050, representatives of EU approved GHG reduction target of 80% -95% compared with 1990. The 149
European Commission presented a series of cautions and proposals which can be implemented in supporting and developing this approach. These actions are [5]: • The EU Emissions Trading System - has become a key instrument in the EU approach to reducing GHG emissions at the international level; • Adopting legislation for the use of renewable energy used in the production of the consumed energy; Granting subsidies for the use of optimal systems to capture resources needed to produce energy; • Setting a target to increase Europe's energy efficiency by 20% by 2020 by improving the energy efficiency of buildings and the quality of household appliances; • Reducing carbon dioxide emissions for transportation; • The European Climate Change Programme (ECCP), which has led to the implementation of dozens of new policies and strategies. In a press release from the European Commission it is stated that “CO2 is the greenhouse gas most commonly produced by human activities and it is responsible for 64% of man-made global warming. Other greenhouse gases are emitted in smaller quantities, but they trap heat far more effectively than CO2, and in some cases are thousands of times stronger. Methane is responsible for 17% of man-made global warming, nitrous oxide for 6%” [6]. For the above mentioned period, 2008-2012, EU-28 Member States overachieved their targets by a total of 4.2 Gt CO2-eq. For the next period, 2013-2020, 2013-2020, total emissions (excluding LULUCF – Land use, land-use change and forestry, and international aviation) are expected to be 23 % lower than base year, 1990, levels according to Member States' projections. In the next period, it is aimed a potential overachievement of 1.4 Gt CO2-eq. Each member state is in line with the objectives proposed at European level and manages, within available resources, to control climate change through the use of renewable sources in daily activities. These renewable sources help reduce GHG emissions and maintain an acceptable level of climate change. 2.2 Climate change in Romania Climate change in Romania fits into the overall context, having regional conditions: in summer temperature rise is recorded, while in the north-west Europe the highest rise is expected in the cold season. According to estimates presented in the IPCC AR4 (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change - "Climate Change 2007: Synthesis Report" [7]), Romania will register higher temperature compared to 1980 to 1990, similar to the whole of Europe, existing little difference according to the period: • From 0.5 ° C to 1.5 ° C for the period 2020 to 2029; • Between 2.0 ° C and 5.0 ° C from 2090 to 2099. From the pluviometric perspective, most climate models forecast for the period 2090-2099 serious drought in the summer for Romania, especially in the south and south-east (with negative deviations from the period 1980-1990 more than 20%). Rainfall and cold seasons are reduced and uncertainty is higher [2]. Romania's National Strategy on Climate Change 2013 - 2020 was adopted in Romania and provides two main directions: a. To reduce emissions of greenhouse gases and b. The use of natural tanks for carbon dioxide sequestration. This direction is supported by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) in Romania. As presented in the literature [8], the average air temperature increase, mainly in recent decades is clear confirmation of climate change taking place in Romania, but also globally. This increase in temperature leads to imbalances in economic sectors (eg: forestry, agriculture, tourism, beekeeping, insurance industry, et.al.). For some sectors, such as tourism, these climate changes are positive leading to improved financial situation, according to various indicators. In contrast, for other fields (for example: winter sports), these changes are perceived negatively. Surely for the human body, 150
climate change leads to imbalance [9]. Climate change leads to strong reactions chain triggered which may endanger the equilibrium of fragile systems. Natural disasters are significant threats in socio-economic terms of the country. 2.3 Assessment of the national situation Climate changes are felt in Romania, because these climate changes have as the main factor greenhouse gases emissions. The condition of GHGs in Romania is shown in Figure 1 (a) and Figure 1 (b) [10]. The analysis of these figures highlights that the total GHG emission level has had a downward evolution since 2006 in Romania, which has been an improvement. Figure 1b shows the situation of Romania’s GHG emission by sector of activity. The energy sector is thus developing the largest quantity of GHG per year, with a slight decrease since 2006. In Romania, the data related to the years 2000–2011 are presented by the National Institute of Statistics (NIS). For the years 2012–2014, NIS does not present the data on GHG emissions.
Fig.1.(a) Total GHG emission including Land use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF ) and exclusive LULUCF in Romania. (b) GHG emission by sector of activity in Romania (in thousand tons)
Carbon dioxide is the gas with the largest share of GHG [11] .For Romania, the share of carbon dioxide emissions is presented in table 1. Thus, the energy sector should be improved to reduce emissions. This sector can be improved through the use of renewable energy. Analysis of renewable energy sources in Romania is shown in table 2 [10, 12]. It is observed that carbon dioxide emissions are produced mainly by: electricity and heat production, transportation, and industrial sector. The “Total” line of table 1 comprises the net quantity of CO2 (sequestrations and emissions) and quantities of CO2, CH4 and N2O (emissions) for the LULUCF sector. Tab.1.Total GHG emission (thousand tons) Type/Year
2000
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
Energy Energy Industry sector Waste Total LULUCF
104.338,29 92.894,36 16.826,43
113.521,44 96.602,11 18.223,69
118.038,25 99.709,24 19.355,61
117.506,44 96.123,48 20.624,73
116.165,41 95.965,23 17.945,58
92.055,61 82.877,82 11.253,06
90.808,74 79.624,01 12.414,25
98.054,21 86.320,46 12.605,14
5.157,70 -29.219,59
5.539,28 -28.062,87
5.765,54 -27.862,84
5.602,38 -25.218,88
5.677,92 -24.312,00
5.703,17 -28.254,61
5.715,62 -25.830,81
5.366,48 -25.304,94
Renewable energy sources contribute to the diversification of energy sources available and most likely will gradually replace fossil fuel sources of energy which is continuously decreasing according to existing national data [12]. Using these sources instead of fossil fuels can considerably reduce greenhouse gases and especially carbon dioxide emissions. The situation of solar energy, wind energy, municipal waste, biomass and geothermal sources is listed below [13]. Solar energy used in the production of energy comes from the sun in the form of solar radiation. Romania is located in the European B area in terms of sunshine (1200-1600 kWh / m² per year). The
151
highest point registers a value of 1350 kWh / m² per year (Romanian Plain). The total capacity installed in Romania at the end of 2012 is 41 MW [13]. In terms of wind energy, the share is below the European average, and in Romania is covering 5% of the total energy. Mountain winds are a main direction in this regard, which can exceed 8m / s. This source is also supported by the Romanian seaside, with a wind speed of about 6 m / s [13]. Biomass is renewable energy source that is obtained from urban waste, plants, animal waste and sun. Romania has a potential biomass of 7.6 million tones [14]. Geothermal energy is represented in Romania by 66 geothermal water sources. Geothermal energy sources have an annual potential of approximately 10 * 106GJ equivalent of 240,000 tep [13]. In Romania municipal waste recycling rate reaches the maximum value in 2011, representing 7% of the total waste collected. Municipal landfills contain high levels of organic and inorganic pollutants arising from chemical biological and physical processes taking place. The amount of municipal waste collected per capita, in 2011, in Romania is 239 kg, down 22% compared to 2008. In the EU-28, the amount of waste for 2012 is 488 / kg / per capita, down 5% compared to 2008 [10]. Analyzed data on GHG emissions in Romania demonstrates that it remains a gap of at least 50 million tons of carbon dioxide equivalent annually, as the difference between the target value set by the Kyoto Protocol and total emissions in the commitment period of the 2020 convention, even considering the possible uncertainties associated to inventories and projections of GHG emissions. 3. Renewable energy in Romania - summary, directions and perspectives Climate change will further affect Romania, creating also opportunities such as using renewable sources [15, 16]. These opportunities also contribute to the development of organizations that genuinely generate excessive pollution [17]. Data presented in the second section highlights a number of directions and perspectives: • The need for diversity of energy sources, renewable energy development; • Adapting the infrastructure to climate change; • Compliance with public health, including animal health; • Use incentives to reduce water consumption in human and industrial activities; • Improvement of ecosystems (conservation and restoration of diversity, reduce negative effects on existing species); • Adaptation could lead to a complex restructuring of economic sectors that are exposed directly to weather conditions (eg agriculture, forestry, fisheries, and tourism) [18]. Climatic conditions can be sustained by developing systemic outlined directions that are aligned to international strategies. References [1] International Energy Agency, Energy technology perspectives – Harnessing Electricity’s Potential, 2014. [2] Ministry of Environment of Romania, Romanian national climate change strategy for 2013-2020, http://www.mmediu.ro/beta/wp-content/uploads/2013/10/2013-10-01_SNSC.pdf [3] A. Zia, Post-Kyoto Climate Governance - Confronting the politics of scale, ideology, and knowledge, British Library, 2013. [4] Y. Seo and S.M. Kim, Estimation of greenhouse gas emissions from road traffic: A case study in Korea, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, vol. 28, pp. 777–787, 2013. [5] European Commission, The 2020 climate http://ec.europa.eu/clima/policies/package/index_en.htm.
152
and
energy
package,
[6] European Commission, Life and Climate change mitigation, Publications Office of the European Union, 2015. [7] Intergovernmental Panel on climate change, Climate Change 2007: Synthesis Report, https://www.ipcc.ch/publications_and_data/ar4/syr/en/main.html [8] G. Teodorescu and C. Oros, Development of education on environmental and climate change impacts in Romania, Procedia Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 2, pp. 5502–5506, 2010. [9] M. Radoane, F. Obreja, I. Cristea and D. Mihaila, Changes in the channel-bed level of the eastern Carpathian rivers: Climatic vs. human control over the last 50 years, Geomorphology, vol. 193, pp. 91–111, 2013. [10] L. I. Cioca, L. Ivascu, E. C. Rada, V. Torretta and G. Ionescu, The Study of Sustainable Development and Technological Impact on CO2 Reducing Conditions: Case Study of Romania, Sustainability Journal 2015, vol. 7, pp. 1637-1650, doi:10.3390/su7021637, 2015. [11] J.R. Duflou, J.W. Sutherland, D. Dornfeld, C. Hermann, J. Jeswiet, S. Kara, M. Hauschild and K. Kellens, Towards energy and resource efficient manufacturing: A processes and systems approach, CIRP Ann–Manuf. Technol., vol. 61, pp. 587–609, 2012. [12] International Energy Agency. IEA Statistics. C02 Emissions from Fuel Combustion, 2013 Edition. Available online: http://www.iea.org/publications/freepublications/publication/ co2emissionsfromfuelcombustionhighlights2013.pdf (accessed on 2 November 2014). [13] V. Campeanu, S. Pencea, Renewable energy sources in Romania: from a “paradise” of investors to a possible abandon or to another boom? The impact of a new paradigm in Romanian renewable sources policy, Procedia Economics and Finance, vol. 8, pp. 129 – 137, 2014. [14] E.C. Rada, I.A. Istrate, V. Panaitescu, M. Ragazzi, T. Cirlioru and T. Apostol, A comparison between different scenarios of Romanian municipal solid waste treatment before landfilling. Environmental Engineering Management Journal, vol. 9(4), pp. 589-596, 2010. [15] M. Cioca, L.I. Cioca and S.C. Buraga, Spatial [Elements] decision support system used in disaster management, IEEE International Conference on Digital Ecosystems and Technologies, pp. 235-240, 2007. [16] R.I. Moraru, G.B. Băbuţ, L.I. Cioca, Human Reliability Model and Application for Mine Dispatchers in Valea Jiului Coal Basin, Proceedings of the International Conference on Risk management, assessment and mitigation, pp. 45-50, 2010. [17] L. Ivascu and L.I. Cioca, Opportunity risk: integrated approach to risk management for creating enterprise opportunities, Advances in Education Research, v. 49, n. 1, pp. 77-80, 2014. [18] Artene A., Domil A., Duran V., Duran D., Customizing Environmental Management Systems to Optimize Environmental Costs in Romanian SME , 20th IBIMA conference on Entrepreneurship Vision 2020: Innovation, Real Estate investment, Development Sustainability, and Economic Growth, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia.
153
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Stefan Lazarević and Orthodox Nobility in Transylvania Stefan Staretu University of Bucharest, 4-12 Regina Elisabeta Bd., Bucharest, Romania,
[email protected],
[email protected] Keywords: Lazarević, Serbia, Lazar, Despotate of Srem, Beograd, Sion
Abstract. The complexity of the relations between the Serbians and the kingdom of Hungary is determined by the position of Stefan Lazarević in the Order of the Dragon. The competition between the Hungarian knights, amongst them, the ancestors of the group that propelled Janko Hunyadi as regent, and head of the Crusade, is centered on the fame of the sacrifice of Lazar at Vidovdan, one of the first monarchs who died in the crusade on the battlefield in Europe. This led to the propagation of the model of Knighthood, which was cultivated by Lazarević, and to the spread of the model of the orthodox crusader that continued with Stefan the Great. The genealogical connections between Mircea the Old, Lazarević and the family of Janko that can be deduced, explains this entire affair. This explains the share of a chivalric model in Europe. And led to the fame of Serbian knighthood that was perpetuated by Vlad Tepes and than by Stephan the Great, thought of as king of Serbia and Moldavia. 1. Introduction The complexity of Stefan Lazarević’s relations with Hungary is not yet fully analyzed. The raise of Sigismund of Luxembourg on the throne of Hungary and then of the Germanic Roman Empire, led to the founding of the Order of the Dragon in 1409 [1], and to the appointment of Stefan Lazarević as prime knight. He had a palace in Buda, and was involved, apparently, in the appointment of a second rank knights of the Order, and in encouraging ennoblements in Transylvania, ennoblements of Orthodox Romanians. Manuel Paleolog, brother of Constantin Dragaş, relative of Janko’s as well, as demonstrated on the heraldry of Veluce(see Fig.1), is a monarchical model for Sigismund, the King of Hungary.
Fig.1.Nobles with halo in Veluce, Serbia (personal photo collection)
He was marked by the death of Prince Lazarus, the first monarch killed in battle by the Saracens, Sigismund that ennobles Lazarević’s relatives (future Corvine or Silaghieşti which were closely related to the Draculeşti via the Impaler) and many nobles from Maramures bound to Moldavia still apart. 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
154
ICSSS 2015
2. Sigismund of luxemburg, stefan lazarevic and matthias corvinus Mr. Mihailo Popovic, Ioan Dragan (Orthodox nobility in Transylvania and Ciulan-More family [2] ) and Adrian Andrei Rusu (which clarified the issue of the family of Janko Hunyadi[3]) wrote about this issue too. It is a phenomenon that has not been analyzed in detail so far. Stefan Lazarević’s ties with Hungary were marked by Constantine of Kostenec[4], and presented in their genealogic implications by Prof. Bojovic[5]. Manuel Palaeolog took the Byzantine model to the west, and the nearest monarch to the catalyst event, the death of the monarch bearing the name of the first resurrected from the dead, is Sigismund. Sigismund creates a chivalric order to structure the fight due to the death of this monarch. It includes Lazarus’ relatives, the Bessarabs, the Drăculeşti, the Silagheşti, the Corvines, etc ... all to create a real noble monarchical model. The raise of Matthias Corvinus to the Hungarian throne comes after more stages: the end of the Lazarević dynasty (and the return of nobility initiated in Lazarević’s Belgrade to the Hungarians, hence the support of this nobility, which created pressures for confiscation of Lazarević properties by the Corvines, given to the Brankovicis, nobility that preferred Janko as successor of the Lazarević, as shown in Serbian ballads), the fall of Serbia, and a new wave of refugees (the Iakşicis) and oscillations of Wallachia. Matthias Corvinus annexed to his ideology many elements of the Serbian and Byzantine imperial ideology. Following Sigismund, a last remnant of European knight nobility, heralding the end of the 100 years war and the opening of the late crusade front, after Kossovopolije, Matthias brings Manuil's model (possibly related to the former one, as I could see, properties conceded by Helen Dragas’s son to Janko in Mesembria, in the Bulgarian nobility area with reference to Silaghieş and Corvine genealogy) in Hungary, which turns into the last European bastion of medieval royalty, unscathed by the renaissance influence (at least initially). The Serbian Despotate of Srem, founded by Matthias Corvinus to perpetuate the existence of the Serbian medieval crown is little known in the Serbian and Romanian historiography. Interesting for the total attempt to perpetuate the medieval Serbian monarchy under Hungarian suzerainty, and to perpetuate the idea on recapturing Serbia starting from Hungary, this despotate must be analyzed from its political foundations point of view. This new Serbia ideologue was Maxim, the author of canonizations. Matthias Corvinus was interested, just like Janko, in Serbian policy in a broader context related to crusade fighting and in a context centered on a possible although difficult to reconstitute inheritance right in Serbia. From these bases available, until Matthias 's right to create a Serbia, and to the Brankovic group conflict with Wallachia nobles led by Mihnea the Bad, also related to Draculesti traditions, so in the area of interest of the Lazarević, there is a complex process that shows a state fluctuation and pragmatism. 3. Stefan lazarevici and order of the dragon Serbia’s evolution under Stefan Lazarević is important, when Serbian-Hungarian relations were founded, whose purpose was the Despotate of Srem. Stefan Lazarević was integrated into a Western feudal space, and triggered the integration of Wallachia leaders, his relatives. Initiated in Order of the Dragon, prime baron of the kingdom, and creator of a sacred Serbian hagiography and topography of old Christian essence, Stephen Lazarević must be seen as an enlightened complex prince, who, although forced to perform humiliating actions, due to necessary alliances, eventually appears as an inspired politician that created stability and healed Serbia after more psychological than real Kossovopolije defeating. Stefan Lazarević relations with Hungarian nobles, many of them Orthodox from Haţeg, and the influence that his chivalrous model will have on Janko will lead to respect of Hungarian nobility for the Serbian chivalry traditions and Serbian opening to Hungarian political action . It is a distant era from the era of Dushan, when the Angevine royal armies undertook genocide in northern Serbia, because an important role is played by Sigismund of Luxembourg too. To analyze this period, beyond Serbian sources, chronicles or Kostenec, the Order of the Dragon status must be analyzed, 155
Lazarević 's properties of Transylvania, properties upon which Janko that will have his right (confiscating them from the Brankovic) through a possible but difficult to determine genealogical connection (maybe Janko ’s mother is a Kantakuzena of those related to Brankovic, later). The impact orthodoxy had in chivalrous developments in Hungary, involving Lazarević in the top Hungarian policy is important. The Brankovic, after Lazarević adopted the idea of Ottoman alliance and double suzerainty, idea encountered in our country too. This destroyed the noble knight's conscience of Serbia, which can be seen from the ballads that show Vuk Brankovic Lazarus’ traitor at Kossovopolije, and that consider Janko direct successor of Lazarević. Serbian despots actions during Janko’s rule will be devastating for Serbia. Belgrade disposal and destruction of everything Lazarević had created there triggered a reaction among some Serbian nobles, which, joining Hategan nobility involved by Sigismund in organizing the city (those Hungarian knights about which Kostenec says that lamented on Lazarević death and who in Belgrade were his servants), a reaction that lowered the Brankovic popularity. The entry of Stephen Tomasevic in Serbia, and the expulsion of Stefan Brankovic, a relative of Skanderbeg, the Albanian who built towers in Chilandari, and then the Turkish reaction came as support of Brankovic destroyed Serbia. The Brankovic have made loyal people in Wallachia belonging to Vlad the Monk, Draculescu collaborator, and the old front Lazarević was retained by Moldova of Stefan the Great, who donated to Chilandari against the orders of the sultana and his adopted son (a noble forcefully become monk who then killed his opponent and took his wife, initially made by Stefan to do it, as Drăculesc, but betraying his own line of dynasties). Stefan becomes ruler in Moldova two years before the fall of the Serbian Despotate. The exile of Stephen, his death, and the coming to the throne of Jovan who received the title of noble of the Hungarian kingdom and of despot is also worth more attention. I find him the last ruler of Serbia, with potential, after Lazarević . A strong man with deep bases of family tradition, a man marked by the model of Ştefan Prvovencani, as his brother become Maxim, ordained in Belgrade by the Metropolitan belonging now to Constantinople, of Moldavia, was marked by the model of St. Sava. This is the period when Maxim manages to create again the tradition of holy despots, which during the Brankovic at the south of Danube had disappeared. It is amazing how they managed to return to the Serbian dynastic cult under Matthias Corvinus, a man interested in Byzantine succession, exactly when in Moldova the holy king model and the Constantinople pattern know a new development. Jovan is a loyal ally of Matthias Corvinus, and he is involved in his unfortunately vague campaigns. Jovan's reign, however, is essential in understanding the situation in Wallachia after the Craioveşti coming to the throne. Offspring of nobles close to the court of Stefan Lazarević with his father and grandfather raised in the environment of canonizations made by Stefan Lazarević after the battle of Kossovopolije, so being educated during the development of the Vidovdan cult, education seen in the action of his father, Janko de Hunedoara, who wants to repeat the battle of Kosovo to avenge Lazarus (to whose nation he was connected via unknown ties but proven by Tismana donations, which say explicitly that provide help to Tismana for the founder right of Lazarus and Stefan Lazarević, so as their relative) Matthias Corvinus is interested in bringing in Hungary the rest of holy Serbian kings. He gives Maxim as feud Srem, which is no longer Serbian since the time of Stefan Dragutin and he built there Krusedol. Maxim will come again with the relics of Serbian kings, his ancestors in the north of the Danube, in 1494, after the fall of Srem under the Ottomans, shortly after Matthias Corvinus lost his throne, sign of less Hungarians’ interest for this area. 4. Maxim brankovoc and his role Then he will come with the relics in the north of the Danube, in Targoviste, at the Court of Radu the Great, who, after the dissolution of Maxim’s bishopric in Belgrade, founded by the same Matthias Corvinus (marked as his father by the fame of Lazarević ’s Belgrade where they were formed, considered new Zion and new Jerusalem, reason why Janko wanted to defend his relative 156
Lazarević ’s city, as if the battles fought by Janko followed the symbolic sacred Serbian geography map as Lazarević did: Kossovopolije and Belgrade, Krusevac and Ravanica where Janko stopped as it is known). This comeback with the relics in the north of the Danube will lead to the interest of Wallachia’s people interest for the idea of Serbian holy king, and Neagoe Basarab’s dynastic mausoleum's construction in Arges, under the signs of the saint Tsars Lazarus, Simeon and Sava, as archetype and monarchical model. The impact of Stephen Lazarević monarchical ideology reminds us of an action of Corvine chivalrous dynastic fiction enrichment with direct Serbian sources. Stephen Lazarević was the creator of the Vidovdan and Tsar Lazarus’s cults and member of the Order of the Dragon which included Sigismund, closely related to Janko’s family. Vlad the Impaler tries to imitate Milos Obilici, in the famous night attack, killing the sultan, and Stephen the Great built at Razboieni his famous church. It’s a dynastic ideology about the myth of the Kossovo battle, transmitted to this nation by Voico, by knights, because Vlad Dracul was also Janko ’s relative, that Voico, maybe nephew or cousin of Janko ’s who joins him to Kossovopolije, but also by Janko himself. Janko battles topography is taken from the poetic and sacred fiction created by Stephen Lazarević in Belgrade. It is an extraordinary, total fiction, and through the Corvines, the sacred dynasty of the Lazarević acquires its glorious period. This despot ate persistence in the Wallachia dynastic fiction can be seen in the memory of that time in the Wallachia boyars’ minds. Voico is attested in 1407 in Wallachia, in 1409 in Transylvania, reinforced by Sigismund of Luxembourg in Hunedoara, who in 1408 founded the Order of the Dragon, including Lazarević and Pipo Spano. Janko goes for apprenticeship to both of them. After that, another Voico, maybe son of the first Voico still in Wallachia, takes Vlad Dracul to Nuremberg to let him join the Order of the Dragon. His connection with the first one, reinforced by Sigismund, the head of the Order of the Dragon, in Hunedoara, shows us a link between the two. This Voico’s successor is Voico Dobrita, an important assistant of Vlad the Impaler’s. Janko makes donation in Tismana, to Nicodemus, Lazarus’ brother, and in Serbian ballads Janko appears as Lazarević ’s son and in the same sources Mircea is Janko ’s godfather. So Voico is Lazarević relative, maybe from the first generation of Dragons. It can show that Voico’s family came to Wallachia with Ana Lazarević, Mircea’s mother. There were strong connections between them. Or maybe even having estates in Wallachia and Transylvania in 1407 and 1409, and even he was close to Sigismund, he lived in Belgrade. Perhaps Slovo Ljubve, written in 1409 is a proof of pain at separation from Stefan and Voico’s relocation to Transylvania, sample of chivalrous eulogy addressed to him and Janko ’s relationship with Stefan Lazarevići propelled the former in front of the despotate’s interests in Serbia. Janko Hunyadi’s attachment to Belgrade, called holy city and New Jerusalem in Kostenec’s hagiography, is explained by his growing up here and by his father’s kinship with Stefan Lazarevići, who inspired this choice. Perhaps Voico’s properties enriched when the city of Belgrade was taken over by Lazarević. Being his close counsellor, Voico received the village of Voica, near Belgrade and other properties too. He also received properties in Hateg and Wallachia [along with other Serbian nobles like Candea or Balea, hence their churches in Lazarević’s era specific style]. The Serbian hagiographic model was very important in Janko de Hunedoara’s formation. The fall of the Serbian despotate under Ottoman rule and Byzantium and Serbia dissolution led to the necessity of dynastic and state succession to continue the two destroyed countries, the former related to the Constantinople symbolic potential and the latter related to Serbia. One can say that Matei Corvin, looking like a Byzantine emperor in the image of Roman Caesar in his portraiture, and as successor of Serbian despots, his ancestors, was chosen by the European politics world to continue his succession. The fact that Matthias Corvinus brings the Brankovic to Hungary gives them lands and becomes then their sovereign during the last Serbian despot canonizations, of nemanide tradition, shows us his conscious attempt to preserve by own kinship with the Brankovic this Serbian medieval will, of sacred kingship. After Hungary, the Brankovic, led by 157
Maxim, go to Wallachia, where other Corvine relatives were waiting for them. The kinship goes on: the Draculesti related to the Szylaghiesti, like the Corvines. Through women, the Draculesti can be related to the Corvines. However this is just a genealogical speculation, which can provide hypotheses for future research. Serbia created an essential monarchic model, based on nobility, power and sanctity. This model continued in Hungary through Voica family. These aspects clear up other issues too, such as the genealogy of the first Corvines. 5. Serbia and holy dynasty The history of the Serbians in their relations with Hungary after the Battle of Kossovopolije has not been written sufficiently detailed yet. The dynamics of this nation, during the decay of its tsarate, after the time related to Dushan’s influence, including Moldavia foundation, resulted in accepting many Serbian nobles in Hungary. Stefan Lazarević had strong influence in Hungary. This influence led to the ennoblement of many Orthodox nobles by the first member of the Order of the Dragon, The Serbian despot. These nobles, ennobled by Lazarević led to Janko Hunyadi’s position of the strongest man in Hungary and then to the Corvine monarchy. However, genealogy cannot fully explain the Hungarian king rise. In addition, geographical origin cannot understand the symbolic geography of the battles fought by Hunyadi. Stefan Lazarević’s international influences, Mircea the Elder’s ascension to an important role, will be succeeded by Corvine ennoblements. Matthias Corvine brought great Serbian noblemen in Transylvania, and he donated them lands in Arad and Timisoara. This policy succeeds Sigismund’s policy to donate to Baia Mare or Satu Mare or Aiud, properties to Lazarević, effect of his great importance. Janko Hunyadi didn’t go incidentally to Kossovopolije. Matthias Corvinus didn’t bring the Brankovic’s to Buda to create a state for them. Relations between Gheorghe Brankovic and Janko Hunyadi, of collaboration, unfortunately, sometimes inconsistent, are followed by Matthew’s relations with the Brankovic. It is interesting that Hungarian nobles competed among themselves to be anointed knights by Lazarević. The Brankovici saved by Mathia will change Moldavia’s image until Lapusneanu, through Elena’s marriage to Petru Rares and Neagoe’s to Milita. Maxim Brankovici influence in Transylvania is overwhelming. Serbia comes with the idea of sacred dynasty. From Saint Sava, who, through these canonizations integrates the Western monarchical idea based on family nobility and kingdom following the universal love model based on hesychasm, until Matthias Corvine, who seeks to canonize his father, after Serbian royalty influence, which he felt directly, inviting Maxim to Budapest and Neagoe Basarab integrated in the sacred Serbian dynasty and then he is ready for canonization through Gavriil Protul’s work[6], from Matthias Corvinus’ Serbian mercenaries to Serbian nobles who helped Stefan at Razboieni [called Huszar], we have only one guideline. Stefan Lazarević’s influence is overwhelming. Having great fame related to the Kossovopolije battle, when his father died as a martyr king, he was integrated into the Order of the Dragon on the first position. Aiming at upgrading and integration in the order [1], he contributed to the crystallization of a group of orthodox nobles leading to the appointment of Matthias Corvine Hungarian king. Serbia is a source of monarchical, noble and religious ideal, Moldavia’s foundation was possible after 1346, one year [7] after the empire proclamation by Dushan [5]. Ştefan Lazarević continues this tradition of the holy lineage and canonizes his martyr father. Sigismund of Luxemburg is a complex dynast. Interested in orthodoxy, he attempts to refocus the West to his Orthodox background. References [1] M. Popovic, The Order of the Dragon and Serbian Despot Stefan Lazarevic, in Emperor Sigismund and the orthodox world, Austrian Academy of Sciences, ed. Ekaterini Mitsiou, Verlag der Osterreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Vienna, pp. 103-106, 2010.
158
[2] I. Drăgan, Un model de ascensiune socială în Transilvania voievodală:Ciulanii, în Arhiva Genealogică, 1994, 1(VI),1-2, Institutul de istorie A.D. Xenopol, Iasi, 1994. [3] A. A. Rusu, Ioan de Hunedoara Clujeană, 1999.
i românii din vremea sa: studii, Editura Presa Universitară
[4] K. Kostenecki, Zitija Despot Stefan Lazarevic, Manasija, 2011. [5] B. I. Bojović, L’Ideologie Monarchique dans les Hagio-Biographies Dynastiques du Moyen Age Serbe, Orientalia Christiana Analecta 248, Pontifcio Istituto Orientale, Roma, 1995. [6] Gavriil Protul, Viaţa şi traiul sfinţeniei sale Părintelui nostru Nifon, Patriarhul arigradului, Carele a strălucit între multe patimi şi ispite în arigrad şi în ara Muntenească/ Life and living his holiness Our Father Niphon , Patriarch of Constantinople , who shone among many passions and temptations in Constantinople and Country Munteneasca, available on http://saraca.orthodoxphotos.com /biblioteca/viata_ sf_nifon_patriarhul.htm. [7] Ş. S. Gorovei, Întemeierea Moldovei:probleme controversate/Moldavia Foundation: controversial issues, Alexandru Ioan Cuza University Publisher, Iasi, pp. 24, 1997.
159
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Correlation Analysis of the Per Capita GDP and the Community Service Facilities Allocation——A Survey of 7023 Communities in ten Cities of Sichuan Province Guangchuan Pana,*, Wei Songb, Haopeng Zhangc Business School, Sichuan University, Chengdu, 610065, China a
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected] *Guangchuan Pan
Keywords: Community construction, Community service facilities, Social sciences.
Abstract. With the improvement of people's living standards, the more community’s service facilities are required by residents. Community service facilities play an important role to the community residents’ living quality improvements. At present, regional differences are existed in Sichuan (China) community service facilities allocation. Through the investigation of 7023 communities in ten cities of Sichuan province, we can know the specific community service facilities allocation status in different regions, then using the per capita GDP as reference to research the correlation with the community service facilities’ various target coverage. It can obtain the specific prediction rules and contribute to the coordinative development of urban-rural area. 1. The introduction The living standards of Chinese citizen have a great improvement since the Chinese Economic Reform (1978). The national New Urbanization Planning (2014-2020) declared that “enlarge the rural public service coverage rate, complete the social security system covering both urban and rural residents, promote the social security system linking urban and rural, and accelerate to establish the sustainable public service system covering urban and rural area under government-led ". The planning makes it clearer of the future development direction in the process of urbanization and promoting the balanced development of the urban and rural public services. From many literatures, we have known that the community is a basic place of public services [1]; the gaps already exist between urban and rural areas, between different regions, and between different types of communities [2]. 2. Problem statement Through the investigation of some communities in Sichuan province, we have found that there exist dramatically gaps in different areas and diverse community. In order to narrow the regional gaps, Sichuan government puts forward the policy which is the unity development of city and countryside. Now it has been many years after the policy have been implementing, but there are less researches and studies about the effect and result of the equalization coordinative development of urban-rural area’s policy [3]. So it is necessary to investigate fully and research the present situation in the community. The per capita GDP is an important index of regional economic development level, so we can use GDP to measure the living level of an area. We have the common sense that the community service facilities are related to the people's living standards. In that way, we can use the per capita GDP represent the current situation of people’s living standard if GDP has the correlation with the 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
160
ICSSS 2015
regional community service facilities. So this paper researches the correlation of the per capita GDP and the Community service facilities allocation. 3. Related notion: Connotations of community public service facilities From the macro perspective, urban and rural community public service facilities, in accordance with articles in Code of Urban Residential Areas Planning and Design（GBJ137-90） and Town and Village Planning Standard（GB50188-93）, could be classified into eight sections which are the medical care, educational institutions, culture and sports, commercial services, municipal public work, public administration and others. From the micro perspective, it contains the community service station, old people’s day care centre, nursery and kindergarten facilities for children, one-stop service hall, bank and post office, labor employment and insurance service, community supermarket, police office, library, and community health service station etc[4]. In order to know the current situation of community public service facilities in Sichuan province, the survey, at present, have selected indexes of them with representativeness, operability and comparability, which cover almost all aspects of community public service. Indexes selected in this survey (refer with: table 1) are community service station, old people’s day care centre, and nursery and kindergarten facilities for children, labor employment and insurance service, police office, library, and community health service station[5,6]. By utilizing indexes mentioned above comprehensively, this survey managed to investigate the ongoing situations of community public service facilities in cities. Tab.1.The indexes of the community service facilities allocation perspective
All indexes
Indexes selected in this paper
medical care, educational institutions, culture and sports, Macro commercial services, municipal public work, public
community service station, old
perspective administration
people’s day care centre, nursery and
he community service station, ld people’s day care centre,
kindergarten facilities for children,
nursery and kindergarten facilities for children, one-stop
labor employment and insurance
service hall, bank and post office, labor employment and
service, police office, library,
insurance service, community supermarket, police office,
community health service station
Micro perspective library, and community health service station etc
4. The detail of the correlation analysis 4.1 The coverage rate of community public service facilities in ten cities In order to get the coverage rate of community public service facilities, we have an investigation of the 7023 samples in Sichuan different ten cities. Through the investigation of community service facilities from the micro indexes in Sichuan province, we summarized the coverage rate in different cities (refer with: table 2).
161
Tab.2.The coverage rate of community public service facilities in ten cities of Sichuan province Different cities in Sichuan
Regional capita GDP (Billion)
Chengdu Zigong Luzhou
per capita GDP
A
910.889
63977
3145
91.96%
9.63%
32.62%
80.32%
70.62%
97.46%
78.44%
100.16
36745
480
82.71%
8.13%
28.13%
49.38%
45.83%
84.79%
66.04%
114.048
26848
495
78.99%
11.52%
39.80%
59.19%
44.44%
84.85%
63.64%
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Panzhihua
80.088
65001
322
91.61%
17.08%
37.89%
76.40%
68.01%
97.83%
78.88%
Neijiang
106.934
28735
439
61.96%
8.66%
42.60%
42.82%
63.78%
77.22%
61.73%
Leshan
113.479
34863
474
75.74%
4.85%
30.59%
45.99%
41.35%
85.44%
58.65%
Nanchong
132.855
21059
506
61.26%
9.88%
42.29%
47.43%
41.30%
69.96%
58.30%
Guangan
83.514
25933
422
86.02%
7.11%
24.88%
41.47%
47.63%
90.05%
58.53%
Dazhou
124.541
22632
501
72.26%
18.16%
41.32%
35.13%
33.93%
67.86%
42.71%
Liangshan 121.440 26556 239 67.36% 3.77% 27.62% 17.57% 52.72% 64.85% 55.65% * A~H respectively represent to Total number of investigated community (A), community service station(B), old people’s day care centre(C), nursery and kindergarten facilities for children(D), labor employment and insurance service(E), police office(F), Community library(G), community health service station(H)
From the table 2, we can obtain that the coverage rate is high in community service station, labor employment and insurance service, police office, library, and community health service station, the library’s coverage rate is more than 80% declaring that the majority of the community have been equipped with the community public service facilities. But on the contrary, old people’s day care centre and nursery and kindergarten facilities for children is low, the highest coverage rate is only 42.60%. On the region’s differences respective, the community public service facilities’ coverage rate in Chengdu is generally higher than other cities, the community library coverage reached high to 97.46% and the community service stations reached 91.96%. On the regional per capita GDP’s respective, the coverage of each index of the highest city (Panzhihua) are in high level, such as, the community health service station coverage reached to 78.88%, labor employment and social security service facilities coverage reached to 76.4%, But there is generally lower in the lowest per capita GDP city (Nanchong), for example, the police room equipped with coverage rate is only 41.3%. 4.2 The principle of correlation analysis Correlation analysis is an important content of Statistics, and the correlation mainly inspects the connection between the two variables [7]. The calculation formula is referred as follows. (ⅰ) Correlation coefficient calculation formula σ2 ∑ ( X − X )(Y − Y ) (1) r = XY = σ XσY ∑ ( X − X )2 ∑ (Y − Y )2 n
X =
∑X i =1
i
n
(2)
n
Y =
∑Y i =1
n
j
(3)
162
The Eq. (1) is complex to calculate, we are more commonly use its simple calculation method. n∑ XY − ∑ X ∑ Y σ2 (4) r = XY ≈ 2 2 σ XσY n∑ X 2 − ( ∑ X ) n∑ Y 2 − ( ∑ Y ) (ⅱ) Linear regression analysis formula Y = α + β X (5) n XY − ∑ X ∑ Y β= ∑ (6) 2 n∑ X 2 − ( ∑ X )
α = ∑ −β Y
n
∑X n
= Y − β X (7)
4.3 The correlation of GDP per capita and community service facilities First we can get the line graphs (refer with: Fig. 1) in which we can get the general correlation of the above indexes .On the basis of the data in table 2, per capita GDP in each area as independent variable, and community service facilities coverage rate’s index as the dependent variable, put out the relation between the two through correlation analysis [8] (refer with: table 3) by using Eq. (1) to Eq. (4). 0.7
1 0.9
0.6
0.8 0.7
Regional per capita GDP
0.6 0.5
community service station
0.4 0.3 0.2
Regional per capita GDP
0.5 0.4 0.3
old people’s day care centre
0.2 0.1
0.1 0
0 1
3
5
7
9
11
1
3
5
7
9
11
Fig.1.The line graph of per capita GDP with two of the indexes with different correlation
Tab.3.The correlation coefficient of GDP with the seven indexes of service facilities old nursery and correlation Regional communit people’s kindergarte coefficient per y service day care n facilities capita GDP station centre for children Regional per 1 .754* .257 -.107 capita GDP .012 .474 .768 **. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed). *. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2-tailed).
163
labor employment and insurance service
community police office
Communi health service ty library
station
.817**
.776**
.789**
.873**
.004
.008
.007
.001
4.4 The conclusion of the correlation analysis First of all, at the significant levels 0.01, the per capita GDP(X) exists closely correlation with four indexes of the community health service station, labor employment and insurance service, Community library, police office. The degree from high to low is community health service stations (Y1) > labor employment and social security services (Y2) > library (Y3) > police room (Y4). Further, we can get the detail relation using the linear regression analysis in SPSS (refer with: Eq.5, Eq.6, and Eq.7). The relative formulas have been derived as follows. Y1 = 0.423 + ( X /100000 ) *0.623 (Sig=0.001) (8) Y2 = 0.171 + ( X /100000 ) *1.012 (Sig=0.004) (9) Y3 = 0.622 + ( X /100000 ) *0.619 (Sig=0.007)
(10)
Y4 = 0.300 + ( X /100000 ) *0.654 (Sig=0.008)
(11)
At the Significant levels 0.05, we can obtain the relative Eq. about the per capita GDP and community service station (Y5) as follow.
Y5 = 0.588 + ( X /100000 ) *0.568 (Sig=0.013) (12) From the liner regression equations above, we can use them to predict the present situation about community public service facilities’ coverage rate of other cities. For example, the per capita GDP for city Suining(Sichuan, China) is 22517, we can conclude the coverage rate of these index is approximately equal to Y1=54.97%, Y2=37.61%, Y3=74.72%, Y4=43.39%, Y5=65.85%(refer with:Eq.8 to Eq.12). In addition, the per capita GDP(X) hasn’t liner correlation with old people’s day care centre or nursery and kindergarten facilities for children, the correlation coefficient are -0.107 and 0.257, showing that these indexes is not liner related to the per capita GDP. The reasons mainly are two aspects as follows. First of all, the converge rate of these two indexes all are not higher than others, the highest kindergarten and nursery facilities coverage rate is only 42.6% and old people’s day care centre is 18.16%[9]; then, there are many better( than community facilities) retirement organizations and nursery schooles in some communities with high GDP per capita area. 5. Conclusions Through the investigation of the community public service facilities and a correlation analysis of per capita GDP of ten cities in Sichuan province, this survey gets a basic knowledge of the current situation of community public service facilities in Sichuan (China), and at the same time puts forward a reference to the future community construction. through a correlation analysis between city’s average GDP and coverage rate of community public service facilities, this survey gets the conclusion that there is a high correlation between the per capita GDP and five indexes of coverage rate of medical service station, facilities for labor employment and social insurance, library, police office, and community service station, while it is no liner correlation between the per capita GDP and the facilities for old people’s day care centers and the nursery and kindergarten for children. Among the indexes with high degree of correlation, based on the regression analysis, five linear regression equations is worked out, which provide an indication method for predicting overall conditions of communities facility construction in other cities. 6. Acknowledgement This contribution is an output of the project “The social management innovation of the new urban and rural communities in Sichuan province (SC13ZD04)”.
164
References [1] Kardaras D, The potential of Virtual Communities in the Insurance Industry in the UK and Greece, International Journal of Information Management, vol. 23,pp.41-53,2003. [2] Tang, Liyang, The Chinese community Patient’s life satisfaction, assessment of community medical service, and trust in community health delivery system, Health and Quality of Life Outcomes,vol.11,pp.18,2013. [3] keun, Yang jae, The Relationship Among Community Spirit, Community Identification, and Community Loyalty of Online Sports Community User, The Korean Society of Sports Science, vol.22,pp.153-164,2013. [4] Lawthom, Rebecca, Developing learning communities: using communities of practice within community psychology, International Journal of Inclusive Education, vol. 15,pp.153-164, 2011 [5] Kim, Jae woon, A Study on Improvement Plan of the Community Safety Committee for Revitalization of Community Policing, Korean Associating of Public Safety and Criminal Justice Review, vol.21, pp.51-77, 2012. [6] Zhang Lei; Li Guo-qing, Study on Urban Community Self-governance in China: Problems and Solutions, Proceedings of 2013 International Conference on Public Administration (9th), vol.1, pp.189-196, 2013. [7] Weaver, Bruce, Karl L, SPSS and SAS programs for comparing Pearson correlations and OLS regression coefficients, Behavior Research Methods,vol.45, pp.880-895,2013. [8] Huaxin Zhang, Statistic model of PE teaching effect based on software, Journal of Theoretical and Applied Information Technology, vol.49, pp.753-758, 2013. [9] Durrant, Ian; Peterson, Andrew, Pupil and teacher perceptions of community action: an English context, Educational Research, vol.54, pp.259-283, 2012.
165
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Public Service Resources Optimization Research of Chengdu Community Haopeng Zhanga,*, Wei Songb, Guangchuan Panc Business School, Sichuan University, Chengdu, 610065, China a
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected]
Keywords: Public service demand, Resources allocation, Optimization.
Abstract. In recent years, with the improvement of living standards of residents in our city, the aspects of the community residents for materials and cultural is higher and higher. The government has invested a lot of manpower, material resources and financial resources in community construction. However, there has a structural imbalance problem in community public service resources, it shows that government public expenditure is inconsistent with public service demand of community residents. About this point, many investments of researchers found that because of the management system and decision-making mechanism, much public service supply seriously deviate from the needs of community residents [1]. In this paper we will focus on the study of structural imbalance of community public resources. In order to make the resources of every kinds used effectively. 1. Introduction Community public resources have many forms, including physical resources, human resources, cultural resources and information resources. This paper mainly studies from service facilities and service staffing condition, and transfer condition of community fund. With the development of urbanization and the further development of the reforms and open policy the development and construction of city community is facing new challenges, multiple needs and cultural conflicts caused by different strata of the heterogeneity of community, the feeling of insecurity caused by the growth and mobility of population, high-rise residence and small public space reduced the opportunity of residents to communicate with eachother, brings many difficulties to the community construction. Although people's living standard improved, however their requests for better life also raised. Public service resource supply and demand imbalance, can be divided into two aspects, total imbalances and structural imbalance [3]. Total imbalance refers to the supply of public goods is difficult to meet the consumers demand for it and structural imbalance means at the established supply level, because of the difference of supply mode, supply content and supply chain of public resources, there exist big deviation between supply and demand. 2. Present situation of the community public service resources With the development of urbanization, our country attached much importance to the investment of community construction. Although the increase of investment is an important link to improve community public services, but not the only determining factor. According to the theory of public economics, the optimal supply of public goods directly related with public products demand conditions, only to reach the equilibrium of supply and demand of public goods consumers can maximize the utility of public goods. (B. Anthony Atkinson, 1994)[1]. According to the census data of 3,221 communities in Chengdu in 2014 by Sichuan Provincial Civil Affairs Bureau, we analyzed 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
166
ICSSS 2015
the investment of every level of governments on construction of various community facilities in Chengdu. The analysis shows that the government of Chengdu invested 1,192,000,000 RMB in the construction of 3,222 community facilities in 2014, the average investment is about 543,700 RMB every community. The coverage of financial investment is about 52.42%. The basic situation of investment is shown in table 1 below. Tab.1.Investment situation on community facilities of all levels of government Capital investment（billion）
11.92
The total number
community number of
The coverage rate of
of community
capital coverage
capital（%）
3221
1689 个
52.42
In recent years, as people's living standards improved, the requirement for community infrastructure, community neighborhood committees, living environment, transportation and health facilities of residents also increased. In order to improve the living standard of residents, the government invested a lot of money for the construction of community library, "one-stop" service hall, charitable service facilities, elderly day care facilities, kindergarten, employment and social security services, community policing room community health service station and so on. The basic situation of community service facilities construction is shown in table 2 below. Tab.2.Community service facilities construction condition library
"one-stop"
charitable
elderly day
kinderg
employment
security
health
service hall
service
care
arten
and
room
service
facilities
facilities
social
security
stations
facilities Build
3065
2101
783
303
1029
2526
2221
2467
95.16%
65.23%
24.31%
9.41%
31.95%
78.42%
68.95%
76.59%
number
Build rate
3. Demand for public services resources of community residents 3.1 Demand for library In this paper, we investigated 236 residents in the community of Chengdu randomly, according to the survey 184 residents use the community library rarely, however, in the construction of the library, the situation is completely opposite. The data in table 1 shows that the construction of the community library rate reached 95.16%. Most of the community has a library but very few people interested, causing most of the community library vacancy, waste a large amount of resources. Community public resources construction plays an important role in the community construction. However, most residents are reluctant to participate in the construction of community public resources[5]. The government invested much manpower, financial resources in the construction of the community library and other cultural facilities that residents are not interested. The basic situation of community library utilization rate is shown in chart 1 below.
167
Chart.1.Library usage condition
3.2 Demand for elderly day care facilities As medicine continues to advance, the mortality rate of the population decreased and people are living longer, in addition the implementation of family planning policy in our country, lead to the problem of aging population in our country. Recent years, the aging problem is more and more serious, and most of the younger residents tend to work in other cities, the problem of take care of the elderly has caused much attention. According to the survey, 85% residents think the construction of elderly day care facilities is inadequate, 13% residents believe that the construction of elderly day care facilities is adequate, and 2% residents believe that the elderly day care facilities are part of the idle. As is shown in table 1 the construction of elderly day care facilities is far from satisfied. Tab.3.Elderly day care facilities investigation inadequate
adequate
idle
85%
13%
2%
3.3 Demand for employment and social security facilities China is a country with a large population, employment problem is an important issue related to the benefit of every person, along with the accelerated process of urbanization, many of the original farmers become city residents, appeared a lot of farmers concentrated residential areas, reform from villager committee to resident committee etc, so the community employment is particularly important. In the research community about 78.42% of the community built labor employment and social security facilities, however in the investigation on the satisfaction of residents for community employment and social security facilities showed that only 34% of residents are satisfied with the employment and social security facilities, 24% are not satisfied with it and 42% of the residents have no opinion. As is shown in table 4 below. Tab.4.Satisfaction survey of employment and social security facilities satisfied
Have no opinion
unsatisfied
34%
42%
24%
4. The realization path of community public service resources optimization 4.1 Based on the needs of community residents Planning city community public resources need be based on the characteristics of community composition and evaluation of the diverse needs of the community residents which is the foundation to realize the maximum economic benefit and sustainable development of city community [2]. With 168
the development of economy and society, the community residents had new changes on the demand for public goods: The first is that the demand of community residents gradually improve from the low level of survival to the high level of spiritual needs for community public cultural resources, and the original has been unable to meet residents’ growing higher level of demand and emerged supply shortage of cultural resources of public service. The second is that new change on the urban community composition has taken place such as the emergence of laid-off workers and freelancers, the increased number of elderly people and floating population, different requirements of different groups in public cultural resources [4]. The third is that there is a change from "unit people" to “community people”, changing from unit culture to social culture construction emphasizes more importance on public cultural resources in the community, the scientific concept of "people oriented" is come up, and the type of government has also changed from economic efficiency to public service. The plan of public cultural resources in the community should not only meet the current needs of life of most people, also the demand of continuously improving the quality of life of residents from the view of sustainable development, such as the elderly day care facilities, community employment, social security facilities and various cultural services of elderly people etc. Although the plan of community public cultural resources can’t satisfy all the people, meeting the need of most residents in the community and the multiple needs of different groups must be standard. 4.2 Give full play to the guiding function of the government According to a survey, the utilization rate of a large part of facilities which government invested a lot of resources to construct is too low, resulting in the idle resources. There are three main reasons: on the one hand, most of the residents think cultural and sport facilities are not enough and mainly suitable for old people and children; On the other hand, many residents said some of the cultural resources are just a empty shell, such as books in the reading room are too old and the update of equipment in the computer room is too slow; the last is that a lot of cultural resources are suitable for the elderly in the community but too less for other groups. Library, computer rooms and other facilities play an important role in improving the cultural literacy and enriching the cultural life of the community residents and government should give full play to the guiding function to improve the residents' cultural qualities and other aspects of the quality so that they can initiatively use these facilities, reducing the waste of resources and improving the utilization rate of resources. 4.3 Encouraging community residents to participate in planning community public resource The residents have a better understanding for the status of the community and problems and needs faced in planning public resources problems and needs. Only through the communication can the government understand the most urgent demands of the community residents, then reasonably plan and make full use of community public resources [5]. The first is inviting the community residents to participate in community public resource planning through the scientific way and method. Poor access to information is one of the obstacles preventing community residents from participating in planning cultural construction. There are some professional mobilization methods such as sending out questionnaires, calling or visiting community residents and other means to build relationships, conduct propaganda for the residents by setting advisory site in the community and mass media such as establishing community website, exhibition and advertisement, posters and mobile publicity vehicles etc [1]. Of course, it is feasible to change the problem of weak participate of residents by holding resident representative meeting to choose the family or the building representative. The questionnaire survey can be used to listen to the opinions and suggestions to obtain the community residents of cultural resources demand. The second is building new plan mechanism of community culture resources by constructing cooperative and participated culture management mode. The aim of community residents participating in the process and decision of community cultural resources plan is breaking the original model of experts and government planning and allowing the main life body in the community such as local residents, the committee and public resources institution within their area, join consultation for the construction, use ,management, assessment and other 169
issues of community public resources in the community to form the high involvement and decision of community cultural resources planning. References [1] Chunfeng Gao, City community public cultural resources planning research on demand perspective [J]. Economic Research Guide, 2014 (1): 219-221. [2] Wenxia Yan, Ruiping Guo, the construction of infrastructure in the rural community under urbanization [J], China investment in science and technology, 2013, 26: 139. [3] Ying Li, Exploration of "one-stop" mode community public services--Taking Taizhou HL District CD street as an example [J], New Economy, 2014 (8): 2-4. [4] Wanlong Lin, Structural imbalance of supply and demand of rural public service in China: the manifestations and causes [J], Management World, 2007 (9): 62-68. [5] Yan Shi, Anna, Qian Gu, etc, Analysis of health services resource allocation of community in Shanghai [J], China Health Resources, 2010 (6): 285-286.
170
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Research on the Influence of Wechat Advertising on Consumer Buying Behavior Yucheng Zenga, Zhiwei Zhangb,* Business School, Sichuan University, Chengdu, 610065, China a
[email protected],
[email protected]
Keywords: Wechat advertising, Perceived value, Buying behavior.
Abstract. The dissemination of information and development of new media under Web2.0 technology have an influence on buying pattern and behavior. Taking the consumer perceived value as the intermediate variable to establish research model, this paper analyzes the influence of Wechat advertising on consumer buying behavior, and makes recommendations for enterprises to use Wechat advertising effectively for marketing services. 1. Introduction With the changing modes of media communication, advertising has experienced exposed, implantable and interactive three stages from emergence [1]. Advertising competition has already been in saturated state under the traditional media forms, but the emergence of new media opens up a new market for advertisers. The development of Internet and information technology breaks the boundaries of time and space of the information dissemination. In order to provide more accurate marketing services, weibo, BBS and other new media forms integrate the diversified information into advertising to create interaction between enterprises and consumers. Wechat is an instant messaging software launched by Tencent in 2011, which has the greatest influence among the domestic similar products at present, and has become the new favorite after SNS, weibo and other marketing ways. Although Wechat marketing is not yet mature, it has been concerned by advertisers, some companies such as China Merchants Bank, China Southern Airlines, China Unicom have tried to use Wechat to display advertising [2]. Unlike any kind of traditional way of media communication, Wechat changes the way of communication between enterprises and consumers. After advertising information push, enterprises can carry out one-on-one docking according to consumer feedback and devise tailor-made solutions based on consumer demand, this kind of marketing gives consumers the sense of personalized customization [3]. The positioning service function of Wechat provides the accurate marketing platform for enterprises, so they can find "the near one" to provide services and enterprise information for the potential consumers around. The diversified, targeted and interactive information dissemination of Wechat could better grasp the psychological and intuitive feelings of consumers, which brings huge advantages for enterprises to carry out the advertising. 2. Literature review Currently the researches on marketing and advertising of Wechat are mostly qualitative aspects, which analyze the differences between Wechat and traditional advertising, the existing advantages and problems of enterprises that use Wechat advertising. But they have not materially discussed the problems of how enterprises use Wechat advertising in marketing services and the relationship 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
171
ICSSS 2015
between Wechat advertising and consumer behavior, they have also not done quantitative analysis of how to use Wechat advertising to influence the consumer buying behavior. In the domestic researches, Zhou Lei (2012) combined the advantages of communication and dissemination of Wechat, studied the development value and potential of Wechat advertising, she analyzed the difference between the Wechat advertising and traditional advertising, introduced the advantage of Wechat advertising and pointed out the problems to be solved when enterprises use Wechat advertising; Gong Ping (2013) aimed at the special function of Wechat marketing, she analyzed the characteristics of Wechat marketing and put forward some suggestions for the enterprises which use Wechat advertising[3]. This paper analyzes the marketing modes of Wechat advertising, uses consumer perceived value as intermediate variable to establish research model and collects data to do empirical analysis through questionnaire survey method. It studies the influence of Wechat advertising on consumer buying behavior and provides recommendations for enterprises to use Wechat advertising effectively for marketing services. 3. Research design 3.1 Concept definition 3.1.1 Consumer perceived value Consumer perceived value (CPV) is the overall evaluation of the utility of the product or service after consumers weighed the interests and costs perceived at the time of acquisition. Consumer perceived value reflects the subjective perception of the value of the product or service provided by enterprises, which is different from the objective value of the product or service. Michael E. Porter (1985) pointed out in his book Competitive Advantage that the competitive advantage ultimately generates from the value enterprises create for customers. Woodruff (1997) also pointed out “customer perceived value is the next source of competitive advantage.” [4] In the period of intense market competition, consumer perceived value is becoming more and more important for enterprises, and many have applied the idea of the consumer perceived value in the process of operation[5]. Consumer perceived value includes economic value, functional value and psychological value three dimensions[6]. The so-called economic value refers to the value of cost savings for consumers at the realization of the same features, such as the purchase cost, use cost, etc; functional value refers to the value consumers obtained from the features of the product or service, such as quality level; psychological value refers to the consumer satisfaction, such as brand experience. 3.1.2 Consumer buying behavior Consumer buying behavior is the process by which individuals search for, select, purchase, use, and dispose of goods and services, in satisfaction of their needs and wants, which includes subjective psychological activities and objective material activities of consumers (Philip Kotler, 2000). Consumer buying behavior is mainly influenced by external and personal factors, namely consumer buying behavior is the function B = f (T, P) of external determinants (T) and individual determinants (P). External determinants include cultural influence, social influence and family influence and so on, individual determinants include life cycle stages, occupation, income, lifestyle, personality, self-concept and psychological factors, etc. these various factors together influence the consumer buying behavior. American Marketing Association defined the consumer behavior as ”the dynamic interactive process of perception, cognition, behavior and environmental factors, which is the behavior foundation of the transaction function in human life.” Buying behavior is the most key link in the process of consumer behavior, which is the response of consumers under the condition of certain purchase demand and motivation, different demands and motivations will produce different buying behaviours[7].
172
3.2 Model and hypothesis Wechat advertising influences consumer buying behavior through the intermediate variable consumer perceived value, in this model we can construct three variables: Wechat advertising prepositive variable X; consumer perceived value - intermediate variable Y; consumer buying behavior - outcome variables Z. The specific theoretical model is shown in figure 1 below:
Fig.1.Model of the influence of Wechat advertising on consumer buying behavior
3.2.1 The influence of Wechat advertising on consumer perceived value With the rapid development of smart phones and the cross-platform integration spawned by network communication, the external environment is favorable for the development of Wechat. The diversified consumer market segments and convenient information communication are two-way interactive. As a new medium, Wechat has diversified modes of transmission, which makes Wechat become capable of carrying large and colourful advertising information. Wechat can timely grasp fresh advertising information and is proficient in the use of various kinds of advertising symbols, it conveys accurate and detailed advertising information to the target audience and reduce some unnecessary information transmission channels, which effectively improve the power of advertising information transmission[8]. In the era of micro-marketing, advertising is no longer the traditional net type one-way web page and streaming video advertising, but the direct interaction between enterprises and consumers and two-way sharing of valuable information. Studies have shown that enterprises communicate interactively with consumers regularly, which could reduce the uncertainty of consumer perception, improve the sense of self-status and control of consumer and enhance the perceived value of products and services. We can draw the following hypotheses through literature and inference: H1: Wechat advertising has a positive influence on economic value; H2: Wechat advertising has a positive influence on functional value; H3: Wechat advertising has a positive influence on psychological value. 3.2.2 The influence of consumer perceived value on consumer buying behavior Consumers will evaluate the benefits and costs of the goods, they will make a overall evaluation after weighing them, and finally make the buying decision according to the perceived value. Consumer perceived value is composed of perceived benefits and costs, the perceived benefits include quality, performance, etc. of the goods or services, and perceived costs include tangible currency pay and intangible mental cost. We can draw the following hypotheses through literature and inference: H4: economic value has a positive influence on consumer purchase intention; H5: functional value has a positive influence on consumer purchase intention; H6: psychological value has a positive influence on consumer purchase intention.
173
3.2.3 The Influence of Wechat Advertising on Consumer Buying Behavior Wechat Advertising influence consumer perceived value, and ultimately influence consumer buying behavior, so we can draw the following hypothesis through above inference: H7: Wechat advertising has a positive influence on consumer buying behavior. 4. Empirical research 4.1 Reliability and validity testing Before the formal survey, this research first carried out a pre-survey of small scale and conducted the reliability and validity testing of the results. The results showed that the KMO measure value was greater than 0.8, relatively close to 1, which was suitable for factor analysis, meanwhile the effect of factor analysis was good. In addition, the internal consistency index Cronbach α coefficients of each variable were greater than the critical value 0.7, so the reliability and validity of the scale was good, therefore the survey could be implemented formally. 4.2 Experimental data collection This research was conducted by using the questionnaire survey method, it randomly distributed 400 questionnaires and recycled 356 questionnaires, the recovery rate was 89%, 322 questionnaires were valid among them, the effective rate was 80.5%. The basic situation of the sample is shown in table 1 below. Tab.1.The basic situation of the sample
Gender
Age
Education
Classification
Number
Proportion
Male Female Under 19 19-23 23-26 Above 26 Below Undergraduate Undergraduate Master degree or above
167 155 79 97 85 61
51.9% 48.1% 24.5% 30.1% 26.4% 19%
95
29.5%
122
37.9%
105
32.6%
Mean
Standard deviation
0.481
0.5
2.399
1.053
2.031
0.787
Through the descriptive statistics analysis of the survey data, we could see that: the mean value of gender is 0.481, relatively close to 0.5, the mean value of age group is 2.399, relatively close to 2.5, the mean value of education level is 2.031, relatively close to 1.5, so the survey objects of the research are extensive. In addition, the standard deviation of gender and education is less than 1, the standard deviation of age is slightly greater than 1, which illustrates that the sample of this research is average, the distribution is reasonable. 4.3 Data testing and analysis This research used the Likert five scale method and SPSS statistical software for data processing and analysis, and mainly used the method of correlation analysis.This research used SPSS 17.0 to do correlation analysis Pearson two-sided test for survey results, it obtained Asymp. Sig. (2-sided) value respectively, the specific results were shown in table 2. Tab.2.Correlation analysis Variable
Asymp. Sig. (2-sided)
X and Y1
0.00
X and Y2
0.02
Results H1 was supported, Wechat advertising had a positive influence on the perceived economic value H2 was supported, Wechat advertising had a positive 174
X and Y3
0.084
Y1 and Z
0.029
Y2 and Z
0.034
Y3 and Z
0.018
X and Z
0.034
influence on the perceived functional value H3 was not supported, Wechat advertising had not a positive influence on the perceived psychological value H4 was supported, the perceived economic value had a positive influence on consumer buying behavior H5 was supported, the perceived functional value had a positive influence on consumer buying behavior H6 was supported, the perceived psychological value had a positive influence on consumer buying behavior H7 was supported, Wechat advertising had a positive influence on consumer buying behavior
5. Conclusion Based on the restless study of various related literatures, this research took the consumer perceived value as the intermediate variable, preliminary constructed the theoretical model of the influence of Wechat advertising on consumer buying behavior. This research mainly obtained the first-hand data by questionnaire survey, it analyzed the data with one-way anova through statistical software and drew the following conclusions: i) Wechat advertising has a positive influence on the economic value, functional value consumers perceived, but no significant influence on psychological value, so we recommend that the enterprises should appropriately increase the economic and functional information of products or services when push Wechat advertising; ii) The consumer perceived value has positive influence on consumer buying behavior, therefore we recommend that the enterprises should enhance the perceived value of products or services when use Wechat advertising for marketing; iii) Most consumers believe that Wechat advertising is credible and can be taken as a reference of purchasing decision, so the enterprises should actively use Wechat advertising to do marketing services. References [1] Zhou Lei, Research on the propagation force of Wechat advertising, Southeast Communication, vol.9, pp. 21-23, 2012. [2] Gong Ping, The use of Wechat public platform for good service marketing, Marketing Management Review, vol.9, pp. 42-43, 2013. [3] Han Mei, New medium: the new channel of network marketing—Wechat for instance, Today's Massmedia, vol.21, pp. 95-96, 2013. [4] Bai Lin and Chen Qi, New progress in the study on driving factors of customer perceived value. Foreign Economics & Management, vol.28, pp. 39-45, 2006. [5] Woodruff, R.B., Customer value: the next source for competitive advantage, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, vol.25, pp. 139-153, 1997. [6] Xiqiu Wang, Quantitative analysis of core rigidities based on customer value, Control and Decision, vol.20, pp. 87-90, 2005. [7] Zhang Wei and Xu Ming, Research on the influence of Weibo comments on consumer buying behavior, China Market Region & City, vol.19, pp. 7-9, 2012. [8] Shanshan Hu, The advantages and disadvantages of Wechat advertising communication influence, China Packaging Industry, vol.22, pp. 79-80, 2013.
175
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Theories of FDI and Economic Development – A Critical Review Tomáš Dudáš Faculty of International Relations, University of Economics in Bratislava, Dolnozemská cesta 1/B, 85235 Bratislava, Slovak Republic
[email protected] Keywords: Foreign direct investments, Economic development, South-East Asia
Abstract. One of the most important questions concerning FDI inflows is their potential ability to support economic development of the host country. The goal of this paper is to examine the most important theories in this field of study – the Japanese FDI development theories and the development theory of John Dunning. Both theories believe that there is a strong relationship between FDI inflows and economic development in less developed countries. The increased FDI inflows should increase the purchasing power of the local population and that should generate additional FDI inflows. With the right mix of economic policies FDI host countries should be able to reach the economic level of highly developed countries with own FDI abroad. However, these theories favor large countries, therefore not all countries are able to go through the development process envisioned by them (ex. small Central European countries). 1. Introduction The global economy is now experiencing its best period as humanity as a whole has reached the highest standards of living in history. Despite the overall economic progress it is still possible to find a number of economically underdeveloped countries and regions, where poverty and hunger is very common. That is why the question of economic development is still one of the most important research areas in economics. One of the interesting questions is that of what factors played an important role in the economic development of countries that have managed to break free from poverty and underdevelopment. As the amount of FDI in the world economy continued to grow in recent decades, economists became interested in exploring FDI inflows as a possible factor of economic development. New theories were developed that focused on the relationship of FDI inflows and economic development. These theories are based mainly on the analysis of economic development that have received larger quantities of FDI, most often in the newly industrialized countries of Southeast Asia. The premise of FDI theories dealing with economic development is that the level of economic development has the ability to affect foreign direct investment flows, which in turn affect the future economic structure and economic development of countries. This paper will examine the most important theories in this field of study – the Japanese development theories and the development theory of John Dunning. 2. Japanese FDI development theories The first complex theories researching the relationship of FDI flows and economic development were created in Japan in the 1970s. It was not a coincidence, as this decade witnessed an international expansion of Japanese corporations. The structural changes in the Japanese economy after the oil shock of 1973 led to an increasing wave of FDI outflows from Japan to other countries in Southeast Asia. 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
176
ICSSS 2015
The groundwork for the Japanese FDI development theories has been laid by Kiyoshi Kojima in the 1970s. Kojima researched the FDI made by Japanese corporations and came to conclusion that Japanese FDI differ from FDI made by US corporations. According to Kojima Japanese FDI creates trade flows, whereas US FDI replace trade flows [1]. Japanese investments were better able to exploit the comparative advantages of the countries in Southeast Asia. In the first phase, Japanese corporations invested in labor intensive industries abroad and production facilities in these industries were abolished in Japan. That meant new trade flows from Southeast Asia to Japan. The ideas of Kojima were further developed by Terumoto Ozawa, a US economist with Japanese ancestry. He was one of the first proponents of the thesis that FDI inflows can play an important role in the economic development of developing countries. Ozawa stated that developing countries must interact with developed countries in order to gain their know-how and knowledge. This can be illustrated by the example of the U.S., which followed the successful policies of Great Britain in the 19th century, or by the example of Japan, which successfully emulated the technologies and policies of the industrialized countries after World War II. Ozawa analyzed the relationship of economic development, accumulation of physical and human capital and FDI flows [2]. In his analysis, Ozawa used the framework of national competitiveness created by Michael Porter. Porter identifies four phases of national competitiveness in his framework – factor-driven, investment-driven, innovation-driven and wealth-driven. Ozawa utilized these phases and analyzed the FDI inflows and outflows in each phase. Ultimately, Ozawa described three stages of economic development: • In the first stage, there is a growth of FDI inflows that are interested in cheap factors of production. Outgoing FDI are virtually non-existent in this phase. • In the second phase, incoming FDI are motivated by the growing domestic market and the outgoing FDI by cheap labor abroad. • In the third phase, both the incoming and the outgoing FDI are motivated by market factors and technological factors. The ideas of Kojima and Ozawa were further expanded by Rajneesh Narula, who used the OLI framework of FDI. Narula analyzed the dynamics of the relationship between firm specific advantages and location advantages of countries. According to him, at the beginning of economic development countries primarily possess resources (e.g. natural resources or cheap labor), and as such FDI inflows will be influenced by these resources [3]. As the economic development of a country progresses, the factors influencing FDI flows will change dynamically. At the highest level of economic development the FDI flows are influenced mostly by human capital and technological capabilities [4]. The main ideas of the Japanese FDI theories have been empirically demonstrated on the countries of Southeast Asia. Japan itself is the first example, as during the second half of the 20th century it followed the phases of economic development as described by Ozawa. South Korea is a prime example, as Korean corporations belong to the most dynamic corporations of the early 21st century. Chinese corporations are undergoing analogous development as they used licensing and joint-ventures to gain new know-how and technologies from abroad. They now use their improved positions to expand internationally with the help of FDI. Chinese corporations penetrate the rankings of the largest global corporations with an increasing rate, as evidenced by the presence of 89 Chinese companies on the Fortune Global 500 list of the largest global companies in 2013 [5]. To be fair, the Japanese development theories have their limitations as not all countries are able to follow the phases described by Ozawa and others. There are two key factors that determine this ability – the size of the internal market and the ability of the state to create strong domestic corporations. These factors speak clearly in the favor of Southeast Asian countries, as they are usually populous with a strong government role in the economy. If we look at South Korea, a dynamically growing domestic market of 50 million inhabitants and proactive government policies created a strong base for the creation of strong Korean corporations.
177
On the other o hand, for Centrall European countries itt is hard to reach r the deevelopment phase withh strong FDII outflows. These T counntries possesss relatively y small dom mestic markeets and the government g t policies ussually conccentrate on the incorpporation of large globaal corporations into th he nationall economiess via FDI innflows. The section headings h aree in boldfaace capital and lowerccase letters.. Second levvel headingss are typed as part of thhe succeediing paragrapph (like the subsection n heading off this paragrraph). 3. Dunnin ng’s theoryy of econom mic develop pment and FDI F Besides crreating the eclectic e theeory of FDI John Dunn ning also reesearched thhe relationsship of FDII flows and economic developmennt. Dunningg’s theory outlines o thee basic relaationship beetween FDII flows and the structurre and stagees of econom mic develop pment of inndividual coountries. As he workedd with a sim milar framew work, the main m ideas of o John Dun nning are siimilar to thhe Japanese theories off economic developmen d nt and FDI. Dunningg recognizees five main phases of economic e deevelopment, if we take iinto consideeration FDII flows [6]: • In the t first phase of economic developpment locall firms do noot engage inn FDI activitties, as theyy do not possess firm sppecific advaantages. On the other hand, the couuntry is likeely to be disscovered byy m developeed countriess, which aree trying to utilize the locational advantagess foreign invvestors from (usually resources). • Thee second phhase is charracterized by b an increaase of FDI inflows. E Economic deevelopmentt increases the t purchassing power of the inhaabitants, wh hich is notiiced by forreign corporrations thatt switch expporting for loocal producction. Outward FDI aree still weak as the numbber of locall companiess with speciffic advantagges is limiteed. • A visible v increease of outtward FDI is i visible in n the third phase. Loccal corporattions gatherr sufficient experience e i internatioonal businesss and deveelop their ow in wn specific advantages. Economicc developmeent leads too wage incrreases, so the country loses its innvestment aattractiveneess in laborr intensive industries. On the other hand, new facto ors of inveestment atttractivenesss appear – dynamicallly growing local markket, modern infrastructu ure, technollogy and othhers. Overaall, outwardd FDI are stiill weaker thhan inward FDI, but the gap betweeen them staarts do decrrease. • In the t fourth phase the couuntry becom mes a majorr exporter of FDI. • Thee fifth stagee is describbed by Dunnning as a phase withh strong intrra-industriaal trade andd investmentt. FDI deciisions are less l influennced by loccation advanntages, straategic capab bilities andd innovationn comes intoo foregrounnd. The highhly develop ped countriees of the cuurrent globaal economyy have all reaached this stage s of devvelopment.
178
Fig.1.Inward annd Outward FD DI flows in Jaapan, China an nd South Koreea 1995 – 20005 (million US SD)
It is cleaarly visible that John Dunning D shaares the view ws of the Jappanese theoories on the role of FDII in the proccess of econnomic deveelopment. Dunning D seees FDI infloows as a useful tool th hat can helpp economic developmen d nt in poor deeveloping coountries. In the first phase, governnment policiies are vital,, as states haave to creatte an environment that is attractivee for potentiial foreign iinvestors. Government G t policies also remain vital v in the further phaases of development, although a there is a shiift from thee support off FDI inflow ws to the suupport of ouutward FDI.. In order too improve tthe outward d FDI statess have to suppport the creation of strrong domesstic corporations. If an economy iss dominated d by foreignn corporationns, outwardd FDI will remain weakk in the long g-term, as foreign f corpporations deevelop theirr FDI activitties from their home coountry headquarters. Countries of Southheast Asia are a a proof of o these stattements. Soouth Korea rrestricted th he access off foreign corrporations to the Koreaan markets for f a long tiime and useed protectionnist policiess to supportt the creatioon of strongg domestic corporationns called Chaebols C (Samsung, LG G or the no ow defunctt Daewoo). These corporations noow belong to the globaal leaders off their industries and successfully s y compete with w corporaations from Europe andd the USA. South Korrean compaanies use FD DI to createe their own internationnal productiion networrks and inv vest in faraaway locations such as a Slovakiaa (Samsung and Kia). Similar S econnomic strateegy also too ok place in China, C as thhe Chinese government g t obligated foreign f inveestors to forrm joint-venntures with Chinese C corrporations. D Domestic corporationss obtained new technoloogies know-how and management m t knowledgee through thhese joint-ventures andd used this knowledge k to preparee their ownn competitiv ve productss and servicces. We arre currentlyy witnessingg an internaational expaansion of Chinese C corporations that successsfully challlenge theirr competitorrs from deveeloped counntries (Lenoovo, HTC, ZTE Z and maany others). Fig 1 demonstrate d es three Sooutheast Asian countriies (Japan, South Korrea and Ch hina) in thee different phhases of ecoonomic deveelopment ass described by Dunningg. The graphhs show the inward andd outward FD DI in these countries between 19995 and 2005 5. In the case of Japan w we see a cou untry in thee most advannced phase of developm ment with sttrong outwaard FDI andd relatively llow inward FDI. In thee 1990s Japaan was alreaady a home to t many stroong corporaations that were w key plaayers in theiir industriess on the globbal level. Inn comparisoon, South Korea K was not n so advannced in the same time period. p Thee country stiill had a relaatively highh level of innward FDI, but there iss also a visiible growth of outwardd FDI. This growth g is esspecially visible betweeen 2001 and 2005, when Korean ccorporation ns started ann aggressive internationnal expansioon. This exxpansion req quired extennsive creatiion of new productionn F of thesee corporatio ons. and servicee capacities abroad, whhich led to thhe increased outward FDI
179
Figg.2.Inward and Outward FD DI flows in Ch hina 2006-20111 (million US SD)
Chinesee FDI data from the saame time peeriod tell a different sttory. Duringg the 1990ss China hass become onne of the most m attracttive investm ment destin nations on the t global llevel. In teerms of thee Dunning developmentt phases a shhift to the seecond phasee was visiblee in these yeears, as morre and moree foreign invvestors were attracted by the grow wing purchasing poweer of the Chhinese popu ulation. Thee outward FDI F were relatively r low in thiss time periiod, as Chhinese corporations were w mostlyy consolidatiing their maarket positioons in the domestic d maarkets. How wever, theree is a visiblee growth off outward FD DI after thee year 20000 and this growth g furtther accelerrates after 22005 (see Fig. F 2). Thee trajectory of o Chinese economic developmen d nt is a mod del examplee of the phaases describ bed by Johnn Dunning [77]. On the contrary, governments g s in Centraal and Easteern Europe mostly resigned to crreate strongg domestic companies c d to variouus political and financiial reasons. The result oof this proceess was thatt due many key domestic companies c w were privatiized by foreign transnnational corpporations. However, H itt should be noted n that there t was a lack of dom mestic capittal and locall managemeent know-ho ow in thesee countries inn the 1990ss, so the salee of big statte-owned co ompanies too foreign coorporations was w usuallyy the only way w to save them. t Slovaakia tried too build a strrong domesttic corporatte sector bettween 19944 and 1998, but this proocess endedd in spectacuular failure as many domestic ow wners went bankrupt b orr eventually sold their ownership o too foreign coorporations.. Large trransnationaal companiees usually do d not use their foreiggn subsidiarries for FDI activities,, which is thhe main reaason of low outward FD DI in Centrral and Easttern Europee. Only a few big locall companiess were able to t remain inndependent in i Central Europe E – nottably the Czzech energy y giant ČEZ,, the Hungarrian oil com mpany MOL L, and the Huungarian OT TP Bank. Thhese compaanies have no n dominantt foreign ow wner, so the local l managgement was able to retaain its indepeendence. Thhe result of this t processs is that thesse corporatiions decided to expandd within Ceentral Europpe in order to create a successfull regional market m presennce. As for Slovakia, S thhe lack of strrong Slovakk corporatio ons is clearlyy detectablee in weak ou utward FDII flows. This means thaat Slovakia is not goinng to move along the path p describbed by Dun nning in thee foreseeablee future. Thhis does not mean that the t Slovak government g ts should quuit supportin ng dynamicc domestic companies, c as even a limited set of o strong lo ocal compannies can plaay an imporrtant role inn economic developmeent. The Sloovak IT coompany ES SET, speciaalizing in aantivirus so oftware andd security, iss a good exxample of such s a comppany, as it has subsidiiaries in thee USA, Arg gentina andd Singapore.. ESET is a high-tech h coompany witth high addeed value andd strong innovation cap pabilities. Inn order to reaach the highhest phases of economiic developm ment, the Sloovak governnment shou uld focus onn the supportt of compannies of this kind. k
180
4. Summary The examination of FDI development theories has brought mixed results. The reality is that the theories of Kojima, Ozawa or Dunning failed to provide generally accepted answers to questions related to FDI and economic development. Models developed by these authors are able to explain the changes that have taken place in the countries of Southeast Asia very well, however, they are applicable only to a specific group of countries. In this context, small economies are especially problematic, as it was demonstrated by the example of Slovakia. The problem with these theories is the fact that they originated back in the 60s, 70s and 80s of the last century and the world economy has changed significantly since then. This does not mean that we should completely reject these theories and send them into oblivion. Kojima’s and Dunning’s models are useful for examining the empirical FDI flows and economic development of specific countries. Moreover, theories of this kind are still necessary, since at present an increasing amount of FDI flows is directed precisely to less developed countries. On the other hand, maybe it's time for the emergence of a new theoretical approach which will based on the assumptions of the modern global economy of the 21st century. 5. Acknowledgement This research was financially supported by the Cultural and Educational Grant Agency of the Ministry of Education, Science, Research and Sport of the Slovak Republic (Grant KEGA 017EU-4/2015 - Modern textbook of World Economy with a focus on application of knowledge and problem solving). The project has been researched at the Faculty of International Relations of the University of Economics in Bratislava. References [1] K. Kojima, International trade and foreign investment: substitutes or complements. Hitotsubashi Journal of Economics, vol. 16(1), pp. 1-12, 1975. [2] T. Ozawa, Foreign direct investment and economic development, Transnational Corporations, vol. 1(1), pp. 27-54, 1992. [3] R. Narula and N. Driffield, Does FDI cause development? The ambiguity of the evidence and why it matters, European journal of developmental research, vol. 24(1), pp. 1-7. 2012. [4] R. Narula and J. Dunning, The Investment Development Path Revisited: Some Emerging Issues, In Foreign direct investment and governments: catalysts for economic restructuring. Routlege. 1996. [5] M. Grančay and N. Szikorová, Determinanty čínskych priamych investícií v Afrike, Ekonomický časopis, vol 62(3), pp. 307-325. 2014. [6] J. Dunning, Explaining the international direct investment position of countries: towards a dynamic or developmental approach, Weltwirtschaftliches Archiv, vol. 117, pp. 30-64, 1981. [7] N. Szikorová and M. Grančay, Teórie analyzujúce priame investície pochádzajúce z rozvojových krajín. Medzinarodne vztahy (Journal of International Relations), vol. 9(2), pp. 44-55, 2011.
181
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Structural Analysis and Design of Engineering Personnel Development Process Marina Nikolaevna Vrazhnovaa, Ekaterina Igorevna Makarenkob, Aleksandr Vyacheslavovich Akhterovc, Olga Vladimirovna Lezinad Department “Sociology and Management”, Moscow Automobile and Road Construction State Technical University (MADI), 125319, Russian Federation, Moscow, Leningradsky prospekt, 64. Tel.: +7 (499) 155-01-44 a
b
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected] *
[email protected]
Keywords: SADT modelling, Engineering and technical personnel, Technical intelligentsia, Higher education.
Abstract. This article is dedicated to structural analysis and design of engineering personnel development process. One key factor in the development of engineering personnel is the education system, and one of the main stages in the said process is master’s degree training. To understand and optimize these processes, we conducted a functional modelling of the engineering and technical staff development during Master’s degree training, using the Structured Analysis and Design Technique (SADT). As a result of SADT modelling, we identified four key processes in the development of engineering and technical personnel: (1) cooperation with sectorial research institutes; (2) integration with core companies in the industry; (3) building trans-departmental structures to implement trans-disciplinary projects; (4) implementing trans-disciplinary projects and writing Master’s theses. The main outcome of the first process is the building of competencies necessary for performing research and development works in the Master’s degree student. The second process is intended to develop competencies related to the production activities in the respective sector. The third process provides methodological, regulatory and organizational backing for implementation of trans-disciplinary projects by the student. This means that before implementing a project, a Master’s degree student needs to demonstrate knowledge not only in his/her area of specialization, but in adjacent areas, have an understanding of economics in the subject area, and possibly acquire management skills as well. And finally, the idea of the fourth process is the actual implementation of trans-disciplinary projects by the master’s degree students and writing the Master’s theses. 1.
Introduction
Engineering personnel is the basis for a successful economy in any industrially developed country. Today's realities require training engineering specialists at a radically new basis, meeting the current requirements of the labor market and economic development demands. This article is dedicated to structural analysis and design of engineering personnel development process. One key factor in the development of engineering personnel is the education system, and one of the main stages in the said process is master’s degree training. To understand and optimize these processes, we conducted a structural analysis and design of the engineering staff development during Master’s degree training, using the Structured Analysis and Design Technique (SADT).
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
182
ICSSS 2015
2.
SADT modelling of the engineering personnel development process
The first step in modeling any process is to formulate the goal of the modeling exercise. In this work the goal is formulated as follows: understanding what functions need to be included in the process of developing engineering, scientific and technical personnel during the Master’s training, and the relationship between these functions. 2.1. Context diagram A-0 of engineering personnel development process in the course of Master’s training The context diagram of engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of Master’s training is presented in Fig.1. The Law on Education and the Roadmap for Education and Science Development in Russia
Master’s students
Higher education standards
Economic development challenges
Development of engineering, scientific and technical personnel А0
Intellectual capital of a University, research institution and specialized partner companies
Engineering personnel
Production resources of a University, research institution and specialized partner companies
Fig.1.Context diagram A-0 for the engineering personnel development process in the course of Master’s training
In accordance with SADT rules, the chart is read as follows: development of engineering, scientific and technical personnel in the course of Master’s training is, first of all, dictated by the challenges of the country’s economic development and demands of the labor market. Master’s degree training is part of higher education system and is regulated by two basic documents at the federal level (the Law “On Education in the Russian Federation” and the “Roadmap for Education and Science Development in Russia”), as well as the education standard for the respective training area. Resources necessary for implementing the process deserve a special mention. These include intellectual capital of the University, research institutions and specialized partner companies that the educational institutions have contracts with, as well as production bases of the organizations taking part in providing Master’s training (University, partner research institutions and specialized companies). Intellectual capital is a “combination of knowledge, information, experience, qualifications and motivation of the personnel, organizational abilities, communication channels and technologies, that can create added value and provide competitive advantage for an organization in the market” [1]. Stewart [2] describes the structure of intellectual capital as follows: “Human capital is the part of intellectual capital directly related to a human. This includes knowledge, practical skills, creative and cognitive abilities of the people, their moral values, personal and leadership traits, and work culture used by an individual or organization to generate revenue. Organizational capital is the part of intellectual capital related to the organization in general. This includes procedures, technologies, management systems, technical and software facilities, organizational forms and structures, patents, and organization culture. Consumer capital is the part of intellectual capital derived from connections 183
and stable relationships with clients and consumers” [2]. In this work we consider the first two components of intellectual capital. This means that “turning” Master’s degree students into professional engineering, scientific and technical personnel requires human and organizational capital of the University itself and specialized companies the University has partnered with. 2.2. Diagram А0 of the engineering personnel development process in the course of Master’s training More detailed composition of the context diagram is presented in Fig. 2, which shows the key sub-processes of the engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of Master’s degree training: cooperation with sectorial research institutions, integration with specialized companies, building trans-departmental structures to implement trans-disciplinary projects, implementing trans-disciplinary projects and writing Master’s theses.
Fig.2.Chart A0 for the engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of Master’s training
2.2.1. Block А1. Cooperation with research institutions. This process is intended to arm the students with competencies required to perform research and development (R&D) works. The input for this process contains Master’s students, who acquire the necessary competencies while performing R&D work. Another output is the research institution employees who took part in the Master’s training process. The resources include the research institution’s intellectual capital (its human and organizational components) and its production base. 2.2.2. Block А2. Cooperation with partner institutions. Similar to research institutions, the University also has to partner with specialized companies in the sector by signing cooperation agreements. This process outputs Master’s students armed with competencies related to production activities in the respective sectors, and employees of partner companies involved in the training process. The resources include intellectual capital of the University and partner company and the latter’s production base.
184
2.2.3. Block А3. Building trans-departmental structures for implementing trans-disciplinary projects. This process is aimed at building methodological, regulatory and organizational support (trans-departmental structures) for implementing trans-disciplinary projects. A trans-disciplinary project is understood as a deliberate, time- and resource-limited activity performed by a Master’s student with support from a special team of teachers (this can include University professors and employees of the partner research institutions and companies). The peculiarity of these projects is their trans-disciplinary nature. This means that in order to implement the project, the student must demonstrate the knowledge in his/her subject area and adjacent areas – perhaps, some management skills as well. Building this type of trans-departmental structures must be based on the current trends in fundamental and applied science, which is shown as the respective control arrow. At the exit of this process, we get completed trans-departmental structures and University staff helping the student implementing the project. Project resources include the University’s intellectual capital, staff at partner research institutions and companies engaged in the training process, and the University production base, as this is where the trans-departmental structures will be built. 2.2.4. Block А4. Implementing the trans-disciplinary projects and writing Master’s theses. While the previous process (block А3) was aimed at building trans-departmental structures (and did not involve the actual students), the goal of process in block A4 is the actual implementation of trans-disciplinary projects by the students and writing their Master’s theses. Only when this process is completed, we can say that our students have acquired all necessary competencies and can be safely called technical intelligentsia. It should be noted that the inputs for this process include both students that have acquired the necessary competencies related to R&D and production activities and those students who are still beginning their Master’s training. Project resources include the partner research institution and company employees engaged in the training process, University intellectual capital and technical support of the training process. The controls include current trends in the fundamental and applied science and the higher education standard regulating the content of the training. 2.3. Chart A1 for the engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of master’s training. process: “cooperation with sectorial research institutions”. Below we will look at a decomposition of the four blocks in A0 chart. 2.3.1. Block А11. Joint implementation of R&D activities. The goal of this process is to get the students engaged in performing research and development work at the partner research institution (see the control arrow). The inputs for this process are the students and an assignment for R&D work. The outputs are students with competencies for performing R&D works and results of joint R&D activities. The results of R&D activities are understood as specific documents (report, article, patent, etc.) and the methods, technologies, algorithms, etc. developed by the student. The resources for process implementation are the research institution’s intellectual capital and production base. 2.3.2. Block А12. Performing practical R&D works. This process has goals similar to those of A11: building competencies related to R&D works. The difference is that these practical research works are included in the curriculum and are a mandatory form of education, unlike the joint R&D exercises. 2.3.3. Block А13. Engaging research institution staff in the education process. The goal of this process is to engage the research institution employees in training the students on a contract basis. This is done with the aim of providing the students with actual information on the status of fundamental and applied science in the chosen area of training. 2.4. Chart A2 for the engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of master’s training. process: “integration with partner companies” 2.4.1. Block А21. Taking part in the production activities at the partner company. This process is intended to arm the students with competencies related to the production activities at 185
partner companies. The inputs include students, and the outputs include students with the necessary competencies and the results of student’s involvement in the production activity of the specialized partner company. The resources include intellectual capital and production base of the partner company. 2.4.2. Block А22. Joint performance of R&D works at partner companies. Speaking about companies operating in science-intensive sectors of the economy, we can consider another form of cooperation between the University and the partner company: engaging the students in the company’s R&D works. This process also uses the knowledge and experience of company staff and technical support for performance of R&D works as resources. 2.4.3. Block А23. Conducting professional practice and internships. This is very similar to Process A12. Production practice is part of the study plan and unlike A21 and A22 is a mandatory form of education. By passing production practice at a partner company, students also acquire competencies related to its production activity. 2.4.4. Block А24. Engaging partner company specialists in the training process. This process is intended to get the partner company specialists involved in the training process. Engaging the production specialists in the Master’s training helps synchronize the study materials with the current demands presented by the companies to their employees’ competencies. This process is there to bridge the gap between “what we teach” and “what the business needs”. 2.4.5. Block А25. Professional development of the University staff. Another form of cooperation between the University and the partner company is professional development courses provided for the University staff. This form of cooperation helps the University save money on engaging highly skilled specialists to train the Master’s students. The partner company employees train University professors, and the latter pass the knowledge to the students. The output of this process is University professors possessing current knowledge and competencies. The resources for this process include intellectual capital of the University (University professors) and partner company (highly qualified specialists from the partner company). 2.5. Chart A3 for the engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of master’s training. process: “building trans-departmental structures for implementing projects of trans-disciplinary nature” 2.5.1. Block А31. Preparing staff for implementing trans-disciplinary projects. This process is intended to build teams of University, partner research institutions and partner companies’ staff to be engaged in the training process. The resources for this process include the University’s human capital, employees of research institutions and partner companies taking part in the training process, as well as methods for evaluating the qualifications of the teaching staff. An overview of a trans-disciplinary project shows in [3]. 2.5.2. Block А32. Developing topics for trans-disciplinary projects. The process is intended to develop topics for the future inter-disciplinary projects. The development will be performed by teachers selected in Process A31. 2.5.3. Block А33. Developing organizational and methodological support for implementation of trans-disciplinary projects. The process is intended to create trans-departmental training structures including the topics of trans-disciplinary projects, as well as methodological, regulatory and organizational support of their implementation. All forms of support are developed by the auxiliary and teaching staff selected in Process A31. 2.6. Chart A4 for the engineering, scientific and technical personnel development process in the course of master’s training. process: “implementing trans-disciplinary projects and writing master’s theses” 2.6.1. Block 41. Theoretical training. The process implies arming the students with the theoretical knowledge necessary for implementing 186
trans-disciplinary projects. Even though the output of this process is a student possessing theoretical knowledge and all necessary competencies, this doesn’t mean that theoretical knowledge has to be provided after the internship at a research institution and partner company. The thing is, IDEF0 charts generally do not show the temporal sequence of processes. So Process A4 does not have to start after Processes A1, A2 and A3 are completed. All these four processes can run simultaneously. As theoretical knowledge is required before implementing trans-disciplinary projects, the resources needed for this process include trans-departmental structures developed in Process A3. 2.6.2. Block 42. Implementing trans-disciplinary projects. While Process А33 was aimed at building all forms of support for implementing the trans-disciplinary projects, this process represents the actual implementation of this project by the student. The inputs for this process include the topics of trans-disciplinary projects developed as part of Process A32. 2.6.3. Block 43. Publishing and presenting R&D results. Publishing the results of research and development works is a mandatory component of a Master’s training process. 2.6.4. Block 44. Writing the Master’s thesis. The final step of Master’s degree training is writing a Master’s thesis. This process uses the outputs of all earlier processes as its inputs, namely: R&D work results obtained at the partner research institution, results of student’s engagement in production activities at the partner company, and the results of R&D work at the partner company. 3. Summary As a result of SADT modeling we identified four key processes required for the development of engineering, scientific and technical personnel: cooperation with sectorial research institutions, integration with partner companies, creating trans-departmental structures for implementation of trans-disciplinary projects, actual implementation of trans-disciplinary projects, and writing the Master’s thesis. A decomposition of all of these processes was performed. We should point out some of the weaknesses of the approach proposed, as well as some possible directions for future research. SADT modeling implies a repetitive implementation of author/reader cycle to clarify every detail in the charts. Even though the models presented in this article were verified and discussed in the professional environment, the clarification process for various chart details cannot be considered complete yet. Further research can continue in two directions: “width-wise research” and “depth-wise research”. Some steps in this direction have already been taken, with [4] looking at the process of developing management competencies in engineering, scientific and technical personnel (the first direction of research), while [5] present an approach to designing the information and education component of a pedagogical knowledge management system at the producing chair of the University (second direction). 4. Acknowledgement This article has been prepared as part of project design phase of the state assignment in 2015 (Project No. 28.2049.2014/K). References [1] A.L.Gaponenko, T.M. Orlova, Knowledge Management. Turning Knowledge into Capital. – Moscow, Exmo Publishing, 2008. [2] T.A. Stewart, Intellectual Capital. The New Wealth of Organizations. N.Y.-L., Doubleday, 1997.
187
[3] A.V. Akhterov, O.G. Minina, The synergetic approach to the substantiation of introduction of project-oriented management at the University. Interactive Collaborative Learning (ICL), 2013 International Conference on, pp. 396 – 397, 2013. DOI: 10.1109/ICL.2013.6644608. [4] A.E. Shastina, M.N. Vrazhnova, Development needs of engineers relating to organizational and managerial competencies. Interactive Collaborative Learning (ICL), 2013 International Conference on, pp. 348 – 350, 2013. DOI: 10.1109/ICL.2013.6644595. [5] A.V. Akhterov, O.V. Lezina, Designing of the information component of pedagogical knowledge management system in a chair of technical university. Interactive Collaborative Learning (ICL), 2013 International Conference on, pp. 544 – 546, 2013. DOI: 10.1109/ICL.2013.6644647.
188
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Impact of Territoriality of Court Bailiffs and its Quantification in the Czech Republic Luboš Smrčkaa,*, Jan Plačekb University of Economics, Prague, nám. W. Churchilla 4, Prague 3, 130 67, Czech Republic a
[email protected],
[email protected] *Corresponding author
Keywords: Territoriality, Forecast of impacts, Recovery rate of receivables.
Abstract. The Czech Ministry of Justice takes into account an idea about higher regulation of court bailiffs. There are discussed several concepts as territoriality and mandatory deposits from creditors. These concepts would influence the Czech market, its structure and the level of its competition among the different bailiffs. This paper is focused on the territoriality and its possible impacts on the market, participants and efficiency of a process. This papers works with unique current data which enable to quantify current recovery rates of receivables. Normally these data are not publicly available in a format which can be used for a research and further predictions. In this case authors have to work with assumptions and predict the future state of the world. The basic assumptions are change of the market structure and a decrease of efficiency. The market structure would change in a way that the bailiffs would have the same comparable amount of solved cases and this amount is guaranteed. Motivation and as well as economic incentives decrease. The paper tries to quantify recovery rates of receivables after an introduction of the territoriality. The paper's results enable to compare two different states of the world – before introducing the territoriality and after introducing the territoriality. 1. Introduction The aim of the court bailiffs or enforcement agents is to help creditors when debtors do not do or want to pay off their debts. It is a case of personal as well as corporate debts. The court bailiffs are used only for an individual enforcement. If there is a group of the creditors and the debtor does not have enough assets to cover his/her debts it is another process – the process of insolvency. Other ways (than insolvency process or the process of recovering payments with the bailiffs) are persuading the debtors by phone calls, mails, personal visits etc. or selling these receivables to special agencies which focuse on problematic clients. The environment has changed for last years. New Insolvency Act came to efficiency in 2008 which is also a start of the economic crisis in the Czech Republic. More details about the changing economic environment in the Czech Republic could be found in Čámská (2015). The business of the bailiffs is regulated by law in the Czech Republic because the government has to protect the environment and related counterparties. On one side the counterparty could be a creditor and on the other side it could be a debtor as well. Nowadays there are discussions about changes of these regulations. Further details from the legal point of view could be found in Beníková (2010) or Korbel and Prudíková (2013). There are also visible trends and shifts inside the European Union not only in the Czech Republic itself. The report of European Commission confirms that there were significant shifts in the time period 2006-2010. Public enforcement agents are replaced more and more by private enforcement 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
189
ICSSS 2015
agents. It is the trend that the enforcement agents should work in the competitive environment and the creditors should have a right to decide about an enforcement themselves. Figure 1 displays status of enforcement agents across Europe. The organization in the European Union tends to the private enforcement agents. The Czech Republic is an example of mixed status which should be moved right now. Although the current trend is private as we write in the next chapter the idea of the territoriality tends more to a public organization and state interventions to the enforcement system.
Fig.1.Status of enforcement agents in Europe. Source: The European Commission for the Efficiency of Justice.
2. Territoriality Territoriality is a seriously discussed concept of the regulation in the case of the enforcement agents in the Czech Republic nowadays. The territoriality means that the enforcement agents should solve only cases which are directly connected to their place of residence. The territoriality of the cases would be influenced by the debtor's place of residence. It means that the enforcement agents could not solve any cases which are not directly connected with their place of residence even if the client (creditor) would like to. There are proponents as well as opponents of this concept. There are 159 registered enforcement agents in the Czech Republic. 35% of all registered agents solved 65% of total Czech cases in 2013. There was a serious shift between years 2001 and 2014. 90% of cases in 2001 were solved by the agents whose place of residence was similar as a place of a debtor. It can be compared with the year 2014 when only 9% of the cases were solved by agents whose place of residence was similar. The creditors were able to choose the agent according their own criteria. Authors have these numbers and conclusions from internal documents and statistics of Ministry of Justice and Chamber of Executors Czech Republic. 190
The territoriality would mean many changes in the system. The creditors would not be able to choose the agent easily because the choice would depend on the place of residence of the agent and the debtor. There would be a redistribution of current cases among the agents. Some agents would lose their cases and others would get these cases. There are proponents as well as opponents of this concept. The proponents are small and medium sized agents who would get cases and the opponents are large agents who provide the highest quality services and have the highest market share. The aim of this paper is to quantify impacts of the territoriality. The paper does not want to discuss the changes from the legal point of view but from the economical perspective. The support will be found in the basic economic theory as well as in the science business economics. 3. Impacts of territoriality The territoriality would lead to the redistribution of the cases. Only several agents would solve the same amount of the cases as they do right now. The territoriality makes it difficult for the creditors choose their agent. The enforcement agent is on one hand regulated by the law but on the other hand he/she is an entrepreneur whose incentives are strictly economical. The agent has to solve business risks and has to create economic profit otherwise it is better to exit this market. The creation of economic profit (or in other words economic value added) is a key target of every business unit and entrepreneur (Synek et al., 2010). The maximization of economic profit is also connected with the amount of employed resources. We cannot talk about the maximization in the absolute numbers but we have to take into account the employed resources (number of employees, amount of capital, effort of the agent etc.). It is a concept of productivity, further information about corporate productivity and its measurement in Klečka (2014). According to the redistribution the best agents would lose thousands of the cases annually. It does not matter if the efficiency of the agent is high or low because of territoriality he/she has a certain number of the cases. This could decrease their effort (in another words productivity, quality of the enforcement process, recovery rates etc.). Following chapters show us that the success among agents differ significantly nowadays. Based on these current data we will predict the future state of the world. 3.1 Methods and data sample Our prediction is based on the current observed data and our assumptions introduced in the following subchapter. The availability of data is very low. Authors cooperated with several creditors (providers of hire purchases, banks and mobile operator) whose value of problematic receivables is high regularly. Therefore authors can work with unique data which are included in table 1. Tab.1.Differences among the premium bailiffs in the case of several types of creditors. Source: own computations. % / type of creditor
Provider of hire purchases 1
Provider of hire purchases 2
Bank 1
Bank 2 23.0
Mobile operator (time frame 3y) 34.0
Mobile operator (time frame 7y) 80.0
Highest recovery rate Average recovery rate Lowest recovery rate Ratio of the lowest to average recovery rate Ratio of the lowest to highest recovery rate
31.2
15.8
39.2
19.2
8.3
30.8
15.8
20.0
46.0
6.8
4.2
25.3
11.0
11.0
25.0
35.4
50.6
82.1
69.6
55.0
54.3
21.8
26.6
64.5
47.8
32.4
31.3
The creditors included in table 1 are the classic business units whose aim is the creation of economic profit and its maximization. These creditors work long term with the enforcement agents 191
whose efficiency is the highest. The table 1 shows that there are significant differences among recovery rates. It depends on the type of business, time frame and also on the quality of the chosen enforcement agents. If the creditor has good experiences with one agent this agent will be chosen also for the future cases. In the case of the territoriality this free choice is not possible. 3.2 Assumptions Authors' predictions of the future state of the world are based on several assumptions. The first assumption is connected with the cases redistribution among the agents. There are approximately 20 agents who can be called premium and they solve most of the cases. Their market share would decrease to 10% (precisely 12.58%) in the case of an equal coverage. In total there are 159 registered agents. The second assumption is that the creditors will not change their preferences and they will still use this type of enforcement. The third and fourth assumptions are crucial for authors' data modeling or simulation. The third assumption is that the worse premium agent is so successful as the best “other” agent. The last assumption is the most important. It says that there is the ratio the highest to the lowest recovery rate is same for premium as well as other agent group. The assumption is reasonable because the real differences are probably higher. Table 2 is based on the assumption 3 and 4 and results for premium agents. Table 2 shows the recovery rates for the group of others bailiffs (enforcement agents) who do not create the premium group. Tab.2.Differences among others bailiffs in the case of several types of creditors. Source: own computations. % / type of creditor Highest recovery rate Average recovery rate Lowest recovery rate Ratio of the lowest to highest recovery rate
Provider of hire purchases 1
Provider of hire purchases 2
Bank 1
Bank 2
6.8
4.2
25.3
11.0
Mobile operator (time frame 3y) 11.0
4.1
2.7
20.8
8.1
7.3
16.4
1.5
1.1
16.3
5.3
3.6
7.8
21.8
26.6
64.5
47.8
32.4
31.3
Mobile operator (time frame 7y) 25.0
3.3 Quantification and results Aforementioned assumptions and the original data sample allow quantify the future state of the world. The future state of the world is the territoriality which would influence the market structure and as well as the efficiency expressed by the recovery rates. The territoriality leads to the cases redistribution. The market share of the premium agents would significantly drop. In the case of evenly distribution each agent has 0.6% market share. Probably the market share of the premium agent would exceed 0.6% because his/her place of residence is connected with more cases because more people as well as corporations have there their place of residence. Due to this reason authors make three different predictions. The first is the strictest and it forecasts that 20 current premium agents will operate with the market share 10%. The middle prediction is based on the market share 15% and the most optimistic one on 20%. The recovery rates decrease in all three predictions (comparison with table 1). The results are included in table 3, 4 and 5. These tables display highest, lowest and average recovery rates for the different types of creditors. The most pessimistic version is connected with table 3 which shows results in the case that the premium agents have only 10% market share in total. For some creditors the results are so low that we cannot exclude a possibility that they would not use the services of the bailiffs at all.
192
Tab.3.Decrease of recovery rates (market share of the premium bailiffs 10%). Source: own computations. % / type of creditor
Provider of hire purchases 1
Provider of hire purchases 2
Bank 1
Bank 2
12.2
Mobile operator (time frame 3y) 13.3
Mobile operator (time frame 7y) 30.5
Highest recovery rate Average recovery rate Lowest recovery rate
9.2
5.4
26.7
5.6
3.2
21.8
8.9
8.6
19.4
2.0
1.4
17.2
5.8
4.3
9.5
Table 4 contains the improved results but the lowest recovery rates for some creditors do not exceed 10%. The level of satisfaction generally remains low and insufficient. Tab.4.Decrease of recovery rates (market share of the premium bailiffs 15%). Source: own computations. % / type of creditor
Provider of hire purchases 1
Provider of hire purchases 2
Bank 1
Bank 2
12.8
Mobile operator (time frame 3y) 14.5
Mobile operator (time frame 7y) 33.3
Highest recovery rate Average recovery rate Lowest recovery rate
10.5
5.9
27.4
6.4
3.5
22.3
9.3
9.2
20.9
2.3
1.6
17.7
6.1
4.7
10.4
Table 5 should display the best results in the case of authors' predictions but in the comparison with table 1 the recovery rates are half. The authors' simulation of territoriality leads to a serious deterioration. The creditors lose money and their capital always because the recovery rates in the case of risk clients are never 100%. Before the territoriality the average recovery rate for provider of hire purchases 1 is 19.2%, for provider of hire purchases 2 is 8.3%, for bank 1 30.8%, for bank 2 15.8 and mobile operator in time frame 3 years 20%. After the introduction of the territoriality the average recovery rates drop to 50%. This is the extreme deterioration which would affect not only the creditors but all their customers. These customers should pay higher prices to cover these expected losses. The impact is then predictable on the whole country economy. Money disappears from the system because of the debtors and therefore it cannot be multiplicated and creates higher value for society. Tab.5.Decrease of recovery rates (market share of premium bailiffs 20%). Source: own computations. % / type of creditor
Provider of hire purchases 1
Provider of hire purchases 2
Bank 1
Bank 2
13.4
Mobile operator (time frame 3y) 15.6
Mobile operator (time frame 7y) 36.0
Highest recovery rate Average recovery rate Lowest recovery rate
11.7
6.5
28.1
7.2
3.8
22.8
9.7
9.8
22.3
2.5
1.7
18.1
6.4
5.1
11.3
4. Conclusion This paper was focused on the territoriality and its possible impacts on the market, participants and the efficiency of the process in the case of enforcement agents' regulation in the Czech Republic. Authors forecasted and quantified the possible impacts of the territoriality. Because of the limited data availability the authors had to use 5 types of the creditors as case studies and as well they worked 193
with the strong assumptions. The assumptions could be revised but still the territoriality would lead to lower recovery rates which is an unwanted state of the world. 5. Acknowledgement The article has been processed as one of the outputs of the research project “Research of insolvency practice in the CR, with the aim of forming proposals for changes in the legislation that would enable increased yields from insolvency proceedings for creditors, which would contribute towards increasing the competitiveness of the Czech economy”, registered at the Technological Agency of the Czech Republic (TA CR) under the registration number TD020190. The authors of this study would like to thank for the cooperation and support the Ministry of Justice of the Czech Republic, namely JUDr. Robert Pelikán, Mgr. Michal Fraňk, Mgr. Antonín Stanislav, Mgr. Lenka Vyčichlová and Mgr. Klára Cetlová, court bailiffs, who provided valuable information about executor office functioning, and Chamber of Executors Czech Republic for its statistics. Finally, the authors have to pay a special attention and thank to the institutional creditors whose data allow to detect and objectively explain differences among the court bailiffs functioning and regional disparities in the recovery rates. References [1] D. Beníková, Několik úvah nad připravovanou změnou exekučního řádu, Bulletin advokacie, pp. 40-42, 2010. [2] D. Čámská, Impact of the Czech Changing Economic Environment on Bankruptcy Models, International Advances in Economic Research, vol. 21, pp. 117-118, 2015. [3] J. Klečka, Indicators measuring the level and development of enterprise productivity, The 8th International Days of Statistics and Economics Conference Proceedings, pp. 668–677, 2014. [4] F. Korbel and D. Prudíková, Velké změny exekučního práva od 1. ledna 2013, Právní rozhledy, pp. 1-10, 2013. [5] M. Synek et al., Podniková ekonomika, 498 p., 2010. [6] The European Commission for the Efficiency of Justice, European judical systems – Edition 2014 (2012 data): efficiency and quality of justice, available at http://www.coe.int/t/dghl/cooperation/cepej/evaluation/2014/Rapport_2014_en.pdf
194
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Metal Curtains of Architectural Stage: Media Facades İnanç Işıl Duman Faculty of Architecture Department of Interior Architecture and Environmental Design, İzmir University, Gursel Aksel Bulvarı, No: 14, Üçkuyular, 35350, İzmir, Turkey
[email protected] Keywords: Architecture, Stage, Media Facades, Digital Age.
Abstract. Higher-resolution, larger screen technologies are increasing everyday but not only in our living room, but also on the facades of the buildings. Challenging technology of communication and informatics, arising power of media, widespread effects of advertisements, fast changing demands of the consumer accompany the deep impact that change the look of our buildings. But there is a question; who will be the prior authority on future appearances of the buildings and control the messages those surfaces communicate? Among public, employers, lighting designers, computer engineers, media content developers, technology experts, advertising companies, the role of architects and their reaction towards these highly digitalized facades will be discussed. The results of this discussion will give the idea about their point of view between art and engineering. There are a lot of comments between technology vs. architecture, advertising vs. architecture, media vs. architecture, but there is only few finding between the scopes of art vs. architecture among these subjects. In this study, the changing character of architectural surfaces from traditional façade definition to media façade which seem like the metal curtains of architectural stage will be discussed with the scope of Semper’s notions of architectural façade in textile methods of designing. 1. Introduction In Der Stil first published in 1860-63, Semper’s opinion about the architectural façade as a dressing symbolically indicates to the way in which textiles were presumably first used to build. Semper’s term “Beckleidung,” has been translated into English as “cladding”, rather than as “clothing” or “dress”, it has lost its original meanings. Semper’s Beckleidung connotes as well the theatrical mask. The textile-like coverings of the walls “mask” their underlying structure at the same time. In Semper’s definition of Beckleidungprinzip, clothing is understood not only protection but also as the adorning components, which are used by people to have an attraction. Textile-like coverings masks between the underlying structures and outside and Semper’s analogy of the carpet and the wall, which spoke much of the visible boundaries of space, shows its currency here. Related with the notion of Semper, changing architectural surfaces, particularly Media Surfaces are discussed in a textile way of architectural thinking. Media Surfaces which are not only protect and divide between interior/exterior but also as the textile like plaited (metal meshes) coverings, decorates the body of building and connotes the theatrical mask [1]. Semper’s speculations about art were concerned with style and he attempted to build a theory, not of how art forms can be created, but of the manner in which they came into being. He interested of the manner in which forms were created by. Although he understood art as being like language in that it was structured on the basis of a number of elementary formal types and symbols, nevertheless Semper understood such structures activity resting on a natural instinct, that being the human desire for adornment. Semper stated that “the beginning of building gets along with the beginning of textiles 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
195
ICSSS 2015
as the symbolic cloths dressings of architecture” [2]. Not only in beginning, have we also witnessed the textiles at the cutting edges of architectural revolution process in 21st century. The main act of adorning structures begins a process of continuous formation, elaboration and transformation, which Semper terms the art of ‘dressing’. Although the art of dressing arises spontaneously out of local instincts and elementary technical skills its development into a language of art is disciplined by two factors: the negation of physical material; the liberation of the pictorial form [1]. In line of Semper’s thoughts about transformation, it is possible to see Semper’s thoughts of art form’s reflection on facade, which is became inseparable to think without each other. It should also be connected with debates on media façade. The dynamic exchanges are taken place between architecture and textiles have been creating a new range of possibilities that take both disciplines in exciting new directions. Not only does today’s generation of textiles provide new inspiration for architects, it also presents fresh possibilities for urban planners and developers [3]. Media facades create entirely new connections between digital space on the one hand and architecture and urban space on the other hand. 2. Transformation of facades The motivating factors of the media facades were created in the process of investigation was the new mechanical methods of communication, such as engineering, film and photography, had begun to emerge in the nineteenth century. Behind that, its source was firmly rooted in the belief that pictorial art was inherently valuable. The pictorial productions deliver very different effects with media facades to those that had been manifested in the past. It occurred a radical break in architecture practice as a new form of façade arising. Media facades represent the ongoing transformation of modern architecture, as well. Building facades come alive with floating, abstract forms and moving images capturing our attention and expanding our imaginations. Clothing and information are fascinating us with color and motion. Emerging and existing innovations in fabric technology makes us searching new terms to redefine the meaning of new facades [4]. Manolopoulou’s picture wall which explains the wall what we see, as an image. With the image we see but we also hide, we screen seeing. Consequently the wall is also what we don’t see [5]. In this discourse of the façade is defined as a static picture plane. It is like a filter, permitting, blocking or reflecting views and light; showing or hiding the space behind. One step further, for Vicente Guallart, the fundamental purpose consists of the adaptation of architecture to a digital culture and context; a purpose that is at once real and uncertain [6]. Relating with reflection of digitalized architecture, media facades change here the surfaces’ picture wall meaning from static to a dynamic and living character at once real and uncertain together; which It can turn to be a sign, a surface, a clock, a breathing hearth, a reference point, a landmark, and but at the background a show of architectural stage. And we witness how a picture plate comes to a media façade, that can be perform as matt and felt at the same time [7]. Throughout Der Stil passages occur in which architecture is described as if it were a living structure, in which the artistic expression of the conflict between pressure and counter-pressure animates the building’s appearance. In the case of Greek Temples the use of a “veil of paint” masks mechanic necessity and transforms them into “dynamic, even organic, forms, a matter of endowing them with a soul…” [8]. That is also the reason why a media façade sometimes can be called as living skin in literature. With the parallel thought of immaterialization, the façade represents itself not as a material artifact, but as a fictional being and deny the material reality of the construction. Right here we can mention about the separation between the presence and representation, becoming close to the characteristics of a theatrical performance. 3. Textile methods of designing The cutting edge in architecture is not hard, but with textile methods sensuous and soft. Now, for the first time in many years, the significance of the textile in architecture is being rediscovered [3]. For 196
centuries, the qualities and properties of textiles as a material group were largely excluded from most architecture theory and from architectural production itself. Building with textiles is usually perceived difficult and seemed flammable, vulnerable to water, impermanent and weak material. Architecture is equated with density and mass, so the lightweight textiles have often been limited to decorative expressions. Few practitioners, the most known is Semper, guessed that textiles had a long history as an architectural material, had been giving rise to a tradition of portable habitations and porous buildings several thousand years ago. In the context of buildings, fabrics disappeared while wood, stone, metal and glass became the materials of choice, but recent developments in textile technology have revealed their existence in architecture today. Even though there is a disagreement between robust architecture and tactile fabrics, there are threads that connect them. While fabric-formed environments were seeing as tensile buildings and inflatable pavilions, the tailoring techniques of braiding, weaving and pleating are used to create the dynamic ornaments of media facades. Many of the visual and intellectual principles supporting fashion are gaining currency among architects. As tailoring techniques find expression in architecture, the resulting focus on fashion tends to eclipse the vital role that textiles play in contemporary architecture. Apparel and architecture rarely come together in structures built for permanent environment, but converge where they share mutual skills, practices and ideas. Fabric, in the hands of fashion designers, can craft wearable shelters, while the agency of architecture enables textiles to become built structures. Textiles and architecture can truly become one in the built environment [9]. 4. Architectural stages of digital age: media facades Translation of physical textiles and textile techniques into architecture with aid of computer has been sustained preoccupation for architectural theorists and advanced research architects. The development of weaving the repertoire of forms was extended enormously. Increasing the number of architects, who see textile methods in architecture not as a weak form, but also soft architecture of hard form, textiles have emerged as a material that can interface with built structures on many different levels, resulting in a whole new paradigm of lightweight, interwoven architecture [3]. Architects, like Dominique Perrault, borrow from tailoring techniques of weaving and braiding, while creating media facades with metal meshes. Dominique Perrault’s works are suggestive of many of the possible futures of architextiles. Perrault describes his work in evocative and phenomenological terms, referring to fleeting effects and to the ‘speed’, ‘liquidity’, ‘softness’ and other characteristics of textiles in space. Progressive projects have examined a broad range of textile qualities. He describes his projects as, variously, ‘veil’, ‘evening dress’, ‘smock’, ‘vestment’, ‘slipcover’, ‘curtain’ and ‘drape’. In Perrault’s successful collaborations with mesh manufacturers and producers, he has altered the nature of architectural construction and its system of production through his development of new building fabrics with German manufacturer GKD [10]. The versatility of metal mesh fabrics is expanding even further to include architectural and illuminated metal mesh. These fabrics have the ability to “clad” architectural surfaces in transparent, light-reflecting metal skins. With the addition of embedded, programmable Led lights or “profiles”, the mesh becomes a media wall, capable of delivering graphics, text, and video on a large scale, day or night. Metal Fabrics or called as Metal meshes which used for media facades, stainless-steel textile interweaves digital imagery and special LED strips at regular intervals (Fig. 1). The LEDs display digital images such as logos, advertising promotions, animation and film, and can be controlled remotely through a web-based user interface and also interact spontaneously with weather changes. Woven stainless steel, in the form of ready-made exterior mesh, is an aesthetically and structurally compelling textile that can be purchased by the meter in weaves that mimic herringbone, jacquard and tweed. Even techniques such as knitting and crochet can contribute to the process. When flexible fibers and supple polymer strands are twisted or bundled into cables and braided, structures that result can create tension and compression more efficiently than masonry. Braiding is a system in which all fibers are continuously mechanically interlocked at regular intervals, acting as a distributor [10]. 197
Fig.2.Mediamesh®– LEDs integrated into stainless steel mesh Photo: ag4 media façade
Media facades create utterly new connections between digital space on the one hand and architecture and urban space on the other hand. As in the project of Dominique Perrault- Centre Pompidou-Metz, in France, the external mesh skin also functioned as a media surface, suggesting the changing contents and events within the museum. Textiles change their properties depending on their tension and the detail of their structure as a whole in media façade. LED embedded units of stainless-steel textile interweave lose their ornamental pattern appearances. Penn professor David Leatherbarrow described performative architecture as an emphasis not on what a building is, but what it does. He feels as a new way of understanding buildings by pointing their potential double meaning, apart from their functions and leading them to consider as an event not as an object [11]. Especially at nights when the screen’s lights on, increases the theatrical performance on the stages of the media façade and masking the interior by attracting the others with their gleaming appearance. They change their daily role and become ready for the night. Titillating visionaries of them lure public. In some samples or in early day times, except for the surfaces blocking the views which are made by fully opaque materials, walls allow views and filter flows of light. As a surface technique, braiding and weaving invert the concept of masking, promoting greater transparency in architecture when the media façade was not active. But, generally they encouraged people to see the exterior surface, not inside [12]. In a similar vein, Jan Edler, an architect with realities: united in Berlin, presented a light and media installation, and called BIX that he has just completed at the Kunsthaus in Graz, Austria. This new building, designed by Spacelab Cook-Fournier GmbH, has a free-form glass facade shaped like a large potato. Behind the facade, realities: united has designed a lighting scheme that turns the building into a gigantic illuminated screen upon which digital media art pieces can be projected. BIX is an experimental laboratory. As the content producer the Kunsthaus has the chance to develop methods for a dynamic communication between building and surroundings, between content and outside perception (Fig.2).
198
Fig.2.Museum of Modern Arts, Graz, Austria. Photo: Realities united
In a parallel thought their other project in Singapore, the façade of the Iluma Shopping Center demonstrates that an image or a text message require a systematic matrix while the pixel elements can have any geometric form (Fig.3). For the ILUMA building in Singapore RU created a light and media facade, which had to be effective both during day and night. The project is part of a new development (Urban Entertainment Center) designed by WOHA architects. In various ways this concept blurs boundaries as it actively merges the concept of a media screen with an ornamental architectural screen filtering air and light and as it blends abstract futuristic shapes with a 1970’s Vegas style. On one side there is the impression of an ultra large media screen, which is not yet fully there. It appears to be still deep frozen under a surface of ice, cracking and thawing. A herald of a fundamental change of architecture, which is about to transform from a static to a dynamic art. On the other side the individual blinking crystals carry a strong reminiscence to the look of the “modern city” of the 20th century. The idea of “entertainment” linked to flashing neon signs and excessive baroque carpets of light bulbs with its on-off moving aesthetic [13].
Fig.3.Iluma Building, Singapore. Photo: Realities united
5. Results and conclusion The challenges in technology are creating a new range of possibilities that take architecture in exciting new directions. Not only does today’s generation of textiles or digital screens provide new inspiration for architects, it also presents fresh possibilities for urban planners and developers. With the textile ways of thinking style architectural forms and facades are extended interactively. Textiles have emerged as a material that can interface with built structures on many different levels, resulting 199
in a whole new paradigm of lightweight, interwoven architecture. Architects borrow from tailoring techniques of weaving and braiding, while creating media facades with metal meshes. The screen makes a fuzzy line between where the architecture ends and where the performance medium begins by giving project great vitality. The evolving movements in a rich mix of digital media, architecture, sculpture, high-tech engineering, and interactive buildings in digital era, the definiton of architectural facade is changing in a way through as the stage of architecture which was dressed by the textile methods of design. The role of architect in these stages is thought not only being an art director or technical supporter but also as a coordinator of the disciplines of lighting designers, computer engineers, media content developers, technology experts from humans point of views. References [1] G. Semper, The four elements of architecture and other writings, Cambridge University Press, New York, 1989. [2] V. Watson, Problems of painting and building in architecture, The Journal of Architecture, vol.14, 3 pp. 289-291, 2009. [3] M. Garcia, Architecture + textiles= Architextiles, AD- Architectural Design, edited by Mark Garcia, ISBN- 0- 470-02634, pp. 6-11, 2006. [4] J. Bisantz, New mesh up, Fabric Architecture, vol. 97, pp. 12-16, 2009. [5] Y. Manolopoulou, Repetation to monochrome: surfaces for picture making by Herzog& de Meuron and Ellsworth Kelly, The Journal of Architecture vol. 86, pp. 36-45, 2009. [6] J. Salazar, Critical Visions, 10X10: Ten architects ten critics, Phaidon Press Limited, London, pp. 255-256, 2006. [7] G. Hartoonian, The fabric of fabrication, Textile, vol. 4, 3, pp. 270-292, 2006. [8] C. A. Van Eck, Figuration, tectonics and animism in Semper’s Der Stil, The Journal of Architecture, vol. 14,3 pp. 323 -326, 2009. [9] M. Garcia, Prologue for a history and theory of architextiles, AD- Architectural Design, edited by Mark Garcia, ISBN- 0- 470-02634, pp. 13-16, 2006. [10] M. H. Haeusler, Media Facades, history, Technology, content, Leibfarth & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG, ISBN: 978-3-89986-107-5, 2009. [11] B. Kolaroviç & A. M. Malkawi, Performative architecture beyond instrumentality, Spon Press, Taylor Francis Group, New York and London, ISBN 0-203-01782-X Master e-book ISBN, pp.4-5, 2005 [12] F. Duarte, R. J. Firmino, Infiltrated city, augmented space: information and communication technologies and representations of contemporary spatialities, The Journal of Architecture, vol. 14, 5, pp. 545-563, 2009. [13] K. Christoff,Kunthauz graz: the convention of an alien object, text by Colin Fournier for Kunthauz book, 2004. http://www.archis.org/test_getobject.php?object_id=465.
200
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Study on Transformational Leadership and its Influence in Chinese Media: Taking Newspaper Group as Example Zhiyong Mo a, *, Chih-Chung Chen b School of Journalism and Communication, Jinan University, Guangzhou, 510632 China a
[email protected],
[email protected] *Corresponding author
Keywords: Transformational Leadership, Organizational Commitment, Turnover Intention
Abstract. This research took a famous newspaper group China (the Southern Metropolis Daily) as example, using quantitative methods to explore its managers’ transformational leadership and employees’ organizational commitment and turnover intention. We found the performance of transformational leadership and organizational commitment in this newspaper are high, and employees have low turnover intention. Besides, this research also proved that transformational leadership has positive influence on organizational commitment, and negative influence on turnover intention. Transformational leadership, hence, was proved to be a good leadership style for media organizations. The findings are both important for further media researches and media management practices. 1. Introduction Leadership has been one of the hot topics in study of western management. Some scholars define it as “a kind of interpersonal behavior aimed to acquire commitment of employees to achieve an objective” [1]. From this definition, it can be said that leadership is everywhere in the organization and any behavior of stimulating, guiding and influencing the subordinate or the partner to achieve a particular objective can be termed as leadership. The noted economist J. A. Schumpeter even thought, the strategic success or failure of an enterprise, to a large extent, depended on leadership capacity as the connotation of a strategy was unlikely to be expressed with words or embodied with a formal system or norm. Instead, it is leaders who predict the future of the organization according to their experience and intuition, then organize employees according to the prospect, accumulate resources, seize the opportunity and finally establish strategic superiority step by step. [2] In the course of study on leadership in the past nearly one hundred years, it is without doubt that transformational leadership was the hottest study subject in the 80s of the 20th Century. Compared with the traditional leadership style, transformational leadership develops potential of employees, changes their value and belief and encourages employees to put forth efforts beyond their expectation so as to better realize the objective of the organization. [3] Studies in the recent years indicate that transformational leadership has great influences on organizational performance. When western management science and organizational behavior theory are brought into China, study of leadership also blossoms and yields fruit. Especially in terms of transformational leadership, domestic scholars have conducted studies one after another on this new kind of leadership pattern and have accumulated quite a lot of research achievements. However, so far, domestic study has achieved nothing about media leadership. This study employs a transformational leadership scale which has been tested with empirical data and amended under the background of China, takes the well-known metropolitan newspaper 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
201
ICSSS 2015
“Southern Metropolis Daily” as the object of analysis and discusses the transformational leadership performance and structure of this newspaper and influences of transformational leadership on organizational commitment and turnover intention of employees. This helps to strengthen scientificalness and standardization of study of media leadership in China, and, meanwhile, has great guidance significance to improve the leadership capacity and performance of the newspaper industry. 2. Literature review 2.1 Transformational leadership The word transformational leadership appeared at the earliest in the book “Leadership” by Burns. [3] Burns believed that leadership was an evolvement process of the interrelationship between leader and the subordinate and leaders and employees were devoted together to intellectual stimulation and spiritual inspiration to stimulate organizational transformation. In this process, the working motivation and cooperation ethics of leaders and the subordinate got promoted, which, meanwhile, was able to facilitate change of the organizational social system. [3] The follow-up researcher Bass pointed out, transformational leadership was trust, respect and loyalty of employees perceived by leaders and leaders improved commitment of employees to the organizational objective by means of changing the value and belief of employees, taping their potential and giving them confidence and stimulated them to have an aspiration and make efforts for the organization out of their expectation. [4] Bass and Avolio made a specific analysis of the four dimensionalities for transformational leadership as follows: [5] Inspirational motivation, Idealized influence, Individualized consideration, and Intellectual stimulation. A large quantity of empirical studies have been conducted in the western society in the recent years on relevant variables about transformational leadership and it is discovered that significant correlations exists between transformational leadership and such variables as organizational efficacy or organizational performance, unit cohesive force and organizational commitment. [6] Studies by domestic academics also indicate that significant correlation exists between transformational leadership and employee satisfaction. [7] It was found by that there was certain difficulty in applying the western transformational leadership directly into Chinese enterprises as a consequence of cultural differences. [8] For example, what the western scale usually inquired about was opinions of employees in the leadership capacity of their direct supervisors, and this also manifested the thinking of westerners that “all managerial personnel need to possess leadership”. However, since the collectivism consciousness was strong in Chinese enterprises, employees were, to a large extent, influenced by the top leaders and other executives at a high order in addition to their subordinate supervisors. As a consequence, employees were often unable to effectively answer any question concerning leadership capacity of their subordinate supervisors. Hence, Chen Chih-Chung and Zhang De interpreted and amended the western scale to make the structure and rhetoric of the western scale more easily understood by employees in Chinese enterprises.[8] 2.2 Organizational commitment and turnover intention Organizational commitment refers to a kind of emotion generated among employees to be willing to participate in the work of the organization whole-heartedly with increase of the organization in “unilateral input”. Meyer and Allen categorized organizational commitment into three dimensionalities [9], namely, “continuance commitment” which means that hard work of employees is aimed to protect the existing position and welfare, “emotional commitment” which refers to emotion and loyalty of employees to the organization and “normative commitment” which refers to sense of responsibility and sense of
202
obligation among employees towards the organization. These three dimensionalities are currently the most widely accepted organizational commitment model. Turnover intention is the possibility that employees shift a job within a certain period of time. It is recommended by quite a large number of academics to replace turnover intention with actual turnover behavior in the study, as turnover behavior is affected by a lot of external factors and is difficult to forecast. [10] For the time being, it is widely believed in science of management and psychology that organizational commitment and turnover intention are important indicators to measure the personal efficacy of employees. Organizational commitment means emotion and responsibility of employees towards the organization, whereas turnover intention indicates whether employees are ready to render a service to the organization in the long run. Thus, both of the two are important variables that measure the psychological condition of employees. 3. Methodology This study employs a survey research method and takes the most noted metropolitan newspaper “Southern Metropolis Daily” as the research object to discuss performance of the transformational leadership and verify influences of transformational leadership on organizational commitment and turnover intention. 3.1 Instruments Transformational leadership is measured with the scale designed by Podsakoff et al. [11] There are altogether 14 items, among which 6 subjects measure the inspirational motivation (or prospect shaping), 4 subjects measure the idealized leadership (or charismatic leadership), 2 subjects measure the individualized consideration and 2 subjects measure intellectual stimulation. Organizational commitment is measured with the organizational commitment scale by Meyer and Allen [9]. This scale contains 18 subjects which are classified into the three dimensionalities of continuance commitment, normative commitment and emotional commitment. Turnover intention is measured with the turnover intention scale compiled by Michaels and Spector, [10] which has one dimensionality and 6 subjects. The scales employed in this study are all 5-point Likert scales and the options from 1 to 5 include “Strong disagree”, “Disagree”, “Not sure”, “Agree” and “Strongly agree”. 3.2 Sampling “Southern Metropolis Daily” is a well-known metropolitan newspaper in China and is subordinate to the Southern Media Group. It was launched in 1997 and is a four-leaf comprehensive daily paper to the needs of the public in Pearl River Delta in Guangdong Province. According to “the ranking list of top 100 world daily newspapers in ranking of circulation” in 2010” that was announced by the World Association of Newspapers and the International Organization of Journalists on August 16, 2010, the circulation of “Southern Metropolis Daily” reached 1.4 million, ranking the 30th in the world. This study sends out questionnaires within the internal office OA system of the newspaper through the human resource department of “Southern Metropolis Daily” during the period and April and May in 2010. Altogether, 142 questionnaires are taken back among which 135 questionnaires are effective. 4. Data analysis 4.1 Descriptive statistics Among the 135 effective respondents, 52.6% are male, among which 64.6% have a working experience for more than five years in “Southern Metropolis Daily” and 20.8% have a working experience for more than ten years. Besides, as many as 70.2% of respondents have a working experience in the entire newspaper industry for more than five years and 33.6% have a working experience for more than ten years. Thus, it can be seen that the respondents do not only have rich 203
average working experience, but also possess certain seniority in “Southern Metropolis Daily”, so they are qualified to effectively answer any issue concerning the leadership and organizational behavior. In terms of educational background, 95.5% of respondents possess a college degree or above and 68.8% of respondents have a bachelor degree and above. Distribution of positions is extensive. 24.6% of respondents are reporting staff, 20.1% of respondents are administrative and personnel assisting staff, 14.9% of respondents are sales and marketing personnel and the proportion of midlevel executives and first-line managers also respectively reach 16.4%. The basic statistic about transformational leadership and organizational commitment and turnover intention in the case of “Southern Metropolis Daily” is shown in Table 1. It can be seen in Table 1 that the transformational leadership and organizational commitment of “Southern Metropolis Daily” are both above the middle value of 3 in Likert Scale. It is, thus, obvious that the leadership capacity of the management team of newspaper office has a high level and employees also have great centripetal force and sense of loyalty towards the newspaper office. Furthermore, the mean 2.81 of turnover intention is lower than the middle value of 3 in the Likert Scale. It is, thus, obvious that a large majority of employees still tend to continue to work in the newspaper office. Tab.1.Mean and standard deviation of main variables (SPSS 14.0 estimator, N=135) Name of variable Transformational leadership Inspirational motivation Idealized influence Individualized consideration Intellectual stimulation Organizational commitment Continuance commitment Normative commitment Emotional commitment Turnover intention
Mean 3.51 3.74 3.42 3.33 3.55 3.29 3.29 3.10 3.49 2.81
Standard deviation 0.66 0.57 0.80 0.77 0.80 0.66 0.64 0.78 0.79 0.79
Given the different dimensionalities of the variables, the four dimensionalities of transformational leadership are respectively inspirational motivation, intellectual stimulation, idealized influence and individualized consideration in the sequence of the scores. This indicates that the newspaper office is able to construct a beautiful prospect and makes use of the prospect and objective to stimulate employees (inspirational motivation) and are also adept in letting employees beat their brains to stimulate the creativity and imagination (intellectual stimulation) of employees. Nevertheless, there is still space for improvement in the aspects of taking the lead, words and deeds and showing consideration for personal demand of employees. Of course, this has something to do with cultural differences. What western countries study is the leadership of the direct superior of each employee and the direct superior may have more opportunities to have face-to-face and individualized contact with the subordinate employee. Yet, in China, what transformational leadership studies is leadership of the entire management team. As a result, no wonder that the latter lags behind in terms of meeting individualized demand of employees. Among the three dimensionalities of organizational commitment, it is emotional commitment that gets the highest score and it is normative commitment that has the lowest score. This proves the centripetal force of a large majority of employees is emotional and they like “Southern Metropolis Daily”. They consider themselves a member of the Southern Metropolis Daily and blieve their work in Southern Metropolis Daily is meaningful. However, on the other hand, there are a few employees whose feelings towards the newspaper can rise to the level of morality and sense of responsibility (normative commitment) and there is still open space for improvement of employee satisfaction with such external elements as job stability, remuneration and welfare, etc. (continuance commitment).
204
4.2 Correlations between transformational leadership, organizational commitment and turnover intention The effect of transformational leadership has been supported by a lot of empirical studies. Hence, this study makes the following hypotheses: H1: Transformational leadership has positive influences upon organizational commitment. H2: Transformational leadership has negative influences upon turnover intention. We employ multiple linear regression analysis. Step one: control variables enter the equation; step two: independent variables enter the equation. Variables directly enter the equation. First of all, we check influences of transformational leadership on organizational commitment and turnover intention and the result is shown in Table 2. It can be seen from Table 2, after influences of the variables of gender and seniority are taken under control, transformational leadership has significantly positive effects on organizational commitment (a regression coefficient of 0.72), and, furthermore, transformational leadership has significantly positive effects on continuance commitment (a regression coefficient of 0.58), normative commitment (a regression coefficient of 0.69) and emotional commitment (a regression coefficient of 0.62). This indicates that the more a management team adopts the transformational leadership style, the higher the organizational commitment. On the other hand, although effects of transformational leadership on turnover intention has achieved the statistically significant level (p 1, China has a comparative advantage, whereas if RCAS0 represents xi is better than xk ; while akj >S0 represents xk is better than x j , then aij >S0 can be derived the equation of xi better than x j is aij =aik ⊕ akj
(2)
Definition 3: The Algorithm Rules of Three Different Kinds of Pairwise Comparison Decision Making Matrices The preference relation matrix is generated based on a general formula. For different known factors of the decision-making expert’s choice, it obtains few matrices. The algorithm’s rules of the three decision making matrices are shown by many researches. Xu [1] proposed the algorithm rules of the three different decision making matrices and Wang et al. [3, 4] used the InLinPreRa to solve the Multi-Criteria Decision Making. Chang et al. [5] utilized the Incomplete Linguistic Preference Relations to measure the possibility of success for implementing ERP. 3. Framework for measuring the Satisfaction of selecting suitable internet-marketers 3.1 Investigating the influential factors on selecting suitable internet-marketers The influential factors are derived though widespread investigation and consultation with several experts. There are C1: Creativity, C2: Insightful, C3: Decisiveness, C4: Collaborative, C5: Professional, C6: Dedication, C7: Negotiation skill. 3.2 Determining the priority weights of influential factors Subjectivity and vagueness within the measuring process are dealt with using linguistic variables quantified in a scale of [-t , t ] . This study uses linguistics to express their strength of preference among influential factors. 3.2.1 Linguistic variables This study provides the evaluators simple linguistic terms quantified on a scale of [-8, 8] to express their strength of preference among influential factors (see Table 1). Linguistic variables are simultaneously used to measure the likelihood of success/failure regarding each influential factor (see Table 2). Table.1.Linguistic terms for the importance weights of influential factors Definition Absolutely more important (AB) Very strongly more important (VS) Strongly more important (ST) Weakly more important (WK) Equally important (EQ)
value 8 6 4 2 0
Definition Absolutely more important (AB) Less Strongly more important (LST) Less Very strongly more important (LVS) Less Absolutely more important (LAB)
378
value -2 -4 -6 -8
Table.2.Linguistic variables for the priority ratings of possible outcome Definition Very high (VH) High (H) Fair (F) Less High (LH) Less Very high (LVH)
value 4 2 0 -2 -4
3.2.2 Obtaining priority weights of influential factors z Construct pairwise comparison matrices amongst the influential factors ( C r , r = 1, 2,..., k ). The evaluators ( E e , e = 1, 2,..., n ) used three types of pairwise comparisons algorithm (horizontal, vertical, and oblique) to construct pairwise comparison matrices. Uses of the horizontal comparison of matrices are seen below: C1
C ( e ) = ⎡⎣ aij( e ) ⎤⎦
k ×k
C1 ⎡ 0 C2 ⎢⎢× C ⎢× = 3⎢ C4 ⎢ × ... ⎢... ⎢ Ck ⎣⎢×
C2
C3
C4
a12( e ) a13( e ) a14( e ) × × 0 × × 0 × × 0 ... ... ... ×
×
×
... Ck a1(ke ) ⎤ ⎥ × ⎥ × ⎥ ⎥ × ⎥ × ⎥ ⎥ ... 0 ⎦⎥ kxk
... ... ... ... 0
(3)
The remaining a ij can be calculated using Eqs.(1) and Eqs.(2) to obtain the other known × of (e)
triangular second half. Finally, obtain the full preference matrix. (e) ( e) z Transform the preference value a ij into bij in an interval scale [0,1], then the matrix Ct obtained as
Ct = f (C ( e ) ) .
The transformation function is given by f : [−a, a ] → [0,1] ,
Ct ( e ) = ⎡bij( e ) ⎤ ⎣ ⎦ kxk
z
C1 C2 ⎡ 0 b12( e ) C1 (e) ⎢ C2 b21 0 (e) C ⎢ (e) = 3 ⎢b31( e ) b32( e ) C4 b41 b42 ... ⎢... ... Ck ⎢⎢b( e ) b( e ) k2 ⎣ k1
f ( x) =
x+a 2a
C4 b14( e ) (e) b24 b34( e ) 0 ... bk( e4)
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C3 b13( e ) ( e) b23 0 (e) b43 ... bk( e3)
(4a)
Ck b1(ke ) ⎤ b2(ke ) ⎥ b3(ke ) ⎥ ⎥ b4(ke ) ⎥ ... ⎥ 0 ⎥⎦ kxk
(4b)
Utilize the method of average value to integrate the judgment values of n evaluators,
namely C = [ pij ]kxk pij =
z
1 ⎛ (1) + (2) + ... + (n) ⎞ = 1 bij ⎟⎟⎠ n n ⎜⎜⎝ b ij b ij
n
(5a)
∑bij
(e)
i = 1, 2,...,k , j =1, 2,...,k
e =1
Use hij to indicate the normalized preference values of each influential factor, such as
379
(5b)
C1
C2
C3
C4 ... Ck
C1 ⎡ 0 h h h (e) C2 ⎢⎢ h21 h h 0 (e) C ⎢ h ( e ) h32 h 0 C = [hij ]kxk = 3 ⎢ 31 (e) (e) (e) C4 ⎢ h41 h42 h43 0 ... ⎢... ... ... ... ⎢ Ck ⎢⎣ hk(1e ) hk( e2) hk( e3) hk( e4) (e) 12
pij
hij =
∑p
... h1(ke ) ⎤ ⎥ ... h2(ke ) ⎥ ... h3(ke ) ⎥ ⎥ ... h4(ke ) ⎥ ... ... ⎥ ⎥ ... 0 ⎥⎦ kxk
(e) 14 (e) 24 (e) 34
i = 1, 2,...k ,
k
i =1
(e) 13 (e) 23
(6a)
j = 1, 2,..., k
(6b)
ij
Given the r w denoting the priority weight of influential factor r , the priority weight of each factor can be obtained that is z
k
∑h
k
∑h
rj
r
w=
rj
j =1 k k
∑∑
i = 1, 2,..., k
r
w=
hij
k
j =1 k
∑∑ h
i = 1, 2,..., k
(7)
ij
i =1 j =1
i =1 j =1
k
1
w, 2 w,..., k w ,
r
∑
w ∈ [0,1] ,
r
w =1
r =1
(8)
3.3 Determining the priority ratings for possible outcome regarding factors The evaluators are asked to express their subjective judgments regarding the preference ratings of possible outcome ( A i , i = 1, 2,..., m ) regarding each influential factor in linguistic terms, as listed in Table 2. The evaluators used three types of pairwise comparison algorithms to choose the better of two possible outcomes for a set of m -1 preference data under each influential factor. Uses of the horizontal comparison kinds of matrices are seen below. A1 A 2 ⎡ A1 ⎢ 0 A2 ⎢× ⎢ A3 ⎢× r ( e) r ( e) ⎡ ⎤ D = ⎣ auv ⎦ = A4 ⎢ m×m ⎢× # ⎢ ⎢... Am ⎢ ⎣×
A3
A4
...
× a23
×
... ... ... ...
r (e)
a12
r (e)
×
0
× a34
×
×
0
...
...
...
...
×
×
×
...
0
r (e)
Am × ⎤ ⎥ × ⎥ ⎥ × ⎥ ⎥ × ⎥ r ( e) ⎥ am-1m ⎥ ⎥ 0 ⎦m×m
(9)
z Use Eqs.(1) and Eqs.(2) to obtain the corresponding value. Finally, obtain the full preference matrix. (e) Next, the preference value r auv is transformed in the range [-4, 4] into rbuv( e) in an interval scale r [0,1] , then the matrix Dt obtained as r Dt = f ( r D ( e ) ) . The transformation function is given by
f : [−a, a ] → [0,1] , r
f ( x) =
x+a 2a
Dt = [ r buv( e ) ]mxm u, v = 1, 2,..., m
380
(10) (11)
z
Utilize the method of average value to integrate the judgment values of n evaluators, namely r
quv = =
z
D = [ quv ]mxm
(12a)
1 r (1) r (2) (e) ( buv + buv + ... + r buv ) n
(12b)
n
∑ r buv( e )
1 n
u = 1, 2,..., m ,
v = 1, 2,..., m
e =1
Use λuv to indicate the normalized preference values of each influential factor, such as r
r
λuv =
D = [ rλuv ]mxm
quv
r
u, v = 1, 2,..., m
m
∑q u =1
(13a)
(13b)
uv
Consequently, rϕ u denoting the average rating of possible outcome u with respect to influential factor r is provided. The desired rating of each possible outcome can be obtained for each influential factor as z
ϕu =
1
r
π
m
∑
r
v =1
λuv
(14)
3.4 Obtaining the priority weight for prediction Multiplying the priority weights of influential factors by the ratings of possible outcomes, a predicted value Z u for chance in select suitable internet-marketers is obtained as: Z u = rϕ u ⊗ r w
(15)
4. Empirical case study We have a meeting with all members to make sure they know about internet-marketing-talent. Seven major influential factors are considered in this problem of selecting suitable internet-marketers. The sequences of these seven influential factors are randomly assigned. Namely, the seven major risk factors are C1: Creativity, C2: Insightfulness, C3: Decisiveness, C4: Collaborative, C5: Professionalism, C6: Dedication, C7: Negotiation skill. The priority weight of each influential factor can to be obtained by Eqs.1-14. The priority weight and rank of each influential factor assessed by eleven evaluators are listed in Table 3. Table.3.The rank of the influential factor importance weight k
C1
C2
C3
C3
C5
C6
C7
Total
Rank
Weight( w )
C1
0.128
0.128 0.108
0.123
0.127
0.123
0.128
0.864
5
0.126
C2
0.122
0.123 0.103
0.116
0.120
0.115
0.122
0.821
7
0.120
C3
0.143
0.143 0.123
0.143
0.147
0.144
0.143
0.987
4
0.144
C4
0.160
0.160 0.139
0.165
0.168
0.167
0.160
1.119
2
0.163
C5
0.156
0.156 0.135
0.160
0.163
0.162
0.156
1.088
3
0.159
C6
0.165
0.164 0.144
0.172
0.152
0.174
0.167
1.139
1
0.166
C7
0.125
0.126 0.105
0.120
0.123
0.116
0.125
0.840 6.857
6
0.123
381
1
C6 (0.166) > C4 (0.163) > C5 (0.159) > C3 (0.144) > C1 (0.126) > C7 (0.123) > C2 (0.120) The results demonstrate that the five most important influential factors are (C6) Dedication (0.166), (C4) Collaborative (0.163), (C5) Professionalism (0.159), (C3), Decisiveness (0.144), (C1) Creativity (0.126). The prediction weight for selecting suitable internet-marketers is calculated as follows: Z success = (0.647 × 0.126 + 0.569 × 0.120 + 0.534 × 0.144 +
0.685 × 0.163 + 0.569 × 0.159 + 0.710 × 0.166 + 0.655 × 0.123) = 0.627 Z failure = (0.353 × 0.126 + 0.431 × 0.120 + 0.466 × 0.144 + 0.315 × 0.163 + 0.431 × 0.159 + 0.710 × 0.166 + 0.345 × 0.123) = 0.373
5. Conclusion and contribution The Internet has changed and continues to change the way marketing is done. With e-commerce, the research of marketing is even more indispensable. Powerful internet-marketing-talents can be utilized as weapons that make a company successful. Having a complete system for selecting internet-marketers may bring a great deal of business for a company. The proposed approach is based on the reciprocal additive consistent fuzzy preference relations, rather than using conventional multiplicative preference relations. Namely, since this method considers only n − 1 judgments, whereas the traditional AHP takes n( n2−1) judgments in a preference matrix with n elements, it is clear that the proposed approach is faster to execute and more efficient than the conventional pairwise comparison methods. We hope that the results of this study can help organizations select suitable internet-marketers. 6. Acknowledgement The authors would like to thank the National Science Council of the Republic of China, Taiwan for financially supporting this research under Project: MOST 103-2410-H-151-013. References [1] Z. Xu, Incomplete linguistic preference relations and their fusion, Information Fusion, vol. 7, pp. 331-337, 2006. [2] Z. Xu, A method for multiple attribute decision making with incomplete weight information in linguistic setting, Knowledge-Based Systems, vol. 20, pp. 719-725, 2007. [3] T. C. Wang, S. C. Hsu, and Y. C. Chiang, Multi-Criteria Decision Making with Expansion of Incomplete Linguistic Preference Relations, WSEAS Transactions on Mathematics, vol. 6, pp. 817-823, 2007. [4] S. C. Hsu and T. C. Wang, Solving multi-criteria decision making with incomplete linguistic preference relations, Expert Systems with Applications, vol. 38, pp. 10882-10888, 2011. [5] T. H. Chang, S. C. Hsu, T. C. Wang, and C. Y. Wu, Measuring the success possibility of implementing ERP by utilizing the Incomplete Linguistic Preference Relations, Applied Soft Computing, vol. 12, pp. 1582-1591, 2012.
382
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Does “Sell in May” Effect Exist in Chinese a Share Market?—— An Empirical Analysis Based on ARMA-GARCH Model Yu Guo School of Economics and Management, Nanjing University of Science and Technology, Nanjing, Jiangsu, China Email:
[email protected]. Keywords: “Sell in May” effect, Chinese A share market, ARMA-GARCH model
Abstract. This paper conducts an empirical analysis of “Sell in May” effect in Chinese A share market based on ARMA-GARCH model using daily return rate data of two composite indices. The result shows that “Sell in May” effect indeed exists in both Shanghai and Shenzhen A share market in the 1997-2003 period. And we find the risk difference cannot explain this seasonal effect. Besides, the significance of “Sell in May” effect is unstable in Shanghai and Shenzhen A share market. The seasonal effect is most particularly strong in the period of 2002-2007, but it tends to be not significant since 2008.The further research finds out that “Sell in May” effect is not driven by high returns of February or March, but an independent seasonal anomaly. So “Sell in May” effect is not the disguise of the other seasonal anomaly.
中国A股市场存在“五月卖出”效应吗？——基于ARMA-GARCH模型的 实证研究 郭瑜 南京理工大学经济管理学院，南京，江苏，中国 Email:
[email protected]. 关键词: “五月卖出”效应; A股市场; ARMA-GARCH模型
中文摘要. 本文基于ARMA-GARCH模型，利用上证A股综合指数和深圳A股综合指数日收益 率数据，对中国A股市场的“五月卖出”效应进行了实证研究。结果表明在1997年-2013年期 间,沪深两市A股市场总体上存在显著的“五月卖出”效应,且以波动率衡量的风险无法解释其 收益特征。该效应在2002年-2007年间表现最为明显,但是自2008年开始A股市场的“五月卖出” 效应逐渐减弱甚至趋于消失。进一步的实证研究还表明，“五月卖出”效应并非由于二、三 月份异常高收益导致，所以“五月卖出”效应是独立的股市异常现象，而不是其它日历效应 的变相表现形式。
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
383
ICSSS 2015
1．引言 “五月卖出”效应（Sell in May）是一种独特的股市日历现象，其收益模式表现为每年 11 月至下一年4 月期间，股票收益率水平一般高于其它月份，从五月起股市开始回落，所以 应该在五月初将股票卖出，直到十月底再买回。 国外学者对“五月卖出”效应进行了系统的研究。已有研究文献证实很多国家的股票市 场都存在显著的“五月卖出”效应。Bouman&Jacobsen (2002) 是最早在文献中证实“五月卖 出”效应存在的学者。他们以37个国家的资本市场为研究对象，对1970-1998年的MSCI再投资 指数进行了研究，结果表明“五月卖出”效应不仅存在于发达资本市场，而且也存在于新兴 资本市场[1]。Andrade et al. (2012) 将Bouman&Jacobsen (2002) 的研究区间扩展到了2012 年 ， 发 现 “ 五 月 卖 出 ” 效 应 在 1998 年 之 后 产 生 了 更 明 显 的 经 济 效 应 [2] 。 Jacobsen & Visaltanachoti (2009)系统分析了美国的不同行业，发现大多数产业冬季的表现都优于夏 季，三分之二的产业都表现出显著的“五月卖出”效应[3]。 但是也有学者提出了不同的研究结论，认为“五月卖出”效应可能仅仅只是“一月效应” 的变相表现形式或者是数据挖掘的结果。Maberly &Pierce (2003)将Bouman&Jacobsen (2002) 关于美国股市的研究扩展至期货市场。他们发现在1982-2003年间的SP500期货市场，利用“五 月卖出”策略没有任何经济获利的机会，美国市场上的“五月卖出”效应是由个别月份异常 收益造成，进行了异常值调整之后，“五月卖出”效应完全消失[4]。Maberly &Pierce (2004) 进一步用日经225指数期货数据检验“五月卖出”效应的稳健性，发现日本市场的“五月卖出” 效应只出现于1986年之前[5]。 Jones & Lundstrum (2009)指出“五月卖出”策略不具有实际应用性，Bouman&Jacobsen (2002)的研究结果是时间依赖的，多数投资者都无法在他们的投资时间区段内实施这样的资 产配置策略[6]。Dichtl &Drobetzb(2013)的研究结论同样认为，近些年“五月卖出”效应已 经减弱甚至完全消失了，该投资策略并不能提供获取额外收益的机会[7]。 中国国内关于“五月卖出”效应的研究鲜少，而国外的相关研究证实该效应存在于诸多 发达资本市场和新兴资本市场，那么中国股市是否存在“五月卖出”效应?本文主要就中国A 股市场是否存在“五月卖出”效应进行实证研究。文章以下部分的结构安排为：第二部分是 研究设计；第三部分是实证结果与分析；第四部分为稳健性检验；第五部分是最终结论。 2．研究设计 2.1 样本选择与数据来源 本文以上海证券市场A股综合指数（指数代码000002，以下简称为“上证A指”）和深圳 证券市场A股综合指数（指数代码399107，以下简称为“深证A指”）作为研究对象，选取1997 年1月2日至2013年12月31日上证A指和深证A指的日收益率数据进行实证分析。由于1997年之 前中国股市尚未设置涨跌幅限制，故1990年至1997年的两指数日收益率数据未包含至研究区 间。数据来源于瑞思(RESSET)金融研究数据库。 2.2 变量选取与模型构建 Bouman&Jacobsen (2002)通过建立经典简单回归模型，验证了“五月卖出”效应在诸多 资本市场上的存在性。该模型以收益率r作为被解释变量，以时间虚拟变量（dummy）作为解 释变量，经典模型回归方程为： rt
=
α
0
+ α
1
* dum m y
+ ξt
(1)
由于时间序列数据通常都存在序列相关和异方差的问题，而且金融资产收益率的分布通 常会呈现厚尾分布，随机干扰项并不服从正太分布，因此简单OLS回归分析结果的显著性检验 384
不一定可靠。参考已有文献常用方法，考虑采用基于广义误差分布（GED）的ARMA（1,1）-GARCH （1,1）模型进行回归分析，回归方程为： rt
=
α0
+
β 0 * rt − 1 2
σt
=
γ0
+
ξt
+
β 1 * ξ t −1
+
α1 * dum m y
+ γ 1 * σ t2− 1 + γ 2 * ξ t2− 1
(2) (3)
其中，rt为上证A指或者深证A指的日收益率，在均值方程（2）中加入表征时间的虚拟变 量dummy，当日收益率落入5月-10月间，dummy 取值为1；否则为0。如果回归结果中虚拟变量 dummy的系数α1显著为负，说明5月-10月的股票收益率水平显著低于11月-4月期间的收益水 平，从而支持中国A股市场存在“五月卖出”效应的假设。 3．实证结果分析 3.1 变量描述性统计 表1报告了全样本以及5月-10月、11月-4月子样本日收益率数据的描述性统计情况。从 1997年到2013年，上证A指和深证A指各有4110个日收益率观测值，其中2079个观测值落入5 月-10月间，2031个观测值落入11月-4月间。从表1的统计结果可以看出，对于全样本而言， 沪深两市A指日收益率均值都大于0，其中上证A指为0.0003，深证A指为0.0005。而5月-10月 的日收益率均值均为-0.0002，都小于0；但是11月-4月的日收益率均值都大于0，分别为 0.0009，0.0011。不难发现，11月-4月期间沪深两市A指收益率平均水平高于5-10月的收益水 平。 表1 指数日收益率描述性统计 样本
观测量
均值
标准差
最大值
最小值
上证
4110
0.0003
0.0164
0.0986
-0.0897
5-10月
2079
-0.0002
0.0171
0.0986
-0.0890
11-4月
2031
0.0009
0.0157
0.0930
-0.0897
深证
4110
0.0005
0.0180
0.0968
-0.0976
5-10月
2079
-0.0002
0.0188
0.0968
-0.0973
11-4月
2031
0.0011
0.0172
0.0907
-0.0976
统计分析还表明虽然11月-4月期间指数收益率水平相对更高，但是其标准差却明显低于5 月-10月，例如上证A指5月-10月的日收益均值为-0.0002，低于11月-4月的收益均值0.0009； 但是5月-10月收益率的标准差为0.0171，高于11月-4月的收益率标准差0.0157。深证A指收益 率亦是如此。这似乎表明11月-4月期间较高的股票收益水平可能并非由于高风险导致。 从各月日收益率和日波动率均值变化趋势，也可以发现这一点。图1和图2分别描述了上 证A指和深证A指各月日收益率均值、日波动率均值的变化趋势。图1显示沪深两市A股指数日 均收益率从5月份开始回落，直至8、9月份跌至低谷，然后从11月开始表现出明显的上涨趋势 直至次年的4月份，5月-10月期间股票收益率水平明显低于11月-4月。但是图2中各月日波动 率均值的变化趋势却并没有体现出“高风险、高收益”的特征，5月-10月期间日波动率均值 并不明显低于11月-4月期间的波动率均值。这为中国A股市场存在“五月卖出”效应提供了一 定的支持，而且说明这种收益率特征似乎并不能由风险因素解释。
385
0.0025
0.02 0.018
0.002
0.016 0.014
日均波动率
日均收益率
0.0015 0.001 0.0005 0
-0.0005
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0.012 0.01 0.008 0.006 0.004 0.002
-0.001
0
-0.0015
1
上证A指
2
3
4
深证A指
5
6
7
上证A指
图1 1997-2013年间两指数各月日收益率均值
8
9
10
11
12
深证A指
图2 1997-2013年间两指数各月日波动率均值
3.2 回归结果与分析 利用经典模型（1）进行回归分析，得到的实证分析结果见表2的A部分。从表2-A可以看 出，不论是上证A指还是深证A指，其回归结果中虚拟变量dummy的系数α1显著为负（上证A指 显著性程度为-2.233，深证A指显著性程度为-2.231），说明在1997年-2013年间，沪深两市 5-10月的股票收益率水平显著低于11-4月的收益水平，A股市场存在明显的“五月卖出”效应。 采用基于GED的ARMA（1,1）-GARCH（1,1）模型进行回归分析，结果见表2的B部分。从ARMA （1,1）-GARCH（1,1）模型总体回归分析结果（表2-B）可以看出，在修正了异方差和序列相 关性问题之后，虚拟变量dummy的系数α1仍然显著为负，上证A指α1为-0.0009，显著性程度z 值为-2.4790；深证A指α1为-0.0010，显著性程度z值为-2.3770。实证分析的结果表明，在 1997年-2013年间，中国股票市场5月-10月期间的收益表现劣于11月-4月的收益，结果同样支 持沪深两市A股市场“五月卖出”效应的存在性。 表2 “五月卖出”效应回归分析 表2-A 经典模型回归分析结果
α0
α1
t （ α0 ）
t （ α1 ）
上证 0.0009 -0.0011 2.520 -2.233 深证 0.0011 -0.0013 2.706 -2.231 表2-B 基于GED的ARMA（1,1）-GARCH（1,1）模型总体样本回归分析结果
α0
α1
β0
β1
γ0
γ1
γ2
上证 0.0009 -0.0009 -0.8122 0.8342 0.0000 0.9045 0.0802 z值 3.5380 -2.4790 -6.9590 7.5620 4.4010 90.507 8.8060 深证 0.0012 -0.0010 -0.7106 0.7560 0.0000 0.8884 0.0970 z值 4.1810 -2.3770 -7.3060 8.3600 4.9310 98.514 10.451 表2-C 基于GED的 ARMA（1，1）-GARCH（1,1）模型子样本回归分析结果 区间 1997-2001 2002-2007 2008-2013 α1 z（ α1 ） α1 z（ α1 ） α1 z（ α1 ） 上证 深证
-0.0013 -0.0012
-1.412 -1.145
-0.0016 -0.0022
-2.733 -3.400
-0.0006 -0.0001
-0.916 0.083
4．稳健性检验 4.1 子样本检验 依据中国股市整体波动周期将总样本划分为三个子样本：1997年-2001年，2002年-2007 年，2008年-2013年分阶段进行回归分析。从表2-C可以发现，样本分阶段实证分析结果与总 386
体检验的结果有所差异。1997年-2001年以及2002年-2007年间，沪深两市A股市场仍然存在显 著的“五月卖出”效应，但是该效应在两阶段的显著性程度有明显差异。1997年-2001年间， 上证A指、深证A指虚拟变量dummy的系数α1取值分别为-0.0013、-0.0012，相对应的显著性 程度z值分别为-1.412、-1.145；而在2002年-2007年间，沪深两市A股指数α1取值为-0.0016、 -0.0022，z值分别为-2.733、-3.400，显著性程度明显高于1997-2001年。与前两阶段样本检 验结果不同，2008年-2013年上证A指、深证A指虚拟变量dummy的系数α1取值分别为-0.0006、 -0.0001，但是显著性程度z值只有-0.916、-0.083，均无法通过显著性检验，说明2008年-2013 年间“五月卖出”效应在沪深两市A股市场明显减弱甚至消失。 4.2 “五月卖出”效应是其它月份效应的变相表现形式还是独立的日历效应？ Lucey &Zhao (2008)等人认为“五月卖出”效应并不是一个独立的股市异常现象，主要 是因为一月份的异常高收益导致的,该效应只是“一月效应”的变相表现[8]。Haggard & Witte (2010)等人通过实证研究后，发现即使在控制了“一月效应”的情况下，“五月卖出”效应 仍然是稳健的[9]。已有研究文献表明,中国股市并不表现出发达资本市场广泛存在的“一月效 应”，而且陆磊和刘思峰（2008）发现中国股市存在显著的春节前后的“节前效应”和 “节 后效应”（以下称为“二月效应”以及“三月效应”）[10]。从图1的各月日收益率均值变化趋 势也可看出，日均收益率在二、三月份间表现最高。那么，中国A股市场存在的“五月卖出” 效应是否只是“二月效应”或者“三月效应”的变相表现形式？ 为了分别检验“五月卖出”效应与“二月效应”、“三月效应”的独立性，在模型的均 值方程（2）中分别设置表示“二月效应”、“三月效应”的虚拟变量JANi （i=2时，代表二 月效应；i=3时，代表三月效应）。检验“五月卖出”效应与“二月效应”的独立性时，对于 虚拟变量dummyadj，若日收益率时间区间为二月以及5-10月则取值为1，否则为0；对于虚拟变 量JANi，若日收益率时间区间为二月，则取值为1，否则为0。检验“五月卖出”效应与“三 adj 月效应”的独立性时，对于虚拟变量dummy ，若日收益率时间区间为三月以及5-10月则取值 为1，否则为0；对于虚拟变量JANi，若日收益率时间区间为三月，则取值为1，否则为0。回 归方程为：
rt
= α0 + β0 * rt −1 + ξt + β1 *ξt −1 +α1 * dummyadj +α2 * JANi 2
σt
= γ 0 + γ1 *σt2−1 + γ 2 *ξt2−1
(4) (5)
表3报告了回归分析结果。当i=2，沪深两市A股指数日收益率虚拟变量dummyadj的系数α1 取值分别-0.0008、-0.0009，显著性程度z值分别为-2.298、-2.031，说明即使不考虑二月份 的高收益，“五月卖出”效应仍旧显著，即“五月卖出”效应并不是“二月效应”的变相表 现。 表3 “五月卖出”效应与其它月份效应独立性检验回归结果 i=2
α1
α2
上证 深证 i=3 上证 深证
-0.0008 -0.0009 α1 -0.0008 -0.0008
0.0012 0.0017 α2 0.0010 0.0013
z (α1) -2.298 -2.031 z (α1) -2.266 -2.024
z (α2) 1.443 1.816 z (α2) 1.519 1.775
类似的，当 i=3，上证 A 指和深证 A 指虚拟变量 dummyadj 的系数 α1 取值均为-0.0008，显 著性程度 z 值分别为-2.266、-2.024，说明即使不考虑三月份的高收益，“五月卖出”效应 仍旧显著，即“五月卖出”效应同样与“三月效应”无关。
387
5. 结论 本文以上证A股综合指数和深证A股综合指数为研究对象，选取两指数1997年1月2日至 2013年12月31日间的日收益率数据，利用基于GED的ARMA-GARCH模型构建回归方程,对中国A 股市场是否存在“五月卖出”效应进行了实证研究。主要的研究结论包括以下几点：（1）在 1997年-2013年间，沪深两市A股市场均存在显著的“五月卖出”效应，而且以波动率衡量的 风险差异无法解释“五月卖出”效应所表现出的这种收益率特征；（2）A股市场“五月卖出” 效应的强弱程度不断发生变化，该效应在2002-2007年间最为显著，但是2008年之后则开始减 弱甚至趋于消失。中国股市曾在2007年达到历史最高点，之后随着2008年全球金融危机的到 来，宏观经济环境不断恶化，因此推测“五月卖出”效应的强弱程度可能会受到经济周期变 动的影响；（3）通过对“五月卖出”效应与其它月份效应的独立性检验，证实“五月卖出” 效应并不是由于二、三月份的高收益导致，该效应确实是独立存在的股市异常现象，并非其 它日历效应的变相表现形式。 References [1] Bouman S and Jacobsen B,The Halloween Indicator：“Sell in May and Go Away”,The American Economic Review, vol.92, pp. 1618-1635, 2002. [2] Andrade S C, et al.“Sell in May and Go Away” Just Won’t Go Away ,Financial Analysts Journal, vol.69, pp. 95-105, 2012. [3] Jacobsen B andVisaltanachoti N,The Halloween Effect in US Sectors ,The Financial Review, vol.44, pp. 437-459, 2009. [4] Maberly E D and Pierce R M,The Halloween Effect and Japanese Equity Prices: Myth or Exploitable Anomaly ,Asia-Pacific Financial Markets, vol.10, pp. 319-334, 2003. [5] Maberly E D and Pierce R M,Stock Market Efficiency Withstands another Challenge: Solving the “Sell in May/Buy after Halloween” Puzzle,Econ Journal Watch,vol.1, pp. 29-46, 2004. [6] Jones C P and Lundstrum L L,Is “Sell in May and Go Away” a Valid Strategy for U.S. Equity Allocation? The Journal of Wealth Management, vol.12, pp. 104-112, 2009. [7] Dichtl H and Drobetzb W,Are Stock Market Really so Inefficient? The Case of the “Halloween Indicator” ,Financial Research Letters, vol.11, pp. 112-121, 2013. [8] Lucey B M and Zhao S,Halloween or January? Yet another puzzle,International Review of Financial Analysis, vol.17, pp. 1055-1069, 2008. [9] Haggard S K and Witte D H,The Halloween effect: Trick or treat? International Review of Financial Analysis, vol.19, pp. 379-387, 2010. [10] Lei Lu and Sifeng Liu, Does holiday effect exit in Chinese stock market? Journal of Financial Research,vol.2, pp.127-139, 2008.
388
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Application of the Flipped Classroom Model in College English Translation Teaching Qing Yang School of Foreign Languages, Wuhan University of Technology, Wuhan, Hubei, P.R. China
[email protected] *Qing Yang Keywords: Flipped classroom, Micro course, College English, Translation teaching.
Abstract. Compared with the traditional teaching model, the flipped classroom model reverses the order of the inculcation of knowledge and the internalization of knowledge. The roles of the teacher and the student have been changed in this new teaching process. The paper strongly recommended introducing the flipping teaching into college English translation teaching to create an individualized and cooperative learning environment. The application of the flipped model can effectively stimulate interest in learning and improve the quality of teaching.
翻转课堂在大学英语翻译教学中的应用 杨青 武汉理工大学外国语学院，武汉，湖北，中国
[email protected] *
杨青
关键词: 翻转课堂; 微课; 大学英语; 翻译教学
中文摘要. 翻转课堂颠倒了传统的教学模式，将知识传递和知识内化的次序逆向安排，教师 和学生在教学过程中的角色发生了变化。在大学英语教学改革的趋势下，翻译教学的重要性 提升，在教学过程中应用这一新型教学模式，能够有效地激发学习兴趣，提高教学质量。本 文介绍了翻转课堂的起源与发展；说明了在大学英语改革中，必须将翻转课堂应用于翻译教 学中；明确了教师和学生在课前、课上以及课后各自定位，利用微课构建出个性化协作式的 学习环境。 1．引言 近年来，随着互联网的发展和普及，翻转课堂（flipped classroom）模式逐渐在美国教 育界流行起来并引起争论，同时也成为我国国内教育界关注的焦点，引发了教育模式的深刻 变革。这种新的教学模式翻转了传统的教学模式，把课堂的知识讲授和课外的知识内化颠倒 顺序，以此来解决群体教学和个体差异这一矛盾体。自2007年以来，美国很多中小学都尝试 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
389
ICSSS 2015
应用这种翻转模式，有些取得了显著效果；一些大学也借助各类慕课（MOOC）平台，进行课 堂翻转，优化教学模式。在中国国内对翻转课堂的研究还处于起步摸索阶段，少数中学正在 进行试点教学，大学教育者们也尝试在自己的课堂采用这类教学模式。对于正处于改革之中 的大学英语教学，随着课时的减少，对交流能力培养的提高，怎样合理利用课外时间来辅助 课堂教学成为英语教育者们亟待解决的难题。在大学英语教学中的翻译教学越来越重要，但 是对于这项需要一些专业知识的技能，却并未像专业英语的翻译课那样获得同等的授课时间。 要在大英课堂里不减弱阅读、听说能力的培养，就必须将翻转模式引入翻译教学，把专业知 识的讲解放在课外，让不同水平的学生都能较好的了解掌握；而在课堂内，更多是进行翻译 实践的练习与讨论。因此，本文就如何借力翻转课堂，构建个性化协作式的大学英语翻译教 学模式进行探讨。 2．翻转课堂的起源与发展 翻转课堂，也被译为颠倒课堂（inverted classroom），是由教师制作视频，学生先通 过课外观看来学习知识，再到课堂上师生面对面交流和答疑的教学模式。翻转课堂是把传统 的学习过程翻转过来，课前完成知识传授，课堂完成知识内化（Kathleen, 2012）。学习者 在课前通过视频等教育资源完成知识点的自主学习，课堂则通过师生互动答疑讨论，从而达 到更好的教学效果（Sams and Bergmann, 2013）。 翻转课堂这一全新的教学模式起源于美国科罗拉多州的林地公园高中。2007年初，乔纳 森•伯尔曼（Jonathan Bergmann）和亚伦•萨姆斯（Aaron Sams）使用屏幕捕捉软件录制讲解 PowerPoint演示文稿的视频，并将其传到网络，以帮助课堂缺席的学生在家补课，而课堂上 更多则是做作业和进行答疑。这一模式深受学生欢迎，并被广泛传播，在美国一些学校流行 起来。2011年，乔纳森•伯格曼和亚伦•萨姆斯出版了专著《翻转你的课堂：时刻惠及课堂上 的每位学生》（Flip Your Classroom: Reach Every Student in Every Class Every Day）， 分享了翻转课堂多年以来的实践经验和理论总结。 2004年，萨尔曼•可汗（Salman Khan）先是通过网络给亲戚朋友们答疑，之后索性把辅 导材料制作成视频，放到YouTube网站上，方便多人分享。他有意识地把每段视频的长度控制 在10分钟之内，并尽量说得浅显易懂，很快这些视频就受到了网友们的热捧。2007年，可汗 学院（Khan Academy）网站成立，可汗用视频讲解不同科目的内容，并解答网友提出的问题， 后逐步发展成学生可以自我学习和自我评估的互动式教学系统。2011年，萨尔曼•可汗在TED 演讲《用视频重新创造教育》（Let’s use video to reinvent education）中推广这种观 看教学视频进行学习的模式，翻转课堂因此成为全球教育关注的教学模式。 中国教育界也掀起了探索翻转课堂教学模式的浪潮，不少中小学、大学开始了部分课程 的翻转模式的试点，以期促进学生自主探究、批判性思维的培养。而在理论结构上，学者们 尝试解读翻转课堂，分析其特征，不断优化教学模式。在翻转课堂上，传统教学方式被颠覆， 知识传授通过信息技术的辅助在课后完成，知识内化则在课堂中由教师和学生们共同完成。 而在这一新型教学模式中，教师、学生的角色发生了转变，课堂时间重新进行了分配。（张 金磊等，2012）钟晓流等则认为所谓翻转课堂，是教师提供教学视频让学生在课前完成知识 的学习，课堂上一起完成作业答疑和互动交流等活动的一种新型的教学模式。（钟晓流等， 2013） 综上所述，翻转课堂的基本教学模式可以认为是以信息技术为依托，通过网络平台展示 教学视频，使学生在课前接受知识的传递，而后再在课堂上通过和其他师生的互动交流来实 现知识的内化，从而形成的一种以学生为主导、教师为引导的新型教学模式。
390
3．段落翻译给大学英语翻译教学带来的挑战 随着改革开放的不断深入和经济全球化趋势的日益加强，为增进国际社会对中国的认识， 增强国家文化软实力，我国对高层次翻译人才的需要越来越强烈。早在2005年，教育部首次 批准设置高校翻译本科专业；2007年，国务院学位委员会批准设置翻译硕士专业学位。高等 学府对英语专业翻译人才的培养采取了一系列明确的措施，明确了其重要性并积极使其促进 国家发展与交流。但是，对于非英语专业学生的翻译能力培养却一直未能得到足够的重视。 直到2013年8月，全国大学英语四、六级考试委员会才宣布对四、六级考试的翻译部分做出调 整：自2013年12月起，原单句汉译英调整为段落汉译英，翻译内容涉及中国历史、文化、经 济、社会发展等，四级翻译题长度为140-160个汉字，六级翻译题长度为180-200个汉字，且 所占分值也由原来的5%提高为15%。这次调整无疑给多数非英语专业的学生带来了极大的挑 战，也促使我们对大学英语的翻译教学做出再次思考。 自2006年以来，四、六级考试中的翻译题都是句子汉译英：卷面提供一个句子的部分英 文信息，学生根据随后括号中的汉语信息，将其翻成英文，补全整个句子信息。这种题型无 需太多对句子整体结构的分析，更像是考查词汇、语法知识的另一种形式，而且每题分值不 多，一直以来并未引起师生足够重视。而新题型发展为段落翻译，涉及中国的历史、文化、 经济、社会发展等内容，这对学生在单句、段落、语篇结构方面的把握，专业性的翻译技巧 以及知识涉猎方面显然有了更高要求。这与英语专业的翻译要求越来越接近，与真实语境中 的翻译和交际需求更为接近，符合中国文化“走出去”的国家战略。 段落翻译这一新题型对全国的大学英语教学起到巨大的反拨作用，大英课堂教学势必加 强翻译教学，使其得到应有的重视。过去，翻译更多是大英教学的辅助手段，即使四、六级 考试有了单句翻译，也不太需要翻译技巧，而如今的大英翻译测试己经提升到段落、语篇的 水平了，如果不改变传统逐字逐句死译，不利于培养学生在真实语境中的交际能力。然而， 大英教学改革中，课时的减少不利于在课堂上增加翻译技巧的讲解与大量的实例练习。翻转 课堂模式则正好适合用在大英翻译教学上，将需要花时间去理解的翻译技巧的讲解放在课外， 通过观看翻译实例，尝试完成相关翻译练习，然后回到课堂进行讨论总结，找出更为合适的 译法，再在课后进行练习巩固。 4．翻转课堂教学模式在大学英语翻译教学中的步骤 基于多年的翻转课堂的教学实践，美国富兰克林学院的罗伯特·陶伯特（Robert Talbert） 教授总结出翻转课堂的结构模型图，简要描述了翻转课堂的过程，如图1 所示。(Talbert, 2011)
图1 Robert Talbert的翻转课堂模型图
391
依据这一模型所反映的翻转课堂的内涵，遵循学习规律，以系统化教学设计理论为指导， 笔者构建出适合大学英语翻译教学的翻转课堂教学步骤，明确了师生在各个阶段的定位，如 表1所示。 表1 大学英语翻译教学的翻转课堂教学步骤
课前 知识传达
课上 讨论拓展
课后 反思评估
教师 查找网络资源 制作微课视频 分析潜在难点 布置课前任务 针对提出问题 检查学习效果 设计课堂活动 组织分组讨论 调查教学效果 形成总体评估 进行教学反思 优化教学方案
学生 观看视频课件 提出疑难问题 在线讨论交流 做好笔记练习 参与分组活动 解决疑难问题 重组认知结构 提高思辨能力 总结所学知识 学会举一反三 反馈教学效果 提出完善建议
4.1 课前知识传递 在翻转课堂中，教师需要通过网络学习平台提供学生观看的视频，既可以是网络上已有 的开放式课程资源或相关视频，也可以是老师自己录制的短视频。随着慕课的发展，网络平 台上涌现许多来自知名大学开出的公开课，可汗学院也提供了数千段辅导视频，中国国内也 陆续建立了国家精品课程和大学公开课等大型知名网络学习平台，提供了很多可供选择的优 秀免费课程。教师可以借助相关优质资源作为教学内容，学生也有机会接触国内外优秀教师 的最新教学理念。 然而，对于英语这门学科，由于国外优秀视频较少有适合中国大学英语教学的，而国内 大学的精品课和公开课也在这个领域刚刚起步，可选资源不如其它学科丰富；专门针对英汉 互译的课程就更是屈指可数。2011年，华中师范大学教授华先发在新浪公开课开设了《英汉 比较与翻译》，重在通过实例比较分析英汉两种语言在词、句、段、篇几个层面相异之处。 2014年，广东省外语艺术职业学院的袁洪副教授主持的《商务英语翻译》登录中国大学精品 开放课程网站——爱课程。还有一些非知名学习平台提供了一些相关课程，而这些显然不能 满足大英课堂翻译教学的要求。因此，老师还必须结合实际情况，自己录制微课视频才能达 到设定的教学目标。 屏幕录像及编辑软件Camtasia Studio，功能非常强大，操作也比较容易，很适合教学视 频的录制与编辑。一般视频如果是纯翻译理论讲解，最好不要超过10分钟；而如果还有实例 分析，可适当延长，但也最好也不要超过20分钟。 至于国外的优秀开放课程，其专业性内容不能为翻译教学提供太大帮助，但是却能作为 很好的翻译素材，进行实践练习，而在同时又能扩大学生的知识涉猎面，拓宽视野。 翻转课堂通常是强调先通过视频学习掌握知识点，而在实际教学中，由于视频缺乏面对 面的直接交流互动，在调动学生的积极性方面可能稍有欠缺。因此，可以在前一节课末花5 分钟时间，以互动形式引出即将给出的视频的主要内容，调动学生情绪，让他们更迫不及待 地去看视频来找到解决问题的答案。 目前国内很多学校都在摸索翻转课堂教学，但是适当的网络学习平台的建设稍显落后， 资金、技术支持等问题有待解决，教师的翻转教学能力有待提高。但我们仍然能够借助现有
392
的聊天、分享平台尽量支持翻转课堂。一些免费网盘平台，如百度云、网易、360等都能够发 布视频，或者直接通过qq、微信等平台进行视频发布和互动交流。 在视频观看后一定要辅以适当的练习，尤其是要针对可能对学生来说是潜在的疑难点提 出问题，让他们在思考、讨论中争取理解与掌握，而那些仍然不确定的问题就是课堂讨论的 重点。在这一环节中，教师要起到有效的引导作用，提高视频学习的效率。 在课前环节中，学生可以自由选择时间来观看教师提供的视频，既包括翻译的专业知识 点，也有相关的案例，还有相应的练习。学习过程中有任何难题可以马上在线提出，其他同 学或教师都可以参与讨论。由于翻译自身特点，在实践过程中会出现多种语法正确，但表达 不同的版本，其中哪些是最佳选择也是在这一过程中值得讨论的。 4.2 课上讨论拓展 在观看视频的学习过程中，由于学生知识水平不同，理解有异，掌握知识的程度也会不 一样。课堂上，教师首先针对学生在观看视频后在交流平台上反应出的疑难点，进行共同探 讨。由于课前对讨论的问题已有所了解，并经过了初步思索与探讨，因此即使对于程度稍弱 的学生，也能够谈到一些基本思路，而水平略高的学生往往能发表令人惊讶的想法。这有利 于全班学生共同参与，也弥补了在家看视频后只能进行简单网络讨论的不足。 在大学英语翻译教学中，翻译理论的内化必须通过实践来实现，因此理解了视频提及的 内容之后，必须经过独立的实际翻译来进行检验。当独立完成翻译练习后，可以先以小组形 式进行讨论，分析不同翻译方式的利弊，最终获得最佳翻译结果。这个过程中，清楚地说明 自己使用的翻译方法，词汇的选取，句型的使用，最后能说服其他同学接受，就是知识内化 过程的体现，而同时也完成了一次有效的交流。 教师在讨论过程中应在各组之间聆听，掌握学习效果。对好的想法加以赞扬并引导进行 拓展练习，对于仍然存在的疑惑进行更为细致的讲解。总之就是根据个体差异，给予相应的 引导，并根据所掌握的情况适当调整设定的课堂活动。 经过了小组讨论，学生可以对所学知识进行总结汇报，可以通过课堂展示、辩论等形式 交流学习体会。这个过程中，学生不仅可以更加清楚了解到中英两种语言的异同，还能领略 到不同语言的美妙与多样性。勇于将自己的独到见解与他人分享，学生最终成为课堂的主角， 颠覆了传统的老师主宰课堂的局面。 4.3 课后反思评估 传统的形成性评价强调学习结果，主要通过作业、测试等方式进行。而翻转课堂模式则 还要结合总结性评价，会涉及到个人学习过程中的表现、小组学习中的表现、拓展性学习等 多个方面，这些评价并非只来自于教师，还包括同伴和自己。 课堂教学结束后，学生应回顾整个学习过程，整理笔记，总结所学内容，通过更多翻译 练习的实践来巩固知识。与此同时，要积极及时向教师反馈学习效果，并提出改进建议。而 教师可以以问卷、访谈等形式调查学习效果，进行教学反思。在面对面的交流中，教师可以 确信学生理解了翻译理论与技巧，并且根据学生不同的水平提出难易适度的问题，真正做到 因材施教。 最后根据掌握的全体学生的学习情况，总结教学过程中存在的不足，优化教学方案，有 时甚至需要调整微课视频内容。 5．结束语 翻转课堂为大学英语翻译教学提供了更为灵活、全面的模式，既节省了课堂知识讲解的 时间，留出更多实践空间；又满足了个性化的学习需求，不同水平的学生都能较好掌握；还 促进了协作式的学习方式，提高了学习效率。尽快建立有效的整体性学习平台，开发更多优 393
秀的大英翻译教学资源，使老师能够将更多的精力、时间投入到有针对性的课堂活动中，更 好地引导学生提升自主学习的能力。翻转课堂“翻转”的不仅是课堂教学结构，更重要的是 教学思维、理念的翻转。结合中国课堂实际教学，探索出适合我国实践的翻转模式，并结合 学科特点以满足个性化学习的需求。 致谢 本文为武汉理工大学自主创新研究基金人文社科一般项目《生态翻译学视角下汉语新词 中隐喻的英译研究》(Grant No. 2014IB056)的阶段性成果之一。 References [1] A. Sams and J. Bergmann, Flip your students’ learning, Educational Leadership, vol. 70, pp. 16-20, 2013. [2] J. Bergmann and A. Sams, Flip Your Classroom: Reach Every Student in Every Class Every Day, Washington, DC: International Society for Technology in Education, 2012. [3] J. L. Zhang, Y. Wang and B. H. Zhang, Introducing a new teaching model: Flipped classroom, Journal of Distance Education, vol. 30, pp. 46-51, 2012. [4] K. Fulton, Upside down and inside out: Flip your classroom to improve student learning, Learning & Leading with Technology, vol. 39, pp. 12-17, 2012. [5] R. Talbert, 2011, Inverting the linear algebra classroom, https://prezi.com/dz0rbkpy6tam /inverting-the-linear-algebra-classroom, 2015-3-19. [6] X. L. Zhong, S. Q. Song and L. Z. Jiao, Instructional design based on the idea of the flipped classroom in ICT environment, Open Education Research, vol. 19, pp. 58-64, 2013.
394
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Evaluation on Policies of Major Decisions Assessment on Social Stability Risk-----Focused on the Assessment Subject Yang Wang Institute of Social Development, National Development and Reform Commission, Beijing, China
[email protected] *Yang Wang Keywords: Major decisions, Assessment policies of social stability risk, Assessment subject, Policy evaluation, Evaluable assessment
Abstract. The government’s function for social governance is increasingly essential in the risk society. Major Decisions Assessment on Social Stability Risk (MDA-SSR) is to measure and acknowledge the extent of social stability risk threat from major decisions. This essay is aiming at improving policies effects of MDA-SSR so as to form a scientific and normative regulation on “the assessment subject” (AS). Using the method of evaluable assessment, this paper firstly analyzes the current mode of AS and then evaluates deeply the policies of assessment subject. It finds out that there are three problems that leading to low-performance of MDA-SSR, namely that, unscientific policy arrangement, shortage of supportive policies, and poor-complete supporting systems. Hence, China should refine policies’ goal of MDA-SSR on AA, in order to improve policies effects. Firstly, detail the category of major policies, and determine the source of assessment subject. Secondly, formulate provision of procedure, and increase financial input on policy evaluation. Thirdly, regulate outsourcing payment, and stimulate multiple subjects’ participation.
重大决策社会稳定风险评估制度的效果分析——以“评估主体”的规 定为重点 王阳 国家发展和改革委员会社会发展研究所，北京，中国
[email protected] *王阳 关键词: 重大决策; 社会稳定风险评估制度; 评估主体; 政策评估; 可评估性评价
中文摘要. 风险社会背景下，政府作为治理者的职能愈加凸显。组织开展重大决策社会稳定 风险评估（简称“稳评”），旨在知晓公共政策和项目对社会稳定潜在威胁的程度，以采取 措施降低乃至消除风险。本研究旨在改善稳评制度研判决策风险的效果，形成科学、规范的 “评估主体”规定。本研究使用可评估性评价方法，立足评估主体的现状，对相关政策规定 进行深度评估，认为存在三个问题影响了稳评制度效果，即评估主体的政策安排不科学，实 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
395
ICSSS 2015
施稳评中缺少支持性政策，及引入私人部门和社会主体承担稳评的制度不完善。建议针对稳 评制度的目标细化确定评估主体规定，提高政策科学性、协同性和规范性，细化决策类型， 分类确定评估主体来源；出台程序规定，增加政策评估资金投入；规范外包费用支付，激励 多元主体实施稳评。 1. 研究的背景和研究的意义 当前，社会利益格局调整加快，社会矛盾日趋凸显， “风险社会”正在到来。在这一背景 下，政府作为治理者，在风险和安全治理上的职能成为主要增长点（M. Douglas，1990：7）。 在不可预测的风险的巨大压力下， “如果政府继续垄断风险治理的职能，势必会使人类在风险 社会中越陷越深”①。因此，发达国家正逐步形成“审计社会”（audit society），政府从风 险治理者变成了治理风险的组织者，通过增加治理主体来应对风险（Michael Power，1997： 141）。 任何公共政策和建设项目都会在社会上创造成功者和失败者，但是对每个人而言，成功 或失败的可能性却是未知的。特别是一些政策只会导致变动的结果，更加深了个体层次的不 确定性，影响了稳定度。公共政策和建设项目的社会稳定风险是决策行为对社会稳定的纯消 极影响。组织开展社会稳定风险评估（后文简称“稳评”） ，就是要知晓公共政策和建设项目 对社会稳定潜在威胁的程度，以采取措施消除风险于一个可接受的层次。在重大决策的制定 出台、组织实施或审批审核前，实施社会稳定风险评估，是将稳评程序嵌入到决策程序，增 强决策对社会稳定风险的前瞻性和预防性。 近年来，中国各个省区市和地市州盟等陆续建立了稳评机制，按照“谁决策、谁负责” 的原则，对重大政策和工程项目组织开展稳评。然而，稳评在实施中却出现了评估主体“不 愿评”、“不会评”、“不敢评”、“不能评”等现象，影响了稳评制度效果。本文以评估主体的 规定为重点，在归纳和总结现有研究贡献的基础上，归纳我国目前评估主体的主要模式，并 深入分析评估主体相关政策的问题，以完善稳评制度有关评估主体的规定提出政策建议。 2. 已有研究的主要进展和本研究的设计 2.1 已有研究对稳评制度效果的主要判断 评估主体是稳评机制建立和运行的关键推动力。综合已有研究结论，有以下三个重要的 效果：第一，有利于从源头预防化解社会矛盾。在良好的社会秩序尚未建立起来的背景下， 让社会主体直接参与决策管理，有利于重大决策、重大项目的出台，重大改革措施的实施及 涉及社会敏感问题的处理等获得广大民众的理解和支持，减少维护社会稳定的压力（付翠莲， 2011：44-45）。第二，有利于形成维护社会稳定的集体行动格局。在转型期，稳评可以集中 社会各方面的力量，使原本分散、原子化的矛盾化解力量凝聚为整体的合力，促进产生维稳 的集体行动，降低社会管理成本（朱德米，2013） 。第三，有利于社会主体表达政策诉求。在 公共决策过程中嵌入稳评程序，引入社会主体参与决策评估，是将公民的立场转化为可供决 策者参考使用的意见建议，推动内部决策过程向透明、开放、多元、包容、协商方向发展。 2.2 现有研究的不足和本研究的设计 现有研究业已指出评估主体在组织管理上的四类问题：第一，容易出现“条条”与“块 块”之间的问责处置不到位（付翠莲，2011：301）。第二，主要责任主体不明确，容易出现 “拍脑袋”评估（廉如鉴、黄家亮，2012：22）。第三，缺少监督问责，稳评成了“做形式”、 “走程序” （童星，2010：117） 。第四，混淆监督主体与评估主体，弱化决策提出、项目报建 ①
[德]乌尔里希·贝克. 从工业社会到风险社会（上篇）——关于人类生存、社会结构和生态启蒙等问题的思考[J]. 王武龙编 译. 马克思主义与现实, 2003, (3): 28-29.
396
部门风险源头控制的责任，造成“踢皮球”，易陷入“越维越不稳”的怪圈（许传玺、成协中， 2013：89）。上述结论为下一步深入研究评估主体的相关政策奠定了比较扎实的实践基础。 然而，当前评估主体出现的种种问题，不仅说明具体的政策安排存在瑕疵，更反映出一 系列影响评估主体实施稳评的制度和机制尚不完善。有鉴于此，本研究拟弥补这一空白。评 估公共政策是一条可以为政策制定带来秩序和理性的途径（Weiss C. H.，1999：23；李志军， 2013：17） 。评估通常能产生对公共政策决策和再决策非常重要的信息，有利于成功解决原先 制定政策时所想要解决的问题。为此，本研究使用政策评估的方法，广泛探索执行中的评估 主体相关政策、使用的手段及要实现的目标，考察和剖析政策措施效果与政策目标偏离的主 要原因，进而给出改善政策的建议。可评估性评价是评估政策效果的一种方法，目的是评判 一项政策措施或项目帮助目标对象改变现状的价值，预设前提是，多个利益相关者正式或潜 在的目标都是衡量政策价值的标准。①可评估性评价要求使用描述性方法产生有关政策结果的 价值的有效和可靠信息，其深度和广度就取决于评估的参与者，也即利益相关者。如果政策 结果的价值确实有利于实现利益相关者的目标，就说明该政策取得了一定层次的绩效，反之 亦然，则说明是不成功的、需要调整乃至终止的政策（William N. Dunn，2009：306） 。 评估主体相关政策嵌入在重大决策稳评制度之中，前者的目标服务于后者（F. Ackermann etc. ，2007：44-45）。稳评制度以实现“有效过滤社会稳定风险”为目标，那么评估主体的 相关政策就要在其之下细化，基于评估主体的来源、资源条件和引入政府部门以外主体的方 式三个维度，拆解为“最重要的利益相关者是评估主体的必要来源”， “评估主体拥有充足的 可投入稳评的资源”和“私人部门和社会主体承担稳评具有很强的激励”三个子目标。衡量 每个维度的评估主体政策的效果，要运用可评估性评价的方式，逐一分析不能被多个利益相 关者明确支持的政策结果，探讨其中的原因，从而挖掘深层次的体制和机制问题。 3. “评估主体”的实践模式及特点 重大决策社会稳定风险评估主体是稳评的责任主体和实施主体。在稳评主体中，重点关 注实施主体。2010 年《国务院关于加强法治政府建设的意见》要求，完善行政决策风险评估 机制，重大决策要经政府常务会议或者部门领导班子会议集体讨论决定。在做决策前要把公 众参与、专家论证、风险评估、合法性审查和集体讨论决定作为重大决策的必经程序。2012 年《关于建立健全重大决策社会稳定风险评估机制的指导意见（试行） 》要求，稳评责任单位 作出重大决策前，必须经过风险评估、合法性审查等程序。实施单位可以由责任单位开展自 评，也可以委托商业评估机构或非营利组织进行评估论证。 实际上，在国家政策出台前后，各地已陆续出台了类似的“实施意见”或“实施办法” ， 稳评工作也相继推开。整体看，稳评的责任主体基本一致，包括决策提出部门、项目报建部 门、改革组织部门和活动主办部门，差异集中在实施主体，具体为：由责任单位自行实施评 估，还是组建专门的评估小组，除责任单位外，组织相关部门和专家或委托有资质的第三方 机构参与实施评估。根据目前各地稳评政策对实施主体的规定，总结为四种主要模式： 3.1 “政府部门+私人部门+社会主体”模式 固定的单一模式。实施主体是评估工作小组，包括党委政府、决策部门、项目报建部门、 维稳办、信访办、政法委、市民群众、相关利益群体、专家学者、中介机构和新闻媒介等。 浙江、广东、江苏等地实行该模式。此模式的特点是：强化党政领导责任，整合各部门力量， 协调各方面利益关系，在“全面维稳”格局下开展稳评工作。同时，强调政策的稳评要立足 于基层决策部门，前端口、全口径调动资源，预测各类不稳定因素（中共浙江省委政法委员 会课题组，2010：24）。对涉及群众面广、影响深远的政策，重点听取社会主体的意见建议， 对涉及部门多、职能交叉、评估责任单位难定的政策，委托中介机构评估论证。对“形式评 ①
该部分的论述部分参考了 Michael Howlett 和 M. Ramesh（1996：165-168）对公共政策评估的分析。
397
估”、“虚假评估”等行为严肃追究。 3.2 “政府部门”模式，或“政府部门+社会主体”模式 随机的双重模式。实施主体是决策方案提出部门、政策草案拟制部门、项目报建部门、 改革牵头部门、活动主办部门，可以组织相关部门、社会各方代表、专家学者（单位）、社会 知名人士等审查评估报告（草案）。四川、上海、吉林等地实行该模式。此模式的特点是：遵 循“主管者评估”、“建设者评估”的原则，规定稳评的责任主体即实施主体，确保工作的执 行和落实。同时，建立了比较完善的评估主体组织体系，强调政府内部各决策部门之间的协 调、配合，形成顺畅的沟通机制，夯实工作基础。根据需要，邀请社会主体参与评估，确保 多渠道、全过程监督，严肃评估主体的责任追究制度（廉如鉴、黄家亮，2012：22） 。 3.3 “政府部门”模式，及“政府部门+私人部门+社会主体”模式 固定的双重模式。实施主体分为两种情况。对一般评估，由评估责任主体实施评估；对 重点评估，由党委维稳领导小组确定牵头单位，成立专门的评估小组，组织相关部门和专家 或委托有资质的第三方机构实施。福建、黑龙江、海南等地实行该模式。此模式的特点是： 根据公共决策的行政层级和政策部门的职能，对决策进行筛选分类，以决策的特点确定稳评 的形式（朱德米，2013） 。同时，实行属地管理，各级党委政府主要领导负责并组织协调，政 策各部门配合落实，对直接或间接涉及利益格局调整或再分配的决策，由政策部门联合商业 中介机构、高校、科研单位等其他主体实施稳评，注重评估方法的科学和专业性。 3.4 “政府部门”模式 固定的单一模式。实施主体是制定出台重大政策和实施重大改革的组织单位、重点项目 报建单位的上级主管部门，可以听取群众及专家特别是利益相关方的意见。北京市实行该模 式。此模式的特点是：党政机关内部“自上而下”的自评，即将稳评程序纳入行政决策程序 中，将风险等级作为行政许可、项目审批等的决策要件，以指导和监督政策、项目等报送部 门拟定应对措施。同时，贯彻党政领导干部负责制，重点加强主管部门的责任，在决策、项 目审批环节，必须首先评估社会稳定风险。严格行政问责，将稳评纳入行政问责的范畴，特 别是将“群体性事件”等后果类事件作为启动行政问责的要件（许传玺、成协中，2013：88-90） 。 4. 评估主体政策的主要问题及带来的不利后果 4.1 评估主体的政策安排缺乏科学的依据 稳评制度要实现“有效过滤社会稳定风险”的目标，就要求尽可能多的重大决策利益相 关方参与，并且投入精力削减风险，那么组建中立的评估主体是重要的举措。然而，目前我 国评估主体仍以公共部门为主，私人部门、非营利组织和公民个人等为辅，影响了评估主体 的中立性。最重要的利益相关者是最大的社会稳定风险源，对前者意见的忽视，就是在增加 风险发生的概率。同时，在公共部门内部，又由于缺乏对系统性风险的敏感度，还在增加出 现社会稳定风险外化和局部的、区域性高风险的可能性。于是，以政府部门为主的评估主体 就出现了不同程度的不履职、错履职、乱履职等现象。 4.2 评估主体实施稳评中缺少支持性政策 即使一些地方模式中的评估主体是多元化的，但是在稳评的实施过程中又暴露出评估主 体力量弱的问题，一方面是来自于政府部门行政和管理上的支持少，另一方面是来自于政府 部门以外的主体资金和技术上的支持少。在实施稳评的过程中，与评估主体政策相联系的重 要的利益相关者是稳评的重要参与者，包括政府部门、私人中介机构、非营利组织、社区乃 至公民个人等。政府部门肩负着鼓励和配合评估主体开展稳评的责任，而其他的私人部门和 398
社会主体则有责任支持评估主体的工作，为稳评提供便利的条件。 对于作为必要参与者的政府部门，缺乏内部相互协作、配合、支持等机制和政策规定， 特别是缺少自上而下的支持稳评的政策。稳评的实施单位不能得到政策和项目所在地政府的 支持和认同，稳评实施过程缺乏法律依据和管理措施。对于作为重要参与者的私人部门和社 会主体，缺少鼓励和引导其参与稳评的政策。一些地方的评估主体仍缺乏与非营利组织、社 区和公民个人的联系。政策的制定忽视了利益相关者的需求，就会使政策效果大打折扣。政 府部门不配合，私人部门和社会主体少支持，令评估主体可投入稳评的资源十分匮乏，影响 了独立性。 4.3 引入多元主体承担稳评的制度不完善 我国各地稳评政策的制定基本上是在已有实践经验的基础上总结形成，所以作为一项成 功的经验，委托私人部门和社会主体实施稳评的做法，体现在国家和一些地方的稳评政策中。 在浙江、广东、江苏、河南等省拟定的重大事项社会稳定风险分析和评估工作机制的指导意 见中都提出，各地、各部门作为稳评的责任主体，要深入调查研究，广泛收集社情民意，听 取和采纳商业机构、社会组织、专家、相关利益群体等的合理的意见建议，评估主体在开展 稳评时可以委托相关中介机构开展具体的评估论证。 多种主体参与政策评估，有利于打破决策部门“自评”的尴尬，使重大决策的出台得到 群众的理解和支持。然而，鼓励私人机构、非营利组织等政府部门以外的主体投资和实施评 估工作，却还缺乏必要的法律和制度保障，其中一个突出的问题就是，未能明确稳评工作外 包的费用标准、支付方式等内容。委托私人部门和社会主体实施稳评需要健全、完善的政府 购买服务制度的支撑，但当前可依据的政策，对于政府购买服务的范围、原则、实施程序、 资金管理等都没做出明确、具体的规定，致使稳评工作外包缺少配套政策支持，不利于调动 私人部门和社会主体参与的积极性，更不利于该项工作面向全国推广。 5.政策建议 建议针对评估主体政策的三个子目标，有重点地健全完善重大决策稳评的制度和机制， 着力提高评估主体相关政策的科学性、协同性和规范性。 5.1 细化重大决策的类型，分类确定评估主体的来源 对评估主体来源的规定，要以实现“最重要的利益相关者是评估主体的必要来源”这一 目标重点予以改进。建议按照重大决策的类型及决策的周期，组建稳评的任务型组织，评定 并吸纳最重要的利益相关者加入，厘清稳评责任主体与实施主体之间的关系。应面向所有重 大决策组织开展稳评，以决策的类型为条件，依据决策的周期，拓宽评估主体的来源，形成 多方参与稳评实施的、柔性化的评估主体结构。政府的重大决策涵盖本行政区全局性、战略 性和基础性的经济调节、市场监管、社会管理、公共服务等政务事项。按照社会性、技术性 和矛盾性分类重大决策，以引入最重要的利益相关者为要件，构建多样的评估主体模式。社 会性高的政策可由政府部门实施评估，同时收集、采纳社会主体的意见建议；技术性高的政 策应委托私人部门或社会主体实施评估，政府部门是责任主体；矛盾性高的政策，除委托私 人部门或社会主体实施评估以外，须吸引社区、专家和公民参与实施稳评，收集和采纳社会 主体的意见建议。 5.2 出台稳评的程序规定， 增加政策评估的资金投入 对评估主体实施稳评过程中的政策，要以实现“评估主体拥有充足的可投入稳评的资 源”这一目标重点予以改进。建议从行政和经济两个方面加大对评估主体实施稳评的支持， 完善稳评的法律依据，将稳评程序与决策程序衔接，明确决策部门与项目审批部门间的责任 关系。同时，健全稳评的筹资体制，增加决策作出部门、政策制定部门、项目建设主管部 399
门、改革实施部门、活动组织部门等政府部门公共政策评估的财政资金投入，安排专项资金 开展政策评估。在法律依据方面，应调整完善《行政许可法》，将对重大决策、重大项目等 开展稳评工作，设置为行政许可事项，或者增加行政许可事项的内容。在政策依据方面，应 明确具体的评估程序规定，在稳评制度中细化稳评工作的评估程序，将稳评工作列为项目可 行性研究的要件之一。 5.3 规范稳评外包费用支付，激励各方主体实施稳评 对引入政府部门以外主体承担稳评实施的政策，要以实现“私人部门和社会主体承担稳 评具有很强的激励”这一目标重点予以改进。建议将稳评工作纳入政府购买服务的范围，以 合同外包的形式，让政府部门以外的主体承担稳评的具体论证工作，政府部门在稳评实施过 程中只负责监督合同的履行，并支付稳评的费用。将稳评外包的益处在于，将专业的政策评 估机构、人员和评估方法引进重大决策和项目的稳评中，利用竞争机制提高稳评的效果，提 升对社会稳定风险预判的质量，并且能够限制和约束政府部门的行政行为，有助于对民众的 需求做出及时、灵活的反应，并且根据需求和资源变化调节政策，提高决策对风险的敏感 性。 尽快完善政府采购制度，修订《政府采购法》，明确行政类服务购买的范围、类型、具 体的购买程序、资金管理、质量标准、项目管理等内容。同时，规范服务费用标准和支付规 则。对委托相关中介机构进行具体评估论证的，须明确评估费用标准和支付等问题，按照稳 评工作的复杂性和难度核定服务费用，以购买稳评工作方案的形式，分期支付服务费用。建 立稳评中介机构服务信用体系和咨询专家库，对认真履职、完成稳评报告质量较高的中介机 构，给予税费减免、社保补贴等优惠政策，对提供科学建议、较好配合完成稳评的专家，给 予社会声誉等方面的奖励。通过更加健全、完备的激励制度，吸引和鼓励私人中介机构和社 会主体承担稳评工作，推动稳评更加专业化、规范化。 References [1] Xiaoyuan Xue and Zhanchao Zhou, Globalization and Risk Society. Beijing: Social Sciences Academic Press, pp. 195-270, 2005. [2] M. Douglas and A. Wildavsky, Risk and Civilization, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1982. [3] M. Douglas, Risk and Responsibility, London: Routledge, pp. 7, 1990. [4] Demi Zhou, Major decisions assessment of social stability risk can’t go out of form, Beijing Daily, pp. 18, 2013.1.28. [5] Cuilian Fu, Study on Major Decision Assessment Mechanism of Social Stability Risk, Beijing: China Social Sciences Press, pp. 23-47, 296-308, 2011. [6] Xing Tong, public policies assessment of social stability risk, Learning and Practice, vol. 9, pp. 114-119, 2010. [7] Carol Hirschon Wiess. The Interface between Evaluation and Public Policy. Evaluation, Oct 1, pp. 17-35, 1999. [8] Zhijun Li, Theory, Method and Practice of Major Public Policies, Beijing: China Development Press, pp. 15-33, 80-83, 2013. [9] Michael Howlett and M. Ramesh. Studying Public Policy: Policy Cycles and Policy Subsystems. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996. [10] William N. Dunn. Public Policy Analysis: An Introduction. London: Longman, 2009 (4th 400
edition). [11] F. Ackermann, C. Eden, T. Williams and S. Howick. Systemic Risk Assessment: A Case Study. The Journal of the Operational Research Society, Vol. 58, No. 1, pp. 39-51, 2007.
401
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Public Sports Service Demonstration Area of Urban and Rural Social Sports Instructor Team Management Jianqiang Guo1,a, Wenjie Zhu2, Qiner Xu1 1
Changzhou university sports institute
2
Suzhou Art and Design Technology Institute, Jiangsu SuZhou, China a
[email protected]
Keywords: Rural and towns, The social sports instructors, Management
Abstract. The paper take the interview to visit, such as literature analysis, the research methods of sociology, research of public sports service demonstration area of urban and rural social instructors organization and management of the advanced experience at home and abroad, for our public sports service demonstration area of urban and rural social sports instructor team organization and management to provide reference and help.
公共体育服务示范区城乡社会体育指导员队伍管理探究 郭建强 1
1,a
2
，朱文杰 ，徐勤儿
1
2
常州大学体育学院 苏州工艺职业美术学院 a
[email protected]
关键词：城乡；社会体育指导员；管理
中文摘要. 文章通过采取访谈走访、文献分析法等社会学研究方法，研究公共体育服务示范 区城乡社会指导员队伍组织管理的国内外先进经验，为我们公共体育服务示范区城乡社会体 育指导员队伍组织管理提供借鉴与帮助。 城乡公共体育服务体系示范区建设必须真正把我乡镇纳入城乡体育一体化和示范区群众 性体育服务体系建设进程之中，示范区乡镇公共体育服务体系的顺利构建和良性运行也必须 充分发挥市场体系和社会体系的作用；充分发挥示范区内农民体育健身服务体系的服务与改 造双重功能，实现示范区农村体育的长效、健康发展；加大对示范区乡镇各中、小学校体育 的投入力度，提高象征学校的体育资源优势的社会开放率和利用率。 1. 创新管理思路，推进分级联动的组织管理体系 美国现行的社会体育指导员制度是协会主导下的政府相关部门监督制度，而我国现行的 是政府体育行政部门主导下体育行政部门分级实施制度。行政主导、行政实施”的制度思考 在我国经济不发达到情况下，且在举国体制下是必然选择，政府统管政策法规制定、培训内 容和标准、资格的认定以及对社会体育指导员的派遣。 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
402
ICSSS 2015
但随着我国经济的迅速发展，人民生活水平的大幅提高，城市和小城镇化已初见规模， 所有这些都必然要求社会体育指导员大幅增加，这也就使政府陷入大量的事务性工作中，影 响了宏观管理和政策调控的质量；个别单位部门不顾培训质量和条件盲目培养和认定，以谋 取私利。所以各级政府部门应解放思想，转变观念，采取切实行动为各地社会体育指导员协 会的成立创造条件，并帮助其开展社会体育指导员的培训、鉴定、监督、奖惩等项工作，待 条件成熟后，把权利交给协会，实现社会体育指导员的行业自治。 1.1 建立与基层社会体育组织密切联系的工作机制 公益型社会体育指导员应将协助基层社会体育组织开展活动，为其提供无偿服务纳入工 作内容之中，并建立一定的工作机制，及时、有效地对基层社会体育组织的体育活动进行指 导。另一方面，公益型社会体育指导员也是社会体育组织和政府体育行政机构之间沟通的桥 梁和重要的协调者。对于社会体育组织中出现的问题，公益型社会体育指导员应向政府体育 行政部门提出申请，要求予以适当帮助；而对于政府体育行政部门的体育政策、措施等，公 益型社会体育指导员同样有义务在社会体育组织中进行宣传、传达，并促使社会体育组织认 真执行。 1.2 设计数字化管理体系，推进城乡社会体育指导员职业化进展 现在国内对城乡社会体育指导员的组织、管理很不完善，地区发展也不平衡，我市有一 级社会体育指导员协会，可是区一级、街道一级的社会体育指导员协会没有发挥应有的作用。 国家已经下发了《社会体育指导员国家职业标准》文件，可以借势构建起城乡社会体育指导 员的数字化管理体系，提升管理的效率和科学水平，这也是适应网络时代发展的要求。 建议建立社会体育指导员组织机构或协会，把分散的社会体育指导员，按类别纳入其网 络系统中，并根据指导类别成立相应的体育俱乐部和社区体育指导中心等。要借助行政立法 等功能，加快和促进社会体育指导员职业化进程，社会效应与经济利益并举，为社会体育事 业的发展提供了广阔的发展空间，同时对建立和完善社会体育管理体制将起到积极的促进作 用。 2. 以制度促进社会体育指导员队伍持续、有序发展 政府的行政职能具有宏观性和微观性，多体现在管理职能方面，在政府简政放权的今天， 政府体育管理职能部门应该及时进行自我改革，对社会体育事务需要宏观管理的要做到位， 做足功课，对于城乡社会体育一些具体事务工作，要成立专门的事务机构，或者进行政府购 买的形式开展工作。探索不同社会体育团体、组织的协同活动，可以在合适的时候，设立国 家层面上的城乡社会体育协会，用以指导相关工作的宏观管理、协调、培训等工作。地方政 府体育部门对于具有细节工作不要过多的予以管理。要善于抓大放小，简政放权，提升政府 工作的效率。 同时也要进一步研究、修订城乡社会体育指导员的管理、考核相关法规，在城乡社会体 育指导员的管理、继续教育、考核评优方面信息等方面形成自我发展的新机制。要设立城乡 社会体育指导员的协会管理部门，从顶层做奥设计，从全局进行权衡以国家或地区的城乡社 会体育指导员队伍的规模、建设等。 3. 城乡社会体育指导员队伍建设的提升路径 3.1 开辟社会体育指导员管理与培训的社会化途径 (1) 建立社会体育指导员的社团组织培育社会自治力量、扩大社会自治权力是现代政治 文明和民主建设的发展趋向，社会体育指导员工作更要走社会化的管理道路。要在上海等少 403
数省市已经建立社会体育指导员协会的基础上，逐步扩大地方建立社会体育指导员协会的范 围，并争取尽快建立全国性的社会体育指导员协会。要充分发挥其社团自治与自律管理的职 能，将体育行政部门中可以由社会体育指导员协会管理的事项．逐步向协会转移。 (2) 充分发挥单项体育协会和行业体育协会的作用现有的各种体育社团是社会体育指导 员工作应积极利用的组织渠道。随着全民健身活动向纵深发展，技能指导型的社会体育指导 员应逐步成为社会体育指导员队伍的主体，应积极发动各项目协会积极参与，督促他们更好 地履行运动项目普及的法定职责．在社会体育指导员的专项能力把握与培养中发挥应有的作 用。除了全国性单项体育协会正在积极参与社会体育指导员职业鉴定的有关工作外，有条件 的地方单项体育协会也要根据可能积极承担有关任务。另外，行业体育协会是开展职工体育 的重要组织形式，有条件的全国性行业体育协会经向国家体育总局申请批准后，可负责本行 业内公益社会体育指导员的管理工作。 3.2 增强社会体育指导员继续教育力度，提升队伍整体素质 从世界范围来看，西方国家在社会体育指导员的培养与管理方面采取交叉形式，既有分 级又有分类。 日本在分类上面做的比较典型，日本对社会体育指导员的资格类型做了8类：社区、竞技、 商业、休闲、野外、少年、计划等类型体育指导员。英国则分为4种：运动类、社区类、基础 类、高级类，这四种类型既有分类又有分级。属于混合实用型的分类制。国外还有把社会体 育指导员依据不同指导类型制定成：青少年体育指导员、老年人体育指导员、比赛体育指导 员等等，在类型上的划分个性化很强。目前国内官方的社会体育指导员的等级制度是一个从 三级到高级的高低等级序列局面，缺少更有针对性的分类指导级别的划分。这样的状况优点 是，能够培养全能型社会体育指导员，带来的问题是大而全往往会导致培训的深度不足，面 广而专不精。从国家现行的培训教材内容来看，理论内容的比例大于社会实践技能的比例。 社会体育指导员的个性化需求是随着经济社会发展而产生的，我们国家可以根据目前社 会体育活动的趋势和民众群体的诉求，适时改革社会体育指导员等级制，增加分类内容。在 设计培训内容时，要结合受培训学员的培训受众群体的需求，设计个性化的培训内容，力图 使培训内容更加注重针对性。要让教材体现理论与实践统一、传统技能培训与现实需求培训 统一，增加培训内容的层次性。比如可以按照不同年龄、功能需求群体的不同、不同职业群 体等的角度进行区分。把不同类型的健身需求与分级结合在一起，有利于满足社会不同人群 的个性化群体。这样，在上述的前提下，我们能够做更细致的分类，比如，儿童健身指导员、 青年健身指导员、女士健身指导员、黄昏健身指导员；白领健身指导员、公务员健身指导员、 职工健身指导员；娱乐型健身指导员、瘦身塑形健身指导员、康复健身指导员等等。 同时，管理部门要扩展与各类型体育社团的沟通合作，以政府购买服务的方式，细致化 健身服务的种类，这样能够从更多的角度发挥不同类型特长社会体育指导员的作用，也能服 务更多不同需求群体的健身个性化需求。 (1)精细化培训制度，设计合宜的培训学时 继续教育的培训目的在于提升教育对象的能力，良好的制度能保证学员有外在的监督去 完成培训，内在的培训效果在于学员的学习动机如何。这方面是培训效果得以保证的前提。 制度的设计可以从一个角度提升社会体育指导员的积极性，比如，政府管理部门拨付专 门资金用于扶持社会体育指导员的培训。用好这笔钱，专款专用的前提必须是设计好相关的 制度。 在社区进行公益活动的社会体育指导员，他们以其热情、奉献对社区、街道的社会体育 运动的活动进行了贡献，更珍贵的是他的社会层面的意义，因此管理部门要有专门的财政预 算，足额保证所需。同时还要做好培训内容（比如，社会体育活动的基本理论、基本技能、 基本项目或相应级别的内容）、培训学时方面的制度设计，做到钱花到位，效果取得明显。 (2) 理顺社会体育指导员培训管理机制，增加高级序列社会体育指导员的培训机会 404
强化地方社会体育指导员的继续教育工作，大幅度的提升社会体育指导员队伍在建设、 考核、日常管理等等事务工作方面体现出科学化、规范化。可以把当前的比例提升到每万人 两人的程度，另外，可以参考有关解决外来务工人员问题的案例，以后开展社会体育指导员 统计时，改变通常采取“常住人口”作统计单位，而是把外来务工人员的数量统计在数据里， 有效达成动态调研满足所有人群的健身需求。 出于提升提社会体育指导员水平的考虑，尤其是高级别序列中指导员的水平，可以在对 社会体育指导员开展培训初期，设定相关的门槛，特别是对国家级社会体育指导员培训进行 人选推荐时，要求培训对象拥有过基层或一线设会体育指导工作简历。这样做的好处在于， 一是给基层社会体育指导员提供更多的继续教育机会，二是有利于理论与实践结合。更有利 于一线社会体育运动活动的开展。 致谢 本文为国家社科基金一般项目《苏南城乡公共体育服务均等化示范区建设研究》的阶段 性成果之一。项目编号：14BTY105. 本文为 2014 年常州市体育局体育科技项目局管课题支持， 编号：CT2014401105。 References [1] Lv Xu-tao. Social sports instructors in China research were reviewed [J]. Journal of Capital University of Physical Education and Sports. 2007(01):60-63. [2] Liu Qingjian.China's development of social sports instructors, the dynamic comparative study [J]. Journal of Beijing Sport University. 2007(07): 901-903 . [3] Yu Shanxu,Wang Xuguang,Li Rongri,Xu Huanxin.Improve the system of social sports instructors in China about the key issues discussed in this paper [J]. Journal of Tianjin University of Sport. 2007(05):374-377. [4] He Minxue,Du Xiaojuan. Research on the characteristics of social sports instructors in China [J]. Journal of Wuhan University of Sport. 2005(06): 33-35. [5] Dai Jianhui,Yu Chonggan.Investigation and analysis of China's social sports instructor usage [J]. Journal of Shanghai University of Sport. 2005(06): 17-20. [6] Shi Shusheng,Ma Xiaoyan. For social sports instructors and personal trainer competition in the workplace [J]. Journal of Beijing Sport University.2009(05):124-126. [7] Li Yali,Liu Shaoying.Social sports instructors in hunan province present situation and the development countermeasures [J]. Journal of Shenyang Sport University. 2009(03):43-46.
405
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Public Sports Service Demonstration Area Construction of Human Security Team Construction Jianqiang Guo1,a, Wenjie Zhu 2 1
Changzhou University sports institute
2
Suzhou Art and Design Technology Institute, Jiangsu SuZhou, China a
[email protected]
Keywords: Public sports service, Demonstration area, Social instructors, management
Abstract. The paper take the interview visits, quantitative sociological research methods of questionnaire and literature analysis, understand the national human aspects in the construction of public sports service demonstration area about social instructor management way certain deficiencies. Through research, the relevant departments to provide public sports service demonstration area construction experience of social instructor team construction to provide certain reference.
公共体育服务示范区建设人力保障队伍建设研究 郭建强 1
1,a
,朱文杰
2
2
常州大学体育学院 苏州工艺职业美术学院 a
[email protected]
关键词：公共体育服务；示范区；社会指导员；管理
中文摘要. 文章通过采取访谈走访、定量问卷法、文献分析法等社会学研究方法，了解国家 公共体育服务示范区建设中人力方面关于社会指导员管理方式存在一定不足。通过研究，为 相关部门提供公共体育服务示范区建设关于社会指导员队伍建设提供一定借鉴经验。 公共体育服务示范区建设人力保障是个重点部分，重视社会体育指导员建设和管理工作， 作为全民健身的重要抓手，加强社会体育指导员管理和培训，充分发挥社会体育指导员在全 民健身活动中的引领作用，全面提升公共体育服务水平，推动全民健身运动持续健康发展。 1. 影响队伍建设的因素调研分析 影响社会体育指导员工作开展的几个方面的因素： 1.1 物质方面的因素 一定的物质保证是开展任何活动的前提基础，物质条件、经济水平直接制约着、影响着 体育事业的发展，这种影响一是体现在国家高水平竞技类体育项目的发展，这在国际体育赛 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
406
ICSSS 2015
事中能够得到体现。二是体现在基层社区社会体育开展的状况上面。体育属于上层艺术领域 人们只有在富裕起来以后才有心思去进行健身运动。地方政府也只有在经济发展起来以后， 有足够的财力去支持社会体育运动的发展。同一个道理，社会体育事业的发展程度如何也就 直接制约着社会体育指导员队伍的建设、发展。 在对武进区社会体育指导员队伍群体中做的“影响自身工作的因素有哪些”的问卷中， “活动经费”这一选项位列首位，占调查人数的53.1%。数据说明了活动经费也就是钱的问题 是影响社会体育运动开展的首要问题。经费的多寡一是影响社会体育指导员的工作积极性， 二是影响社区活动站工作的开展的成效，所幸的是，武进区这几年投入的资金数额是很大的， 对社会体育的发展起到了很大的促进作用。 当前，武进区社会体育指导员都是义务服务政府投入的经费全是用在活动本身。如果从 个人经济报酬方面来说，社会体育指导员的积极性难以继续提升，但从目前开展工作的成绩 来看，武进区的社会体育还是走在了全国的前列。武进区在这几年中对社会体育指导员队伍 建设管理方面还是做出了一些有益探索。 1.2 硬件条件对社会体育运动的影响 硬件设施是开展体育运动的必要条件，社会体育活动对硬件的要求虽然比不上专业体育 运动的要求，场地、设施的配套是否齐全、完备对于社会体育运动的开展有多大影响，我们 在调研中也做了相关统计分析。 在影响武进区社会体育指导员开展工作的因素中选择“场地不足，设施不完备”的有 38.9%。这一数据说明，硬件设施对于社会体育运动的开展、社会体育运动指导员开展工作有 着重要的影响作用。场地不足会直接限制活动开展的规模、次数、人数。设施不完备会直接 影响社会体育指导员开展指导工作的积极性和便利性、专业性。武进区在近几年对社会体育 运动的资金投入数额很大，添置了社区健身设施，硬化社区健身广场，配置了音响、话筒、 舞蹈服装、道具等等。武进区在区中心、街道社区相继开辟、开放了一批形式多样、门类众 多的群众性体育设施：小区的全民健身路径；全民健身主题广场；全民健身主题小公园等等。 但面对规模日益壮大的崇尚健身的广大群众，现有的场地和设施还是不能满足其健身的需要。 场地设施等硬件条件不能保证，社会体育指导员工作的开展必然会受到影响。但有一个可喜 的现象正在发生，南京市的以赢利为主的健身俱乐部、健身体育中心、各种体育会所等正如 雨后春笋般茁壮成长，各大公园相继免费向老百姓开放，不少学校的场地也在一定的时间段 向周边的群众开放。相信不久的将来南京市广大群众再不会为没有健身场所而埋怨。 1.3 组织管理状况对社会体育指导员的影响 社会体育指导员队伍建设的好坏与否，同该队伍的组织管理状况有密切的关系。在课题 组的调查中，在“影响武进区社会体育指导员开展工作的因素中”有28.9%的受访人选择了“组 织不规范、管理不健全”。 武进区在社会体育运动指导员队伍建设中，积极实践创新，在实践中，武进已经形成了 以“区社会体育指导中心——镇（街道）文广教体科——村（社区）体育健身俱乐部”为主 导的体育行政管理系统。在这个基础上成立的指导站，既有镇（街道）文广教体科的行政依 托，又有基层社会体育指导员的广泛基础，在区社会体育指导员协会的指导下，又逐渐形成 了“镇（街道）社会体育指导站——体育健身指导片（分站）——健身指导点”以社会力量 为主导的三级基层社会体育指导系统。即指导站负责对镇（街道）全民健身进行业务指导、 项目推广；根据区域人口情况，划分成若干片，明确社会体育指导员骨干担任片长，负责片 区内的体育组织、指导工作；在各健身点配置社会体育指导员，负责健身点的体育指导和管 理工作。三级社会体育指导系统，填补了基层体育组织工作的空白，突破了基层社会体育管 理的“瓶颈”，全区全民健身计划的实施变得有序、可控，基层体育活动变得活跃、频繁，健 身设施有人管理、健身人群有人指导，社会体育指导员的能量得以更大释放，大大提高了组 407
织活动的效率。 1.4 群众体育健身理念因素 在调查问卷中，我们针对民众健身理念设计了相关问题进行调查，在对社会体育指导员 工作影响的相关因素问题中，选择“民众健身消费意识”的有16.3%。可见，民众的健身意识 状态对社会体育活动的开展有着密切关系，民众健身意识强，有利于社会体育活动的认可， 有利于社会体育运动项目的开展，这样社会体育指导员在开展工作时，会得到更多的认可与 支持，社会体育运动项目的开展训练也会有较好的效果。 课题组在武进区不同街道、社区与20位居民进行有关社会体育运动访谈时，100%的受访 者认为，“健身很重要，要经常进行”，仅有不足50%的受访者认为“健身消费话费是可以接 受的”，问到“是否愿意社会体育指导员进行指导”，100%的受访者表示“愿意”。从访谈 中可以得知，武进区民众对社会体育运动时高度认可的，对技术指导、训练支持方面也有高 度需求。具有良好的社会体育运动意识。这些健身意识的背后离不开武进区近几年在推进社 会体育运动工作中所做的努力。也从一个角度反映出，社会体育指导员、社会体育运动项目、 民众健身意识三者之间存在互相促进、影响的关系，这方面武进区的做法值得总结推广，这 一点在随后的报告中会有详细论述。 1.5 舆论宣传 社会体育指导员在我国来说是一个较为新鲜的事物，国家体育总局制定的相关文件，制 度也相对滞后，从国家层面上来说，对社会体育指导员的宣传度是不够的，对相关从业资格 的认定、推广的渠道还是很狭窄的。从社会层面来看，民众对社会体育指导员的认识度与认 可度不是很高。 在武进区，民众对社会体育指导员的认识度还是很高的，一是得益于政府的大力推广社 会体育活动，二是武进区两千多名社会体育指导员活跃在各大社区、街道，在组织群众活动 中，已经为广大人民所认识。但也存在部分居民没有参与过社会体育活动，对社会体育指导 员的认知处于模糊状态。 各级政府还要在不同场合多加宣传、推介社会体育指导员，让大家熟悉社会体育指导员 的身份、作用、职能，这样才能有利于社会体育指导员更好的开展工作。 2. 城乡社会体育指导员队伍建设路径探究 2.1 队伍管理和运行机制的大胆探索 要重视政府部门管理服务职能的到位，持续改善社会体育指导员的年龄、学历、性别等 因素，管理部门一方面具有宏观的政府职能，一方面也有一部分的较为具体的管理权限，我 们要加强政府的服务意识，适当放权，把社会体育运动组织变换为城乡社会体育指导员建设、 管理的主体，建议如下所述： 1、设立各级社会体育指导员协会，细化协会架构。比如，咨询、培训、策划等部门，协 会的功能涵盖：不同级别的指导员的继续教育、考级管理、优秀社会体育员的评选、推荐等 等。 2、协同发挥不同类型社会体育组织的作用 在目前存在很多类型的体育民间组织，有公益性的，有商业性的，表现形式有俱乐部、 团队、点等等。要善于整合这样的资源，协同发挥不同组织的合力，善于借力打力。 3、重视社区基层组织在发挥社会体育运动中的作用。 街道、社区是我们目前的基层政府单位，最接地气，他们在开展群众体育活动时，是直 接的政策传达者、贯彻者，是参与民众的组织者，他们最熟悉社会体育指导员队伍的建设和 管理现状，要调动他们参与管理的积极性，发挥基层智慧，有创新、有针对性的管理社会体 408
育指导员队伍。 截止到2012年，武进区社会体育指导员人数为2247人。社会体育指导员队伍总体数量优 势明显，但是其等级结构失调，尤其是高级别(国家级)社会体育指导员目前为空白，拥有三 级等级资格从业证书的比重最大。根据城市居民小区普遍存在体育活动场地设施不足的现实 问题，作为辖区的社区体育组织，一方面要积极向主管住宅行政部门及开发商们呼吁，请重 视居民小区体育活动场地设施的配套建设。另一方面，要充分利用管理好本辖区内有限的体 育活动场所，规划好各健身点的活动场所。在社区内的公园、闲置空地和楼群间要修建合理 的简易体育健身设施，以提高社区各的单位体育场地的利用率。针对社区的特点，进行体育 场地设施建设，多建设小型、简易、便民的体育场所，如方便、简单、开发难度小、投资小 的健身路径、棋牌室、乒乓球室等。注意开发社区的自然资源，利用地区域优势或者地域特 点来对体育场地设施拓进行展，有效增加社区体育场地设施的面积和数量。通过改善服务意 识、满足辖区居民的体育需要，来调动辖区居民加入社区体育组织的积极性。要求在服务内 容选择组织成员喜闻乐见的、健康的并符合社会道德规范行为的体育活动内容；在方法上， 让成员学会自我健身、自我评价健身效果；在服务的时间上，考虑小区居民的作息时间，制 定相应的活动时间和场所，抓住早、晚、周末节日等空闲时间开社区体育活动。 致谢 本文为国家社科基金一般项目《苏南城乡公共体育服务均等化示范区建设研究》的阶段 性成果之一。项目编号：14BTY105. 本文为2014年常州市体育局体育科技项目局管课题支持， 编号：CT2014401105。 References [1] Diao Zaijian,Ma Gengdi,Zhang Ying,Zhang Jijing. A study of sports fitness club development situation in China [J]. Journal of Beijing Sport University. 2002(06): 744-745+750. [2] Li Ming. The social sports instructor system of China, Japan, the United States [J]. Journal of Shandong Sport University. 2000(04): 16-23. [3] Li Shuyi,Zhu Yuetong,Cao Ling. Social sports instructors in our country present situation investigation [J]. China Sport Science. 1999(04): 9-12. [4] He Mingxue,Du Xiaojuan. For the transition of the social sports instructor management system in 2010 and development [J]. Journal of Physical Education. 2006(01):39-41. [5] Xiang Liming. he current situation of social sports instructors in China social science research [J]. Journal of Shandong Sport University. 2006(04):27-30. [6] Xiao Lianhua,Jin Yuqiang. The present situation and countermeasures of China's social sports instructor [J]. Sports Culture Guide. 2006(07):7-10. [7] Chen Linong,Jin Cenquan. Confusion and countermeasures of development of social sports instructors in our country [J]. Journal of Xian Sport University. 2006(04):7-10.
409
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
A Case Study of the Explanation of English Vocabulary Abilities for English Comprehensive Competence Ying Shen1,a,*, Yaxiong Li2,b 1
Foreign Languages College, Guangxi University, Guangxi, China; Institute of Intelligent Systems, The University of Memphis, Memphis, Tennessee, USA 2
Foreign Languages College, Guangxi University, Nanning, Guangxi, China a
[email protected],
[email protected] *Corresponding author Ying Shen
Keywords: Vocabulary Ability, English Comprehensive Competence, SPSS
Abstract. This paper aims to investigate the interrelationships between vocabulary abilities (productive vocabulary ability, receptive vocabulary ability, translation ability of vocabulary, and linguistic vocabulary ability) and English comprehensive competence. The subjects were graduate English majors at Guangxi University recruited in 2013. The statistic analyzing tool SPSS 19 was adopted in this study. The results are as follows: (1) Different variables of vocabulary abilities have different influences on the comprehensive English competence; (2) the productive vocabulary ability has a strong relationship with the overall quality of English competence, especially vocabulary Levels 5000 and 10000 have obvious influences on the comprehensive English competence. These results show that more attention should be paid to the learning and teaching of vocabulary Levels 5000 and 10000 in the future.
词汇能力对英语综合能力的解释度研究 1,a,*
沈 莹
2,b
, 李雅雄
1
广西大学外国语学院，南宁，广西，中国；孟菲斯大学智能系统研究中心，田纳西，美国 2
广西大学外国语学院，南宁，广西，中国
a
[email protected],
[email protected] *
通讯作者 沈莹
关键词: 词汇能力；英语综合能力；词汇能力各变量
中文摘要. 本研究以广西大学2013级英语专业硕士研究生为研究对象，探索了词汇能力的各 个变量（产出性词汇能力、接受性词汇能力，词汇翻译能力以及词汇语言学能力） 与英语综 合能力之间的关系。本研究使用的统计工具是SPSS 19统计分析软件，结果主要为：（1）词 汇能力的各个变量对英语综合能力的影响不同；（2）产出词汇能力对英语综合能力有较大影 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
410
ICSSS 2015
响，尤其是低频词级5000和10000词级的产出词汇能力对英语综合能力的影响力最强。以上结 果表明，将来对低频词的产出性词汇的学习和掌握应该得到应有的重视。 1．引言 众所周知，词汇学习在英语学习中占着很大的比重。研究者们一致认为，词汇知识至少 应包括质和量两个维度，即词汇知识的深度和广度 (Qian 1999 & 2002; Qian & Schedl 2004) 。词汇的广度即词汇量的大小，指接受性词汇，反映的是了解一个词最常用含义的能 力 (Laufer & Paribakht 1998) 。Meara (1996) 认为，一个人词汇量的大小与其阅读能力、 写作能力、听说能力甚至是整体的英语水平都存在一定的关系。而词汇的深度是指学习者掌 握一个词全部意义或用法的程度，包括产出词汇的能力、翻译能力、语言学能力等方面，还 包括语域和搭配等各个方面。 就目前而言，词汇量的大小及其影响已经得到了广泛关注，研究成果也较多，但是由于 测试工具和研究群体的不同，调查得出的词汇量与综合能力之间的关系并不明确，甚至结果 差异很大 (桂诗春1983 & 1985; 解放军外国语学院英语测试中心1987; Meara & Jones 1988; 周大军1999 & 2000; 邵华2002; 吕长竑2004)。而词汇深度由于其复杂性和难以测量性，国 外除了研究词汇深度和阅读等某一单项之间的关系外，只有研究学习策略与英语综合能力的 关系 (Nisbet, Tindall & Arroyo, 2005; Llosa, 2007), 英语综合能力与学术成就的关系 (Graham, 1987; Johnson, 1988)，语言综合能力测试之间的关系 (Hanania & Shikhani, 1986) 的类似研究。国内，除了吕长竑 (2004) 做了词汇量与语言综合能力、词汇深度知识的研究， 李晓 (2007) 做了词汇广度与深度对语言各分项能力的研究外，几乎没有这一方面的研究。 对英语综合能力的定义，国内外并没有统一的说法,国外多都把对英语综合能力的评估标 准定位在已经形成一定模式的标准化考试成绩如TOEEL成绩为主，因此在本文中采用国内已经 形成一定标准、用来衡量英语综合能力的英语专业八级作为评估标准。 迄今为止，大多数关于词汇能力与英语综合能力方面的研究都集中于本科生或非英语专 业研究生，对英语专业硕士研究生词汇能力和英语综合能力之间的关系研究似乎有所忽略。 因此，本文通过分析广西大学英语专业硕士研究生的词汇能力，讨论高层次语言学习中影响 英语综合能力的词汇因素，分析词汇能力中的接受性词汇、产出性词汇、翻译能力和语言学 能力是否直接影响英语综合能力，对英语综合能力的预测力和解释力为多少。 2．研究程序 2.1 研究对象及时间 受试对象为74名广西大学2013级英语专业硕士研究生，其中4名跨专业同学（未参加专业 八级考试），7名同学未按要求完成所有测试，故有效测试试卷为63份。由于广西大学是211 院校，面向全国招生，研究的受试者成绩具有一定的代表性。测试在开学后第9周后进行，即 从2013年10月29日开始，2014年1月14日结束。 2.2 研究工具 2.2.1 词汇接受性能力的测试方法： 采 用 Schmitt, N. (2010) 编 写的 接 受性词 汇 水平测 试 ，即 Vocabulary Level Test (VLT) 。该测试由五部分组成：2000词频、3000词频、5000词频、学术词汇和10000词频。每 一部分有10道测试题，每6个词为一组，配有3个英语解释，学生根据英文释义从给出的6个词 中选择合适的单词。
411
2.2.2 词汇产出能力的测试方法： 采用Laufer. B & Nation, P. (1999) 设计的产出性词汇水平测试，即Productive Level Test (PLT)。 产出性词汇测试采用单词填空的形式，以给出单词的前几个字母来考察学生产 出性词汇的输出，共计54题。 2.2.3 词汇翻译能力的测试方法： 采用Schmitt (2000) 编写的Vocabulary in Language Teaching中的试题。共给出了50 个单词，要求被试者把给出的英语单词翻译成汉语，翻译对一个单词，其词汇量就是以翻译 对的单词数乘以500。 2.2.4 词汇语言学知识的测试方法： 同样是采用Schmitt (2000) 编写的Vocabulary in Language Teaching中的试题。给出 了一个中心词和5个相关的形容词，根据认知语言学中的相关概念，与中心词义越接近的词所 处的位置应该与中心词越近。 2.2.5 英语综合能力测试方法： 采用英语专业八级测试成绩来衡量英语综合能力。和TOFFEL考试一样，该考试已形成一 定的标准和规范，考试分为四个等级,考试内容涵盖了听、说、读、写、译四个方面的能力， 是测试应试者单项和英语综合能力的参照性水平考试。而由于大规模考试的条件尚不具备， 所以有关说的技能暂缓测试。 2.3 研究方法 本研究根据SPSS 19统计软件分析数据，主要使用SPSS 19中的皮尔逊相关关系(Pearson correlation) 和线性回归两种检测方法。 3．研究结果及讨论 为了判断是否受试研究生的词汇能力的各个变量（接受性词汇能力，产出性词汇能力， 词汇翻译能力以及词汇语言学能力）与英语综合能力之间的相关关系，本研究通过SPSS 19 统 计出词汇能力各个变量与英语综合能力之间的相关关系 (Pearson correlation) 系数表1以 及描述性统计表2。 表1 词汇能力各个变量与英语综合能力之间的相关关系一览表 1
2
3
4
1. 接受性词汇2000
1
2. 接受性词汇3000
.296*
1
3. 接受性词汇5000
-.181
.091
1
.179
.310*
1
4. 接受性词汇10000 .157
5
6
7
8
9
5. 产出性词汇2000
.488** .411**
.108
.070
1
6. 产出性词汇3000
.231
.465**
.124
.169
.538** 1
7. 产出性词汇5000
.231
.398**
.219
.287*
.323** .464** 1
8. 产出性词汇10000 .090
.290*
.271*
.323**
.242
.332** .719** 1
9. 词汇翻译能力
.105
.324** .439**
-.092
-.001
.440** .512** 1
-.106
.163
-.062
-.140
-.050
.007
10. 词汇语言学能力 -.008
.014
412
-.021
10
.086 1
11
11. 英语专业八级（英 .292* 语综合能力）
.138
.089
-.012
.389** .298*
.431** .407** .106 .116 1
*. 在0.05 水平呈现显著相关 (双侧). **. 在0.01水平呈现显著相关 (双侧) 表2 词汇能力及英语综合能力测试的描述性统计（N=63） 接受性词汇2000词级 接受性词汇3000词级 接受性词汇5000词级 接受性词汇10000词级 产出性词汇2000词级 产出性词汇3000词级 产出性词汇5000词级 产出性词汇10000词级 词汇翻译能力 词汇语言学能力 英语专业八级（英语综合能力）
最小值 90 87 50 30 61 61 11 0 4500 40 50
最大值 100 100 100 100 100 100 83 78 24000 100 80
平均值 98.52 98.46 85.56 76.51 87.54 85.90 48.35 39.33 16015.87 72.67 61.90
方差 3.01 2.79 11.33 16.18 9.78 10.63 14.63 20.61 5776.74 13.58 6.92
表1结果如下： • 产出词汇能力2000与英语综合能力之间的相关系数是r=0.389**, 这说明他们之间的 内在联系比较强； • 产出词汇能力3000与英语综合能力之间的相关系数为r=0.298*, 这能表明他们之间存 在着比较紧密的联系； • 产出词汇能力5000与英语综合能力之间的相关系数为r=0.431**， 这就可以看出他们 之间存在着密切相关性 • 产出词汇能力10000与英语综合能力之间的相关系数为r=0.407**， 这也能表明他们之 间存在着相当密切的关系。 表2的结果如下： • 接受性词汇的数据表明：首先，这4个词级的平均分呈递减分布，且总体成绩较高，意 味着硕士研究生接受性词汇能力强高，很好的掌握了2000和3000词级。其次，4个词级的最高 分虽然都为100分，最低分却差异较大，且随着词汇频率的降低而降低，说明学生对低频词的 掌握还有待提高；最后，表示成绩波动程度的标准差并未呈现简单的递增，3000词的波动比 2000词还小，这说明，在一些常用词上学生的掌握并不完全，同时，随着词汇频率的降低， 成绩上下波动的范围逐渐扩大。 • 产出性词汇的数据表明：第一，这4个词级成绩的平均分呈递减分布，且总体成绩偏低， 这说明学生产出性词汇能力偏低；第二，表示成绩波动的标准差较大，这表明成绩的上下波 动范围较大；第三，受试研究生产出性词汇在5000词频时极速下降，这说明5000词是学生习 得词汇能力的一大门槛。 • 受试研究生在接受性和产出性词汇测试中的成绩随着词汇频率的降低而降低，且掌握 的大多数词汇仍属于高频词，在中低频词方面不尽如人意，同时产出性词汇能力远低于接受 性词汇能力。 • 翻译能力最低分为4500，最高分为24000，平均值为16000，标准差为11.55；语言学能 力最低分为40，最高分为100，平均值为72，标准差为13.58；而表示英语综合能力的专业八 级只有四个等级，不及格 (9人，占14.3%)、及格 (34人，占54.0%)、良好 (19人，占30.2%) 和优秀 (1人，占1.6%)，经过转换后，平均成绩为62，标准差为6.92。 • 相对于接受性词汇能力而言，受试研究生的词汇的产出性词汇能力、翻译能力和语言 学能力的波动范围较大。 413
总之，在词汇能力的各个变量（接受性词汇能力、产出性词汇能力、词汇翻译能力和词 汇语言学能力）中，产出性词汇能力与英语综合能力的相关性最高，其中5000和10000词级的 产出性词汇能力对英语综合能力的影响力最强，而词汇翻译能力和词汇语言学能力对英语综 合能力的影响力并不强。 4．结论和启示 由上述数据统计和结果分析表明：首先，受试者在接受性词汇和产出性词汇中成绩随着 词频的降低而降低，且产出性词汇能力远低于接受性词汇能力，这表明学生的表现与词频有 密切关系；其次，词汇翻译能力对英语综合能力的影响力不强，这就证明了学生只掌握单词 的基本意思对英语综合能力的提高是远远不够的；再次，相对于词汇翻译能力，词汇语言学 能力对英语综合能力的影响较高，同时会影响学生的认知水平；最后，词汇能力只能在一定 程度上解释英语综合能力，还有更多的影响因素值得探讨，例如，百科知识的储备、相关测 试学知识的掌握以及考试时的心理因素等。 针对上述结果，研究建议英语专业研究生课程应更注重培养同学们的中低频接受性词汇、 产出性词汇、词汇搭配、测试学以及百科知识等各方面的能力。 本研究对实证研究中几乎没有针对英语专业硕士研究生词汇能力和英语综合能力的调查 进行了补充，从词汇的质和量两个方面深入探讨了两者之间的关系，填补了对中国英语专业 硕士研究生词汇能力调查的空白。但由于时间和受试人数的限制，本研究只能作为个案分析， 不具普遍性，希望以上的不足可以通过将来的研究得到改进。 致谢 本文为以下科研项目的阶段性成果： 1. 广西大学重点研究课题《英语写作中的衔接与连贯》，编号XBS100008 2. 2014年广西高校优秀教师出国留学基金项目 3. 2014年国家级大学生创新训练立项资助项目（项目编号：141059349） References [1] Dajun Z. & W. Boyan. A track investigation of English vocabulary of Chinese college students. TESOL Quarterly, vol. 32 (5), pp. 356-361, 2000. [2] Gui Shicun. An investigation of English vocabulary of Chinese English learners. Collecting Theses of Learning and Teaching Research of Foreign Language Education, Shanghai: Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press, 1983. [3] Gui Shicun. Investigations and analyses on the vocabulary size of English majors in China, Modern Foreign Language, vol. 1, pp.1-6, 1985. [4] Graham, J. English language proficiency and the prediction of academic success. TESOL Quarterly, vol. 21 (3), pp. 505-521, 1987. [5] Hanania, E. & M. Shikhani. Interrelationships among three tests of language proficiency: Standardized ESL, cloze, and writing. TESOL Quarterly, vol. 20 (1), pp. 97-109, 1986. [6] Johnson, P. English language proficiency and academic performance of undergraduate international students. TESOL Quarterly, vol. 22 (1), pp. 164-168, 1988. [7] Laufer B. & T. S. Paribakht. The relationship between passive and active vocabularies: Effects of language learning context. Language Learning, vol. 48 (3), pp. 365-391, 1998. 414
[8] Laufer B. & P. Nation. A vocabulary size test of controlled productive ability. Language Testing, vol. 16 (1), pp. 33-51, 1999. [9] Li Xiao. Assessing the roles of breadth and depth of vocabulary knowledge in second language proficiency. Foreign Language Teaching and Research , vol. 39 (5), pp. 352-359, 2007. [10] Llosa, L. Validating a standards-based classroom assessment of English proficiency: A multi-method approach. Language Testing, vol. 24 (4), pp. 489-515, 2007. [11] Lv Changhong. Vocabulary size and its influence on English achievement as its relationship to depth of lexical knowledge. Foreign Language Teaching and Research,, vol. 36 (2), pp. 116-123, 2004. [12] Meara. P. & G. Jones. Vocabulary size as a placement indicator. In P Grunwell (ed.). Applied Linguistic in Society. London: CILT, pp. 80-87, 1988. [13] Meara P. The dimensions of Lexical Competence. In G Brown, K Malmkjaer & J Williams (eds.). Performance and Competence in Second Language Acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 35-53, 1996. [14] Nisbet D., E. Tindall & A. Arroyo. Language learning strategies and English proficiency of Chinese university students. Foreign Language Annals, vol. 38 (1), pp. 101-107, 2005. [15] Qian, D. Assessing the roles of depth and breadth of vocabulary knowledge in reading comprehension. The Canadian Modern Language Review, vol. 56 (2), pp. 283-307, 1999. [16] Qian, D. Investigating the relationship between vocabulary knowledge and academic reading performance: An assessment perspective. Language Learning, vol. 52 (3), pp. 513-536, 2002. [17] Qian, D. & M. Schedl. Evaluation of an in depth vocabulary knowledge measure for assessing reading performance. Language Testing, vol. 21 (1), pp. 28-52, 2004. [18] Researching students’ vocabulary size, building up grading vocabulary. Foreign Language Teaching and Research, vol. 3, pp. 42-46, 1987. [19] Schmitt, N. Vocabulary in Language Teaching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000. [20] Schmitt, N. An Introduction to Applied Linguistics (2nd Edition). New York: Oxford University Press, 2010. [21] Shao Hua. An empirical study of CET-4 grading vocabulary learning for common institutions of higher learning. Learning and Teaching of Foreign Language, vol. 6, pp. 421-425, 2002. [22] Zhou Dajun. An investigation of the situation of CET-4 grading vocabulary of Chinese College students. Foreign Language Teaching and Research, vol. 12, pp. 34-36, 1999.
415
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
A Comparative Study on View of Women of William Somerset Maugham and William Faulkner Li Zhang, Xiaoli Shia,* Department of English, North China Electric Power University, Baoding, Hebei, China a
[email protected] *Xiaoli Shi
Keywords: William Somerset Maugham, William Faulkner, View of women, Comparative study, Reasons.
Abstract. English writer William Somerset Maugham and American writer William Faulkner both lived at the turn of the 20th century and cared about women’s life and fate. But their female characters have different attitudes towards love and marriage and get different influences from their family. Different portrayal of female characters reflects different views of women. Maugham is a misogynist while Faulkner is a gyneolatrist. This is caused by their different life experiences and social environments. The study is based on Maugham’s early work Liza of the Lambeth and later work Up at the Villa and Faulkner’s peak works “A Rose for Emily” and “Dry September”.
威廉·萨默塞特·毛姆与威廉·福克纳的女性观对比研究 张莉, 施晓莉
a,*
华北电力大学英语系，保定，河北，中国 a
[email protected] *
施晓莉
关键词: 威廉·萨默塞特·毛姆；威廉·福克纳；女性观；比较研究；原因
中文摘要. 英国作家威廉·萨默塞特·毛姆与美国作家威廉·福克纳生活在19世纪末20世纪 初，都关注女性生活和命运，但笔下女性人物对爱情和婚姻的态度是不一样的，从家庭受到 的影响也是不一样的。对女性人物的不同刻画体现了两位作家不一样的女性观：毛姆是反女 性主义者，而福克纳是同情女性主义者。这是由于两位作家不同的人生经历和社会环境所致。 本研究基于毛姆的早期作品《兰贝斯的丽莎》、晚期作品《别墅之夜》与福克纳的创作高峰 期作品《献给艾米丽的玫瑰》和《干旱的九月》。 1．引言 英国小说家威廉·萨默塞特·毛姆（1874—1965）热切关注女性命运，描写女性生活， 塑造了一系列动人的女性形象。无独有偶，女性形象在美国作家威廉·福克纳（1897—1962） 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
416
ICSSS 2015
的作品中同样占据重要地位。更巧的是，毛姆与福克纳是跨越大西洋的同代作家。福克纳给 读者描绘了众多生动鲜明、性格迥异的南方女性形象。作家们通过女性形象的命运来透视社 会变革、审视世态人情、表达社会理想，读者也可以通过解读女性形象来分析作者的女性观、 女性观与其创作的相互影响并为其女性观溯源。由于福克纳和毛姆通常是把女性置于家庭关 系和两性关系中，而很少置于友情、事业或者其他社会关系中来表现，因此本文将从两性关 系和家庭关系的角度重点对比分析毛姆《兰贝斯的丽莎》和《别墅之夜》与福克纳的《献给 艾米丽的玫瑰》和《干旱的九月》中的女性形象的塑造，并以此为依据，分析他们的女性观 与女性观的形成原因。《兰贝斯的丽莎》是毛姆的成名作，代表了毛姆的早期女性观，《别 墅之夜》是毛姆写作技法最成熟的中篇小说，写于1941年，代表了毛姆晚期的女性观。《献 给艾米丽的玫瑰》和《干旱的九月》都是福克纳创作高峰期的作品，是福克纳关于南方女性 的代表作，也能代表福克纳的女性观。 2．不同的女性刻画 毛姆和福克纳在其各自的作品中为读者刻画了不同的女性形象，但这些女性形象在两点 上是可以相互联系作对比分析的，分别是对爱情和婚姻的态度不同与从家庭受到的影响不同。 2.1 对爱情和婚姻的态度不同 毛姆笔下的女性对爱情和婚姻的态度是不够严肃认真的。《别墅之夜》中玛丽并不缺少 爱情，在前夫去世后，被三个男人示爱。她与前夫因爱结合，而前夫却酗酒、赌博、出轨甚 至对她实行暴力，她居然舍不得离开，任凭丈夫在情感上肆意压榨直到丈夫醉酒车祸身亡。 玛丽是婚姻的阶下囚。而后，在准备接受单恋她多年、仕途坦荡、大可当父的埃德加而成为 公爵夫人期间，玛丽仅因为同情心而放纵自己的欲望，与她慷慨施舍过的逃亡大学生卡尔发 生一夜情而后又没心没肺地企图用钱将已经爱上她的卡尔打发。卡尔无法接受，说“我方才 当你是个女神，而实际上你只是个娼妓。”卡尔开枪自尽。花花公子劳利帮助玛丽掩尸究竟 是出于爱还是因为冒险也不好说，玛丽却答应了他的求婚。两个正面塑造的说是追求爱情的 人，其实压根没太把爱情当回事。在《兰贝斯的丽莎》中，主人公丽莎也不缺少爱情，可是 她却拒绝了心地善良、情比金坚的汤姆，而与有妇之夫、大可当爹的吉姆·布莱克斯顿混在 一起，成为了一个彻头彻尾的第三者，受到人们的蔑视和羞辱，最终流产惨死。丽莎的朋友 萨莉在婚后不再工作，并把母亲接过来一起居住，完全依赖丈夫，可是当萨莉的丈夫渐渐厌 倦，开始酗酒、施暴，萨莉还傻傻地希望等孩子生下来，丈夫就会对她好些。 相比之下，福克纳笔下的艾米丽和明妮对爱情的态度就大不一样了，只是可惜爱情对她 们来说那么是那么的可望而不可及。《献给艾米丽的玫瑰》中出生名门的艾米丽在少女时在 父亲的严格看管下没有跟男孩子交往的机会，在父亲死后她低下了傲慢的头颅，屈尊与身份 地位并不与她相配的包工头北方佬荷马·巴伦谈起了恋爱。镇上的人议论纷纷，指责她这样 做有失贵族淑女身份。艾米丽不顾别人的看法和阻挠仍与这位北方佬一起出双入对，而荷马 却到处扬言不会结婚，后来竟然准备抛弃艾米丽而溜之大吉。艾米丽身心再次受到严重打击， 在荷马离开前不声不响了准备了一包毒药把他毒死，然后伴着他的尸骨过了几十年，企图用 死亡来征服时间和爱情。在《干旱的九月》里，明妮也曾是身材苗条、有些姿色的贵族淑女。 一段时间里她在社交生活中颇露风头。然而现在，她已经四十岁左右，正在失去往年的优势， 不再被人邀请，也不再被注意。长期的压抑使她产生了“被虐狂”的变态心理。于是，她无 中生有控告一个黑人“强奸”了她，结果使这名黑人惨死在了白人暴徒的手下，而自己也落 得了疯掉的下场。芸芸众生，没有人知道被忽视了的她，有多么的渴望被发现被重视被爱！
417
2.2 从家庭受到的影响不同 在《兰贝斯的丽莎》中，丽莎的母亲虽然多产，但是只和丽莎生活在一起，两人的关系 也并不融洽。丽莎的母亲总是埋怨、责怪丽莎跑出去玩不给她风湿的关节擦药，就算丽莎给 她擦着药，她也还是嫌这嫌那、怨气冲天，而她自己却懒得自己动手。她总是让丽莎做饭， 自己却呼呼睡着懒觉。丽莎的母亲爱喝酒，把自己的工资早早花完还要花丽莎的，有时甚至 偷丽莎藏起来过日子的钱偷去买酒喝。丽莎的母亲对丽莎是冷漠的，不曾关心，也不想关心， 不管她几点回家，和什么人在一起，当女儿与有妇之夫在一起的这件事“路人皆知”时，丽 莎的母亲却是在丽莎死的时候吉姆出现才知道的，知道了也没什么大反应，对自己女儿在爱 情里受的痛苦完全不知不管，在得知女儿不治时，和别的妇女热谈保险。丽莎的母亲的形象 是无情无爱、好吃懒惰、自私自利的。丽莎从母亲那得到的关爱太少、关注太少。而丽莎的 父亲早逝，在故事中缺场。《别墅之夜》中的情形也是一样。于是父权制度对女性的影响在 这里是被忽略的、被排除的。女性从家庭中受到的影响完全来自于母亲，而且是不负责任的 母亲。女性的命运和形象似乎完全是咎由自取，而且这也在一定程度上解释了女主角对大可 当父的男性的亲赖。 在《献给艾米丽的玫瑰》中，情况是完全相反的：艾米丽的母亲是缺席的，家庭对她的 性格和悲剧的影响完全来自父亲。艾米丽出生在美国南方没落、腐败的清教主义家庭。父亲 是一个专制的封建家长，也是封建没落贵族思想的卫道士。艾米丽从小受到严格的封建制教 育，再加上封建门第观念的约束以及父亲严格的控制，艾米丽被禁止与男性接触，求婚者被 父亲一个个赶走。父亲又没有为她的婚事做个妥善安排。艾米丽在父权制制度的长期压抑下 心理严重变态，形成了一种孤傲、古怪、敏感的复杂性格。艾米丽是受害者，而她自己却全 然不知。艾米丽对父亲的死很难接受，她一连三天告诉来吊慰的人们她父亲没有死。牧师和 医生一趟又一趟地跑，劝她让他们处理遗体，无果。当他们准备诉诸法律强制执行的时候， 她垮掉了。《干旱的九月》中，明妮也来自南方没落贵族家庭，她虽然和多病的母亲生活在 一起，父亲缺席，但她的母亲并没有话语权。和艾米丽一样，家庭对明妮的影响来自父权制 社会。当无情的岁月带走了她们的青春和梦寐以求的爱情，在被爱人抛弃后，她们最终失去 了理智，成为了“爱情”的谋杀者。女性的悲剧性格和命运都是那么值得同情和叹息。 3．不同的女性观 通过对比《兰贝斯的丽莎》、《别墅之夜》与《献给艾米丽的玫瑰》、《干旱的九月》 中的女性人物在对爱情和婚姻的态度和受到家庭的影响，我们可以总结出这样一个结果，即 毛姆是自始至终、彻头彻尾的反女性主义者，而福克纳是同情女性的。 3.1 毛姆：反女性主义者 甜蜜的爱情和幸福的婚姻是每个女人所期待的，但是毛姆小说中的女性人物对爱情和婚 姻的态度是不够严肃认真的。毛姆笔下的女性要么爱情观不正、取舍不当，成为彻头彻尾的 第三者，破坏别人的婚姻，无视其他女性的痛苦，让人仍不住感叹“女人何苦为难女人”； 要么在婚姻里忍受欺凌压榨、成为婚姻的囚徒、生育的工具；要么在经历失败的婚姻后，还 选择与花花公子一起冒险；要么一边控制着“备胎”准备嫁入“豪门”，一边放纵情欲又不 负责任。毛姆用嘲讽、挖苦、贬斥的笔锋把她们愚蠢、自私、冷漠、虚伪和狡诈的性格特点 展露得淋漓尽致，还或明或暗地表达出：女人就是女人。家庭对这些女性的影响主要是通过 母亲，而这些母亲本身又给不了“正能量”，甚至与女儿“半斤八两”。女性的父亲是缺席 的，便在女性的悲剧性格与命运中逃脱了责任的追究。于是，毛姆似乎在说，女人一窝坏， 女性的一切似乎都是咎由自取，有什么好同情！
418
3.2 福克纳：同情女性主义者 艾米丽和明妮对爱情和婚姻的态度与毛姆笔下的女性形成了鲜明的对比。出生名门的她 们都曾经在少女时期被压制，错过了最佳的恋爱时期。而当她们不再被制约时，她们已失去 了往日风华，追求者也不复追求。好不容易有人你情我愿了，她们低下高贵、傲慢的头颅， 跨越阶级勇敢牵手，不顾闲言碎语继续追求属于自己的幸福，可谁知遇人不淑、男伴太怂。 爱对她们来说是那样可遇而不可求，恨不得抓住了就不放手。艾米丽眼看要失去唯一的爱， 干脆谋杀了它，企图借助死亡征服时间和爱情。明妮没有因此“发作”，却因为被忽视而“发 疯”，害死了一个无辜黑人。福克纳用令人震惊的结果来提醒读者她们有多么渴望爱！福克 纳除了关注她们对爱情和婚姻的态度，也和毛姆一样关注她们受到家庭的影响。不同的是， 福克纳笔下的女性人物是受父亲影响的，被父亲控制的，或者是被父权制社会压制与戕害。 在父权制下的贵族家族中男性是一家之主，女性没有发言权，妻子或女儿服从丈夫或父亲。 父权制与非人道的道德、宗教和社会势力一起对女性的性格和命运造成非常恶劣的影响。女 性被如此残害，怎不让人同情！ 4. 产生不同女性观的原因 两个同时代的作家竟然会有如此不同的女性观，究竟是什么原因所致？作家的个人因素 是不被考虑的。同时，作家的创作也并不是在真空中完成的，他必然会受到他所生活的时代、 社会运动与历史变革的影响。 4.1 个人原因 毛姆出生在巴黎的英国大使馆，哥哥们回英国读书，他便专享母亲的爱，可是在他八岁 时，母亲去世，这给他的心灵留下了无法修复的创伤，毛姆把她的一幅相片保留在床边直到 自己逝世。丧母造成毛姆对来自女性的无私的温柔的爱的巨大损失, 激发了对这种爱的强烈 需要，但毛姆口吃、个矮、型丑、肺弱、离群索居、缺少爱情，毛姆也处理不好与女人的关 系，婚姻不幸。毛姆和未婚先孕的西莉在道义的压力下结婚，双方的考虑都很实际，毛姆43 岁了，需要一个家庭，西莉需要孩子有个父亲，而且嫁给毛姆这样一个誉满文坛的作家还是 很长脸的。这个无爱的婚姻维持了十年，始终矛盾重重。毛姆认为自己年岁已大，生活方式 不能改变，他必须保证一年中有六个月由秘书陪同去搜集写作素材，毛姆希望西莉接受他的 生活方式，可是西莉做不到。毛姆嫌恶起西莉，感到她涉陷进害得他跟他结了婚，在情感和 财务上把他抽得干瘪瘪的。毛姆恨西莉一直到他生命的最后一刻。童年的丧母之痛、青年时 期的爱情缺乏与中晚年的婚姻不幸让毛姆渐渐衍生出反女性倾向，甚至转而迷恋起男性来。 福克纳的生活经历和毛姆是相反的。福克纳的母亲莫德大学毕业，阅读兴趣广泛，画画 很有天赋。她对文学的兴趣深深影响了福克纳。福克纳崇拜母亲，认为母亲是南方过去辉煌 的神圣象征。福克纳虽然和毛姆一样身材矮小、与同学不合，但福克纳并不缺少来自女性的 爱。福克纳家忠诚而有尊严的黑人女仆与姑姑玛丽·霍兰德常常照顾福克纳几兄弟。福克纳 在学校，受到老师桑德勒小姐的喜爱。邻居家的女儿埃丝特尔与福克纳一样都喜欢读书，不 久就对福克纳发生了兴趣。埃丝特尔是典型的南方淑媛，受过现代教育，是20世纪的新女性。 福克纳深爱着她。埃丝特尔因家庭的门第观念嫁入“豪门”，福克纳大受打击，但还有来自 母亲的安慰。埃丝特尔婚姻不幸曾割腕、自溺且向跳窗轻生，福克纳又心痛至极。福克纳在 创作时，面对南方没落贵族的女性命运悲惨自然免不了同情。埃丝特尔最终带着两个女儿与 福克纳冲破重重阻挠而结婚，但福克纳的女儿刚出世就夭折，福克纳陷入悲痛之中。福克纳 的经历无一不让他对笔下女性遭受的不幸同情备至。
419
4.2 社会原因 毛姆的反女性倾向很早就引起了人们的注意，而毛姆的解释是：“我属于一个女性处于 过渡阶段的时代……这个时代的女性一般地既无她母亲的优点，也无她女儿的优点。她是一 个解放了的奴隶，可是不了解自由的条件。她没有受过良好教育，她不再是家庭妇女，但还 未成为一个好伴侣……”毛姆的解释在一定程度上是掩饰，是为自己的反女性倾向开脱，但 联系女性主义运动的发展，我们发现他确实处在那样一个尴尬的时代。成名作《兰贝斯的丽 莎》创作于1897年，这时候女性主义初潮才刚刚有理论在形成中。而且这一浪潮的影响很小， 女性自身的意识觉醒程度很小。男人对女人的俯视，甚至轻蔑积淀成的这种集体无意识一代 代遗传下来，还没有受到女性主义思潮的猛烈冲击。毛姆也还受着这种轻视女人的集体无意 识的左右，认为男人是主要的，女人只是附属品；男人是主宰，具有绝对权威。毛姆所处的 时代背景对为什么他写的女性都是令人不愉快的这个问题是一种重要的解答。 福克纳虽然与毛姆都是19世纪末20世纪初的作家，但福克纳开始创作是在1919年，比毛 姆晚了20年。20年代和30年代是福克纳的创作高峰期，《献给艾米丽的玫瑰》和《干旱的九 月》都是在这个时期创作并发表的，福克纳受到的女性主义第一浪潮的影响显然比毛姆受到 的影响大，对女性的认识要相对进步一些，不再认为男尊女卑，或是把女性看成是男性的附 庸，看女性的眼光也不再那么大男子主义，甚至对父权制社会进行批判。对福克纳女性观造 成影响的社会原因还有美国内战。美国内战与战后重建让福克纳意识到了他所深爱的家乡 ——美国南部的固有的罪恶，它体现在残酷的奴隶制度、种族歧视、宗教教育、南方父权制 和南方淑女观对被白人女性的摧残。于是他刻画了受到摧残而心理畸形的南方白人贵族女性 形象，对这些女性表达了深切的同情。 5．总结 本文对比了威廉·萨默塞特·毛姆和威廉·福克纳各自两篇代表作里的女性形象，得出 的结论是毛姆是反女性的，而福克纳是同情女性的。造成这两位跨大西洋的同时代作家完全 不同的女性观的原因有两个：一个是个人经历，一个是社会环境。这个研究填补了对这两位 文学大师女性观对比研究的空白，这也是本研究在内容上的创新。相比其他的性别观对比研 究，本研究在策略上的创新是分析了造成不同的原因。本研究有助于我们理解那些形象鲜明、 个性突出的女性角色，再现和还原作家内心深处的精神世界，加深对文学创作的认知。但是 由于篇幅和水平有限，本文仅是一个初浅的思考，虽力求详尽，但仍有遗憾之处，有些方面 需要进一步的拓展与深化。 References [1] Maugham, W. S. Liza of Lambeth[M]. Los Angeles: Norilana Books, 2008. [2] Maugham, W. S. Up at the Villa[M]. New York: Doubleday, Doran & Company, 2000. [3] Faulkner, W. Collected Stories[M]. New York: Vintage Books, 1995. [4] Wu Weiren. History and Anthology of American Literature[M]. Beijing: Foreign Language and Research Press, 2010.
420
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Intelligent Control System Design of Lampblack Machine Based on Wireless Communication Wen-dong Xu School of information of Qilu University of Technology, Jinan, Shang dong, China
[email protected] Keywords: Intelligent lampblack machine, MCU, Wireless communication, Design.
Abstract. Using IAP15L2K61S2 as main control module, CC2530 as terminal data acquisition module and MQ-2 as smoke sensor to design the control system design of intelligent lampblack machine. Smoke data are acquired from multi point and the ata transmitted by ZigBee protocol. The smoke data are processed by MCU and automatically realize to open, close and select appropriate speed of moto, then solve the inconvenienc of using lampblack machine at present. At the same time, using ZigBee wireless communication way so as to facilitatly collect different position data and conveniently expand the function of the control system.
基于无线通信的智能油烟机控制系统设计 徐汶东 齐鲁工业大学信息学院，长清，济南，山东， 中国
[email protected] 关键词: 智能油烟机；MCU；无线通信；设计
中文摘要. 采用IAP15L2K61S2为主控模块、CC2530为终端数据采集模块、MQ-2为烟雾传感器 设计了智能油烟机控制系统。烟雾数据进行多点采集，利用ZigBee协议进行数据通信。油烟 数据经过中央处理器按照一定加权算法进行处理后自动实现油烟机电机的开启、关闭和调速。 智能控制系统解决了目前油烟机使用时必须人工操作的问题，同时采用无线通信方式进行数 据传输，便于采集不同位置、不同种类的数据，为今后家用多智能控制系统的融合提供借鉴。 1．引言 油烟机是人们在现代生活中厨房不可或缺的电器[1]，其原理是吸油烟机电源驱动电机， 使得风轮作高速旋转，使炉灶上方一定的空间范围内形成负压区，将室内的油烟气体排出。 目前的油烟机风速控制一般有高速、低速两个档位，并且采用人工切换电机电源开关的 方式实现，不够智能化[2]，这给用户的使用带来一些不便：一方面是由于烹饪过程中，用户 专注于灶台上的操作，可能无暇顾及油烟机的启动控制；另一方面用户无法确切知道油烟浓 度的大小，只能根据自己的经验开启电机档位，所以不能恰当选择适当的风速[3]，很难做到 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
421
ICSSS 2015
[1]
节能环保 ，再者，由于空气流动的影响，人为启动油烟机不及时的话，油烟可能在漂移到 [4,5] 离油烟机较远的位置，无法排出。针对油烟机风速设计上的问题及使用上的不便 ，我们设 计开发了基于无线传感网的智能油烟机控制系统，以期实现根据不同位置油烟浓度大小自动 启动和自动调节风速的功能。 2．控制系统的系统总体结构及电路设计 2.1 系统的组成结构 系统总体结构如图1所示，共有五部分组成：电源，ZigBee数据通信模块，数据处理模块， 数据采集传感器模块，模拟油烟机的受控模块。
图1 智能油烟机控制系统总体构成
设计的智能油烟机基本工作原理是：利用安装在多个位置的烟雾传感器进行数据实时采 集，通过ZigBee通信模块将烟雾数据转发到主控模块；主控模块对数据进行处理后实现对油 烟机电机的启动、停止和自动调节转速等控制功能。油烟机的排气系统用两个直流电机模拟， 整个运行过程和转速受油烟浓度的控制，不需要人工干预。 2.2 主控电路设计 智能油烟机主控电路的核心是单片机微处理器（MCU），它负责对采集数据的接收、处理 和对电机的控制任务，主控电路设计原理如图2所示。由于油烟机工环境恶劣，所以对主控电 路各种器件的选择要考虑温度、湿度、噪音、粉尘等的影响，尤其对MCU的选择要注重体积大 小 、 、 可 靠 性 和 性 能 功 能 方 面 的 因 素 。 本 统 中 采 用 STC 公 司 的 IAP15L2K61S2 单 片 机 。 IAP15L2K61S2单片机是一款不需外部晶振，不需外部复位的单片机；它具有速度快、可靠性 高、功耗低、抗干扰强的特点，采用STC第八代加密技术，加密性超强，指令代码完全兼容传 统8051，但速度快8-12倍。内部集成高精度R/C时钟，±1%温飘，常温下温飘5‰， 时钟在 5MHz~35MHz宽范围内可设置，可彻底省掉外部昂贵的晶振。同时增加了3路可编程计数器阵列 （PCA）模块，可实现软件定时、外部脉冲捕捉、高速输出以及脉宽调制（PWM）输出等功能， 适合在强干扰情况下对电机进行可靠地控制。 在控制系统中，MCU通过无线收发模块接收烟雾数据，经过提取和计算后，通过PWM模块 输出不同宽度的脉冲，脉冲信号直接与电机驱动模块连接，实现对电机速度的控制。同时， MCU外扩LCD模块（这里采用SMC2004A），用以显示烟雾数据和电机转速档位。
422
图2 主控电路原理图
2.3 无线数据采集终端电路设计 数据采集终端的MCU采用CC2530，CC2530具备领先的RF收发性能，内含8051CPU内核，采 用ZigBee协议进行通信，编程方便，使用灵活。设计中CC2530芯片及部分外围器件需3.3V电 源和1.8V电源供电，另外，部分器件需要5V电源。油烟传感器利用MQ-2来充当，完成前端的 数据采集和A/D变换，它与CC2530模块直接相连。电路设计原理如图3所示。
图3 采集终端电路原理图
为合理检测不同位置的油烟浓度，需在炉灶上方安装多个油烟传感器，每个油烟传感器 和采集终端的数据引脚直接相连，通过制订数据传输协议区分不同位置传感器采集的数据， 数据经过封装后传送给中央处理器进行解析。 3 通信方案设计 针对智能油烟机控制系统数据传输量不大、传输速率不高、数据类型单一的特点，采用 了基于IEEE802.15.4规范的ZigBee标准进行数据通信通信。 为此，本系统设计了一种通用的协议帧，帧格式如表1所示。 表1 通信协议帧格式 帧类型
广播
源地址
目标地址
长度
时间戳
校验和
数据部分
帧类型表明数据包为哪种帧，即哪种类型的传感器采集的数据，本系统只有一种数据帧， 占2个bit位。 广播字段表示该帧是否为广播帧或是点对点帧，占1个bit位。 源地址表示该数据来自的油烟传感器位置，其值为位置代号，占3个bit位。 423
目的地址表示该帧数据发送的中央处理器节点，占2个bit位。 长度表示该帧数据包的字节数，占两个字节。 时间戳表示数据的发送时间，占一个两字节。 校验和表示该帧的校验和，用于每个字节的奇偶校验，一个字节长度。 数据部分根据帧类型不同内容、长度有较大差别。 4 系统软件设计 主要包括主控软件和终端采集软件设计两部分。 4.1 主控系统软件设计 智能油烟机的主控程序主要完成系统初始化、终端数据的接收和解析、数据计算、PWM 脉冲输出控制等方面的工作。主控程序流程如图4所示。
图4 主控程序流程
主程序在系统上电即开始运行，采用定时方式进行数据接收，所以要初始化相关的定时/ 计数器和各种控制寄存器，完成初始化任务后，主程序进入循环接收数据的状态，对不同位 置传感器采集的油烟浓度数据采用加权处理的方式进行计算后，确定是否启动电机工作；如 需启动，还要给出PWM脉冲宽度，以使电机在不同的档位运行。 4.2 采集终端软件设计 采集终端程序负责不同位置油烟传感器数据的采集，并进行简单的处理和封装成帧，发 送到主控模块。考虑到油烟机对实时性的要求，这里采用定时的办法进行数据采集。采集终 端程序流程如图5所示。
图5 采集终端程序流程
424
5．系统测试 我们通过人为制造烟雾测试了控制系统的运行情况。当烟雾浓度达到一定数值时，电机 由开始启动，并且随着烟雾浓度的增加，电机的转速在不断增加；反之，电机转速逐渐降低， 直至停止。 6．结束语 本文基于IAP15L2K61S2、CC2530微处理器芯片，采用多个MQ-2烟雾传感器设计了智能油 烟机控制系统，利用ZigBee协议进行数据通信，油烟数据经过中央处理器进行处理后自动实 现油烟机的开启、关闭和调速，解决了目前油烟机使用上的不便，同时采用无线通信的方式， 解决了有线通信难以实现不同位置的油烟浓度检测的问题。 致谢 本文为国家地球物理探测仪器工程技术研究中心开放基金（编号：20130026）的阶段性 成果之一。 References [1] T. Y. Ping, M. Ke, Residential status of kitchen air exhauster and development direction in China, CHINA ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION INDUSTRY, vol.7, pp. 15-111, 2009. [2] Y. Fang,Y. Xie and Y. Xing, Modeling and simulation of Three-Phase High Power Factor PWM Rectifier, Proceedings of IPEMC’06, pp.1-6, 2006. [3] W. Y. Ping and Y. Biao, Goyal, Design of an intelligent exhaust system based on F330 microprocessor, Signal Process & System, vol.5, pp. 36-38, 2010. [4] X. L. Xiong, X. Y. Yan, Design of Intelligent Range Hood, RESEARCH AND EXPLORATION IN LABORATORY, vol.31 no.9, pp. 204-206, 2012. [5] S.L. Kim and D. Ha, Design of Intelligent Control System for Fume, Int. J. Shanxi Electronic Technology, vol. 4, pp. 28-30, 2013.
425
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
The Application of the Improvement Cost Method in Assessment of the Generator Price Dongmei Weia,*, Xinyue Linb Hebei Finance University, Baoding, Hebei, China a
[email protected],
[email protected]
Keywords: Generator, Improvement Cost Method, Integrated Residue Ratio.
Abstract. With the gradual maturity of the electricity market , the determination of the trading price in market economy relies heavily upon on the of property agency's professional judgment. The valuation industry of electric assets will develop rapidly. This paper analyzed the impact factors of the generator price, improved the replacement cost method by calculating the replacement cost, integrated residue ratio, the adjustment coefficient to evaluate the price of the generator price, and then carried out the evaluation model.The research would provide a theoretical reference to assess other mechanical and electrical equipment.
成本法在发电机组评估中的改进和应用 a,*
b
魏冬梅 , 林新岳
河北金融学院国际金融服务外包学院，保定，河北，中国 a
[email protected],
[email protected]
关键词: 发电机组; 改进的成本法; 综合成新率
中文摘要. 随着电力市场经济的逐步成熟，市场经济中的产权交易价格的确定越来越倚重具 有专业判断能力的中介机构。电力资产评估业必将得到快速的发展。本文以火电厂的汽轮发 电机组为研究对象，研究了发电机组评估价格的影响因素，在重置成本法的基础上进行了改 进，通过计算重置成本，综合成新率，调整系数的方法评估发电机组的价格，并对改进后的 模型进行了应用，为评估其他机电设备提供了一定的理论参考。 1．引言 电力行业是具有重要地位的国民经济基础行业，其经济地位是非常重要的，随着电力市 场经济的逐步成熟，人们对市场经济中的产权交易价格的确定越来越倚重具有专业判断能力 的中介机构。电力资产评估对于我国电力企业筹措资金、优化组合电力资产以及维护产权主 体合法权益等发挥了重要作用。
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
426
ICSSS 2015
2．影响发电机组评估价格的因素 影响汽轮发电机组评估的因素有很多，包括使用年限、维修保养状况等等，主要有： (1) 发电机组的使用年限。在发电机组的评估中，使用年限是反映着发电机组的折旧信 息的最主要因素。使用年限包括使用年限，经济适用年限以及预测使用年限。通常情况下， 经济使用年限和预测使用年限是不相同的。 (2) 实地勘察成新率。在资产评估中，评估工作人员有必要进行现场勘察，对被评估设 备以及各个部件进行实地考察，以保证评估工作的科学性。在必要情况下邀请专家对资产状 况进行打分评级，以得出发电机组的实际成新率。 (3) 发电机组的运行状况。发电机组的超负荷运行、满负荷运行均会影响发电机的实际 折旧，进而影响发电机组的评估价格。 (4) 发电机组的维修养护状况。发电机组的维修养护状况良好，会提高发电机组的运行 效率，提高价格。反之，降低其效率和评估价格。 (5) 发电机组主要部件更换情况。发电机组作为生产设备，发生一定的故障并进行维修 是正常的，但是一般情况下，主要部件的更换会影响其价格。主要部件运行情况差，并进行 过更换，会降低其评估价格。 (6) 发电机组的异常事故状况。异常事故的发生情况体现了发电机组潜在事故或故障发 生的可能性。 (7) 发电机组的技术状况。发电机组的技术状况是发电机组本身的性能，是指发电机组 能适应各种使用条件而发挥最大工作效率的能力。技术状况好坏会影响发电机组的评估价格。 3．成本法在发电机组评估中的改进 成本法又称为重置成本法，是指首先估测被评估资产的重置成本，然后估测被评估资产 也已存在的各种贬值因素，并将其从重置成本中予以扣除，从而得到被评估资产价值的各种 评估方法的总称。其基本思路是重建或重置被评估资产。 资产评估价值=重置成本-实体性贬值-功能性贬值-经济性贬值 在发电机组的评估中，其影响因素体现了发电机组的贬值。发电机组的使用年限、实地 勘察成新率以及维修养护状况，体现了发电机组的实体性贬值(有形损耗)；发电机组的运行 状况、主要部件更换情况以及异常事故状况体现了发电机组的功能性贬值；发电机组的技术 状况体现了经济性贬值。因此，这些指标涵盖了用成本法评估发电机组的贬值状况，发电机 组的评估价格可以通过重置成本、成新率与调整系数来确定，即： V=WPK (1) 其中： V 发电机组评估价格 P 重置成本 W 综合成新率 K 调整系数 3.1 重置成本的确定 资产的重置成本就是资产的现行再取得成本。发电机组的重置全价由设备购置费、安装 工程费、其他费用和资金成本四个部分组成，其四部分费用的定义、内容、划分是依据国家 发改委发布的《火力发电工程建设预算编制与计算标准》确定的，以下简称《预规》。因此， 重置成本的计算公式为： 重置成本=设备购置费+安装工程费+其他费用+资金成本 (2)
427
(1) 设备购置费 设备购置费包括设备本体的重置成本和设备运杂费两部分构成。设备本体的重置成本一 般采用直接法和物价指数法计算设备原价。采取何种方法取决于被评估发电机组的现行市价 是否容易获得，如若市场中交易活跃，则采取直接法： 设备本体重置成本=现行市价 (3) 如若无法得到被评估发电机组现时市场价格时，采用物价指数法： P V = P× x Py (4) 设备运杂费的计算是以设备本体的重置成本为基础的，由铁路运杂费和公路运杂费两部 分组成。计算公式： 设备运杂费=设备本体重置成本×(设备铁路运杂费率+公路运杂费率) (5) (2) 安装工程费 概算定额采用中国电力企业联合会发布的《电力建设工程概算定额》(2006年版)。费用 构成及标准采用《火力发电工程建设预算编制与计算标准》(2007年)，并执行中国电力企业 联合会发布的人工工日单价、装置性材料及工程材料与机械费调整办法等有关文件。安装工 程费主要包括发电机组本体安装、本体保温油漆等。 (3) 其他费用 其他费用是指为完成工程项目建设所必须的，但不属于建筑工程费、安装工程费、设备 购置费的其他相关费用，主要包括：建设场地征用及清理费，项目建设管理费，项目假设技 术服务费，分系统调试及整套启动是运费，生产准备飞，大件运输措施费，基本预备费。通 常情况下，这些费用可以通过会计报表或者根据《预规》以及相关文件计算出来。 (4) 资金成本 资金成本即建设期投入资金的贷款利息，参考《电力建设工程工期定额》(2006年版)， 合理建设工期按1.5年考虑，贷款利率按评估基准日执行的银行1-3年贷款利率r计算，资金均 匀投入，则资金成本的计算公式为： 资金成本=(设备本体重置成本+安装工程费+其他费用)×r×1.5÷2 (6) 3.2 综合成新率的确定 发电机组的成新率主要体现在使用年限、设备实际考察状况两方面，因此可以从这两个 方面综合考察成新率。 (1)依据使用年限确定成新率 依据使用年限计算成新率的公式为： W1 = (1 −
实际使用年限 经济使用年限
) × 100%
(7) (2) 依据实地考察确定成新率 使用年限成新率的确是考察了被评估发电机组的折旧情况，但是由于在设备运行过程中， 设备实际的使用状况可能会加剧或延缓被评估发电机组的损耗，同时，发电机组不是一个单 独的设备，而是一个系统的整体设备，因此各个部件的成新率情况也大不相同，仅仅用年限 法确定成新率未免有失偏颇。因此，评估人员或专家对被评估发电机组进行实地考察，以确 定各个主要部件的损耗情况是非常有必要的。专家打分参照表详见表1. 表1 专家打分参照表 序号
测评项目
1
汽轮机
实际情况评估参考 ①运行系统是否良好；②功率、蒸汽初压、进气量、 抽汽量、排汽压力等各项技术指标是否能达到出厂标 准；③运行是否平稳，有无出现异常；④噪音是否符 428
标准分
评估分
30
A1
2
发电机
3
交流励磁机
4
电控系统
合规定，轴承温度符合要求。 ①运行系统是否良好；②发电功率、电压、电流、定 子铁芯温升、转子、交流阻抗、定子检温计绝缘电阻 等各项指标是否测定达到要求。 ①运行是否良好；②额定容量、转速、励磁电流、励 磁电压等各项指标是否保持在出厂标准；③转子运转 状况；④耐电压试验和绝缘电阻测定是否符合要求。 ①运行是否良好；②技术先进程度；③各项各部控制 功能状况；④电气装置是否齐全
W2 = A
100
× 100%
30
A2
20
A3
20
A4
100
A
3.3 调整系数的确定 发电机组设备的贬值不仅仅是成新率状况，它的运行术状况、维修养护状况、主要部件 更换情况、异常事故状况以及技术状况均会影响其在评估基准日的评估价格。这些因素对其 评估价格的影响可以表现为调整系数K。那么我们不妨令这五项影响因素的调整系数为 K i , i = 1, 2,3, 4,5. 针对不同的评估对象，调整系数的选择可以对照表2. 表2 汽轮发电机组调整因素系数表 调整因素 发电机组的运行状况
发电机组的维修养护状况
发电机组主要部件更换情况
发电机组的异常事故状况
发电机组的技术状况
因素等级
调整系数( K i )
运行状况很好，没有超负荷运行 运行状况良好，基本没有超负荷运行 运行状况一般，满负荷运行 运行状况较差，超负荷运行 定期养护和维修，未出现任何问题 定期养护和维修，基本没有问题 养护状况一般，处于正常水平 养护状况较差，平时不注重维修和养护 主要部件未更换且状态良好 主要部件未更换但今后更换的可能性很大 主要部件进行过更换 没有出现过异常事故状况 很少出现异常事故状况 时常出现异常事故状况 技术状况处于行业内领先水平，效率很高 技术状况处于行业内中上游水平，效率良好 技术状况一般，效率可达到行业平均水平 技术状况落后，生产效率比较低
1.3 1.2 1.0 0.8 1.3 1.2 1.0 0.8 1.2 1.0 0.8 1.2 1.0 0.8 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.8
由上表可知，调整系数的公式为： K = K1 K 2 K 3 K 4 K5
(8) 至此，便得出了成本法改进模型中重置成本、综合成新率、调整系数。在对发电机组进 行评估时，便可以按照上述模型进行评估。 4．案例分析 邯郸某电厂C25-4.9/.49型的汽轮发电机组，该汽轮发电机组为南京汽轮电机(集团)有限 责任公司制造的汽轮发电机组，容量为25 000KW。该机组由汽轮机、发电机、交流励磁机、 电控系统组成。启用时间2005年12月。评估基准日为2012年7月30日。该设备在室内运行，工 作环境较好，运行正常，各项经济指标达到设计要求。
429
4.1 重置成本确定 《预规》中规定，主设备(锅炉、汽轮机、发电机、主变压器)铁路、水路运杂费费率： 运距100km以内，费率为1.5%；运距超过100km时，每增加50km费率增加0.08%；运距不足50km， 按50km计取。公路运输的运距在50km以内，费率为1.06%；运距超过50km时，每增加50km费率 增加0.35%；运距不足50km，按50km计取。 通过参考市场价值以及厂商报价，确定汽轮发电机的设备本体重置成本为1740万元。 设备运杂费=设备本体重置成本×(设备铁路运杂费率+公路运杂费率) 可知，南京距邯郸铁路运距为944km，铁路运杂费率为：1.5%+(944-100)/50，电厂距离 火车站不足50km，公路运输费率取1.06%，则： 汽轮发电机组运杂费率=1.5%+(944-100)/50+1.06%=3.92% 运杂费=1740万元×3.92%=682100元 设备购置费=17400000+682100=18 082 100元 据调查，2012年银行1-3年贷款利率为6.65%，安装期间，资金均匀投入。对发电机组安 装期间的会计报表进行调查和计算可得到： 安装费=953 000元 其他费用=1 406 320元 资金成本=(18 082 100+953 000+1 406 320)×6.65%×1.5÷2=1 019 516元 重置成本=设备购置费+安装工程费+其他费用+资金成本 =18 082 100+953 000+1 406 320+1 019 516 =21 460 936元 4.2 综合成新率的确定 该机组的经济使用年限为23年，自该机组2005年12月投入运行起，至2012年7月30日(评 估基准日)，运行80个月，则： W1 = (1 −
实际使用年限 经济使用年限
=（1 −
) × 100%
80 ）× 100% 23 ×12
=71% 专家实地考察得分为73.因此 W2 = 73% W = 0.3W1 + 0.7W2 =0.3 × 71%+0.7 × 73%=72.4% 4.3 调整系数确定 考察得，该汽轮发电机组的运行状况一般， K1 = 1.0 ，维修养护状况较好 K 2 = 1.2 ，主要部 件交流励磁机进行过更换， K 3 = 0.8 ，时常出现异常事故 K 4 = 0.8 ，技术状况较好处于行业内中 上游水平， K 5 = 0.8 ，则调整系数最终为： K = K1 K 2 K 3 K 4 K 5 =1.0 × 1.2 × 0.8 × 0.8 × 1.2=92.2% 则最后的评估价格为： V = PWK = 21460936 × 72.4% × 92.2% = 14325776元 5．结论
本文针对发电机组的评估问题，对成本法进行了改进。改进后的评估模型依然体现了重 置成本这一基本内涵，而且在评估发电机组设备时有了更强的实践操作性。本文中的创新点 430
是将发电机组评估价格的影响因素与成本法实体性贬值、功能性贬值与经济性贬值的对应， 考察这些元素对重置成本的影响来得到评估价值。 References
[1] China Appraisal Society. Asset Evaluation. Beijing: Economic Science Press, 2011. [2] Yulin Wang, Methods of the overall assets evaluation in hydropower station, China Asset Evaluation, vol.17, pp. 12-19, 2011 [3] Pengcheng Li, Application of cost method in assets evaluation of equipment in hydropower, Chinese Rural Hydropower and Electrification, vol.10, pp. 34-35, 2005.
431
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
An Empirical Study on Joint Development of Manufacturing Pillar Industries and Logistics Industry in Three Northeastern Provinces Yingxia Zhao a,*, Xiujie Tian School of Economics, Harbin University of Commerce, Harbin , China a
[email protected] *Zhao Yingxia
Keywords: Logistics industry, Manufacturing, Manufacturing pillar industries, Joint development.
Abstract. This paper uses gray relational model analysis method, and analyzes the linkage relationship between the manufacturing industry, pillar industries of manufacturing and logistics industry in the three northeastern provinces. The results show that there are regional differences and structural differences in the association degree of the Northeast logistics industry and manufacturing and pillar industries. Therefore, appropriate measures should be taken to accelerate the joint development and effective integration of manufacturing and logistics industry in Northeast China. It is a very important practical significance to enhance the competitiveness of manufacturing industry and the healthy development of the national economy in the Northeast region.
东北三省制造业支柱产业与物流业联动发展的实证研究 a,*
赵英霞 , 田秀杰 哈尔滨商业大学经济学院，哈尔滨，黑龙江，中国 a
[email protected] *
赵英霞
关键词: 物流业; 制造业; 制造业支柱产业; 联动发展
中文摘要. 文章运用灰色关联模型的分析方法，对东北三省制造业及其支柱产业与物流业之 间的联动关系进行了实证分析。研究结果表明，东北三省的物流业与制造业及支柱产业的关 联度存在地区差异和结构差异。因此，应采取相应措施，加快推进东北三省制造业与物流业 联动发展、有效融合，这对东北地区制造业综合竞争力的提升和国民经济的健康发展具有十 分重要的现实意义。 1．引言 先进制造业与现代物流业联系紧密，互为依托。加强制造业与重要途径。近些年来，我 国工业品物流总额一直保持快速增长势头，从2006年的51.7万亿元增长到2013年的181.5万亿 元。从社会物流总额的构成看，工业品物流总额一直占社会物流总额的85%以上，是带动社会 978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
432
ICSSS 2015
物流总额增长的最主要因素。因此，必须高度地重视我国制造业所释放的社会化物流需求。 国外物流发达国家对制造业与物流业联动的研究，侧重于企业层面的微观物流研究；对宏观 层面的物流与国民经济增长之间的关系研究及中观层面的物流与区域经济发展之间关系的研 究相对较少。国外相关研究主要集中在三个方面：第一，关于物流企业自身在管理和发展中 的相关问题研究。Mats.Apelkrans等（2009）指出在生产计划中采取多Agent技术，可以帮助 [1] 企业增加利润，降低成本，提高物流配送效率 。第二，关于制造企业与物流企业关系问题 研究。Kern.T和Willcocks.L（2000）根据外包企业和外包商之间的交流方式不同，把外包模 式内部关系分为嵌入型和契约型两种方式。嵌入型方式主要包括愿景的共享、组织文化适应、 知识和时间投入、社会和私人联系等；契约型方式主要通过规定外包企业和外包商之间的信 息交流、产品和服务交流、财务交流、服务施行条款和监控来影响外包组织的协调发展[2]。 第三，制造企业对物流服务商的选择问题研究。Seyed-Mahmoud Aghazadeh（2003）提出第三 方物流项目的成功主要取决于共同的努力，双方良好的沟通，双方企业文化是否共融和良好 的回报激励结构等方面[3]。 当前，制造业与物流业联动发展是国内理论界和各级政府热议的论题之一。国内相关研 究主要有：第一，从宏观层面，分析物流产业发展对产业结构升级和经济发展的影响。王健 等（2012）从地区和行业两个层面分析物流业发展对制造业效率的影响，并且引入制造业企 业规模、政策环境、城市化水平3个调节变量，分析它们对物流业外溢效应的影响，结果表明 我国物流业的发展水平是制造业生产效率提高的一个重要瓶颈因素[4]。第二，从制造业与物 流业关系角度，探讨两业联动的机理、存在的问题及对策，进行有关实证研究。苏秦等（2011） 以 2009 年国务院提出十大振兴产业为主要研究对象，以C－D生产函数和中国2007 年投入产 出表为基础，深入分析了装备制造、钢铁、石化、汽车、船舶工业、有色金属、纺织、轻工 业、电子信息业等其他中国九大振兴产业与物流业的关联关系、各产业物流效率及其物流特 征，最后有针对性地提出了推动我国九大振兴产业与物流业联动发展的政策建议[5]。第三， 对区域制造业与物流业联动发展进行实证研究。孙丽环，佟新华（2012）运用灰色关联度分 析，发现吉林省制物流业与制造业的关联度不高，两业联动处于不甚协调状态，提出通过健 全整体规划、完善机制和搭建信息资源平台来大力推进制造业与物流业的联动发展[6]。第四， 对制造业物流外包的相关研究。姚建明、刘丽文（2010）运用因子分析及结构方程方法对企 业物流外包的决策动因及其关系进行了研究[7]。现有文献已认识到制造业与物流业联动发展 是经济结构调整和产业结构优化升级的必然趋势，但涉及具体地区和具体行业的研究略显不 足，尚未发现结合东北三省制造业支柱产业的实际情况进行两业联动的实证研究。因此，本 文通过对相关理论的研究，运用灰色关联分析法从定量的角度对东北三省制造业支柱产业与 物流业的联动关系进行实证研究。 2．模型的选择 灰色关联分析法是由华中科技大学的邓聚龙教授提出的，它是根据时间序列曲线几何形 状的相似程度来判断其联系是否紧密。它对样本的多少和有无规律都同样适用，而且计算量 小、十分方便，更不会出现量化结果与定性分析结果不符的情况，是用于控制和预测的一项 新技术。 在灰色关联分析中，将两个系统或两个因素之间随时间或不同对象而变化的关联性大小 的量度称为关联度。在系统发展过程中，若两个因素之间变化的趋势具有一致性，即同步变 化程度较高，则可认为两者关联程度较大；反之，则认为两者的关联程度较小。因此，灰色 关联分析方法，是根据因素之间发展趋势的相似或相异程度，亦即“灰色关联度”，作为衡 量因素间关联程度的一种方法。灰色关联分析的具体步骤如下：
433
第一，原始数据序列的构造。原始数据序列包括确定反映系统行为特征的参考数列和影 响 系 统 行 为 的 比 较 数 列 。 本 文 中 将 参 考 数 据 序 列 记 为 X 0 = { X 0 (k ) k = 1, 2," , n} ； 比 较 序 列 为 X i = { X i ( k ) k = 1, 2," , n}, i = 1, 2," , m 。 第二，对参考数列和比较数列进行无量纲化处理。由于实际评价系统中各指标的物理意 义不同，导致数据的量纲不同，并且类型不同，所以指标间难以进行直接比较，因此，在进 行灰色关联度分析前要进行数据的无量纲化处理，方法有初始化法、均值化法等。本文采用 均值化法进行。 第三，求参考数列与比较数列的灰色关联系数。具体过程为计算每个时刻点上母序列与 各子序列差的绝对值，并找出差的最大值和最小值。记 M n
m
n
n
m
n
m
k =1
i =1
k =1
i =1
= max max Δ i (k ) = max max X 0 (k ) − X i (k )
为
m
两极最大差， m = min min Δ i ( k ) = min min X 0 (k ) − X i (k ) 为两极最小差，其中 i = 1, 2," , m ， k = 1, 2,", n 。 k =1 i =1 k =1 i =1 则参考序列 X 0 (k ) 和比较序列 X i (k ) 的关联系数为：ξ ( X 0 (k ), X i (k )) =
m + ρM Δi (k ) + ρ M
，其中 ρ 称为分辨系数
, ρ ∈ (0,1) 。通常 ρ
越小，分辨力越大，本文取 ρ =0.5 。 第四，计算关联度。因为关联系数是比较数列与参考数列在各个时刻（即曲线中的各点） 的关联程度值，所以它的数值不唯一，而信息过于分散不便于进行整体比较，为此，将各个 时刻的关联系数求平均值，作为比较数列与参考数列间关联程度的数量表示。参考序列与比 n
较序列的关联度计算方法为： r = 1 ∑ ξi (k ), i = 1, 2,", m 。 i
n
k =1
第五，排关联序因素间的关联程度。按照以上公式计算所得的灰色关联度数值进行大小 排序，如果 r1 < r2 ，则比较序列与参考序列更相似。关联度越接近于1，说明关联程度越大。 根据经验，当 0 ≤ ri ≤ 0.4 时，两因素关联水平低；当 0.4 ≤ ri ≤ 0.6 时，两因素关联水平中等；当 0.6 ≤ ri ≤ 0.8 时，两因素关联水平较强；当 0.8 ≤ ri ≤ 1 时，两因素关联水平极强。
3．东北三省制造业支柱产业与物流业联动水平的实证研究 为了运用灰色关联理论对东北三省物流业与制造业支柱产业进行相关性分析，物流业选 取货运量作为代表性指标，制造业支柱产业数据是根据这三个省份各自确定的工业主导产业 或支柱产业用工业增加值表示。数据来源于黑龙江省、吉林省和辽宁省历年统计年鉴和国民 经济和社会发展统计公报整理得到，分析结果见表1-3。 3.1 黑龙江省物流业与工业支柱产业联动水平分析 从表1可以看出，黑龙江省能源工业、石化工业和装备工业与物流行业关联效应比较大， 关联度都大于0.6；而食品工业与物流产业关联效应较低，关联度为0.565。这说明黑龙江省 物流业的发展主要来自重工业发展所释放的物流需求，轻工业发展所释放的物流需求不足。 表1 2004-2011年黑龙江省物流业与工业支柱产业产值的灰色关联系数表 支柱产业
装备制造业 农产品加工业
冶金工业
石化工业
2003
0.5
0.434
0.53
0.672
2004
0.528
0.429
0.552
0.704
2005
0.566
0.444
0.6
0.848
2006
0.625
0.591
0.845
0.896
2007
0.891
0.992
0.947
1
2008
0.707
0.603
0.536
0.661
2009
0.649
0.572
0.719
0.885
434
2010
0.498
0.443
0.686
2011
0.406
0.35
0.577
0.716 0.64
关联度
0.596
0.54
0.666
0.78
3.2 吉林省物流业与工业支柱产业联动水平分析 从表2可以看出，吉林省石油化工、汽车制造、医药产业和食品产业与物流行业关联效应 比较大，关联度都大于0.6，其中石油化工产业增加值与物流货运量的关联度达到0.825，具 有极强的关联性；而信息产业与物流产业关联效应较低，关联度为0.487。这主要是由于吉林 省信息业的发展起步较晚，规模较小，所以导致其与物流业的关联程度较低。 表2 2006-2011年吉林省物流业与工业支柱产业增加值的灰色关联系数表 支柱 产业
汽车制造 产业
石油化工 产业
食品 产业
信息 产业
医药 产业
2006
0.627
0.749
0.591
0.481
0.639
2007
0.701
0.8
0.642
0.516
0.699
2008
1
0.793
0.903
0.593
0.977
2009
0.949
0.936
0.781
0.588
0.805
2010
0.677
0.867
0.73
0.406
0.712
2011
0.671
0.808
0.681
0.337
0.768
关联度
0.771
0.825
0.722
0.487
0.767
3.3 辽宁省物流业与工业支柱产业联动水平分析 从表3可以看出，辽宁省石油化工和冶金工业与物流行业关联效应比较大，关联度都大于 0.6，具有较强的关联性；而装备制造业和农产品加工业与物流产业关联效应较低，关联度都 小于0.6。这主要是由于辽宁省目前装备制造业及农产品加工业仍然以粗放式生产经营方式为 主，物流基础设施及物流技术水平比较落后，使得该产业物流效率较低，从而导致其与物流 的联动效应都比较弱。 表3 2003-2011年辽宁省物流业与工业支柱产业增加值的灰色关联系数表 支柱产业
装备工业
石化工业
能源工业
食品工业
2004
0.573
0.607
0.596
0.51
2005
0.623
0.654
0.727
0.519
2006
0.677
0.689
0.795
0.53
2007
0.733
0.706
0.788
0.566
2008
0.683
0.826
0.679
0.895
2009
0.655
0.834
1
0.668
2010
0.606
0.606
0.739
0.485
2011
0.645
0.504
0.57
0.349
关联度
0.649
0.678
0.737
0.565
435
4．结论和建议 本文从灰色关联理论出发对东北三省制造业及支柱产业与物流业联动发展的关联度进行 测算，从中可以总结出： 第一，不同省份制造业支柱产业与物流业联动发展的水平存在结构差异。从东北三省制 造业支柱产业与物流业联动水平的实证分析中可以看出不同省份制造业支柱产业与物流业联 动发展的水平存在结构差异。在制造业内部，相关行业与物流业联动发展水平存在较大差异。 因此，未来制造业与物流业联动发展过程中，应改善联动发展的外部环境，增加科技投入， 提高物流能力和水平，促进物流产业的发展，提高其与制造业的联动水平；促进制造业物流 需求社会化，加快轻工业及高科技产业物流需求的释放，进而推动制造业与物流业联动，从 而促进东北三省经济整体健康发展。东北地区正处于经济转型的关键时期，加快现代物流业 的发展，实现与制造业的联动，为制造业创造一个高效的物流环境，这对东北地区产业结构 的调整和经济发展具有十分重要的现实意义。 第二，完善东北三省两业联动发展的外部环境。促进制造业与物流业有机融合、互动发 展，不仅是调整产业结构、转变经济增长方式的重要途径，也是制造企业和物流企业的共同 要求和迫切愿望。首先，做好东北地区物流发展总体规划。要按照《东北地区物流业发展规 划》的要求，加强东北地区各个城市的统一规划和协作，加强各个城市之间的物流合作，促 进东北地区区域物流一体化的发展。其次，完善“两业”协同发展的政策环境和工作机制。 在物流基础设施建设与物流装备的投融资、物流园区的土地使用以及物流企业工商登记和企 业资质管理等方面，出台有利于物流业发展的政策方针。加快东北地区各城市在内的两业联 动协调推进工作机制的建立，逐步形成高效快捷、配套齐全的区域物流服务体系。再次，完 善物流业发展协调机制，发挥行业协会的作用。制造业和物流业联动发展应充分发挥东北地 区现代物流业发展促进协调小组及其办公室的作用，统一负责规划、领导、组织和协调促进 联动的各项工作。物流行业协会要充分发挥桥梁与纽带作用，做好物流信息统计分析、预测 预警发布、协调应对行业发展重大事项等工作。最后，加快两业联动专业人才的培养。制造 业与物流业应建立适合企业自身联动发展的人力资源开发和人才梯队培养计划，完善企业培 训管理体系，加快跨行业实用型物流人才、物流工程技术人员和高水平物流管理人员的培养， 为两业联动发展提供智力保障。 致谢 本文为教育部人文社会科学研究青年基金项目《东北地区制造业与物流业联动机理及模 式创新研究》（项目编号：11YJC790299）的阶段性成果之一。 References [1] Mats.Apelkrans, Anne.Hakansson.Applying multi-agent system technique to production planning in order to automate decisions [M]. Springer Berlin/Heidelberg, 2009: 193-202. [2] Kern.T.,Willcocks.L. Exploring Information Technology Outsourcing Relationships:Theory and Practice[J]. Journal of Strategic Information Systems. 2000(9):321-350. [3]
Seyed-Mahmoud Aghazadeh. How to choose an provider[J].Management Research News，2003, 26(7):51.
effective
third
party
logistics
[4] Wang Jian, Liang Hong-yan. An Empirical Research on the Influence of Logistics Development on the Efficiency of Manufacturing Industry [J]. China Business and Market, 2012 (2): 27-32. [5] Su Qi，Zhang Yan. Research on Status Quo and Causation of the Interactive Development of the Manufacturing and Logistics Industries [J]. Soft Science, 2011,25 (3): 65-68. 436
[6] Sun Li-huan, Tong Xin-hua. Analysis on the Potential of Joint Development of logistics Industry and Manufacturing Industry in Jilin Province [J]. Northeast Asia Forum, 2012,104 (6): 120-127. [7] Yao Jian-ming, Liu Li-wen. A Structural Relationship Analysis on Decision-making Drives of Enterprise Logistics Outsourcing [J] Journal of Business Economics, 2010,228 (10): 18-25.
437
2015 4th International Conference on Social Sciences and Society (ICSSS 2015)
Influence of E-commerce on Enterprise Financial Management and Innovation Analysis Xin Wei North China Electric Power University, Baoding, Hebei, China
[email protected] Keywords: Electronic commerce; Financial management; Innovation analysis
Abstract. The rapid development of electronic commerce not only brings to the enterprise financial management opportunities, but also put forward severe challenges. How to seize opportunities to find new mode for financial management under the e-commerce environment is a key problem in front of all enterprises. This study analyzes the influence of e-commerce on traditional financial management in enterprises, and carries on innovative analysis of enterprise financial management under the e-commerce environment in four aspects of financial management tools, financial management ideas, financial evaluation systems, financial personnel qualities.
电子商务对企业财务管理的影响与创新分析 魏昕 华北电力大学，保定，河北，中国
[email protected] 关键词: 电子商务；财务管理；创新分析
中文摘要. 电子商务的迅速发展给企业财务管理带来机遇的同时也提出了严峻的挑战，如何 抓住机遇，寻找适合电子商务环境下的财务管理新模式是摆在所有企业面前的关键问题。本 研究深入分析了电子商务给传统企业财务管理带来的影响，并就如何适应财务管理工作的新 特点和新趋势,从财务管理工具、财务管理理念、财务评价体系，财务人员素质四个方面对 电子商务环境下的财务管理进行创新性分析。 1．引言 电子商务的迅猛发展进一步加剧了各企业之间的经济竞争，极大地改变了传统商务活动 的运作模式, 使企业的组织结构、业务流程、经营环境受到很大影响。面对电子商务环境下 的机遇和挑战，寻求先进的财务管理方法和模式，己成为各国企业在日趋激烈的竞争中生存 和发展的当务之急。
978-1-61275-070-5/10/$25.00 ©2015 IERI
438
ICSSS 2015
2．我国电子商务的发展现状 当前，我国电子商务发展正在进入密集创新和快速扩张的新阶段，日益成为拉动我国消 费需求、促进传统产业升级、发展现代服务业的重要引擎。 2.1 电子商务保持快速增长态势，潜力巨大 我国近年来的电子商务交易额增长率一直保持快速增长势头。分析显示，2013年中国电 子商务市场交易规模达10.2万亿，特别是网络零售市场更是发展迅速，2013年达到1.85万亿 元，仅2013年阿里巴巴"双十一"购物狂欢节支付宝成交额就高达350亿元，显示出我国网络 零售市场发展的巨大潜力。 2.2 电子商务初步形成功能完善的业态体系 从电子商务交易情况来看，近年来出现了一些新的发展趋势。一是零售电子商务平台化 趋势日益明显,发展模式不断演变。二是跨境电子交易发展迅速，但尚未形成有效的发展模 式。三是平台之间竞争激烈，市场日益集中。以阿里巴巴、京东商城为第一梯队拉开了与其 [1] 他中小型电子商务企业的差距 。 2.3 政府主导作用进一步加强，利好政策不断涌现 在十二届全国人大三次会议中，国务院总理李克强多次强调电子商务，提出要“鼓励电 子商务创新发展”、要“加快电子商务等新议题谈判”，表示要“鼓励进口政策，增加国内 短缺产品进口，扩大跨境电子商务试点”。李克强还首次提出制定“互联网+”行动计划， 并正式确立其为国家战略，这充分证明国家对电子商务的重视，也体现了政府用电子商务拉 动国民经济快速可持续增长作为重要动力的信心[2]。 3．电子商务的特点 电子商务是一种现代商业方法，指各企业之间、企业与消费者之间，利用网络和先进的 电子通信技术进行的各项经济贸易活动。与传统商务相比，电子商务具有无法比拟的特点。 3.1 数字化办公 传统商务方式一般需要纸质资料和手工签字，电子商务则把所有的信息和载体数字化， 用电子数据来代替，甚至其交易协议、交易签名都是数字化的。因此，电子商务为企业运营 节约了大量的纸张，有利于环境的保护。但由于电子数据容易被修改和删除，这就给跟踪、 审计电子数据带来了困难，也给一些企业或个人进行造假，网络犯罪提供了可能。 3.2 交易成本低，效率高 在电子商务环境下，交易主体可以直接通过互联网查阅所需信息，减少了中介环节的支 出费用。同时，供货商可以通过网络进行产品宣传，减少文件处理费用和广告费用；通过互 联网进行交易，可以快速传递信息，如提供供货信息、网上议价、商谈等活动，大大节省了 时间。虽然在购物过程中需要经过认证中心、银行授权等数据交换，但这些业务都可以通过 网络在很短的时间内完成，彻底改变了传统面对面交易的购物方式，提高了工作效率。电子 商务下企业交易流程如图1所示。
439
图1 电子商务下企业交易流程
3.3 交易风险高 虽然电子商务迅速发展，但目前我国还没有建立完善的法律和法规制度，网络交易往往 通过商家的宣传或是图片信息，并不是以实物为基础，因此交易过程中的风险性要比传统贸 易大得多。同时，网上支付业务、电子数据的窃取、篡改等技术漏洞也提高了电子商务的交 易风险[3]。 4．电子商务对企业财务管理的影响 4.1 电子商务对财务管理环境的影响 电子商务的繁荣逐渐改变着企业生存发展的大背景，企业理财活动作为企业经营的内容 之一，自然要适应不断变化的内外部环境，才能够为企业创造更大的价值。 4.1.1 生产模式发生转变 传统工业时代下，产品是企业的核心，产品大规模生产意味着在竞争激烈的市场里能占 有更多的市场份额，有成本低和效率高的优势，在大众经济的环境下能为企业创造更大的收 益。 电商环境下，顾客逐步成为企业的重心，消费者的需求呈现多样化。产品的批量性、规 模性逐渐弱化，而精准生产的模块化、私人化、个性化的产品更加受客户喜爱。另外，企业 盈利的来源也不再限于产品，服务质量的好坏也成为衡量企业经营好坏的重要标准。互联网 的运用要求企业以最快的速度获取客户需求并实现客户满意，才能在市场中站稳脚跟。 4.1.2 融资环境发生转变 金融市场是现代企业赖以生存和发展的经济环境，不仅影响财务管理理论的发展，而且 对企业投资、筹资方式也有重要的影响。电子商务的发展使企业的融资渠道不断增加，融资 方式更加灵活。近年来互联网经济衍生出越来越多的金融需求，P2P 融资平台、众筹模式等 一系列网贷模式的兴起为企业资金的平衡流转和有效利用提供了更加便利的条件，促进了企 业理财活动的电子化和高效化，同时也为传统“理财论”向更高层次的“综合理财论”的转 变奠定了基础[4]。 4.1.3 竞争环境发生转变 电子商务化环境使得贸易的地域性更加模糊，企业被推入一个全球化竞争愈来愈激烈的 时代。在这个全球互联网经济的时代，竞争的主体从单一企业延伸到包括供应商、销售商、 服务商、客户的企业联盟的一体化竞争。信息飞速传播与发展，强大的知识资源成为无可比 拟的优势点，这些无形的资源成为企业提高竞争力的关键，企业是否具有持续发展的能力， 更加取决于其能否最大限度、最快速度地获取并利用知识资本。
440
4.2 电子商务对财务管理内容的影响 传统财务管理的内容分为投资管理、筹资管理、营运资金管理、利润分配管理几个模块， 在电子商务环境下，知识资源管理和风险管理的地位提升，将贯穿于财务管理的始终。 4.2.1 知识资本成为重要管理内容 电子商务时代，互联网的普遍运用使得以无形资产为主要形式的知识资本将逐渐取代传 统的实物与货币资本的主导地位，如专利商标权、计算机软件、高素质人才、先进管理方式、 创新能力、顾客关系等[5]。截止2012年4月，京东商城已有4000万注册用户，每日订单处理 量达到30万单，日交易额已上升到1亿元。电商市场进入成熟期后消费者对价格敏感度会降 低，品牌优势将是留住用户的关键。由此可见，企业知识资本的拥有量，成为企业在市场中 的首要竞争力和发展力，成为财务管理为企业创造价值的重要来源。 4.2.2 基于网络的风险管理成为重要管理内容 与企业传统的经营风险、灾害风险、金融风险、环境与法律风险相比，互联网的普及使 得网络财务风险凸显。由于互联网本身具有开放性、突变性、虚拟性等特点，电子商务下的 资讯保护风险、支付安全风险、信用风险、网络信息不对称导致的经营风险等不确定性风险 使得企业更加注重风险管理，以维护资金和财务数据的安全。 4.3 电子商务对财务管理组织结构的影响 传统企业的财务管理组织结构比较分散，这种运行模式必然会减缓财务人员的快速反应 及应变能力。而电子商务时代，企业内外部环境发生了变化，传统的财务管理组织结构无法 适应信息的快速传播，转移和反馈。 在电子商务时代，传统商务运营模式在时空上被限制的弊端彻底被打破，企业内部往往 会建立一个主站服务器，利用强大的财务管理应用系统，对各个分支机构传送给主站的财务 数据进行分析和处理，实现财务预算、财务报表发布以及远程审计等。各级部门的管理人员 可以通过不同的权限对财务系统进行访问、编辑，实现财务数据的访问和共享。这种信息化 财务运作模式，在节省大量人力、财力及物力的同时，还极大地提高了企业财务管理的效率。 4.4 电子商务对财务管理业务流程的影响 传统的财务管理包括财务预测、财务决策、财务预算、财务控制、财务分析等环节，主 要是对企业日常发生的业务进行登记和装订，形成纸质的记账凭证，然后由财务人员登入账 簿，最后制作财务报表。 电子商务下的财务管理业务流程与传统业务流程相比发生了很大变化，其具体内容一是 企业与投资人的协同，如网络信贷等；二是企业内部各个业务环节的衔接，如网上釆购与销 售、网上预算与控制等；三是企业与消费者的协同，如网上订单、网上支付等；四是企业与 [6] 监督管理部门的协同，如网上审计、网上报税等 。 5．电子商务环境下的财务管理创新分析 5.1 在财务管理的工具上实现创新 企业财务管理信息系统不仅需要实现安全、便捷、高效的电子货币支付、电子转账结算 和与之相关的财务业务电子化功能，还应有效地实施网络财务监控和管理。财务问题是企业 的核心，任何一点漏洞都可能导致企业资金或商业秘密的流失，使企业利益受损，严重的甚 至带来灭顶之灾，因此，信息系统的安全性至关重要，需要对其传递手段和储存工具进行严 格管理[7]。
441
5.2 在财务理念上的创新 5.2.1 “零库存”理念 电子商务时代下，各类商业信息及时共享，企业可以在网络上实现产供销实现一体化， 并且定制性产品和服务增加，企业应树立零库存理念，存货可以不以仓库形式存在，库存形 式可以变为协作分包、轮动方式、配送方式等，降低企业的库存量，从而节省仓库建设费用， 存货维护保管费用等资金支出，并防范存货过时、跌价、毁损等风险，有效减少了企业的仓 库管理成本和利息成本，使其利润实现最大化。 5.2.2 “零运营资本”理念 在传统思维下，为了在一定程度上增强企业的抗风险能力，提高企业的短期偿债能力， 管理者往往会将流动性比率（即企业的流动资产与企业的流动负债的比值）控制在一个大于 “1”的值进行上下波动，这种观念往往导致企业大量资产被固化，反而加剧了财务风险。 电子商务环境下企业应改进传统运营资本的控制原则，将企业的流动性比率保持在“1” 上下波动，使企业资本额与短期债务额之差为零，即企业此时的运营资本为零，这就是所谓 的“零运营资本”理念。在这种理念下，企业要将资金管理与物流管理、订单信息化管理相 结合，实现全方位、多角度的系统管理，从而实现资本利用率的最大化，提高企业抗风险能 力与发展速度。 5.3 财务评价体系的创新 我国现有的财务评价体系主要建立在工业企业基础之上，评价内容基本上局限于企业有 形资产与以货币量化的信息范围之内。而在电子商务的影响下，企业财务管理更加注重知识 资本管理，企业现行财务评价体系对无形资产和人力资本的计量与披露方面存在较大缺陷， 因此，财务评价体系应当增加反映知识资本的财务或非财务指标，如企业品牌价值、企业人 才优势、企业技术优势等，以充分反映企业发展软实力，满足投资者和企业股东对企业准确 价值信息的需求[8]。 另外随着市场中企业面临的不确定性风险的增大，仅仅依靠财务指标来分析企业的财务 效益、偿债能力、发展能力等状况已不能达到电子商务环境的要求。财务信息评价体系中应 增加非财务信息作为补充，如投资筹资环境的变化、顾客满意度、环境保护与市场责任等， 进一步完善财务评价体系，充分反映企业的可持续发展能力。 5.4 财务管理人员素质的创新 传统财务管理模式对财务管理人员的要求不高，只需精通财务知识即可，而在电子商务 时代，企业需要既懂得财务核算、财务管理，又要精通网络通信技术的复合型人才。财务管 理人员在关注过去的企业经营成果和现在的财务状况的同时，还要对企业未来的发展趋势进 行预测，关注企业财务信息的时效性。不仅要关注企业内部的财务、业务信息，还要关注相 关企业、供应链、消费者等外部信息。 电子商务环境下的财务管理人员要包括一般管理人员、技术服务支持人员和高级管理人 员三个层次。为提高各类人员的素质，应高度重视电子商务和网络财务的教育问题，借鉴国 外电子商务和网络财务的经验和教训，寻找捷径，避免走弯路。其次要积极开展各种教育手 段，如研讨会、培训班等活动，利用计算机辅助教学软件进行电子商务和网络财务的培训工 作，增强人们的网络财务意识。 6．结束语 总之，电子商务的出现和发展壮大, 极大地改变了传统财务管理的模式, 使企业财务管 理突破时间、空间及地域的界限，向网络化、智能化方向发展, 使企业财务管理面临着新的 挑战和机遇，是企业财务管理领域的一场全方位、根本性革命。但不可否认，电子商务环境 442
下的财务管理模式还不成熟。为此，在企业自身进行财务管理创新的同时，政府也应借鉴国 外经验, 建立完善的法规和政策，为企业财务管理提供健康向上、宽松良好的外部发展环境。 References [1] http://www.qianzhan.com/indynews/detail/214/140704-f101708d.html [2] http://finance.qq.com/a/20150316/041150.htm [3] Yan Kang, Analysis and discussion of e-commerce influence on financial management, Guide to Business, vol.17, pp. 153, 2011. [4] Tongying Liang, Guangbing Chen, Thought on innovation of the small and medium-sized enterprise financial management mode under the network environment, Accounting Research, vol.05, pp. 56-57, 2003. [5] Feifei Wang, The development of network economy's impact on financial management, Research of Finance and Accounting, vol.9, pp. 45-47, 2008. [6] Hong Du, Research of Enterprise financial management in e-commerce environment, Communication of Finance and Accounting, vol.03, pp. 89, 2012. [7] An Yang, Enterprise informatization and electronic commerce [M], Tsinghua University Press, 2007. [8] Sihuan Li, Research of financial management innovation in the electronic commerce environment, Research of Finance and Accounting, vol.23, pp. 48-49, 2009.
443
Author Index A Akhterov ······························································ 182 Alexander Baranov ·············································· 218 Alexey Chuvaev ···················································· 18 Andrejs Čirjevskis ······································· 300, 316 Andrey Tuzikov ··················································· 144 Anna Brzozowska ··············································· 113
Junqiao Qin················································ 35, 86, 90 Junyu Gao ···························································· 229
B Bin Yu ·································································· 323 Blanka Klimova ······················································ 3
L Larisa Ivascu························································ 148 Lei Zhang ···················································· 285, 349 Lesheng Jiang ······················································ 362 Li Zhang ······················································ 289, 416 Lijia Hu································································ 311 Lina Liu ································································· 74 Lu Dai ···································································· 66 Luboš Smrčka ······················································ 189 Lucian-Ionel Cioca ·············································· 148
K Katarína Janošková ·············································· 132 Katarzyna Szymczyk ··························· 100, 106, 113 Kenneth Muzata····················································· 14
C Changhong Zhai ·················································· 213 Changkun Shao ··················································· 235 Chaoke Ren ··························································· 41 Chenliang Deng ··················································· 327 Chih-Chung Chen················································ 201 Ching-Kuo Wei···················································· 127 Chunli Li ············································· 30, 35, 86, 90
M Maria Cristina Grillo ··········································· 121 Marina Khayrullina ··············································· 18 Mário Al Kassiri ·················································· 354 Martin Grančay···················································· 262 Martin Grešš ························································ 333 Mei Dong ····························································· 367 Michela Dalprà ···················································· 121
D Dagmara Bubel···················································· 113 Dalma AHUES ···················································· 281 Daniel Ndhlovu ····················································· 14 Dong-ling Wang ······················································ 8 Dongmei Wei ······················································· 426 Dongmei Xu ·························································· 57
N Natalia Bozo ·························································· 18 Nora Grancay ······················································ 268
E Elena Muzyko ····················································· 218 Elena Volkova······················································ 144 Evgenia Gorevaya ················································· 18
O Olga Kislitsyna ······················································ 18 Olga Vladimirovna Lezina ·································· 182
G Galina Litvintseva ··············································· 251 Guangchuan Pan·········································· 160, 166 Guangqin Sun ······················································ 240
P Pavol Král ···························································· 132
H Hai Qiao ································································ 61 Haopeng Zhang ··········································· 160, 166 Haowen Feng ························································ 46 Hongchong Zhang ················································· 95 Honglei Dai ··························································· 25 Hongmei Liu ························································· 95
Q Qiner Xu ······························································ 402 Qing Yang ···························································· 389
I İnanç Işıl Duman ················································· 195
S Shi Feng ································································· 61 Shu-Chen Hsu······················································ 377 Stanisław Brzeziński············································ 100 Stefan Staretu ······················································· 154 Su-Yuan Tsai ························································ 377
R Robert Sałek ························································ 106 Rongguang Yang·················································· 306 Rushaniya Zinurova············································· 144
J Jan Plaček ···························································· 189 Jana Drutarovska ················································· 344 Janet Serenje-Chipindi ·········································· 14 Jianqiang Guo·············································· 402, 406 Jing Tian ······················································ 358, 373 Jing Zhao ······························································· 35 Jingyi Wang ························································· 295 Judyta Kabus ··············································· 100, 106 Junqiao Qin ··························································· 30
T Tatiana Čorejová ·················································· 354 Thomas Mtonga ····················································· 14 Tien-Chin Wang··················································· 377 Tomáš Dudáš ······················································· 176 444
Author Index U Ulas Akkucuk ······················································ 338
Y Yan Gong ······························································· 30 Yanfei Du ······························································· 74 Yang Wang··························································· 395 Yanling Wang ························································ 90 Yaru Wang ····························································· 74 Yaxiong Li ··························································· 410 Ying Shen ···························································· 410 Ying Zhang ·························································· 274 Yingxia Zhao ······················································· 432 Yonghui Rao ························································ 139 Yongmu Tang························································· 80 Yu Guo ································································· 383 Yucheng Zeng ······················································ 171 Yuzhou E ····························································· 245
W Wanfang Zhang ··················································· 208 Wei Song ····················································· 160, 166 Weimin Ouyang····················································· 46 Wen-dong Xu ······················································ 421 Wenjie Zhu ·················································· 402, 406 X Xiaoli Shi ···················································· 289, 416 Xiaomeng Mao ···················································· 258 Xiaowen Xiao······················································ 311 Xiaoyu Huang ············································· 358, 373 Xiaozhen Li ··························································· 70 Xin Wei································································ 438 Xinyue Lin ·························································· 426 Xiufang Li ····························································· 51 Xiujie Tian ··························································· 432 Xu Chen ······························································ 373
Z Zhibin Liu ······························································ 74 Zhiling Chen ························································ 235 Zhiwei Zhang ······················································ 171 Zhiyong Mo ························································· 201 Ziqin Liu ······························································ 245
445
